Cpi Indico IQ SM

INDICO IQ® SERIES X-RAY GENERATOR
SERVICE MANUAL
PREPARED BY:
COMMUNICATIONS & POWER INDUSTRIES CANADA INC.

45 RIVER DRIVE
GEORGETOWN, ONTARIO, CANADA L7G 2J4
TELEPHONE: (905) 877-0161
902753-00
SERVICE MANUAL P/N
902753-01
MAN90275300_COVER REV. AB
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:
Mail: Customer Support Department

Communications and Power Industries Canada
Inc.
45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J4
Telephone: (905) 877-0161
Fax: (905) 877-8320
Attention: Customer Support Department
E-mail: CANMarketing@cpii.com
Attention: Customer Support Department
MAN90275300_COVER REV. AB
CPI Canada Inc.
®
PRE-INSTALLATION 1
INDICO IQ
SERVICE INSTALLATION 2
AND
INSTALLATION INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING, AND
CALIBRATION 3
MANUAL
ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4
Manual part number: 902753
TROUBLESHOOTING 5
REGULAR MAINTENANCE 6
THEORY OF OPERATION 7
SPARES 8
SCHEMATICS 9
The original version of this manual (June 2010)

has been drafted in the English language by:
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document.
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-00 Rev. B Page 0-1
CPI Canada Inc.
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL

The design and information contained in this document is proprietary to Communications & Power Industries Canada
Inc. (CPI), has been designed and developed at private expense, and is the exclusive property of CPI. The information
contained herein is loaned in confidence solely for the installation, operation, and maintenance of CPI equipment. This
document may not be duplicated in whole or in part, or be used for re-engineering, reverse engineering, or otherwise
reproducing in any form or creating or attempting to create or permitting, allowing or assisting others to create or
manufacture CPI’s product or products derived therefrom, without the express written permission of CPI.
Copyright © by Communications & Power Industries Canada Inc. All rights reserved.
®
Page 0-2 Rev. B Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-00
CPI Canada Inc Pre-installation 1
CHAPTER 1
PRE-INSTALLATION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
®
This manual applies to the Indico IQ family of generators and provides instructions for the installation and
maintenance of all models of that generator.
This chapter contains the following sections.
SECTION TITLE
1A Introduction
1B Safety
1C Preparing for installation
1D Compatibility listing
1E Generator layout and Major Components
®
1 Pre-installation CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank)
®
CPI Canada Inc. Introduction 1A
CHAPTER 1A
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 1A-2

1A.1.1 Terminology ........................................................................................................................................ 1A-2
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................ 1A-3
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 1A-4
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 1A-6
1A.5.0 FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................. 1A-6
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ................................................................................................................................ 1A-7
1A.7.0 OUTPUT PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................... 1A-8
1A.7.1 Radiographic Performance ................................................................................................................. 1A-8
1A.7.2 Fluoroscopic Performance (Continuous)............................................................................................. 1A-9
1A.7.3 Fluoroscopic Performance (Pulsed) .................................................................................................... 1A-9
1A.8.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS ................................................................................... 1A-10
1A.8.1 Environmental Specifications ............................................................................................................ 1A-10
1A.8.2 Applicable Standards ........................................................................................................................ 1A-11
1A.8.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)................................................................................................ 1A-14
1A.8.4 RoHS Compliance ............................................................................................................................. 1A-15
1A.9.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................... 1A-16
1A.10.0 RUNTIME LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE) ...................................................1A-16
1A.11.0 OPEN-SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT........................................................................................... 1A-17
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-02 Rev. P Page 1A-1
1A Introduction CPI Canada Inc.
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This manual provides instructions for the installation and service of the Indico IQ family of X-ray generators.
1A.1.1 Terminology
DIRECT RADIOGRAPHY Radiography in which the recording is effected at an

image reception area. (i.e. film)
INDIRECT RADIOGRAPHY Radiography in which the recording is effected after
transfer of the information obtained at an image
reception area (i.e. digital imaging system).
DIRECT RADIOSCOPY (Fluoroscopy) Radioscopy in which the visible images are presented
at the image reception area, or close to it, in the
radiation beam (i.e. fluoroscope or image intensifier
with a non-digital imaging system).
INDIRECT RADIOSCOPY (Fluoroscopy) Radioscopy in which the images are presented after
transfer of the information so that they can be viewed
from outside the radiation beam (i.e. digital imaging
system with a flat-panel detector or with an image
intensifier and a CCD camera).
REFERENCE AIR KERMA RATE Air Kerma of the primary X-ray beam measured under
specific conditions and expressed as an equivalent
value at the interventional reference point.
PATIENT ENTRANCE REFERENCE POINT A point intended to represent the intersection of the X-
ray beam axis with the entrance surface of the patient.
ISOCENTRE In radiological equipment with several modes of
movement of the reference axis around a common
centre, the centre of the smallest sphere through which
the radiation beam axis passes.
ENTRANCE FIELD SIZE Diameter of the field in the entrance plane that can be
used for transmission of an X-ray image receptor that
can be used for the transmission of an X-ray pattern
under specific conditions.
Note: The above definitions were derived from document IEC60788.
®
Page 1A-2 Rev. P Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-02
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION

®
The Indico IQ family of high frequency X-ray generators is intended for use in stationary radiographic and
fluoroscopic applications for medical diagnostic purposes.
• The generators are compatible with film-based systems and various digital radiographic and fluoroscopic
imaging systems through the appropriate digital interface board.
• A broad range of AEC devices is supported via optional dedicated AEC boards or a universal AEC board
that can be configured to interface with various photo diodes, PMT and most AEC chambers on the
market.
• The room I/O board in the generator is highly configurable. It has +24 VDC, 26 VAC, 110 VAC and 220
VAC outputs for electric locks, collimator lamps and miscellaneous functions.
The X-ray generator consists of a main power cabinet that houses the control electronics and the HV
module. The generator may be supplied with an R&F membrane console, StarQ™ Touchscreen Console, or
Mini-Console control unit. The Mini-Console control unit provides the on / off, prep / X-ray controls, and prep /
X-ray indicators and is used with the StarQ™ Touchscreen Console or digital imaging systems that have
integrated generator controls.
The following are the main features and options available for the generator:
• Low speed starter 2 or dual speed starter 2 can be configured to be compatible with tube types as per
table 1 and 2 in the supplement at the end of chapter 2.
• Compatible with various digital imaging systems and X-ray tables when fitted with the appropriate
optional digital interface board.
• Optional falling load.
• Optional 26 VAC output for collimator lamp (6.7 A maximum).
• 24 VDC output for electric locks (4 A maximum).
• 110 VAC* output from room I/O board. Refer to chapter 3B for details.
• 220 VAC* output from room I/O board. Refer to chapter 3B for details.
• Optional AEC with up to four inputs.
• Optional ABS with kV or kV/mA fluoro stabilizer.
• Optional DAP (Dose-Area Product) or Air Kerma calculator and display.
• Optional tomo interface with angle and speed inputs.
• Optional Active Dose Reduction (ADR).
• Optional wheels on generator cabinet.
* The maximum load on the 110 and 220 VAC output is 350 VA combined.
®
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

®
Figure 1A-1 shows the outline of the Indico IQ X-ray generator main cabinet. Figure 1A-2 shows the outline
of the available control consoles.
Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing
®
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)

®
Figure 1A-2 shows the outline of the Indico IQ control consoles.
Figure 1A-2: Console outline drawing
®
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS
Rad Systems:
• Radiographic table Bucky and off-table radiography (non-Bucky).
• Vertical Bucky / cassette radiography.
• Conventional tomography.
• Optional compatibility with various DR imaging systems.
R&F Systems:
• Fluoroscopic and spot film applications.
• Tomography with conventional and / or remote R&F tables.
• Optional compatibility with various digital imaging systems.
• Optional high-level fluoroscopy.
• Optional pulsed and high-level pulsed fluoroscopy.
1A.5.0 FEATURES
®
Below are some of the features of the Indico IQ generator.
• One or two tube operation, Rad / Fluoro.

• Dual filament supplies.
• Repetitive self checks of generator functions, provides display of system faults and operating errors.
• Optional AEC, up to four channels.
• X-ray tube protection. The generator allows setting of the following limits:
a) Maximum mA, adjustable for small focus.
b) Maximum kV, adjustable for each X-ray tube (Radiography and Fluoroscopy).
c) Maximum kW, adjustable for each focal spot at low and high-speed operation.
d) Maximum filament current adjustable for large and small.
e) Adjustable anode heat warning and anode heat limit warning levels.
• Calibration features:
• a) Filament / mA calibration is automated.
b) Calibration and programming may be performed via GenWeb™ or from the R&F membrane
console.
GenWeb™ is a web-based application that is run on a stand-alone computer or on the StarQ™
Touchscreen Console.
• The operator console displays various status and error messages.
• The error log stores error codes and the associated generator settings for the last 255 errors.
• Service and diagnostic information is available via a laptop computer.
NOTE: BOTH HARD COPY AND CD MANUALS ARE SERIALIZED TO MATCH SPECIFIC
GENERATORS. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT INCLUDED WITH THIS
SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE THE COMPATIBILITY OF X-RAY TUBES AND OTHER
DEVICES FOR THE CORRESPONDING GENERATOR.
THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT IS LOCATED AT THE FRONT AT THE MANUAL FOR
HARD COPY MANUALS, AND INCLUDED ON THE CD FOR SOFT COPY MANUALS
®
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL
The generator will be equipped with either a low speed starter or dual speed starter.
LOW SPEED STARTER 2

Current monitoring Both stator circuits
Low speed starter output frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Braking Dynamic braking available for certain tubes when in low speed
rotation.
Duty cycle Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed by a
minimum 10 seconds wait period. Refer to the stator rating
and characteristics supplied by the X-ray tube manufacturer.
DUAL SPEED STARTER 2

Current monitoring Via both stator circuits.
Dual speed starter output frequency 50 or 60 Hz (low speed).
100, 120, 150, or 180 Hz (high speed).
(Independent of line frequency).
Braking Dynamic braking when in high-speed rotation.
Rotor boost time Determined by tube selection. Boost time can be incremented
up to an additional 700 msec.
Duty cycle Not to exceed 2 high speed starts per minute. Refer to the
stator rating and characteristics supplied by the X-ray tube
manufacturer.
®
1A.7.0 OUTPUT PARAMETERS
1A.7.1 Radiographic Performance
kVp Range/Steps 40 - 150kV; variable in 1kV steps.
kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV

±(5% + 1kV) for 40 - 150kV
(measured between the 75% points of the kV waveform).
Ripple (kV) < 4%pp over the full operating range (for ripple freq. ≥ 10
kHz; with 12m (40ft) HV Cables)
Rise time (10% - 90%) < 0.75 ms (typically < 0.5 ms) (With 30m (100ft) cables)
Exposure Time Range / Steps 1 ms - 6300 ms; variable in 1 ms steps. (Optional up to 20

seconds).
Exposure Time Accuracy ±(2% + 0.5ms) from 5ms to 6300ms and >0.5mAs
±(10% + 1ms) for <5ms or ≤ 0.5mAs
(measured between the 75% points of the kV waveform).
AEC Nominal Shortest Irradiation Time < 2ms with dedicated AEC PWBA (737992 / 737998) and 3
of 5 field AEC PWBA (739389). Actual time depends on the
AEC chamber type (solid-state / ion / other) and the
measurement setup.
Generator will stop the exposure within 20µs of receiving the

AEC STOP signal from the AEC system. See AEC chamber
documentation for minimum exposure time.
Rad mA Range/Steps 50kW; 10 - 630 mA / R10 (Variable in 0.1mA steps)

65kW; 10 - 800 mA / R10 (Variable in 0.1mA steps)
80/100kW; 10mA-1000 mA / R10 (Variable in 0.1mA steps).
Rad mA Accuracy (10 mA - 1000 mA) ±(5% + 1mA) for exposures ≥ 5ms and >0.5mAs and
>6.7ma; measured 5ms after the beginning of the exposure
across a 10 ohms, 1% resistor at the H.V. module mA
feedback connector.
±20% for exposures < 5 ms or ≤0.5mAs or ≤6.7ma;
measured 5ms after the beginning of the exposure across a
1 ohm, 1% resistor at the H.V. module mA feedback
connector.
mAs Range/Steps 0.1 - 1000mAs / R10 (Variable in 0.1 mAs steps)
mAs Accuracy ±(10% + 0.2mAs)
Coefficient of Linearity < 0.1 for kV and mAs parameters.
Coefficient of Reproducibility < 0.05 (Station to Station) for exposures ≥ 25mA or 3.2ms
®
1A.7.2 Fluoroscopic Performance (Continuous)
kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV;

±(5% + 1kVp) for 40 - 125kV, measured after the initial
overshoot.
Ripple (kVp) < 1kV at 100kV & 5mA with 21m (70ft) cables, measured
after initial overshoot.
mA Range/Steps 0.5 - 10 mA in 0.1mA steps;

0.5 - 20mA in 0.1mA steps with High-Level Fluoro Option.
mA Accuracy ±(5% + 1mA) measured 50ms after the beginning of the

exposure ;
±20% for exposures ≤ 6.7mA
1A.7.3 Fluoroscopic Performance (Pulsed)
kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV;

±(5% + 1kVp) for 40 - 125kV, measured after the initial
overshoot.
mA Accuracy ±(5% + 1mA) (measured 5ms after the beginning of the

exposure) for exposures ≥ 5ms;
±20% for exposures <5ms
Pulse Rates 60Hz; 30, 15, 7.5, 3, 1 PPS.

50Hz; 25, 12, 6, 3, 1 PPS.
Other frame rates, up to 60PPS, available.
Pulse Widths 2 - 40 ms; variable in 1 ms steps

(not to exceed 50% Duty Cycle @ selected Pulse rate)
®
1A.8.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS
1A.8.1 Environmental Specifications
OPERATING
Ambient temperature range 10 to 40 °C (50 to 104 °F).
Relative humidity 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
Altitude -700 to 3000 meters (1100 to 700 hPa, 825 to 525 mm Hg).
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

Ambient temperature range -20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F).
Relative humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing.
Atmospheric pressure range -700 to 3000 meters (1100 to 700 hPa, 825 to 525 mm Hg).
• Long-term storage over 40 °C will reduce the service life of electrolytic capacitors in the
generator.
• The membrane console is limited to a minimum temperature of -20°C, with a maximum
duration of 48 hours at that temperature. Transport and storage is limited to a maximum
duration of 120 hours between 50 and 70 °C, with an absolute humidity not to exceed the
humidity of 85% RH at 50 °C.
• Touchscreen console temperatures below -20°C and above +50°C are limited to 10 days
maximum duration, with a humidity not exceeding 50 % RH.
®
1A.8.2 Applicable Standards
A) Safety
®
The Indico IQ family of X-ray Generators is designed to the following regulatory requirements and design
standards:
• FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR subchapter J (USA), Part 1010
&1020, Class I
• Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).
• Medical Device Regulations (Canada), Class 3.
• EC Directive 93/42/EEC (amended by 2007/47/EC) concerning Medical Devices (European
Community), Class IIb.
• EU Commission Regulation 207/2012 on electronic labeling of medical devices.
• EN60601-1/IEC 60601-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1, ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1.
• IEC 60601-2-54/EN60601-2-54, CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 60601-2-54.
− Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
Warning: To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a
supply mains with protective earth.
− Overvoltage category classification: II.
− Pollution degree classification: 2.
− Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
− Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
− Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
− Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide.
• EN 62304/IEC 62304 - Software life-cycle processes.
• EN ISO 14971- Risk Management.
• EN 60601-1-6/IEC 60601-1-6. EN 62366/IEC 62366 - Usability and application of usability engineering
to medical devices.
• EN 60601-1-2/IEC 60601-1-2, applying the following standards:
Electromagnetic Immunity
IEC61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge
IEC61000-4-3 Radiated RF field
IEC61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient
IEC61000-4-5 Surge
IEC61000-4-6 Conducted RF Immunity
IEC61000-4-8 Magnetic Field Immunity
Electromagnetic Emission:
EN55011 (CISPR Publication II Emissions Standards Group 1, Class A)
• ACPEIP-------------------------------------------------- China RoHS
The following are not specific design requirements at this time but are objectives for consideration over the
life of the product.
• DIRECTIVE 2011/65/EU, RoHS--------------------- Restriction of Hazardous Substances
®
1A.8.2 Applicable Standards (Cont)
B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2/IEC 60601-1-2)
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions

The VZW2558 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the VZW2558 series should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The VZW2558 series of X-ray generators use RF energy only for
CISPR 11 their internal functions. Therefore, the RF emissions are very low
and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions Class A
CISPR 11 The VZW2558 series is suitable for use in all establishments other
Harmonic Not Applicable than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-
emissions voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for
IEC 61000-3-2 domestic purposes.
Voltage Not Applicable
fluctuations/
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment –
test test level level guidance
Electrostatic ± 6 kV contact ± 6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile. If
discharge (ESD) floors are covered with synthetic material, the
± 8 kV air ± 8 kV air
IEC 61000-4-2 relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ± 2 kV for power ± 2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ± 1 kV for ± 1 kV for
input/output lines input/output lines
Surge ± 1 kV line to line ± 1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 commercial or hospital environment.
± 2 kV line to ± 2 kV line to
earth earth
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial or hospital environment
®
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment -
test test level level guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80MHz 150 kHz to 80MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Field strengths outside the shielded location from
fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz to 2.5 GHz 80MHz to 2.5 GHz
electromagnetic site survey, should be less than
a
3 V/m. .
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply to all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
. Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2556 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X-ray
generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.
®
NOTE: All referenced standards are considered to be at the latest adopted revision.
The CE Mark is a declaration by the manufacturer that the product complies with the
requirements of the applicable European Union (EU) medical device directive and that
the product has been subject to conformity assessment procedures as provided in that
directive.
The TÜV SÜD mark with the indicators “C” and “US” signifies that the product is
certified for both U.S. and Canadian markets, to applicable U.S. and Canadian safety
standards.
1A.8.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
In accordance with the intended use, this X-ray generator complies with the European Council Directive
concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of the harmonized
standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission from this equipment
and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices.
It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.
®
1A.8.4 RoHS Compliance

®
Indico IQ
产品中有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration.
有毒有害物质或元素
Hazardous substances’ name
Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Poly-Brominated Poly-Brominated
部件名称 Chromium Biphenyls Diphenyl Ether
Component
Name 铅汞镉六价铬多溴联苯多溴二苯醚
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PBB) (PBDE)
Generator X O O O O O
Console X O O O O O
O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下

X: 表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要
求
• 此表所列数据为发布时所能获得的最佳信息
• 由于缺少经济上或技术上合理可行的替代物质或方案，此医疗设备运用以上一些有毒有害物质来实现
设备的预期临床功能，或给人员或环境提供更好的保护效果。
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
• Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication.
• Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended
clinical uses, and/or to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to lack
of reasonably (economically or technically) available substitutes.
®
1A.9.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS
• KV: KV peak including any initial kV overshoot.

• TIME: Time in milliseconds, (ms) that the high voltage (anode to cathode) is greater than or
equal to 75% of the desired kV.
• mA: Average tube current (in mA) after initial overshoot during the exposure time.
• mAs: milliampere-seconds (mA x TIME).
1A.10.0 RUNTIME LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE)
User / End User License Agreement

You should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using this product. It contains software
(“Software”), the use of which is licensed by Communications & Power Industries Canada Inc. (“CPI”) to
you, the original end user, for your use only as set forth below. If you do not agree to the terms and
conditions of the agreement, do not use the software. If you use any part of the software, such use shall
indicate that you accept these terms.
1. The Software embedded in this Product is protected by international intellectual property rights and
treaties. You may use the software in object code form only and are prohibited from distributing the
software as such. There is no grant of any of the Software’s proprietary source code. This license
does not grant you any rights to patents, copyright, trade secrets, trademarks, or any other rights with
respect to the Software. You are not authorized to modify or to create derivative works based on this
software. You are not authorized to decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the
embedded Software. CPI reserves all rights not expressly granted herein.
2. You are authorized to copy the Software only for the following purposes.
a. If such copying is an essential step in the use of the Software and in accordance with this
agreement; or
b. To make an archival copy for back up purposes.
3. If making a copy pursuant to Section 2 above, you must ensure that all trademark, copyright and
intellectual property notices are reproduced and included on any copies that are made.
4. The Software embedded in this Product is provided to you within the same warranty terms, as those
offered for the Products, except for any third party software, which is offered “as is” and without
warranties of any kind including, but not limited to: warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular
purpose, title and non-infringement.
5. The Software embedded in this Product is not intended for use in or with systems, devices, or
products intended to support of sustain life or for any aviation or nuclear reactor application in which
the software or its failure, malfunction, or inadequacy could directly or indirectly cause or contribute to
personal injury or death or significant property damage. It is your responsibility, as the User or End
User, to ascertain the suitability of the Software for your particular situation and / or application.
6. This agreement is effective until terminated. The agreement shall terminate immediately if you fail to
adhere to the terms and conditions set forth herein. Upon termination, you must immediately cease all
use of the Software and destroy any and all copies of the embedded Software in your possession.
7. This agreement represents the entire agreement between you and CPI with respect to the Software,
and supersedes all other agreements or representations, whether written or oral. The terms of this
agreement can only be modified by the express written consent of both parties. If any part of this
agreement is held to be unenforceable as written, it will be enforced to the maximum extent allowed
by applicable law, and without effect to the enforceability of any other part.
8. Should you have questions regarding the use of the Software, please contact support@cpii.com.
®
1A.11.0 OPEN-SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT
The software included in the CPI product covered by this manual may contain copyrighted software
programs that are licensed under the General Public License (GPL) V2. A copy of the GPL can be found
on the GNU website, www.gnu.org. You may obtain the corresponding source code for a period of three
years by forwarding your request to:
CPI Communications & Medical Products Division

45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada
L7G 2J4
Telephone: (905) 877-0161
Fax: (905) 877-5327
E-mail: CANMarketing@cpii.com Subject: Open Source Code
Note: The subject line for any requests must indicate “Open Source Code” in order to obtain a response.
Distribution charges applicable at the time of request may apply.
All Open Source Software will be provided “AS IS”; there are (i) no representations or warranties and (ii)
neither CPI Canada, nor any of the developers or contributors to Open Source Software shall have any
liability or obligation to the customer with respect to Open Source Software beyond what is granted in the
particular Open Source Software license. Any modification to software code residing in CPI Canada
products shall void all warranties and render products “Not for Clinical Use”. CPI Canada shall have no
liability or obligation for any CPI Canada products containing modified software.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc. Safety 1B
CHAPTER 1B
SAFETY
CONTENTS:
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................... 1B-2

1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS ...................................................................................................... 1B-2
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS ..................................................................................................... 1B-2
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNINGS LABELS ................................................................................................................ 1B-7
1B.4.1 Caution: Heavy Object.......................................................................................................................... 1B-8
1B.4.2 High Voltage Exposed When Panel Open / Removed ......................................................................... 1B-8
1B.4.3 High Voltage / High Energy DC Bus Voltage Underneath .................................................................... 1B-8
1B.4.4 Caution: High Voltage Behind Cover .................................................................................................... 1B-8
1B.4.5 Input Distribution Board ........................................................................................................................ 1B-9
1B.4.6 Input Fuse Mezzanine Board ................................................................................................................ 1B-9
1B.4.7 Rectifier Board ...................................................................................................................................... 1B-9
1B.4.8 Auxiliary CPU Board ............................................................................................................................. 1B-9
1B.4.9 Room I/O Board .................................................................................................................................... 1B-9
1B.4.10 AEC Board ............................................................................................................................................ 1B-9
1B.4.11 Low Speed/Dual Speed Starter 2 Board .............................................................................................. 1B-9
1B.4.12 Inverter Board ....................................................................................................................................... 1B-9
1B.4.13 Resonant Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 1B-10
1B.4.14 HV Module .......................................................................................................................................... 1B-10
1B.4.15 Console Board .................................................................................................................................... 1B-10
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-03 Rev. H Page 1B-1
1B Safety CPI Canada Inc.
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and servicing
the X-ray generator.
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console.
This indicates that high voltage is present on or

under the marked item.
This indicates that a potential hazard may exist to

operators or service personnel, or it may identify
hazards that could result in equipment or property
damage.
Refer to the notes that accompany this symbol in
®
the Indico IQ documentation for details.
Radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console. Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure is
in progress. This is accompanied by an audible
tone from the console.
WARNING THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE Radiation warning label on console (not used in all
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND jurisdictions).
OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS, Never allow unqualified personnel to operate this X-
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND ray generator.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ARE
OBSERVED.
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS
WARNING: PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS.
CPI CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND
ASSOCIATED HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR AFTER-SALE
OPERATING AND SAFETY PRACTICES.
THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR
NOT MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND
INSTALLATION MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED
IN ANY WAY.
THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY
RADIATION OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM
POOR OPERATING TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.
®
Page 1B-2 Rev. H Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-03
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (Cont)
WARNING: ONLY AUTHORIZED AND PROPERLY TRAINED SERVICE AND OPERATING

PERSONNEL SHOULD BE ALLOWED TO WORK WITH THIS X-RAY GENERATOR
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: DO NOT MODIFY THIS EQUIPMENT WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION OF THE

MANUFACTURER.
WARNING: THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS
SAFE EXPOSURE FACTORS, OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES ARE OBSERVED.
WARNING: THIS X-RAY GENERATOR SHOULD NOT BE USED ON PATIENTS WHILE PROBES
OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE CONNECTED AND WHILE THE COVERS ARE OPEN.
THIS X-RAY GENERATOR SHOULD ONLY BE USED AFTER IT IS PROPERLY
INSTALLED AND TESTED ACCORDING TO ALL APPLICABLE REGULATORY
REQUIREMENTS AND THE INSTRUCTIONS OF THIS MANUAL.
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
ENSURE THAT ANY EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE CONSOLE IS COMPLIANT

WITH AND APPROVED BY APPROPRIATE REGULATORY STANDARDS.
For the R&F membrane console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator, J2
is a serial port for use by an external computer or the DAP printer, and J13 is for
connection of an external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the touchscreen console, connect cable p/n 90626800 to COMM1 port for
communication with the generator. The DC power supply jack is located on the left side on
the touchscreen as shown in figure 2-7.
COMM2 is only used for digital options (if applicable) for the touchscreens console.
For the mini-console, the cable with the attached 15-pin “D” connector is for connection of
the console cable p/n 735840-03 that is connected to the generator.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR THE USE OF NON-COMPLIANT OR UNAPPROVED

EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
®
WARNING: AN ARC FLASH IS AN ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE OF CURRENT THAT TRAVELS

THROUGH THE AIR AND CAN PRODUCE TEMPERATURES APPROACHING 20,000
DEGREES CELSIUS; THIS CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO EXPOSED SKIN AND
DAMAGE THE EYES OF THE INSTALLER/SERVICE PERSONNEL. THE MAINS
INPUT AND GENERATOR CAPACITOR BANK ARE AREAS WHERE A POTENTIAL
ARC FLASH CAN OCCUR. TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF INJURIES FROM AN ARC
FLASH, THE INSTALLER/SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST WEAR THE PROPER
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) AND WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING ARC FLASH HAZARDS.
CAUTION: VERIFY THAT THE EXPOSURE PARAMETERS ARE SUITABLE FOR THE CURRENT
ACQUISITION REQUIREMENT BEFORE TAKING AN EXPOSURE. DEFAULT
EXPOSURE PARAMETERS PRESENTED IN THE CONSOLE WHEN SWITCHING
FROM ONE TECHNIQUE FACTOR TO ANOTHER, OR WHEN SWITCHING BETWEEN
DIFFERENT MODES (e.g. AEC to non-AEC) HAS TO BE EVALUATED, AND
CHANGED IF NECESSARY, TO ENSURE IT IS SUITABLE FOR THE CURRENT
APPLICATION.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED
WITHIN PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
NOTE: FOR RELIABILITY AND SAFETY, THE GENERATOR AND CONTROL CONSOLE
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT MUST BE WITHIN THE SPECIFICATIONS STATED IN
THIS DOCUMENT. THE VENTS AROUND THE GENERATOR AND CONTROL
CONSOLE SHOULD BE UNOBSTRUCTED TO PREVENT OVERHEATING.
WARNING: HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAINS
POWER IS SWITCHED ON. THESE AREAS INCLUDE THE INPUT FUSE MEZZANINE
BOARD (IF FITTED), THE INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD, THE RECTIFIER BOARD,
THE AUXILIARY CPU BOARD, THE ROOM POWER TRANSFORMER AND,
DEPENDING ON CONFIGURATION, THE ROOM I/O BOARD.
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE AC MAINS POWER
FROM THE GENERATOR.
NOTE: THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MAY PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5
MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK
THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE FULLY DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING THE
GENERATOR.
NOTE: THE INSTALLER MUST PROVIDE A VISUAL INDICATION OF THE ON/OFF STATE
OF EACH EXTERNAL DEVICE THAT CAN PREVENT THE GENERATOR FROM
STARTING EMISSIONS, OR THAT CAN STOP THE GENERATOR FROM
CONTINUING TO EMIT RADIATION, OR BOTH.
®
WARNING: DO NOT ADJUST ANY OF THE POTENTIOMETERS WITHIN THE X-RAY

GENERATOR UNLESS OTHERWISE INSTRUCTED. IGNORING THIS WARNING
COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE X-RAY TUBE AND HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE,
OR INCREASE THE RISK OF PATIENT OVER EXPOSURE.
WARNING: WHEN CONNECTING ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT TO THE GENERATOR, IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE TO ALL
REGULATORY STANDARDS FOR SAFETY, EMC, AND HAZARD ANALYSIS / RISK
ASSESSMENT OF THE FINAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
NOTE: ALL ELECTRICAL WORK PERFORMED DURING INSTALLATION AND SERVICE OF

THIS X-RAY GENERATOR MUST BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CSA
STANDARD Z462 OR EQUIVALENT.
WARNING: THERE IS AN INCREASED DANGER OF THE GENERATOR TIPPING DURING

SERVICE & HANDLING WHEN THE HV MODULE HAS BEEN REMOVED. ENSURE
THAT THE GENERATOR IS STABLE AND WELL SUPPORTED AT ALL TIMES TO
PREVENT TIPPING THAT MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO
THE GENERATOR.
WARNING: THE HV MODULE MUST REMAIN UPRIGHT AT ALL TIMES. DO NOT LAY IT ON ITS
SIDE AS OIL MAY LEAK FROM THE HV MODULE IF IT IS NOT IN THE UPRIGHT
POSITION.
WARNING: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) CAN DAMAGE SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC

COMPONENTS INSIDE THE GENERATOR. ESD HANDLING PROCEDURES MUST
BE FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES.
WARNING: ACTIVATION OF THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH WILL REMOVE AUXILIARY

VOLTAGES (ROOM I/O AND DIN RAIL) AS WELL AS TERMINATE EXPOSURES IN
PROGRESS. ACTIVATION OF INTERLOCKS ON THE ROOM I/O BOARD OR ON THE
DIGITAL I/O BOARD MAY ALSO TERMINATE EXPOSURES IN PROGRESS.
WARNING: TIGHT AREAS, LIMITED ACCESS, SHARP EDGES, CORNERS AND OBJECTS ARE
PRESENT WITHIN THE GENERATOR. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS TO
PROTECT ONESELF FROM INJURY. THE USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT (PPE) IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED.
®
CAUTION: SOME AREAS IN THE GENERATOR USE HINGES ON THE BOARD MOUNTING
PLATES FOR EASE OF MOUNTING AND ACCESSIBILITY. WHEN ACCESSING
THESE AREAS OF THE GENERATOR, ENSURE THAT HANDS, FINGERS AND
WIRES ARE NOT CAUGHT BY THE MOVABLE PARTS TO AVOID PERSONAL
INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE GENERATOR.
CAUTION: AFTER SERVICING, TIGHTEN ALL HARDWARE PROPERLY. ENSURE THAT NO

LOOSE HARDWARE OR HARDWARE THAT CAN COME LOOSE OVER TIME IS LEFT
INSIDE THE GENERATOR. LOOSE HARDWARE CAN CAUSE SHORT CIRCUITS THAT
WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
The following notes apply to the StarQ™ Touchscreen Console only.
WARNING: THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLES AND ITS POWER SUPPLY DO NOT CONTAIN ANY
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS. IN THE EVENT THAT THERE IS A MALFUNCTION OR A
FAILURE, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPEN OR SERVICE THE CONSOLE OR THE
POWER SUPPLY. IT MUST BE RETURNED TO THE FACTORY FOR SERVICE OR
REPLACEMENT (SUBJECT TO WARRANTY CONDITIONS).
NOTE: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH ENERGIZED CIRCUITRY INSIDE THE

TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE, THE MAXIMUM BACK PLATE SCREW LENGTH MUST
BE LIMITED TO 10 mm (0.4 INCH).
NOTE: WHEN MAKING ADJUSTMENTS TO THE WALL MOUNTS, ENSURE THAT THE
SETTINGS DO NOT EXTEND BEYOND THE ALLOWABLE ADJUSTMENT AREAS OF
THE MOUNTING HARDWARE. ADEQUATELY SUPPORT THE CONSOLE WHEN
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CONSOLE POSITIONS.
ENSURE ALL SCREWS ARE SECURED AND DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN AS THIS MAY
LEAD TO MOUNTING HARDWARE DAMAGE AND INSTABILITY OF THE MOUNT.
ALL SCREWS, ESPECIALLY THOSE USED TO SECURE THE MOVABLE
ADJUSTMENTS SHOULD BE PERIODICALLY CHECKED FOR DAMAGE.
CAUTION: WHEN MOVING THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE FROM ONE PLACE TO ANOTHER,
ENSURE THAT IT IS ADEQUATELY SUPPORTED. USE PROPER LIFTING
TECHNIQUE AND LIFT WITH HELP IF NECESSARY TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY
AND TO PREVENT THE TOUCHSCREEN FROM FALLING DOWN.
WARNING: PLEASE ENSURE THAT THERE IS SUFFICIENT AREA AROUND THE COOLING
SLOTS OF THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE TO ALLOW PROPER COOLING OF THE
INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
®
NOTE: WHEN USING THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE WITH THE BUILT-IN STAND,
ENSURE THAT THE STAND IS EXTENDED TO ITS MAXIMUM ANGLE SO THE
CONSOLE IS STABLE AND THERE IS NO DANGER OF THE CONSOLE FALLING OR
TOPPLING OVER.
THE TOUCHSCREEN SHOULD BE SUPPORTED PROPERLY WHILE ADJUSTING
ITS VIEWING ANGLE OR POSITION.
NOTE: IF USING THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE, SOME OF THE PROCEDURES

OUTLINED IN THIS MANUAL MAY REQUIRE THAT DEVICES (e.g. USB FLASH
DRIVE, KEYBOARD, etc.) BE INSERTED INTO THE USB PORT(S). IF THERE ARE
NO AVAILABLE OR VACANT USB PORTS TO USE BECAUSE IT IS IN USE BY
OTHER DEVICES (e.g. DAP PRINTER, DIGITAL INTERFACE, etc.), IT MAY BE
NECESSARY TO REMOVE THESE OTHER DEVICES. IF THIS IS THE CASE, ENSURE
THAT THE TEMPORARILY REMOVED DEVICES ARE RETURNED TO THEIR
PREVIOUS STATE (SUCH AS HOW THE DEVICE IS SECURED, HOW THE CABLES
ARE ROUTED, etc.) AFTER THE SERVICING IS COMPLETED.
NOTE: DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUIDS NEAR THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE DURING
OPERATION, TO PREVENT DAMAGE CAUSED BY SPILLED LIQUIDS.
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNINGS LABELS
This section describes the safety labels used inside and outside the generator cabinet. Depending on
configuration, your X-ray generator may contain some or all of the labels shown.
NOTE: THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE INTENDED TO ALERT SERVICE

PERSONNEL THAT SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED
IS IGNORED.
NOTE: DUE TO THE VARIETY OF GENERATOR MODELS, THE EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE
EXACTLY AS SHOWN.
WARNING: BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS, SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER
DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME (MINIMUM 5 MINUTES) FOR ALL
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE.
WARNING: IF ANY BARRIERS OR COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL
REQUIRED PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND
IMMEDIATELY REPLACE THE BARRIERS / COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR
REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.
®
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS (Cont)
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.
Refer to the spares list (chapter 8) for fuse replacement information.
Refer to chapter 6 for the battery replacement procedure.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your X-ray
generator. Do not operate this equipment except in accordance with these precautions, and any additional
information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and / or competent safety authorities.
1B.4.1 Caution: Heavy Object
A label is attached to the generator and to the HV module to indicate that the weight of these assemblies
exceeds the weight limit recommended for handling by one person. Do not attempt to lift these items
without proper lifting aids or assistance.
1B.4.2 High Voltage Exposed When Panel Open / Removed
This label, which is attached to the generator external covers, warns that high voltage will be exposed if
the cover is removed and the generator is connected to live AC mains or if high voltage capacitors are still
charged.
1B.4.3 High Voltage / High Energy DC Bus Voltage Underneath
The internal capacitors may hold a lethal charge for up to 5 minutes after the console or the main power
disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has been
switched off.
1B.4.4 Caution: High Voltage Behind Cover
High voltage is present behind the identified cover(s). Switch off and lock out the AC mains disconnect,
wait 5 minutes for capacitors to discharge and then confirm the absence of high voltage using a voltage-
measuring device that is known to be functional.
WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN
REMOVED BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE
COVER(S) / PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC
BUS CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 60 VDC BEFORE SERVICING. IF THIS VOLTAGE
EXCEEDS 60 VDC, A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST MANUALLY
DISCHARGED THE CAPACITORS.
®
1B.4.5 Input Distribution Board
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage is present on this board whenever the generator
is connected to live AC mains.
1B.4.6 Input Fuse Mezzanine Board
1B.4.7 Rectifier Board
is switched on.
The DC bus capacitors will remain charged for up to 5 minutes after the generator has
been switched off.
1B.4.8 Auxiliary CPU Board
1B.4.9 Room I/O Board
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage (110 / 220 VAC) may be present on this board at
all times that the generator is connected to live AC mains.
1B.4.10 AEC Board
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: AEC board assemblies with an integral high voltage supply
for ion chambers or for a PMT may have high voltage present, up to approximately 1000
VDC, at all times that the generator is switched on.
1B.4.11 Low Speed/Dual Speed Starter 2 Board
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage (approximately 560/680 VDC) is present on this
board whenever the generator is switched on. This voltage is sourced from the DC bus
capacitors in the generator, and therefore the high voltage hazard will remain for up to 5
minutes after the generator has been switched off.
1B.4.12 Inverter Board
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: The inverter boards are connected to the main DC bus
and will have high voltage applied at all times that the generator is switched on.
This assembly will remain energized for up to 5 minutes after the generator or the
main disconnect is switched off.
®
1B.4.13 Resonant Assembly
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: The resonant assembly is connected to the output of the
inverter assembly, and it may have DC bus voltage applied at all times that the generator
is switched on.
This assembly may remain energized for up to 5 minutes after the generator or the main
disconnect is switched off.
1B.4.14 HV Module
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the
HV module, at the output high voltage connectors, at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the
shorting link is opened and for two-tube HV modules at J5 (the tube 2 solenoid power
connector).
The generator must not be energized if the leads that attach to the primary of the high
voltage transformer are disconnected.
TORQUE NOTICE: Do not over-tighten the nuts on the feed through terminals for the
primary of the HT transformers (maximum torque 18 in lbs / 2.1 N.m). Over-tightening
may damage the HV module.
DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN THE HV CABLE SCREW-DOWN RING. HV cable screw-

down ring should be tightly secured by hand by applying a decent grip while
tightening the ring. If the tube or HV cable manufacturer provides a spanner tool,
use the spanner tool with caution and DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE FORCE.
DO NOT USE any mechanical tools that are not designed to tighten the HV cable
screw-down ring. Over-tightening may damage the HV module.
1B.4.15 Console Board
For R&F membrane consoles:

HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the
area of T1, C61, and J10. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on
the LCD display.
®
CPI Canada Inc. Preparing for Installation 1C
CHAPTER 1C
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................... 1C-2

1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.1 50 kW Three Phase ........................................................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.2 65 kW Three Phase ........................................................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.3 80 kW Three Phase ........................................................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.4 100 kW Three Phase ...................................................................................................................... 1C-2
1C.2.5 Generator Power requirements (AC) mains ................................................................................... 1C-4
1C.2.6 Generator maximum output power requirements based on AC mains conditions ......................... 1C-5
1C.2.7 Service Disconnect (All Models) ..................................................................................................... 1C-5
1C.3.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 1C-5
1C.4.0 GENERATOR DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT ..................................................................................... 1C-6
1C.4.1 Generator Outline ........................................................................................................................... 1C-6
1C.4.2 Generator Weight ........................................................................................................................... 1C-6
1C.4.3 Generator Shipping Pack ............................................................................................................... 1C-6
1C.5.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROL CONSOLE ........................................... 1C-6
1C.5.1 Seismic Centers and Mounting Hole Locations .............................................................................. 1C-7
1C.6.0 COOLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 1C-11
1C.7.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS ............................................................................................... 1C-11
1C.7.1 Tools and Test Equipment Required ............................................................................................ 1C-11
1C.7.2 Site Logistics ................................................................................................................................ 1C-12
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-04 Rev. K Page 1C-1
1C Preparing for Installation CPI Canada Inc.
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The following items must be taken into consideration before installing your generator. These items will
impact the services required:
• Power level of your generator.
• Power line requirements.
• Ground requirements.
• Physical placement of the generator.
• Environmental requirements for the generator.
• Cable runs from the generator to all room components: X-ray tubes, tables, Bucky’s, AEC, DAP and
other room equipment.
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS
1C.2.1 50 kW Three Phase (VZW2558FB8YY)
400-480 VAC ± 10%, 3 ~

1
Line Voltage
Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current 107-90 Amps/phase
2
Standby Current 3 Amps.
1C.2.2 65 kW Three Phase (VZW2558FC8YY)
Line Voltage 400-480 VAC ± 10%, 3 ~

2
1C.2.3 80 kW Three Phase (VZW2558FD8YY)

2
1C.2.4 100 kW Three Phase (VZW2558FJ8YY)

2
®
Page 1C-2 Rev. K Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-04
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS (CONT)
1 Line Voltage: The generator may be operated with a line input voltage of 380VAC -5% /
+15%. If the generator must be installed with a line input voltage below
360VAC (400VAC -10% or 380VAC -5%) then either the generator output
power may be de-rated as specified in section 1.C.2.6 or a 3-phase line
matching auto-transformer may be used. The 3-phase line matching auto-
transformer must meet the minimum requirements specified below:
Input 380VAC 50/60 Hz
Output 400-480VAC ±10%
Momentary Output
As specified above for each power level.
Current
Continuous Output Same as the Minimum Recommended Distribution

Rating Transformer Rating specified in the table below.
2 Standby Current: This is the current that the generator draws when it is “idle”, i.e. with the
generator switched on, the filaments at standby level, and with all the
external or installer-supplied equipment connected at maximum load to
the generator.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES
BETWEEN THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES USED
AT AN INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE
(VOLTAGE LEVEL), THE CURRENT REQUIREMENTS, THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE RUN,
AND MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE INSTALLER.
FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS, AS WELL AS THE
CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT MUST
MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES AND IS USUALLY
DETERMINED BY HOSPITAL / CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.
ALL LISTED RATINGS CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE
INSTALLER MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOADS.
A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING TO
DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER
®
1C.2.5 Generator Power requirements (AC) mains
Mains Minimum Generator Minimum Minimum Minimum Apparent

Voltage Recommended Momentary Recommended Recommended Recommended Mains
Mains Disconnect Line Current Generator Distribution Ground Resistance
to Generator Service Rating Transformer Wire
15 ft/5 m max) Rating Size
50 kW 3 ~ Generator
400 VAC #6 ** 107 A 100 A 65 kVA #6 0.17 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
480 VAC #6 ** 90 A 100 A 65 kVA #6 0.24 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
65 kW 3 ~ Generator
400 VAC #6 *** 136 A 100 A 85 kVA #6 0.13 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
480 VAC #6 *** 118 A 100 A 85 kVA #6 0.19 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
80 kW 3 ~ Generator
400 VAC #6 *** 173 A 100 A 105 kVA #6 0.11 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
480 VAC #6 *** 130 A 100 A 105 kVA #6 0.15 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
100 kW 3 ~ Generator
400 VAC #4 *** 220 A 100 A 130 kVA #4 0.09 Ω
2 2
(21 mm ) (21 mm )
480 VAC #6 *** 170 A 100 A 130 kVA #6 0.12 Ω
2 2
(13.3 mm ) (13.3 mm )
• All wiring and grounding must comply with local electrical codes.
∗ Maximum size for the ground wire is #4 AWG (21 mm2).
∗ ** Maximum wire gauge is #4 AWG (21 mm2).
∗ *** Maximum wire gauge is #4 AWG (21 mm2).
• All wiring must be copper.
• The main disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
®
1C.2.6 Generator maximum output power requirements based on AC mains conditions
Model Rated Power (kW) Rated Supply Max Output Max Output Max Output
Voltage Power (kW) Power (kW) Power (kW)
@359 VAC @350 VAC @342 VAC
Input Input Input
VZW2558FB8YY 50 kW
~
3 400 VAC 50 kW 45 kW 40 kW
VZW2558FC8YY 65 kW
~
3 , 400 VAC 65 kW 60 kW 50 kW
VZW2558FD8YY 80 kW
~
3 , 400 VAC 80 kW 75 kW 65 kW
VZW2558FJ8YY 100 kW
~
3 , 400 VAC 100 kW 93 kW 80 kW
The above table list the maximum power output for the different generator models at a supply voltage
below 360VAC (400VAC -10%). If the measured supply voltage is 360 VAC or lower, de-rate the
maximum power on the generator. For example, if the measured supply voltage on a 50 kW generator is
342 VAC de-rate the maximum output power of the generator to 40 kW.
1C.2.7 Service Disconnect (All Models)

®
Refer to the previous table for the recommended service disconnect ratings for the Indico IQ series of X-
ray generators.
1C.3.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS
POWER LINE:
• A suitable ground must be connected from the main disconnect switch to the main ground connection
on the generator, located below the input distribution board. The ground wire is typically part of the line
cord, and the current capacity of the ground conductor must be equal to or greater than that of the line
conductors.
• If a neutral line is provided with the system, under no circumstances is it to be used for ground
purposes. The ground conductor only may carry fault currents.
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING:

• A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm ) or greater, is to be connected from each X-ray tube’s
2
housing to the HV module’s ground stud located at the top of the HV module.
X-ray Stator Drive Cable Requirements

The X-ray stator cable used with the low speed starter 2/dual speed starter 2 assembly must meet the
following requirements:
• The cable must be shielded and the shield ground must be connected to the generator chassis ground
and to the tube housing ground.
NOTE: For the Metal Center X-ray tube: connect the metal center section lead to one of the
ground studs on the HVM.
• The cable must be rated to at least 600 VAC.

• The maximum total cable capacitance (from the inner conductors shorted together to the cable shield)
must be less than 5.1 nF. For example, a cable type 8618 made by Belden has a capacitance of 4.1
nF for 26 meters.
NOTE: Stator cable capacitance must not exceed 5.1nF. If longer cables are needed, then a
cable with lower capacitance per unit length must be used.
®
1C.4.0 GENERATOR DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
1C.4.1 Generator Outline

®
Refer to chapter 1A for the Indico IQ generator outline.
1C.4.2 Generator Weight
The weight of the generator cabinet and of the available consoles is listed below:
Generator cabinet with HV module 200 lbs (91 kg).
R&F membrane console 8 lbs (3.7 kg).
Touchscreen console 8 lbs (3.7 kg).
1C.4.3 Generator Shipping Pack

®
The dimensions of the packed Indico IQ X-ray generator are shown in the table below.
ITEM LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT
Main cabinet in shipping pack 28 in (71 cm) 24 in (61 cm) 52 in (132 cm) * 240-260 lbs
(109-118 kg)
* The packed weight of the generator will vary within the specified range depending on console type and
options.
1C.5.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROL CONSOLE
WARNING: ENSURE THAT NO EQUIPMENT, BOXES, TOOLS, LIQUIDS OR ITEMS ARE PLACED
ON TOP OF THE GENERATOR CABINET, AND THAT THE GENERATOR CABINET IS
NOT SUBJECTED TO EXTERNAL FORCE UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES.
The generator cabinet is self-standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
• The floor should be flat and level. Leveling feet are available as an option.
• The generator installation area must be dry, clean and free of dirt or debris. Precautions should also be
taken such that there is no chance that water or any type of liquid enters the generator or control
console, before, during and after installation, and within the entire generator's or control console's
service life.
• Mounting holes have been provided in the base of the generator to secure the generator to the floor, if
required. Alternately, the generator may be anchored to the floor via installer supplied hold-down
brackets. Refer to Seismic Centers and mounting hole locations for further details.
• Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the generator for installation.. A minimum of 42
inches (1.07 m) clearance is recommended on any side for which service access may be required
during installation. This is to minimize the risk of accidentally contacting high voltage during service and
maintenance.
• A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm) of clearance is required between the back of the generator and any
wall behind the generator. Areas around the generator vents must be unobstructed to prevent
overheating.
®
1C.5.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROL CONSOLE (Cont)
• Cable conduits, troughs or raceways should be provided to route cables from the generator cabinet to
the console and to the room equipment if required. These should be large enough to allow the cables
to be routed without risk of damage.
• The control console is normally free standing on a desk or shelf and the vents on the control console
must be unobstructed. It may be anchored if necessary and should be installed in a stable, flat, non-
slippery surface. An optional floor stand is available for the R&F membrane console, and an optional
wall mount kit is also available for the StarQ™ Touchscreen Console.
• The control console user should consider ergonomics. This manual does not provide ergonomics
information but appropriate materials should be consulted, as it applies to specific work area
regulations and requirements.
1C.5.1 Seismic Centers and Mounting Hole Locations

®
Figure 1C-1 shows the seismic center location for the Indico IQ X-ray generator. The generator should
normally be secured to the floor via the 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter clearance holes that are located in the
base of the cabinet as shown in Figure 1C-2.
8.1 10.6
(205) (268)
18.7
(476)
LEFT SIDE FRONT

DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
IndicoIQ_seismic.cdr
FIGURE 1C-1: INDICO IQ® SEISMIC CENTERS
®
1C.5.1 Seismic Centers and Mounting Hole Locations (Cont)
FIGURE 1C-2: HOLES IN BASE OF CABINET FOR SECURING THE GENERATOR
Seismic holes are provided as indicated in Figure 1C-2. Depending on your installation requirement, these
holes can be used if seismic mounting is necessary. The customer has to provide the hardware required
to secure the generator to the floor. The recommended diameter of the mounting hardware (such as the
mounting bolt) is 10 mm of sufficient length so the generator assembly is properly secured.
®
When mounting for seismic consideration, all mounting holes should be utilized. All of them are easily
accessible, with one of the holes marked number 4 in the figure, located behind the high voltage module
and can be reached by following this procedure:
• Follow all safety procedures outlined in this manual before commencing any work on the
generator.
• Loosen but DO NOT remove the four (4) Keps nuts on the LSS 2/DSS 2 mounting plate using 8mm
socket or hex driver.
FIGURE 1C-3: LOCATIONS OF KEPS NUTS HOLDING THE STARTER MOUNTING

PLATE TO THE CHASSIS
®
• Push the LSS 2/DSS 2 mounting plate slightly up to free the bottom part of the plate from the unit.
Important: Make sure any cables connected to the LSS 2 or DSS 2 board do not get pinched,
pulled or damaged when moving the mounting plate. If necessary, unplug them from the board.
• Once the bottom part of the mounting plate is free, swing the LSS 2/DSS 2 board mounting plate away
from the unit then up, to access the seismic mounting hole beside the high voltage module. See
figure.
• Install the bolt facing downwards.
• Use a wrench to hold the bolt while tightening the nut.
FIGURE 1C-4: LIFT THE LSS 2/DSS 2 BOARD MOUNTING PLATE UPWARDS TO
ACCESS THE SEISMIC MOUNTING HOLE
• The mounting plate needs to be held securely in the position shown in Figure 1C-4 while the seismic
mounting hardware is secured.
• When done, slide the LSS 2/DSS 2 board mounting plate back into place. Check that the washers
under the Keps nut are not caught between the LSS 2/DSS 2 mounting plate and the generator
chassis.
• If cables were removed earlier, plug them all back to their proper locations.
• Secure and tighten the hardware and check that all connections are properly connected.
®
1C.6.0 COOLING REQUIREMENTS
• Listed below are the cooling requirements for the Indico IQ series X-ray generator:
®
• The main generator cabinet is fan cooled; the membrane console is convection-cooled and
touchscreen console is fan cooled.
• Unrestricted airflow [minimum 3 inches (76 mm)] must be provided at the back of the generator
cabinet.
• The console and generator cabinet should never be covered when the generator is switched on, as any
covering may interfere with the cooling.
• The maximum heat output of the generator is approximately 22 watts (75 BTU / hour) during standby
and approximately 1025 watts (3500 BTU / hour) during fluoroscopic operation. The heat output of the
console is less than 30 watts (100 BTU / hour).
1C.7.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS
The following checklists are provided to help the installer during the pre-installation phase.
1C.7.1 Tools and Test Equipment Required
The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of the
generator.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
A laptop with a suitable browser (Internet Explorer 9 or higher or Mozilla Firefox
3.6 or higher) is needed for setup and calibration. A suitable length of CAT-5
Ethernet cable will be needed to connect the laptop Ethernet port to the
generator.
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of
screwdrivers, pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable tools (i.e. drill, drill bits,
etc) and mounting hardware must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: terminal lugs, caps, splices etc.
A calibrated DVM that indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth;
appropriate leads, probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp. This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a non-
invasive meter such as the Keithley TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for uGy and Gy/min
measurements.
A suitable mA / mAs meter.
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to
speed.
A sufficient selection of absorbers to allow AEC calibration if this option is
fitted. A suggested selection is Lexan in thickness of 5.0, 10.0, and 15.0 cm or
water in plastic containers of homogeneous density in thickness of 5.0, 10.0
and 15.0 cm.
Test phantoms to verify the imaging systems (if applicable) with the generator.
High voltage grease for the HV cable terminations.
®
1C.7.2 Site Logistics
Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist.
CHECK √ DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to
the inside of the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an
elevator available?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the generator?
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified before installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been
completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off
the shipping pallet?
®
CPI Canada Inc Compatibility Listing 1D
CHAPTER 1D
COMPATIBILITY LISTING
CONTENTS:
Section Title
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 1D-2

1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS ............................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.2 Stators ................................................................................................................................................ 1D-2
1D.2.3 AEC Devices ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables .......................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ................................................................................................... 1D-3
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)/Air Kerma ................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.2.8 Options ............................................................................................................................................... 1D-3
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA ............................................................................................................................... 1D-3
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-05 Rev. C Page 1D-1
1D Compatibility Listing CPI Canada Inc
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section describes external equipment that is compatible with your X-ray generator, and it lists options
that may be included in that generator.
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS

®
The Indico IQ family of X-ray generators may be configured to be compatible with various external
devices. Please refer to chapter 3D, 3E, 3F and any supplements along with the compatibility statement
located at the front of this manual (for hard copy manuals) or included on the CD (for soft copy manuals).
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Various makes and models of inserts and housings are supported. Refer to the compatibility statement
located at the front of this manual (for hard copy manuals) or included on the CD (for soft copy manuals)
and also to the supplement at the end of chapter 2 of this manual for details.
CAUTION: PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE INSERT IS AS STATED ON THE
COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT.
IF THE HOUSING HAS BEEN RELOADED WITH ANOTHER INSERT TYPE,
CALIBRATION MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED, RESULTING IN TUBE DAMAGE.
One tube is standard and two tube is optional.
1D.2.2 Stators
Various types of stators are supported. Low speed starter is standard and the dual speed starter is
optional. Refer to the compatibility statement and to the supplement at the back of chapter 2 of this
manual for details.
1D.2.3 AEC Devices

®
The Indico IQ series of X-ray generators may be configured to be compatible with various AEC devices
(ionization, solid state or PMT) via the optional AEC board. Refer to the compatibility statement for AEC
device compatibility of this generator.
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups
Various ABS pickups (photo diode, composite video, PMT, proportional DC, etc) may be supported,
depending on configuration. Refer to the compatibility statement and to chapter 3E for details.
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables
Various Tomographic tables are supported. Please note that the generator is used as a backup timer
ONLY in tomography. AEC is NOT available for tomography.
®
Page 1D-2 Rev. C Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-05
CPI Canada Inc Compatibility Listing 1D
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators)
The generator may be configured to be compatible with various types of external equipment. Refer to the
compatibility statement for details (located at the front of this manual (hard copy manuals) or included on
the CD (soft copy manuals)).
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)/Air Kerma

®
A DAP (Dose-Area Product)/Air Kerma meter is available as an option on Indico IQ X-ray generators.
Refer to chapter 3F for details.
1D.2.8 Options
Major options include AEC, digital interface board, DAP interface or Air Kerma display, low speed starter,
dual speed starter, two tube HV module, etc. Refer to the compatibility statement for details.
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA
Note to installer: Please insert the tube rating charts for the X-ray tubes used with this generator.
TUBE #1
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
TUBE #2
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-05 Rev. C Page 1D-3
1D Compatibility Listing CPI Canada Inc
®
Page 1D-4 Rev. C Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-05
CPI Canada Inc Generator Layout and Major Components 1E
CHAPTER 1E
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND
MAJOR COMPONENTS
CONTENTS:
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 1E-2

1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................................................ 1E-2
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly .............................................................................................................. 1E-2
1E.2.2 Console Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 1E-5
1E.2.3 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Serial EEPROM locations ...............................................1E-6
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-06 Rev. F Page 1E-1
1E Generator Layout and Major Components CPI Canada Inc
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the generator layout drawings and figures that identify the major generator
components. This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the Serial EEPROM on the
low speed starter 2/dual speed starter 2 board. Refer to the applicable figure to ensure correct orientation
should replacement or upgrade becomes necessary.
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly
The following major assemblies are located within the generator cabinet:
• Input distribution board.
• Mezzanine board (all except 50 kW units).
• Rectifier board.
• Auxiliary CPU board.
• Generator control board.
• Generator CPU board.
• Filament board(s).
• Low speed starter (or optional Dual speed starter).
• High frequency inverter board(s).
• Optional AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) board.
• Optional digital I/O board.
• Room I/O board
• High Voltage module.
Figures 1E-1 and 1E-2 show the major components inside the generator cabinet. These figures are meant
to show major component locations only; some details may differ depending on configuration and options.
®
Page 1E-2 Rev. F Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-06
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)
Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies view “A”
®
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)
Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies view “B”
®
1E.2.2 Console Assembly
Figure 1E-3 is an internal view of the R&F membrane console showing the major components and
cabling.
Figure 1E-3: R&F Membrane console internal view
The StarQ™ Touchscreen Console (not shown here) contains no user serviceable parts and must be
returned to the factory for service.
®
1E.2.3 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Serial EEPROM locations
This next figure shows the Serial EEPROM locations and orientation for low speed starter 2/dual speed
starter 2 boards 903132-00 and 903132-04. The Serial EEPROM is required for upgrading the firmware
on starter boards configured for legacy mode.
Figure 1E-4: EEPROM locations for LSS 2/ DSS 2 PWBA 903132-00 & 903132-04
®
CPI Canada Inc. Installation 2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0 UNPACKING............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Generator Lifting Points ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.2 Generator Relocation and Transport..................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.0 REMOVING & REINSTALLING THE GENERATOR COVERS ............................................................... 2-5
2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5.1 Main Cabinet ......................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5.2 Control Console .................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR .............................................................................................................. 2-9
2.6.1 Control Console .................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.6.2 Hand Switch & Fluoro Foot Switch ...................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.3 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections ............................................................................ 2-17
2.6.4 Power Line Mains ................................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.6.5 High Voltage Cables............................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.6.6 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground .............................................................................................................. 2-21
2.6.7 Room Equipment................................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.6.8 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay............................................................................... 2-22
2.6.9 Room Transformer Outputs (“On with Generator” or “On Always”) .................................................... 2-22
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER 2 (LSS2) / DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 (DSS2) .............................................. 2-23
2.7.1 LSS2/DSS2 Board Switch Settings ..................................................................................................... 2-24
2.7.2 Setting the Tube Stator Type for PWBA 90313204 in Legacy Mode .................................................. 2-26
2.7.3 Selecting the Tube Housing Type using GenWeb™ .......................................................................... 2-28
2.7.4 Selecting the Tube Housing Type using a Membrane Console .......................................................... 2-29
2.7.5 Verifying the Subassembly tab number (Switch 1-7 on SW3) ............................................................ 2-30
2.7.6 Setting the Input Voltage for PWBA 90313204 (Legacy mode) .......................................................... 2-30
2.7.7 Setting the Input Voltage for PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus mode) ....................................................... 2-31
2.7.8 Verifying Switch SW8 for PWBA 90313204 (Legacy mode) ............................................................... 2-31
2.7.9 Verifying Switch SW8 for PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus mode) ............................................................ 2-31
2.7.10 Configuring the Generator for the Low Speed Starter 2 (LSS2) ......................................................... 2-31
2.7.11 Low Speed Starter / Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table ............................................................... 2-31
2.8.0 SAFETY LOCKOUT JUMPER / LOCAL ON & OFF SWITCHES / FACTORY DEFAULT JUMPER ..... 2-32
2.9.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS .......................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.10.0 INITIAL RUN-UP ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.10.1 Initial Voltage Measurements .............................................................................................................. 2-34
2.10.2 Initial Power Up ................................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.11.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION .................................................................................................. 2-35
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-07 Rev. L Page 2-1
2 Installation CPI Canada Inc.
2.12.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION .................................................................................................................. 2-35

2.13.0 FINAL CHECKS ...................................................................................................................................... 2-38
2.14.0 REVISION HISTORY .............................................................................................................................. 2-39
®
Page 2-2 Rev. L Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-07
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking and installing the Indico IQ series of X-ray generators.
This chapter also describes the basic wiring and setup of the generator (console, X-ray tube, AC mains,
etc), allowing for initial power-up of the generator. This is followed by the X-ray tube auto calibration
procedure.
2.2.0 UNPACKING
1. Inspect the shipping pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage,
note this in the event that a damage claim is justified.
2. Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve for the generator pack. Be
sure to review this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation
aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future
reference.
3. Remove the shipping straps from the outside of the generator pack.
4. Remove the cardboard outer pack. Then set it aside.
5. Remove the foam end caps from the top of the generator.
6. Carefully remove the stretch wrap packaging from the generator. Note that the use of sharp tools
may damage the contents!
NOTE: SUPPORT THE CARDBOARD PACKS CONTAINING THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE

AND BASE COMPONENTS WHEN REMOVING THE STRETCH WRAP PACKAGING.
PRODUCT DAMAGE OR PERSONAL INJURY MAY OCCUR IF THESE ARE NOT
SUPPORTED.
7. Remove the accessory box(es) from the back of the generator.

8. Carefully lift the generator off the skid. Refer to section 2.2.1 for the generator lifting points.
WARNING: THE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 200 LBS (91 KG). DO NOT ATTEMPT
TO LIFT THIS WITHOUT A PROPER LIFTING DEVICE OR SUFFICIENT HELP.
9. Remove and unpack the control console, any cables packed with the generator and the optional hand
switch kit if included.
• For units equipped with a StarQ™ Touchscreen Console, the console comes with its own built-in
(universal) stand.
10. Inspect all items for shipping damage. Check that there is no loose hardware.
11. Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork packed with the generator.
12. Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in their shipping
pack(s) and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.
®
2.2.1 Generator Lifting Points
The generator should only be lifted from the bottom (figure 2-1) to avoid damage to the generator frame.
Lift with adequate help using proper lifting procedures. Care should also be taken during this procedure to
prevent generator damage and/or personal injury.
Figure 2-1: Generator lifting points
2.2.2 Generator Relocation and Transport
Lifting points are also illustrated in figure 2-1 and when necessary, this can be used to reposition the
generator. If desired, shipping dolly, lifting straps and/or similar devices can be used.
The generator can be equipped with optional leveling feet and wheels to facilitate moving within a limited
area such as repositioning in the room during installation or during serving. These wheels are not intended
to be used to move the generator around on a regular basis or longer distances.
Sufficient help, proper lifting techniques and tools or devices such as those mentioned here should be
used to facilitate moving or relocating the generator in a safe manner.
®
2.3.0 REMOVING & REINSTALLING THE GENERATOR COVERS
Refer to figure 2-2 and 2-3 in conjunction with the following steps.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THERE IS NO LOOSE HARDWARE INSIDE THE UNIT. LOOSE
HARDWARE CAN CAUSE SHORT CIRCUITS THAT WILL RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
To remove the front cover:
1. Remove the center rear screw (D) holding the front cover to the generator cabinet.
2. Swivel the front cover back until the ground wire connected to the front cover is accessible.
3. Disconnect the ground wire from the front cover as shown in figure 2-3.
4. Lift the front cover and ensure the two pins located inside the bottom of the front cover are free from
the mounting slots on the side of the generator chassis.
To re-install the front cover, do the steps in reverse, ensuring that the front panel slides over the side
panel.
To remove the side panel:
1. Remove the three screws (A, B, C) on the left rear side of the cabinet.
2. Remove the center rear screw (D) holding the front cover to the generator cabinet.
3. Swivel the front cover back until the ground wire connected to the side panel is accessible.
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the side panel as shown in figure 2-3. Swivel the front cover to its
original position, but do not fasten back in place.
5. Slide the side panel down to clear the top from the front cover overlap.
To re-install the side panel, do the steps above in reverse.
®
2.3.0 REMOVING & REINSTALLING THE GENERATOR COVERS (Cont)
®
Figure 2-2: Indico IQ external covers
®
2.3.0 REMOVING & REINSTALLING THE GENERATOR COVERS (Cont)
Figure 2-3: Ground screw for external covers
2.4.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
Refer to the section MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT in chapter 1E for major component identification
and layout.
2.5.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
2.5.1 Main Cabinet
Place the generator cabinet in a location that will allow the following:
• Easy access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables. Refer to
LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROL CONSOLE in chapter 1C.
• Air circulation: The main cabinet is fan cooled; therefore room-temperature air must be free to circulate
around the cabinet (3 inch wall clearance). The cooling slots in the cabinet must be unobstructed at all
times.
• A stable footing.
• Close proximity to service-disconnect boxes. Cables should be a maximum of 15ft/5m in length and
located away from traffic areas. Do not locate the X-ray generator within the patient environment of the
X-ray room.
• If the generator is fitted with optional wheels, these are intended only to assist with moving and
positioning the generator in the X-ray room. The optional leveling feet included with the wheels, must
be extended to prevent unwanted generator movement when the generator is located in its final
position.
• Adjust the leveling feet to the desired height, making sure that the generator is leveled. Then raise the
locking nut for each leveling foot up against the bottom of the generator cabinet and tighten the locking
nuts to firmly secure the leveling feet.
®
2.5.1 Main Cabinet (Cont)
∗ If the optional wheels are fitted, extend the leveling feet sufficiently to clear the wheels and ensure
that the generator is level, but no more. Confirm adequate clearance of the wheels from the floor by
sliding a piece of paper under each wheel.
∗ Do not over-extend the leveling feet as this could result in insufficient remaining threads to retain the
leveling feet in the base of the generator.
2.5.2 Control Console
NOTE: GENERATORS SHIPPED WITH THE TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE, REFER TO THE MANUAL
SUPPLEMENT 90684400 FOR CONNECTIONS, FUNCTION AND OPERATION.
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT
DURING SETUP & CALIBRATION OR NORMAL OPERATION OF THE GENERATOR.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL CONSOLE
INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS COMPLETED.
Position the control console in its intended location, on a solid and level surface. Ensure that the console
is stable when positioned in its final location. There must be no risk of it tipping or falling, especially if
extended to its maximum viewing angle (touchscreen consoles).
• The control console including the mini-console, if applicable, must be located inside an X-ray shielded
control booth within the X-ray room, or outside the X-ray room.
• The console should be installed in an accessible and unobstructed area, providing enough space
around it to avoid awkward posture of the user.
• If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the console
to prevent slipping.
• Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow for easy viewing of the displays.
• If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting
instructions supplied with the stand.
• Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CONSOLE CABLE NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FOR

SYSTEM INSTALLATION. HOWEVER, IF THIS IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO ROUTE
THE CABLE, ENSURE CAREFUL AND CORRECT REASSEMBLY OF THE CONNECTOR
SHELL TO AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF PINCHING OF THE INTERNAL WIRES BY THE
SHELL.
StarQ™ Touchscreen Console

The StarQ™ Touchscreen Console is shipped with a built-in (universal) stand.
1. Carefully unpack the touchscreen console and set the packaging aside. Verify that all components
are undamaged.
2. Place the touchscreen console face down on a flat, clean, non-abrasive, and non-slippery surface. If
necessary, use the foam packaging for support when connecting the cables to the touchscreen.
®
2.5.3 Anchoring the Generator to the Floor
If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1C. This should not be done until all
cable hookups to the generator are completed.
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR
All cables should be kept away from high voltage areas in the cabinet, routed away from walkways such
that it does not become a trip hazard, and dressed neatly in place. Cables should be cut to the correct
length if possible, as excess cabling may contribute to EMI/RFI problems. For those cables that cannot be
cut to the correct length (HV cables for example), try to minimize the area inside any loops of excess
cable, as these loops can create an antenna.
The following cables must be shielded: AEC, DAP, console, digital I/O, Ethernet, USB, CAN Bus, RS-232
and used with metal backshell connectors where possible: These cables should also be routed such that
it is away or isolated from the tube HV cables or stator cables. Signal cables used in AEC, DAP, etc. for
example can generate erroneous readings if noise is induced on these cables, so it is very important to
plan the cable routing such that inter-cable effects are minimized, if not eliminated.
The cables that are routed into the generator via the cable access slots and via the high voltage cable
access panel should be secured to the tie points on the inside of the cable openings using cable ties or
equivalent fasteners. Sufficient slack should be left in all cables to act as a strain relief before tightening
the cable ties.
Ensure that console cables are not routed near electrically “noisy” cables such as the stator cables in
order to minimize induced noise on the console cables.
Ferrules should be used on the ends of all stranded wires that are connected to terminal connections in
the generator. These must be supplied by the installer.
EXCESS LENGTHS OF CABLING MUST NEVER BE BUNDLED UP AND STORED INSIDE THE
GENERATOR.
WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE GENERATOR IS WIRED PROPERLY ACCORDING TO THE

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED IN THIS SERVICE MANUAL. ALSO
ENSURE THAT PERIPHERAL DEVICES ARE CONNECTED TO THE CORRECT
CONNECTOR ON THE EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS PANEL AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-
4. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT
IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED, CONNECTIONS ARE BYPASSED, INTERLOCKS
ARE DISABLED, IMPORTANT STEPS ARE OVERLOOKED AND PROPER
INTERCONNECTION PROCEDURES ARE DISREGARDED.
®
2.6.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR (Cont)
Figure 2-4: Rear of generator, external connections panel
NOTE: THE J REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS (i.e. J3, J9, J5, etc.) IN THIS DRAWING AND THE
CORRESPONDING DISCUSSIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE
PURPOSES ONLY AND MAY BE USEFUL SUCH AS WHEN REFERRING TO THE MD
DRAWINGS AND THE THEORY OF OPERATION. THESE J REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
ARE NOT VISIBLE ON THE GENERATOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS PANEL LABELS OR
ON THE INTERCONNECT CABLES. WHEN INTERCONNECTING THE GENERATOR, USE
THE NAME DESIGNATIONS (i.e. R&F CONSOLE, ETHERNET, etc.) WHEN LOCATING THE
CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS.
®
2.6.1 Control Console
NOTE: ONLY USE IEC APPROVED PERIPHERAL DEVICES FOR CONNECTING TO THE
CONSOLES.
Membrane Console:
Figure 2-5A: Console connector cover
1. Place the membrane console face down onto a flat, clean, and non-abrasive surface.
2. Remove the console connector cover from the console as shown in figure 2-5A. Place the cover and
hardware aside in a secure location after removal.
3. If supplied, connect the optional hand-switch p/n 73520300 to J13 (EXTERNAL SWITCH), and then
tighten the screw locks to secure the cable.
4. Next, connect console cable p/n 73209100 to J5 (GENERATOR INTERFACE), and then tighten the
screw locks to secure the cable.
5. Position the console cable to the side of the console or above the hand-switch cable (if installed) as
shown in figure 2-5B. This will ensure the console connector cover aligns properly with the console
when reinstalling the cover.
Figure 2-5B: Console cable connections

®
2.6.1 Control Console (Cont)

6. Reinstall the console connector cover as shown in figure 2-5C. Ensure the ferrite bead on the
console cable is placed on the outside of the console connector cover.
Figure 2-5C: Console connector cover installation

7. Install the screw and fully tighten it to secure the console connector cover.
CAUTION: THE CONSOLE CONNECTOR COVER MUST ALWAYS BE INSTALLED

WHEN OPERATING THE CONSOLE TO COMPLY WITH EMC
REQUIREMENTS.
8. Route the generator end of the console cable p/n 73209100 to the rear of the generator and connect
it to the R&F CONSOLE connector J9 on the generator external connections panel shown in figure 2-
4. Fully tighten the screw locks to secure the console cable.
®
Touchscreen Console:
Figure 2-6: Touchscreen connector cover

1. Place the touchscreen console face down on a flat, clean, non-slippery, and non-abrasive surface.
2. Remove the two screws securing the connector cover from the touchscreen. Refer to figure 2-6.
3. Remove the connector cover and place all hardware aside in a secure location.
4. Connect cable p/n 90626800 to COMM1 (9-pin D-sub) on the touchscreen console.
5. Connect the other end of cable p/n 90626800 (15-pin D-sub) to the R&F connector (J9) on the
generator external connection panel. Refer to figure 2-4.
6. Fully tighten the screw locks on the cable connectors to secure both ends of the cable.
7. If applicable, connect the digital imaging system communication to COMM 2 on the touchscreen.
8. For GenWeb™ access, connect a CAT5 Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the
touchscreen and to the Ethernet connector (J1) on the generator external connection panel.
9. Reinstall the connector cover to the touchscreen console.
10. Connect the 19 VDC power supply cable to the input jack on the side of the console labeled .
WARNING: ALWAYS HAVE THE CONNECTOR COVER AND THE TWO USB PORT
COVERS INSTALLED WHEN OPERATING THE TOUCHSCREN CONSOLE.
®

11. Connect the power cord of the console power supply p/n 7891369300 to the wall outlet. Depending
on your region, one of the following power cords is supplied; check the part number to ensure that
you have the correct part before connecting the power cord to the wall: Europe (8199893500), UK
(8199893100), North America (8199893200), China (8199894100).
NOTE: THE TYPE OF POWER CORD SUPPLIED WILL DEPEND ON THE REGION OF
GENERATOR SHIPMENT. IF A POWER CORD IS REQUIRED FOR A DIFFERENT
REGION, CONTACT CPI FOR INQUIRIES.
NOTE: DO NOT ALTER THE POWER CORD OR POWER CORD TERMINALS IN ANY WAY.
DO NOT REMOVE OR DISABLE THE GROUND CONNECTIONS. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY LEAD TO PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
12. Connect a remote fluoro switch to the room I/O board for fluoro exposures. Refer to chapter 3B and
MD-0977 in chapter 9 for remote fluoro input connections.
13. Connect the mini-console as detailed next
Mini-Console:
NOTE: THE MINI-CONSOLE IS AN OPTIONAL UNIT. HOWEVER, WHEN USING THE

TOUCHSCREEN, THE MINI-CONSOLE IS REQUIRED SINCE THE GENERATOR ON/OFF
FUNCTION AND THE RADIOGRAPHIC EXPOSURE CONTROL ARE ONLY ACCESSIBLE
USING THE MINI-CONSOLE.
1. Route the generator end of the mini-console extension cable p/n SP73584003 (15-pin D-sub) to the
rear of the generator and then connect it to the port labeled MINI CONSOLE (J3) on the generator
external connections panel (figure 2-4).
2. The mini-console has a short piece of cable attached with a 15-pin connector at the end. Connect the
15-pin connector from the mini-console to the other end of the mini-console extension cable p/n
SP73584003.
3. Fully tighten the screw locks on the connectors to secure both ends of the console cable.
ENSURE THAT ANY EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE CONSOLE IS COMPLIANT

WITH AND APPROVED BY APPROPRIATE REGULATORY STANDARDS.
For the R&F membrane console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator, J2 is
a serial port for use by an external computer or the DAP printer, and J13 is for connection of
an external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the touchscreen console, connect cable p/n 90626800 to COMM1 port for communication
with the generator. The DC power supply jack is located on the left side of the touchscreen as
shown in figure 2-7. COMM2 is only used for digital options (if applicable) for the
touchscreens console.
For the mini-console, the short piece of console cable with the attached 15-pin “D” connector
is for connection of the console cable that is connected to the generator.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR THE USE OF NON-COMPLIANT OR UNAPPROVED
EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
®
Figure 2-7 shows the designations of the connectors on the rear panel of the membrane console and
StarQ™ Touchscreen Console.
Figure 2-7: Rear of control console
®
2.6.2 Hand Switch & Fluoro Foot Switch
The optional hand switch, if supplied by CPI Canada Inc, is pre-wired to a male 9-pin subminiature ‘D’
connector. This connects to J13 on the back of the R&F membrane console. On the StarQ™
Touchscreen Console, it is pre-wired to the mini-console.
For R&F generators, the fluoro foot switch connections can be made using these methods:
• On the R&F membrane console, it can be wired to J13 as shown in the table below, or to the room I/O
board as per chapter 3B and MD-0977 in chapter 9.
• For the touchscreen console, connect the fluoro foot switch to the room I/O board as per chapter 3B
and MD-0977 in chapter 9.
The installer must supply the fluoro foot switch.
The table below shows the pin designations for the hand switch connector on the R&F console. A male 9-
pin subminiature ‘D’ connector will need to be provided by the installer if the CPI supplied hand switch is
not used.
Do not apply an external voltage to any of the inputs on the hand switch / foot switch connector.
These inputs are designed to accept ‘dry’ switch contacts only.
Pin
R&F Membrane console: J13
Number
1 Hand switch: X-Ray
2 No Connection
3 Hand switch: Prep
4 No Connection
5 Hand switch: Common (ground)
6 No Connection
7 Foot switch: Switch input (R&F membrane console only)
8 No Connection
9 Foot switch: Switch ground (R&F membrane console only)
®
2.6.3 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections
Refer to figure 2-8 for the X-ray tube stator and tube thermal switch connections.
STATOR CABLES MUST BE SHIELDED (REFER TO CHAPTER 1C, SECTION 1C.3.0 FOR CABLE
STATOR LENGTH REQUIREMENTS). THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE
PROPERLY GROUNDED AT BOTH THE TUBE END AND THE GENERATOR END OF THE
CABLE(S). SEE FIGURE 2-8 FOR GROUND LOCATIONS AT THE GENERATOR END.
1. Temporarily remove the access panel for the HV module, the X-ray tube stator & thermal
connections. This is shown in figure 2-4.
2. Route the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch cable(s) through the opening created in the previous
step, then route the cables toward the stator terminal block(s).
3. Connect the stator and thermal switch wires to the appropriate terminals as shown in figure 2-8.
4. Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables.
NOTE: ONE-TUBE GENERATORS WILL ONLY BE FITTED WITH A SINGLE STATOR

TERMINAL BLOCK. THE LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-8 IS ONLY
FITTED ON TWO-TUBE GENERATORS.
WARNING: WHEN USING A TWO-TUBE SYSTEM, ENSURE THAT THE CABLES ARE ROUTED
PROPERLY TO THE CORRECT TUBE, I.E. TUBE 1 STATOR CABLES GOES TO
TERMINAL DESIGNATED FOR TUBE 1, AND HV CABLE FOR TUBE 1 GOES TO THE
HV MODULE LABELED TUBE 1. DO THE SAME FOR TUBE 2. TESTS SHOULD
ALSO BE DONE AS OUTLINED IN CHAPTER 4, ACCEPTANCE TESTING, SECTIONS
4.3.4 AND 4.3.5, TO ENSURE THAT WHEN TUBE 1 (OR TUBE 2) IS SELECTED, THE
CORRECT TUBE ANODE IS SPINNING BEFORE TAKING ANY EXPOSURE.
CHASSIS GROUND STUD

(2 PLACES)
IndicoIQ-014.cdr
Figure 2-8: Stator & thermal switch connections to the generator
®
2.6.4 Power Line Mains
WARNING: TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS

LOCKED IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-
ENERGIZED BEFORE CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.
Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements.
1. Pass the AC mains cable through the mains cable clamp at the lower rear of the generator.
2. Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses in the generator. This cover must be
reinstalled after the AC mains connections are made, before the generator is powered up. Extreme
care must be used with regard to exposed line voltage if this cover is removed for any reason while
AC mains is applied to the generator.
3. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the AC mains conductors to reach the terminals on the main fuse
block on the input distribution board or on the input fuse mezzanine board.
4. Connect the ground wire to the ground connector (figure 2-9) and connect the mains wires to the free
terminals on the main fuse holder.
• Ferrules should be used on the ends of the AC mains wires. These must be supplied by the
installer.
• Power cable must comply with local regulatory requirements.
5. DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER AT THIS TIME.
Figure 2-9: Generator mains connections
®
2.6.5 High Voltage Cables
The X-ray tube(s) should be mounted in their normal fixtures i.e. tube stand, G.I. table or other devices
before continuing.
Figure 2-10A: HV connector locations (1 and 2 tube HV modules)
Figure 2-10B: HV cable and socket
®
2.6.5 High Voltage Cables (Cont)
Refer to Figure 2-10A and 2-10B:
1. Remove the dust caps that cover the HV (High Voltage) sockets on the HVM (high voltage module as
shown in figure 2-10A
2. Check for debris inside the HV module (ANODE and CATHODE) Sockets on the top of the HVM. If
there is any debris found inside the sockets, it must be carefully removed.
3. Verify that the Plug Bodies are in good condition i.e., no cracks. The contact pins must be sufficiently
opened to make good contact with the mating connectors inside the HV Socket.
4. Carefully clean the Plug Bodies of the HV cables by using dry lint-free paper towels.
5. Apply a thin coat of moisture-dissipating grease to each Plug Body.
6. Carefully clean the HV sockets by using dry lint-free paper towels.
7. Carefully observe the polarity (ANODE and CATHODE) of the HV Sockets and HV cables.
8. To connect the HV cables:
a) In the ANODE (+) HV Socket, first identify the Slot in the socket and visually align it with the Key
on the ANODE Plug Body as shown in figure 2-10B. Then insert and push the Plug Body into the
socket until it is firmly seated.
WARNING: THE METHOD, DESCRIBED IN THE NEXT STEP, OF HOW TO TIGHTEN THE
THREADED RINGS TO THE HV SOCKETS MUST BE PERFORMED BY HAND
ONLY. USE OF MECHANICAL TOOLS SUCH AS A WRENCH MAY RESULT
IN OVER-TIGHTENING, WHICH MAY DAMAGE THE HIGH VOLTAGE
MODULE (HVM) OR THE X-RAY GENERATOR.
b) In the CATHODE (-) HV Socket, first identify the Slot in the socket and visually align it with the
Key on the CATHODE Plug Body as shown in figure 2-10B. Then insert and push the Plug Body
into the socket until it is firmly seated.
9. Use the method described below to tighten the two Threaded Rings to the two HV Sockets
NOTE: HIGH FORCE IS REQUIRED TO ENGAGE THE THREADED RINGS OF THE HV

CABLE. A SUBSTANTIAL AMOUNT OF FORCE IS NEEDED TO SECURE THE
THREADED RINGS OF THE HV CONNECTORS INTO THE HV MODULE INTERFACE.
THERE IS A RISK OF MUSCLE STRAIN. AVOID AWKWARD POSTURE AND
PRACTICES SOUND ERGONOMIC PROCEDURES WHEN PERFORMING THIS TASK.
a) Tighten the Threaded Rings by hand only and ensure there is no gap between the Threaded Ring
and the HV Socket, but do not over tighten.
b) Using a hex key (1.5 mm), tighten the Set Screw, which will secure the Threaded Ring and ensure
a good contact between the HV cable and the HVM.
10. After verifying normal X-ray generator operations, re-tighten the Threaded Rings connecting to the HV
Sockets and the X-ray tube
®
2.6.5 High Voltage Cables (Cont)
NOTE: PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF USING METAL CENTER SECTION X-RAY
TUBES
The mA feedback signals, as measured at the mA test points on the generator control board, represent
anode mA. X-ray emission in the tube is a result of the anode current.
The mA measured at terminals E17 and E18 on the HV module is cathode current. In a metal center
section tube, the anode current will be less than the cathode current, the difference being metal center
section current. In a metal center section tube, the cathode current may exceed the anode current by up to
15%. Although the anode and cathode currents may be unequal, the anode to cathode kV regulation is not
affected.
Due to the presence of metal center section current, filament drive and emission may need to be greater
than expected for a given mA station. The power “lost” to metal center section current may need to be
considered relative to the maximum generator output.
When installing a metal center section tube, it is essential that the center section of the X-ray tube be
securely grounded to HV module; otherwise, premature tube failure may result.
2.6.6 X-Ray Tube Housing Ground

2
Connect a separate ground wire (10 AWG, 6mm ) from each of X-ray tube housing to one of the ground
studs on the HV module. Refer to figure 2-10A. These ground locations may have other ground wires
already connected; ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the X-ray
tube ground connection.
Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and / or exposure errors.
2.6.7 Room Equipment
Refer to chapter 3B, 3D, 3E and 3F for connection of the room equipment (Buckys, miscellaneous room
inputs and outputs, AEC devices, digital imaging systems, DAP, etc.). It is suggested that these items not
be connected until after the initial run-up of the generator is complete and the tube auto calibration has
been performed as described near the end of this chapter.
®
2.6.8 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay
AN EXTERNAL EMERGENCY POWER OFF SWITCH CAN BE INSTALLED FOR SAFETY. THE LOCATION
SHOULD BE DELIBERATELY CHOSEN SUCH THAT IT IS OBVIOUS AND ACCESSIBLE, BUT NOT
SUSCEPTIBLE TO BEING TRIGGERED INADVERTENTLY.
To connect an external emergency power-off switch, disconnect the jumper from J14-1 to J14-2 on the
input distribution board. Then connect the emergency-off switch to J14-1 and J14-2. Refer to sheet 4 of
MD-0975 in chapter 9.
For installations where installer-supplied auxiliary power distribution circuits are added to the generator, 24
VDC is available on the input distribution board to drive the coil of the power distribution relay, or used to
supply an illuminated switch. Connect the coil or the light to J14-3 (+) and J14-4 (ground). The maximum
current available from this source is 500 mA.
WARNING: ACTIVATION OF THE EMERGENCY POWER OFF SWITCH WILL TERMINATE ANY
EXPOSURES IN PROGRESS. THE R&F CONSOLE WILL BE TURNED OF, IF
CONNECTED AND THERE WILL BE NO LED INDICATORS VISIBLE OUTSIDE OF
THE GENERATOR. IF CONNECTED, THE TOUCHSCRREN CONSOLE WILL REMAIN
ON BECAUSE ITS POWER IS NOT SUPPPLIED FROM THE GENERATOR.
ACTIVATION OF THE EMERGENCY POWER OFF SWITCH DOES NOT REMOVE THE
AC MAINS VOLTAGE. HIGH VOLTAGE STILL EXISTS INSIDE THE GENERATOR IN
THE AREA OF THE MEZZANINE BOARD (IF FITTED), THE INPUT DISTRIBUTION
BOARD, THE AUXILIARY CPU BOARD, THE RECTIFIER BOARD, THE ROOM
POWER TRANSFORMER AND POSSIBLY THE ROOM I/O BOARD, THE INVERTER
AND RESONANT BOARDS AND THE DUAL-SPEED STARTER BOARD.
ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED OUT AND ALL
CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING.
2.6.9 Room Transformer Outputs (“On with Generator” or “On Always”)
The room transformer outputs can be configured one of two ways:
Option A: The room power transformer is only energized when the generator is switched on. In this
configuration, 24 VDC and 110 / 220 VAC for the room inputs & outputs and 26 VAC for
collimator power will only be available when the generator is switched on.
To select this option, JW2 on the input distribution board must be jumpered from pins 1 to
2.
Option B: The room power transformer is energized at all times that the generator is connected to live
AC mains. In this configuration, 24 VDC and 110 / 220 VAC for the room inputs & outputs
and 26 VAC for collimator power will be available at all times that the generator is
connected to live AC mains.
To select this option, JW2 on the input distribution board must be jumpered from pins 2 to
3.
®
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER 2 (LSS2) / DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 (DSS2)
NOTE: BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
WITH THE LOW SPEED STARTER 2 OR DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 SET-UP.
ALL SAFETY PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE FOLLOWED
BEFORE COMMENCING WITH ANY WORK ON THE GENERATOR.
Figure 2-11: Subassembly part number & tab number location
This section contains information regarding the setup of the DIP-switches on the LSS2/DSS2 board and
procedure for selecting the tube type (housing) on the generator.
The LSS2/DSS2 board P/N 90313203 or 90313204 is mounted to a metal plate containing the shift
capacitors. The LSS2/DSS2 board together with the shift capacitors compose what is referred to as the
LSS2/DSS2 assembly. The LSS2 assembly consists of part numbers 905135-XX and 908025-XX, where
XX is either tab -41 or -43. The DSS2 assembly consists of part numbers 904925-XX and 908022-XX,
where XX is either tab -21, -23, or -24. The different tabs correspond with different shift capacitors. The
assembly and tab numbers are located on a label beneath the starter board as shown in figure 2-11.
The function of the LSS2/DSS2 assembly is to provide the optimal anode rotation during exposures. The
LSS2/DSS2 board can operate in legacy mode or CAN bus mode. The assembly and board part numbers
determine the mode of operation. Generators with PWBA 90313204 mounted to assembly 905135-XX or
904925-XX are enabled for legacy mode. Generators with PWBA 90313203 mounted to assembly
908022-XX or 908025-XX are enabled for CAN bus mode.
In legacy mode, DIP-switches SW1 (tube 1) and SW2 (tube 2) are configured for the tube type (housing),
DIP-switch SW3 for the shift capacitors and line input voltage, and DIP-switch SW8 for legacy mode
operation. Verify the ribbon cable is connected to J1 on the LSS2/DSS2 board and to J2 on the Generator
Control Board for legacy mode.
®
2.7.0 LOW SPEED STARTER 2 (LSS2) / DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 (DSS2) (CONT)
In CAN Bus mode, the tube type (housing) is selected by using a membrane console or GenWeb™. DIP-
switch SW3 is configured for the shift capacitors, and DIP-switch SW8 is configured for CAN Bus mode
operation. The LSS2/DSS2 board will automatically detect the line input voltage (400 VAC or 480 VAC) in
CAN Bus mode. Verify the ribbon cable is disconnected from J1, the 12VDC power cable is connected to
J8, and the CAN Bus cables are connected to J4 and J5.
WARNING: SWITCHES SW3 AND SW8 ARE FACTORY CONFIGURED AND ADJUSTMENT IS
NOT REQUIRED. INCORRECT SWITCH SETTINGS ON SW3 AND SW8 MAY
DAMAGE THE X-RAY TUBE.
2.7.1 LSS2/DSS2 Board Switch Settings
The following tables outline the DIP-switch settings for the different LSS2/DSS2 boards and assemblies.
Match the assembly number and the LSS2/DSS2 PWBA part number to one of the following tables. Use
the tables below to verify and if required, configure the DIP-switches. The DIP-switches on the
LSS2/DSS2 board must be properly configured for the anode of the X-ray tube to reach its optimal speed.
Tables 1 and 2 outline the switch settings for the LSS2 assemblies.
Table 1:
LSS2 Assembly 905135-XX with PWBA 903132-04 (Legacy Mode)
Tube Stator
Subassembly Switch
Switch Switch
Tab Number Settings for SW8
Settings for SW3 Configuration
(Configured for
for
905135-XX Legacy Mode)
SW1 & SW2
Switches 1-7 on Refer to section

SW3 are factory 2.7.2 to configure
-41 configured. switches SW1
and SW2 for the
Switch 8 on tube housing
(Refer to section 2.7.5) SW3 is sets for (Refer to section 2.7.8) type.
the line input
voltage.
OFF = 400 VAC

-43 ON = 480 VAC
Refer to section 2.7.5) (Refer to section

2.7.6)
®
2.7.1 LSS2/DSS2 Board Switch Settings (Cont)
Table 2:
LSS2 Assembly 908025-XX with PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus Mode)
Subassembly Switch
Tab Number Switch Settings for SW8 Tube Stator
Settings for SW3 (Configured for CAN Configuration
908025-XX Bus mode)
Refer to section
-41 2.7.3 if using
GenWeb™ to select
the tube housing
(Refer to section 2.7.5 and 2.7.7) type number.
(Refer to section 2.7.9)
Refer to section
2.7.4 if using a
-43 Membrane Console
to select the tube
(Refer to section 2.7.5 and 2.7.7) housing type
number.
Tables 3 and 4 outline the switch settings for the DSS2 assemblies.
Table 3:
DSS2 Assembly 904925-XX with PWBA 90313204 (Legacy Mode)
Tube Stator
Subassembly Switch
Switch
Tab Number Switch Settings for SW8
Configuration
Settings for SW3 (Configured for
for SW1 &
904925-XX Legacy mode)
SW2
Switches 1-7 on Refer to section

SW3 are factory 2.7.2 to
-21
configured. configure
switches SW1
Switch 8 on SW3 and SW2 for the
sets the line Input (Refer to section 2.7.8) tube housing
Voltage. type.
-23
OFF = 400 VAC
(Refer to section 2.7.5) ON = 480 VAC
(Refer to section
2.7.6)
-24
®
2.7.1 LSS2/DSS2 Board Switch Settings (Cont)
Table 4:
DSS2 Assembly 908022-XX with PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus Mode)
Subassembly Switch
Switch
Tab Number Settings for SW8 Tube Stator
Settings for SW3
(Configured for CAN Configuration
908022-XX Bus mode)
Refer to section 2.7.3

-21 if using GenWeb™ to
select the tube
(Refer to section 2.7.5 and 2.7.7) housing type number.
(Refer to section 2.7.9) Refer to section 2.7.4

if using a Membrane
-23
Console to select the
tube housing type
(Refer to section 2.7.5 and 2.7.7) number.
-24
(Refer to section 2.7.5 and 2.7.7)
SW1 and if applicable SW2, SW3, and SW8 on the LSS2/DSS2 board must be set correctly to
match the shift capacitors installed (subassembly tab number), and the specific configuration
of the generator in use. Failure to set these switches correctly may result in improper anode
RPM which may damage the X-ray tube.
2.7.2 Setting the Tube Stator Type for PWBA 90313204 in Legacy Mode
In legacy mode, the X-ray tube stator parameters are set on the LSS2/DSS2 board by configuring DIP-
switches SW1 and SW2. These switch settings determine the voltage, frequency, and timing for the
stator.
To configure DIP-switches SW1 and SW2 for the tube type (housing), perform the following steps:
1. Record the tube housing and insert of the X-ray tube.

2. Refer to the X-ray Tube Stator Compatibility Table supplement 746026.
3. Find the tube type (housing and insert) from the table of the X-ray Tube Stator Compatibility Table
supplement. If the desired tube insert, housing, and stator type are not available, please contact CPI
customer support for assistance.
4. Record the corresponding code switches for the tube stator type (housing).
®
5. For single tube generators, configure SW1 (switches 1 - 5) to the switch code for the selected tube
housing. For example, housing type Varian Sapphire with standard “R” stator and RAD-21 insert
requires code 10100 (Type 5). For Type 5, SW1-1 ON, SW1-2 OFF, SW1-3 ON, SW1-4 OFF, and
SW1-5 OFF as shown in figure 2-12).
Figure 2-12: SW1 Switch setting for Varian Sapphire tube

6. Additionally, SW1-6, SW1-7, and SW1-8 can give incremental increases in boost time over the
preselected values (i.e. to run an older tube with worn bearings). Refer to the table below for switch
settings and boost times.
Boost time extension
SW1-6 SW1-7 SW1-8 Time
1 0 0 100 ms
0 1 0 200 ms
1 1 0 300 ms
0 0 1 400 ms
1 0 1 500 ms
0 1 1 600 ms
1 1 1 700 ms
7. For single tube generators, configure DIP-switch SW2 to the same settings as DIP-switch SW1.
8. For 2 tube generators, repeat the steps above for DIP-switch SW2.
9. Follow the tube manufacturer’s recommendation for verifying the anode speed. If the tube
manufacturer does not supply recommendations or instructions to measure the anode speed, use a
suitable tachometer that is capable of measuring the anode rotation speed.
NOTE: IT IS CRITICAL THAT THE TUBE ANODE SPEED MEETS THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S
REQUIREMENTS. IF THE TUBE ANODE DOES NOT REACH THE REQUIRED ROTATION
SPEED, THE TUBE MAY EXPERIENCE PREMATURE FAILURE.
Additionally, the following options may be available to some service personnel to verify the anode rotation
speed:
1. An accelerometer and a spectrum analyzer.
2. An accelerometer and an oscilloscope with Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) feature.
®
2.7.3 Selecting the Tube Housing Type using GenWeb™
If operating in CAN Bus mode and using a touchscreen console or computer, use GenWeb™ to select the
tube (housing) type number from the generator. The tube (housing) type number determines the voltage,
frequency and timing for the stator.
To select the correct tube type number (housing) from the generator, perform the following steps:

4. Record the corresponding tube housing type number from the table. For example, the Tube Housing
type number for Canon (Toshiba) XH-157 XS-RB stator (20.2/28Ω) housing and E7254 insert is Type
21.
5. Open GenWeb™, enter the Tube Starter Settings screen and select the corresponding tube
housing type number recorded in step 4. Refer to the GenWeb™ User’s Guide supplement for
instructions on how to select the stator type number.
6. Click the apply button to save the changes.
Note: The parameters in the above picture are used as an example only.
7. Then open the Tube Setup & Calibration window from the Generator Configurations menu to
select the tube insert type of the X-ray tube.
8. For two tube generators, repeat the steps above for Tube 2.
suitable tachometer that is capable of measuring the anode rotation speed.
speed:

2. An accelerometer and an oscilloscope with Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) feature.
®
2.7.4 Selecting the Tube Housing Type using a Membrane Console
If using a membrane console and operating in CAN Bus mode, the console can be used to select the tube
(housing) type number from the generator. The tube (housing) type number determines the voltage,
frequency and timing for the stator
To select the correct tube type number (housing) from the generator with a membrane console, perform
the following steps:

4. Record the corresponding tube housing type number from the table. For example, the Tube Housing
type number for Canon (Toshiba) XH-157 XS-RB stator (20.2/28Ω) housing and E7254 insert is Type
21.
5. Enter the generator setup screen in the membrane console by selecting GEN CONFIGURATION.
6. Scroll to the next page by selecting >>.
7. Select TUBE STARTER SETUP.
8. Select the TUBE HOUSING TYPE by using the +/- buttons to select the tube housing number
recorded in step 4.
9. To increase the boost time from 100ms-700ms, select LS BOOST TIME EXT (s) and use the +/-
buttons.
®
2.7.4 Selecting the Tube Housing Type using a Membrane Console (Cont)
10. Enter the Tube Selection menu, and then select the tube insert type of the X-ray tube.
11. For two tube generators, select tube 2 and repeat the steps above for the second tube.
12. Return to the generator setup screen after completing the Tube Starter Setup.
suitable tachometer that is capable of measuring the anode rotation speed
speed:

2. An accelerometer and an oscilloscope with Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) feature
SW3 and SW8 on the Low Speed Starter 2 must be set correctly to match the shift capacitors
installed (subassembly tab number), and the specific configuration of the generator in use.
Failure to set these switches correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may
damage the X-ray tube.
2.7.5 Verifying the Subassembly tab number (Switch 1-7 on SW3)
WARNING: SWITCHES 1-7 ON SW3 ARE FACTORY CONFIGURED, AND ADJUSTMENT IS NOT
REQUIRED. INCORRECT SWITCH SETTINGS ON SW3 (SWITCHES 1-7) MAY
DAMAGE THE X-RAY TUBE.
The subassembly tab numbers used for the LSS2 are -41 and -43. The tab numbers used for the DSS2
are -21, -23, and -24. The different tab numbers identifies the shift capacitor values contained on each
subassembly. Switches 1-7 on SW3 are configured for the subassembly tab number. A label containing
the subassembly tab number is located at the bottom of the metal plate assembly as shown in figure 2-11.
2.7.6 Setting the Input Voltage for PWBA 90313204 (Legacy mode)
For LSS2/DSS2 PWBA 90313204 operating in legacy mode, switch SW3-8 must be manually set
according to the mains input voltage. If the mains input voltage is 400 VAC, set switch SW3-8 OFF. If the
mains input voltage is 480 VAC, set switch SW3-8 ON.
®
2.7.7 Setting the Input Voltage for PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus mode)
LSS2/DSS2 PWBA 90313203 supports CAN Bus mode only and therefore automatically detects the
mains input voltage of 400VAC or 480VAC.
2.7.8 Verifying Switch SW8 for PWBA 90313204 (Legacy mode)
WARNING: SWITCH SW8 IS FACTORY CONFIGURED AND ADJUSTMENT IS NOT REQUIRED.

INCORRECT SWITCH SETTINGS ON SW8 MAY DAMAGE THE X-RAY TUBE.
For LSS2/DSS2 board 90313204 operating in legacy mode, verify switches SW8-1 to SW8-7 are OFF,
and switch SW8-8 is ON.
2.7.9 Verifying Switch SW8 for PWBA 90313203 (CAN Bus mode)
WARNING: SWITCH SW8 IS FACTORY CONFIGURED AND ADJUSTMENT IS NOT REQUIRED.

INCORRECT SWITCH SETTINGS ON SW8 MAY DAMAGE THE X-RAY TUBE.
For LSS2/DSS2 board 90313203 operating in CAN Bus mode, verify switches SW8-1 to SW8-3 are OFF,
and switches SW8-4 to SW8-8 are ON. Refer to tables 2 and 4 for the switch settings of SW8.
2.7.10 Configuring the Generator for the Low Speed Starter 2 (LSS2)
For the LSS2 to function properly, verify from the Generator Tube Configuration menu in GenWeb™ or
from the membrane console that low speed is selected. Refer to chapter 3C, Programming the Generator,
for instructions on how to select low speed from the membrane console. Refer to the GenWeb™ User’s
Guide for instructions on how to select low speed from GenWeb™.
2.7.11 Low Speed Starter / Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table
See supplement 746026 for the various type housings and inserts compatible with the generator.
®
2.8.0 SAFETY LOCKOUT JUMPER / LOCAL ON & OFF SWITCHES / FACTORY DEFAULT JUMPER
A safety lockout jumper (JW26) is provided on the generator control board. When this jumper is in the
lockout position, the generator cannot be switched on from either the console or from the local ON switch
S2 (figure 2-13) on the generator control board. This prevents inadvertently switching on the generator
while it is being serviced. The lockout jumper must be in the normal position to allow the generator to be
switched on.
Figure 2-13 also shows the location of the factory defaults jumper JW27. This is described in chapter 6.
FACTORY Jumper NORM: Jumper

DEFAULT: pins 1-2 pins 1-2
NORM: Jumper LOCK: Jumper
pins 2-3 pins 2-3
1 2 3
1 2 3
JW27
JW26
OFF ON
OFF ON
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
IndicoIQ-Lockout.cdr
Figure 2-13: Location of lockout jumper and local ON/OFF switches
®
2.9.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS
It is strongly recommended that the following two interlocks be wired to the generator before preparing to
make any exposures:
Door Interlock
Use configuration A or configuration B as described below, depending on the desired mode of operation to
wire the room door interlock.
Configuration A
This configuration inhibits new exposures if the room door is open. This does not interrupt exposures in
progress when the door is opened.
The door interlock switch connects to the room door interlock inputs.
Configuration B
This configuration inhibits new exposures if the room door is open, and stops fluoro exposures if the room
door is opened during a fluoro exposure. A double-pole type room interlock switch is required for this
configuration.
One pole on the door interlock switch is connected to the room door interlock inputs on the room I/O
board. One side of the second pole on the door interlock switch connects to one terminal on the remote
fluoro exposure input, and one side of the fluoro footswitch connects to the second terminal on the remote
fluoro exposure input on the room I/O board. The free side of the room interlock switch and the free side
of the fluoro footswitch should be spliced together using a suitable insulated connector. This connects the
door interlock switch and the fluoro footswitch in series across the remote fluoro exposure input on the
room I/O board.
Refer to MD-0977 sheet 3 in chapter 9 of this manual for the drawings of both Configuration A and
Configuration B.
NOTE: THE INSTALLER MUST PROVIDE A VISUAL INDICATION OF THE ON/OFF STATE OF
EACH EXTERNAL DEVICE THAT CAN PREVENT THE GENERATOR FROM EMITTING
RADIATION, OR THAT CAN STOP THE GENERATOR FROM EMITTING RADIATION, OR BOTH.
X-Ray Tube Thermal Switch

The X-ray tube(s) thermal switch(s) connects to the generator for tube thermal protection. Refer to the
section X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections in this chapter for details.
2.10.0 INITIAL RUN-UP
Before continuing, check for internal evidence of shipping damage: Loose boards, hardware, connections,
damage to the HV module etc.
This section describes the procedure for initial power-on of the generator after initial installation.
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION

TRANSFORMER:
• IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE
SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER POINT
GROUND REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA CONFIGURED SECONDARY AS THERE IS NO
GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
• IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C. INPUT TO
THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND REFERENCED.
®
2.10.1 Initial Voltage Measurements
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR UNTIL REQUESTED TO DO SO. ONLY THE AC
MAINS TO THE GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME.
1. Verify that the AC mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to
the product ID label on the generator cabinet and to chapter 1C of this manual.
2. Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses inside the generator.
3. If the AC mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and / or
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL

CONTACT WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH.
MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT THROUGHOUT THE GENERATOR
EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE RECTIFIER BOARD,
PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD FOR UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER
HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS
ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
4. Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses on the mezzanine board or input
distribution board in the generator.
L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC. L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC.

5. Verify the above voltages are within specifications for the unit. For 3-phase units, the phase-to-
ground voltage should be as follows:
Mains voltage (phase-to-phase) Mains voltage (phase-to-ground)
400 VAC +/- 10%: 230 VAC +/- 10%
480 VAC +/- 10%: 277 VAC +/- 10%
Are phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground voltages within spec? Check ____
6. Switch OFF the AC mains supply to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any
of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, and then switch
ON the mains.
®
The Indico IQ X-ray generator does not require any internal tap changes to allow operation at 400 or
480 VAC (400-480 V units). The generator samples the AC line voltage and automatically configures
itself for 400 or 480 VAC operation.
For the LSS2 assembly 905135-XX with PWBA 90313204 and DSS2 assembly 904925-XX with
PWBA 90313204, the voltage setting of 400 VAC or 480 VAC must be manually configured on switch
8 of SW3. Refer to section 2.7.6 for information regarding the voltage settings on the LSS2/DSS2
board.
®
2.10.2 Initial Power Up
1. Switch on the generator via the console power ON switch.

2. Verify that the following LED’s are lit. The list below only shows conditions that are critical to initial
run-up of the generator. Refer to chapter 5 for a full list of diagnostic LED’s in the generator.
BOARD LED INDICATES

Rectifier board DS1, DS2 DC bus voltage present.
Rectifier board DS3 Rectified line voltage present.
Rectifier board DS4 +12 V present.
Input distribution board DS3 Rectified line voltage for switching power supply
present.
CPU board DS16 Flashes at 1 Hz rate to indicate that the CPU is
operational.
2.11.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION
Refer to chapter 3C, 3D, 3E and 3F (as applicable) for programming and calibration of the generator.
2.12.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION
It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the X-ray tubes connected (the
thermal interlocks, stator connections and high voltage cables). The generator should be able to complete
an X-ray tube calibration and seasoning cycle without any other equipment connected to the generator,
other than the basic interlocks as noted below. This will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of
the system is connected and tested later.
Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the thermal switch input for the active tube must be closed.
Before beginning X-ray tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly selected
and the tube parameters and generator limits should be programmed. Refer to TUBE FUNCTIONS MENU
and Gen Limits in chapter 3C.
It is recommended that the X-ray tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) during tube auto calibration,
particularly if the tube is new or has not been used for some time. Refer to chapter 6 for details.
WARNING: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
CAUTION: ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY
TUBE HAS BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE
FROM DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS.
The procedure for connecting a stand-alone computer or laptop running GenWeb is described in the
GenWeb user's guide accompanying this manual. Also refer to the GENERATOR SETUP,
PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION, chapter 3C of this manual.
®
2.12.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION (Cont)
Follow the steps below to perform the tube auto calibration using GenWeb™.
Step Action
1. Start GenWeb as described in chapter 3C. Then select Tube Functions, Calibration.
2. Select the tube insert to calibrate from the Tube 1 / Tube 2 drop-down list under the tube
calibration menu.
Tube 2 is only available on two tube units.
3. Select the desired focal spot to calibrate (Small or Large).
The small focus should be calibrated first.
4. Press and hold the X-ray exposure button on the console or use the optional hand switch to
begin the calibration procedure. The kV, mA and ms will be automatically selected by the
generator during auto calibration.
The Prep and X-ray indicators in GenWeb will light to indicate the Prep and X-ray exposure
status.
5. During calibration, GenWeb will display the following calibration parameters:
The tube type currently being calibrated, the filament current and a progress bar showing the
calibration progress, in percent of completion. The kV, mA, post-ms, HU and focus currently
being calibrated will be displayed under the tube calibration menu.
6. When the current calibration cycle is finished, repeat the previous steps to perform the
calibration on the other focal spot and / or on the second X-ray tube.
Should an error occur during auto calibration, an error message will be displayed. The generator
will then limit the tube’s operation to the range in which it was calibrated, thus allowing for
partial operation of the generator.
®
2.12.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION (Cont)
Follow the steps below to perform the tube auto calibration using the R & F Membrane console.
Step Action
1. Turn ON the console and enter the GEN CONFIGURATION menu screen described in chapter
3C.
2. Select the TUBE SELECTION option. Select which tube insert to calibrate, tube 1 or tube 2. Find
and select the desired tube insert by toggling the buttons on the bottom of the display.
Tube 2 is only available on two tube units.
3. When the desired tube has been selected, exit the TUBE SELECTION menu and return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu screen.
4. Select TUBE CALIBRATION from the menu screen.
5. Select the desired focal spot to calibrate (Small or Large).
Calibrate the small filament first.
6. Press and hold the X-ray exposure button on the console or use the optional hand switch to
begin the calibration procedure. The kV, mA and ms will be automatically selected by the
generator during auto calibration.
The Prep and X-ray indicators on the console will light to indicate the Prep and X-ray exposure
status.
7. During calibration, the membrane console will display the following calibration parameters:
The tube type currently being calibrated and the filament current.
8. When the current calibration cycle is finished, repeat the previous steps to perform the
calibration on the other focal spot and / or on the second X-ray tube.
Should an error occur during auto calibration, an error message will be displayed. The generator
will then limit the tube’s operation to the range in which it was calibrated, thus allowing for
partial operation of the generator.
®
2.13.0 FINAL CHECKS
The room interface connections may now be completed.

• Keep all wiring routed into the generator, i.e. to the room I/O board, AEC board and the digital I/O away
from high voltage areas. Cabling should be long enough to reach its destination in the generator with
enough slack to allow the cables to be properly routed, but no more than that. Keep all cabling away
from the auxiliary CPU board, input distribution board and input fuse mezzanine board.
• When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
• Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, kept away from high voltage areas,
and secured as necessary.
• Check that the access panel for the HV module and stator and thermal connections is correctly
installed.
• Check that the cable access covers on the rear of the generator are properly installed, positioned, and
tightened. There must be a minimum of 1 / 16” (1 mm) clearance above the cabling.
• Check that the mains cable clamp is tightened.
• Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.
• For units with the StarQ™ Touchscreen Console, perform a touchscreen calibration if the touch
function is not functioning properly. Refer to chapter 3C for the touchscreen calibration procedure.
NOTE: THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE
GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR ARE
ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.
®
2.14.0 REVISION HISTORY
The following table provides a revision history of the updates made to chapter 2.
Revision History for Chapter 2

Rev Description Date
L Updated section 2.7.0 with the following changes: Dec. 6, 2019
• Combined the DSS section 2.8.0 with LSS sections section 2.7.0.
• Removed Tabs -42 and -44 from the LSS2 assembly tables.
• Removed Tab -22 from the DSS2 assembly tables.
• Added Tab -24 to the DSS2 assembly tables.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc. Interfacing and Calibration 3
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING,

AEC / ABS SETUP & CALIBRATION AND
DAP / AK SETUP & CALIBRATION
3.0.0 INTRODUCTION
3.1.0 Purpose
This chapter describes the interfacing of room equipment to the room I/O board in the generator, and it
also describes the AEC, ABS and DAP / AK setup and programming of the generator. This chapter also
allows the installer to record the necessary information to complete the installation, as well as to record
the programming values.
This chapter contains the following sections.
Section Title
3A Setup information.
3B Room I/O board connections.
3C Programming the generator.
3D AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) setup & calibration.
3E ABS (Automatic Brightness Stabilization) setup & calibration.
3F DAP (Dose-Area Product) & AK (Air Kerma) setup and calibration.
®
3 Interfacing and Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank.)
®
CPI Canada Inc. Setup Information 3A
CHAPTER 3A
SETUP INFORMATION
CONTENTS:
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 3A-2

3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD .............................................................................................................................. 3A-2
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ............................................................................................................................................... 3A-2
3A.2.2 Mains Supply and Fusing ............................................................................................................................ 3A-3
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control........................................................................................................................ 3A-3
3A.2.4 Collimator .................................................................................................................................................... 3A-3
3A.2.5 Imaging System........................................................................................................................................... 3A-3
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 3A-4
3A.2.7 Table Type .................................................................................................................................................. 3A-4
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor .............................................................................................................................................. 3A-4
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment ................................................................................................................................. 3A-4
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes............................................................................................................................... 3A-4
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET ................................................................... 3A-5
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET .................................................................................. 3A-6
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ............................................................................................................ 3A-9
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-09 Rev. C Page 3A-1
3A Setup Information CPI Canada Inc.
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Please record the setup information for your installation on a copy of the tables in this section before
programming the generator. Enter the information appropriate for your generator model.
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Please enter the appropriate information.

1. TUBE 1 (typically over table X-ray tube)
a) Manufacturer:
Type:
b) Focal spot size: Large = Small =
c) kW: Large = Small =
d) Maximum kV:
e) Stator information:
f) Low / high / dual:
g) Stator delay: Seconds =
h) Start and run voltage, low speed: Start volts = Run volts =
i) Start and run voltage, high speed: Start volts = Run volts =
j) Brake voltage (high speed): Volts =
k) Maximum filament current: Large (A)= Small (A)=
l) Minimum filament current, stand-by: Large (A)= Small (A)=
m) Thermal switch included:
2. TUBE 2 (typically under table X-ray tube)

a) Manufacturer:
Type:
b) Focal spot size: Large = Small =
c) kW: Large = Small =
d) Maximum kV:
e) Type of stator:
f) Dual or single speed:
g) Stator delay: Seconds =
h) Start and run voltage, low speed: Start volts = Run volts =
i) Start and run voltage, high speed: Start volts = Run volts =
j) Brake voltage (high speed): Volts =
k) Maximum filament current: Large (A)= Small (A)=
l) Minimum filament current, stand-by: Large (A)= Small (A)=
m) Thermal switch included:
®
Page 3A-2 Rev. C Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-09
3A.2.2 Mains Supply and Fusing
Please record the following information regarding the AC mains voltage and current capacity. Confirm that the
information is appropriate for the generator according to the nameplate on the generator cabinet.
Line voltage: ________ VAC.
Line frequency: 50 Hz. 60 Hz. Line capacity: kVA.
Disconnect fuses (main): amps.
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control
AEC device):
AEC Channel Make of AEC device Type (Ion, PMT, photodiode, etc) Model
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Receptors with AEC:

Rec. 1: ___ yes Rec. 2: ___ yes Rec. 3: ___ yes
Rec. 4: ___ yes Rec. 5: ___ yes Rec. 6: ___ yes
3A.2.4 Collimator
Collimator 1 Collimator 2
Type: Type:
Compatible with X-ray tube: __ yes __no Compatible with X-ray tube: __ yes __no
Exposure interlock (dry contacts): __ yes __no Exposure interlock (dry contacts): __ yes __no
Tomo / stereo by-pass: __ yes __no Tomo / stereo by-pass: __ yes __no
3A.2.5 Imaging System
Conventional: Make & model:

Digital: Make & model:
Image intensifier (if applicable): ___ dual mode ___ tri-mode
24 hour supply: ___ yes ___ no
Image system park / position switch: ___ yes ___ no
Fluoro foot switch to initiate fluoro and spot exposure: ___ yes ___ no
Spot film advance delay: greater than 850 msec? ___ yes ___ no
Remote fluoro controller: ___ yes ___ no
AEC compensation for multi-spot SFD use: ___ yes ___ no
®
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly
Photo diode: _____ PMT: _____ Proportional DC: _____ Composite Video: _____
Make: ____________________________ Model: _____________
3A.2.7 Table Type
Table type: ____________________________________ Make / Model: _______________________
Grid: _________ Ratio: _________ L/P Inch: _________ Focus Distance: _________
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor
Type: ________________________________________
Grid: _________ Ratio: _________ L/P Inch: _________ Focus Distance: _________
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment
Receptor 1: _______________________
Receptor 2: _______________________
Receptor 3: _______________________
Receptor 4: _______________________
Receptor 5: _______________________
Receptor 6: _______________________
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes
®
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET
The information in this table is derived from the Tube Functions menus in GenWeb .
™
Note:
Generator model: ______________ Serial #: _____________
TUBE PARAMETERS TUBE 1 TUBE 2

DEFAULT SELECTED DEFAULT SELECTED
Tube type:
LS Max SF power (kW):
LS Max LF power (kW):
HS Max SF power (kW):
HS Max LF power (kW):
SF standby current (A):
SF maximum current (A):
MF standby current (A):
MF maximum current (A):
LF standby current (A):
LF maximum current (A):
Filament boost time (ms):
Filament preheat time (ms):
Tube speed:
Anode HU Warning (%):
Anode HU Limit (%):
Max tube voltage (kV):
Max SF mA:
Max MF mA:
GENERATOR LIMITS DEFAULT SELECTED
Max Gen kW:
Max Gen kV:
Min Gen kV:
Max Gen RAD mA:
Min Gen RAD mA:
Max Gen RAD mAs:
Min Gen RAD mAs:
Max Gen RAD ms:
Min Gen RAD ms:
®
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET

IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET
RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
Receptor
name:
Tube #:
Tomo:
Fluoro:
Serial:
Auto
Focus
Interface
Option:
Functional
Option:
Memory (Off /
On / Default)
RECEPTOR SYM
(Membrane cons)
Fluoro
Hangover (s):
Rad
Hangover (s):
Tomo Backup
Time (ms):
Last Image
Hold (ms)
AEC Channel:
AEC Backup Mode
(Fixed, mAs, ms):
AEC Backup
mAs:
AEC Backup
ms:
AEC Lock
Exposures:
®
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET (cont)
IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET (Receptor Defaults)

RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6
Technique (AEC,
mAs, ms):
Focus (Small,
Large, Micro):
Film Screen
(I, II, III):
Fields
(L, C, R):
Voltage (kV)
Current (mA)
Time (ms)
Density
®
®
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
™
The following worksheets are only applicable in the Advanced Configuration mode in the GenWeb I/O configuration menus.
Input Function Name Error message
INPUT 1 (default = Bucky
contacts 1)
contacts 3)
contacts 2)
INPUT 4
contacts 4)
INPUT 6
INPUT 7 (default = Multiple
spot exposure)
INPUT 8 (default =
Collimator interlock)
INPUT 9 (default = Room
door interlock)
INPUT 10 (default = I.I.
safety)
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13 (default =
Remote tomo select)
INPUT 14 (default = Mag
mode in 1)
mode in 2)
mode in 3)
HS INPUT 1 (default =
Remote prep)
®
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET (Cont)
Input Function Name Error message

Remote exp)
Remote fluoro)
Pulsed fluoro select)
High level select)
Tomo exp)
HS INPUT 7 (default = HS
input 7)
HS INPUT 8 (default = HS
input 8)
CONSOLE PREP
CONSOLE EXPOSE
CONSOLE FLOURO
Input Timeout De-bounce Min pulse Standby RadPrep GenRdy RadExp FluoroPrep FluoroExp
(s) (ms) width (ms)
INPUT 1 (def =
Bucky contacts 1)
INPUT 2 (def =
Bucky contacts 3)
INPUT 3 (def =
Bucky contacts 2)
INPUT 4
INPUT 5 (def =
Bucky contacts 4)
INPUT 6
®
Input Timeout De-bounce Min pulse Standby RadPrep GenRdy RadExp FluPrep FluExp
(s) (ms) width (ms)
INPUT 7 (def =
Multiple spot
exposure)
INPUT 8 (def =
Collimator interlock)
INPUT 9 (def =
Room door interlock)
INPUT 10 (def = I.I.
safety)
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13 (def =
Remote tomo select)
*INPUT 14 (def =
Mag mode in 1)
*INPUT 15 (def =
Mag mode in 2)
*INPUT 16 (default =
Mag mode in 3)
HS INPUT 1 (def =
Remote prep)
HS INPUT 2 (def =
Remote exp)
HS INPUT 3 (def =
Remote fluoro)
HS INPUT 4 (def =
Pulsed fluoro select)
HS INPUT 5 (def =
High level select)
HS INPUT 6 (def =
Tomo exp)
®
Input Timeout De-bounce Min pulse Standby RadPrep GenRdy RadExp FluPrep FluExp
(s) (ms) width (ms)
HS INPUT 7
HS INPUT 8
**CONSOLE PREP
**CONSOLE
EXPOSE
CONSOLE
FLOURO
*Note: If enabling more than one MAG input at the same time, the generator will enable the highest value MAG input. For example, if
enabling MAG 3 and MAG 2 at the same time, the generator will override MAG 2 and enable MAG 3.
**Note: Selecting any one of the Console Prep or Console Expose generator states would automatically enable all of the generator states
after applying settings.
®
Output Function Name On-time (ms) Delay (ms)

OUTPUT 1 (default =
Bucky 4 / tomo select)
OUTPUT 2 (default =
Bucky / tomo start)
OUTPUT 3 (default =
Bucky 2 select)
OUTPUT 4 (default =
Bucky 3 select)
OUTPUT 5 (default =
Room light)
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 7 (default =
Bucky 1 select)
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 11 (default =
Collimator bypass)
Mag mode 1)
Mag mode 2)
Mag mode 3)
X-RAY ON
Tube indicator
HS OUTPUT 1
HS OUTPUT 2
HS OUTPUT 3
HS OUTPUT 4
®
Output Function Name On-time (ms) Delay (ms)

HS OUTPUT 5
HS OUTPUT 6
HS OUTPUT 7
HS OUTPUT 8
Output Standby RadPrep GenRdy RadExp FluoroPrep FluoroExp

OUTPUT 1 (default
= Bucky 4 / tomo
select)
OUTPUT 2 (default
= Bucky / tomo start)
OUTPUT 3 (default
= Bucky 2 select)
OUTPUT 4 (default
= Bucky 3 select)
OUTPUT 5 (default
= Room light)
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 7 (default
= Bucky 1 select)
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 11 (default
= Collimator bypass)
OUTPUT 12 (default
= Mag mode 1)
OUTPUT 13 (default
= Mag mode 2)
OUTPUT 14 (default
= Mag mode 3)
®
Output Standby RadPrep GenRdy RadExp FluoroPrep FluoroExp

OUTPUT 16 (default
= Tube indicator
HS OUTPUT 1
HS OUTPUT 2
HS OUTPUT 3
HS OUTPUT 4
HS OUTPUT 5
HS OUTPUT 6
HS OUTPUT 7
HS OUTPUT 8
NOTE: AFTER PROGRAMMING AND SETTING UP THE RECEPTORS, PERFORM A GENERATOR BACK-UP TO SAVE THE
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION INFORMATION. ALSO SAVE THE INSTALLATION REPORTS AND PUT IN A SECURE
LOCATION FOR FUTURE REFERENCE IF NEEDED.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc. Room I/O Brd Connections 3B
CHAPTER 3B
ROOM I/O BOARD CONNECTIONS

CONTENTS:
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................... 3B-2
3B.2.0 ROOM I/O BOARD CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................ 3B-3
3B.2.1 Overview of Room I/O Board Connections ............................................................................................ 3B-3
3B.2.2 Room I/O Board Inputs .......................................................................................................................... 3B-3
3B.2.3 Room I/O Board Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 3B-9
3B.2.4 Room I/O Board Programming Jumpers ............................................................................................. 3B-15
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-10 Rev. F Page 3B-1
3B Room I/O Brd Connections CPI Canada Inc.
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the external interfaces to the room I/O board. Most of the room interface inputs can
be programmed via on-board jumpers to accept a dry contact input or a 24 VDC input. The room interface
outputs are a combination of dry contact outputs, outputs that can be programmed to be dry or to output 24
VDC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC, outputs that can be programmed to be dry or to output 24 VDC only or open-
collector outputs via U67 as shown on MD-0977 sheet 8.
All interfacing cables enter the generator at the back of the generator cabinet. Ferrules should be used on
the ends of all stranded wires that are connected to terminal connections in the generator. These must be
supplied by the installer.
Route the cables for the room I/O board into the generator via the cable access slots at the back of the
generator, above the external connections panel. The cables should be secured to the tie points on the
inside of the cable access slots using cable ties or equivalent fasteners. When finished connecting these
cables, gently lower the cable access covers onto the cables such as to reduce the cable access gap to
acceptable limits. There must be a minimum of 1 / 16” (1 mm) clearance above the cables. Lastly, tighten
the screws for the cable access covers.
WARNING: AC Line voltage is Present inside the generator at all times that the main disconnect is
switched on. For safety, the main disconnect should be switched off and locked out
while connecting room equipment.
WARNING: Activation of interlocks on the room I/O board may terminate exposures in progress.
NOTE: The installer must provide the necessary interfacing cables for wiring to the generator
inputs and outputs.
®
Page 3B-2 Rev. F Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-10
3B.2.0 ROOM I/O BOARD CONNECTIONS
3B.2.1 Overview of Room I/O Board Connections
Figure 3B-1 provides an overview of the connections to TB1, TB5, TB8, TB9, TB10, TB11, TB12, TB13,
TB14, TB15, TB16, TB17, TB18, and TB19 on the room I/O board.
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
110VAC TB1 220VAC

TB19 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
TB5 4 3 2 1
24VDC / GRD TB18 26VAC / GRD
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
TB8: OUTPUTS 1, 3, 4 AND 7

TB9: OUTPUTS 2, 5 AND 6
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB10: S.I.D. INPUT, INPUTS 8, 9 AND 10, OUTPUT 11
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(COLLIMATOR BYPASS)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB13: SYNC INPUT, INPUTS 7, 11, 12 AND 13,

OUTPUT 15
TB14: ALE OUT, FLUORO RESET IN, X-RAY DISABLE

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
AND INPUTS 14, 15 AND 16
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB12: OUTPUTS 12, 13, 14 AND 16

TB11: OUTPUTS 8, 9, AND 10
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 TB17: H.S. DIGITAL OUTPUTS
TB16: HS DIGITAL INPUTS
TB15: INPUTS 1 TO 6
IndicoIQ-Room IO.cdr
Figure 3B-1: Room I/O board connections (overview)
3B.2.2 Room I/O Board Inputs

®
The Indico IQ room I/O board has one analog input (the S.I.D. input) and multiple opto-coupled digital
inputs. Most of the digital inputs can be configured one of two ways:
• Dry position: The “dry” mode is active when the programming connector for the selected input is
jumpered from pins 2-3. Refer to figure 3B-3, MD-0977 in chapter 9 and to table 3B-1. In the “dry”
position, the selected digital input is not connected to an internal voltage source in the generator. An
external source will need to supply 24 VDC @ 20 mA across the selected input, with the polarity as per
table 3B-1. The input will be active when the opto-coupler on the room I/O board is energized, i.e. when
the external voltage source is active.
• Live position: In the “live” mode, the programming connector for the selected input is jumpered from
pins 1-2 and 3-4. Refer to figure 3B-3, MD-0977 in chapter 9, and to table 3B-1. In this position, the
opto-coupler on the room I/O board is connected to +24 VDC and a relay contact, transistor or other
low-impedance switching device (≤ 100 Ω, 20 mA current rating) must be connected across the
selected input. The input will be active when the switching device is ON, i.e. in the low impedance state.
If using a directional switching device such as a transistor, the polarity of the voltage seen by the
transistor must be observed. Refer to MD-0977 in chapter 9. The polarity of the voltage seen by the
switching device at each input can easily be determined from this schematic. Note that in the “live”
position the polarity of the voltage is opposite to that shown in table 3B-1, which shows the required
polarity of an external voltage source in the “dry” position.
Refer to table 3B-2, this shows which programming connector is associated with each input. To program an
input for the “dry” mode, ensure that the jumper is connected from pin 2 to 3, and to program an input for
the “live” mode, ensure that the jumpers are connected from pins 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 on the associated
programming connector.
®
3B.2.2 Room I/O Board Inputs (Cont)
Any jumpers that are removed to reconfigure the room I/O board inputs should be set aside such that they
are available for future use, if required.
Most of the inputs have factory-default functions assigned to them. These inputs can be reprogrammed by
the installer, if desired, as described in chapter 3C.
®
NOTE: Indico IQ X-ray generators are shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry
contact inputs.
NOTE: If the optically coupled inputs on MD-0977 sheets 1 to 3 are used in the “dry” contact
position, ensure that the voltage on either side of the jumper block pins (2 or 3) to the
generator ground does not exceed 48 volts.
TABLE 3B-1
ROOM I/O BOARD INPUTS
CONNECTION FUNCTION INPUT TYPE
TB10-1 S.I.D. input (shield) Ground
TB10-2 S.I.D. input (0 to 1000 ohms, +) Analog input Jumper JW53
TB10-3 S.I.D. input (0 to 1000 ohms, -) Analog input
If installed
(default
position),
allows a
potentiometer
to be
connected to
the inputs.
or
If removed,
allows a
voltage to be
applied to the
inputs.
TB10-4 Input 10 (default = I.I. safety) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
(+ if applying 24 VDC in dry position) VDC).
TB10-5 Input 10 (default = I.I. safety)
(- if applying 24 VDC in dry position)
TB10-6 Input 9 (default = room door interlock) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB10-7 Input 9 (default = room door interlock)
TB10-8 Input 8 (default = collimator interlock) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB10-9 Input 8 (default = collimator interlock)
TB10-10 No connection N/A
®

TB13-1 Input 13 (default = remote tomo select) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB13-2 Input 13 (default = remote tomo select)
TB13-3 Input 7 (default = multiple spot exposure) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB13-4 Input 7 (default = multiple spot exposure)
TB13-5 Input 11 (+ if applying 24 VDC in dry position) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB13-6 Input 11 (- if applying 24 VDC in dry position) VDC).
TB13-9 Sync input (+ if applying 24 VDC in dry position) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB13-10 Sync input (- if applying 24 VDC in dry position) VDC).
TB14-3 Fluoro timer reset (+ if applying 24 VDC in dry Jumper configurable (dry or 24
position) VDC).
TB14-4 Fluoro timer reset (- if applying 24 VDC in dry
position)
TB14-5 X-ray disable (+ if applying 24 VDC in dry position) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB14-6 X-ray disable (- if applying 24 VDC in dry position) VDC).
TB14-7 Input 14 (default = mag mode input 1) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB14-8 Input 14 (default = mag mode input 1)
TB15-1 Input 1 (default = Bucky 1 contacts) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB15-2 Input 1 (default = Bucky 1 contacts)
®

TB16-1 HS input 1 (default = remote prep) Requires dry contact closure.
JW52
TB16-2 HS input 2 (default = remote radiographic exposure) Requires dry contact closure.
JWW51
TB16-3 HS input 3 (default = remote fluoro exposure) Requires dry contact closure.
JW50
TB16-4 HS input 4 (default = pulsed fluoro select) Requires dry contact closure.
JW49
TB16-5 HS input 5 (default = high-level fluoro select) Requires dry contact closure.
JW47
TB16-6 HS input 6 (default = tomo exposure) Requires dry contact closure.
JW48
TB16-7 HS input 7 Requires dry contact closure.
JW45
TB16-8 HS input 8 Requires dry contact closure.
JW46
TB16-9 Ground N/A
TB16-10 Ground N/A
TB16-11 Ground N/A
TB16-12 Ground N/A
Note: Jumpers JW45-JW52 are removed from the Room I/O board at the factory before shipping. The
removed jumpers are included with the generator. Do not discard these jumpers, keep them in a
place where they can be easily access if the Last Image Hold operation is required. If the Last
Image Hold operation is required for one of the HS inputs used as an exposure control input,
install the jumper to that input only.
®
TABLE 3B-2
ROOM I/O BOARD PROGRAMMING CONNECTORS
CONNECTION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR
TB10-4 Input 10 (default = I.I. safety) JW15
TB10-5 Input 10 (default = I.I. safety)
TB10-6 Input 9 (default = room door interlock) JW44
TB10-7 Input 9 (default = room door interlock)
TB10-8 Input 8 (default = collimator interlock) JW14
TB10-9 Input 8 (default = collimator interlock)
TB13-1 Input 13 (default = remote tomo select) JW29

TB13-2 Input 13 (default = remote tomo select)
TB13-3 Input 7 (default = multiple spot exposure) JW28
TB13-4 Input 7 (default = multiple spot exposure)
TB13-5 Input 11 JW27
TB13-6 Input 11
TB13-8 Input 12
TB13-9 Sync input
N/A
TB13-10 Sync input
TB14-3 Fluoro timer reset JW34

TB14-4 Fluoro timer reset
TB14-5 X-ray disable JW33
TB14-6 X-ray disable
TB14-7 Input 14 (default = mag mode input 1) JW32
®
CONNECTION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING CONNECTOR

TB15-1 Input 1 (default = Bucky 1 contacts) JW43

TB15-9 Input 4 JW39
TB15-10 Input 4
TB15-12 Input 6
®
3B.2.3 Room I/O Board Outputs
®
The Indico IQ room I/O board has a variety of outputs. The majority of these are relay driven outputs that
can be configured one of two ways:
• Dry contact position: The “dry contact” mode is active when the programming connector for the selected
output is jumpered from pins 4-6 for JW1 to JW5 and from pins 2-3 for JW19, JW21, JW23 and JW24.
Refer to figure 3B-3, MD-0977 in chapter 9, and to tables 3B-3 and 3B3-4. In the “dry contact” position,
the selected output will be a dry relay contact output. Note the maximum voltage that can be applied to
the room I/O board outputs from an external source in the dry contact mode, i.e. if the relay contacts are
used to switch external power. The outputs that can be configured for 24 VDC / 110 VAC / 220 VAC are
rated for voltages up to 220 VAC, a couple of other outputs are rated up to 220 VAC and the remaining
outputs have a maximum rating of 48 VAC / DC. Refer to table 3B-4.
• Live contact position: In the “live contact” mode, the programming connector for the selected output is
jumpered from pins 6-8 for JW1 to JW5 and from pins 1-2 and 3-4 for JW19, JW21, JW23 and JW24.
Refer to figure 3B-3, MD-0977 in chapter 9, and to tables 3B-3 and 3B3-4.
∗ For the outputs associated with JW19, JW21, JW23 and JW24, 24 VDC will be supplied when the
corresponding relay is closed in the “live contact” mode.
∗ For the outputs associated with JW1 to JW5, 24 VDC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC will be supplied when
the corresponding relay is closed in the “live contact” mode. The selection of 24 VDC, 110 VAC or
220 VAC is made by connecting a jumper from TB7 or TB20 to TB2, TB3 or TB4 as per table 3B-4.
Depending on the setting of JW2 on the input distribution board, 24 VDC and 110 / 220 VAC
may be available only when the generator is switched on, or 24 VDC and 110 / 220 VAC may
be available at all times that the generator is connected to live AC mains. Refer to MD-0975
(sheet 7) and to Room Transformer Outputs (“On with Generator” or “On Always”)
in chapter 2 for details.
∗ To supply power to a grounded load for the outputs associated with JW1 to JW5, use the “dry”
contacts position and connect the load to the normally open terminal on the relay i.e. to TB8-1 for
output 7.
The remaining relay-controlled outputs are via dry relay contacts. The ALE (maximum 30 VDC, 100 ma, at
output is via an opto-coupler. Outputs are also provided for a collimator lamp (26 VAC at TB18-1, 2) and
electric locks (24 VDC at TB19-1, 2).
WARNING: For LED base collimators, the installer must consult the documentation supplied with
the collimator before connecting to the power supply on the room I/O board. If
instruction are not followed, the LED light base collimator can suffer irreparable
damage.
The 24 VDC output on the room I/O board is sufficient to operate most LED light base collimators.
However, if the 24 VDC output is being used to its fullest capacity by other equipment, use an external
rectifier and capacitor (supplied by installer) to rectify the 26 VAC output on the room I/O board. The
capacitor must be large enough such that the rectified voltage does not drop below the required minimum
DC voltage of the collimator and not too large otherwise the 26 VAC fuse will fail due to the inrush. Do not
connect the 26 VAC output from the room I/O board directly to the input of a LED light base collimator
without first rectifying, due to the fact that the 0V on the room transformer is connected to chassis/earth
ground (Refer to Figure 3B-2 for explanation).
®
3B.2.3 Room I/O Board Outputs (Cont)
Figure 3B-2: Collimator short circuit diagram
Lastly, 110 VAC and 220 VAC are available at TB5 and TB1, respectively. Refer to table 3B-3 and MD-0977
for further information. The maximum load for the collimator lamp supply is 6.7 A, the maximum load
for the 24 VDC supply is 4 A and the maximum loading on the 110 VAC and 220 VAC supplies are
350 VA combined, i.e. 176 VA for the 110 VAC supply only, 220 VA for the 220 VAC supply only or
350 VA for any combination of loading on the 110 and 220 VAC supplies. Several of the relay-driven
outputs have R-C snubbers connected across the relay contacts to protect the contacts when driving
inductive loads. In some installations, the relay outputs may drive opto-couplers or other low current
devices. The leakage current through the R-C snubber, when used with AC sources, may be sufficient to
energize the external input. If this is the case, the snubber on the room I/O board will need to be disabled.
This is done by removing the jumper that is in series with the R-C snubber circuit. Table 3B-5 shows the
jumper to be removed for each output that is fitted with an R-C snubber across the relay contacts.
Even though R-C snubbers are fitted to most outputs, it is strongly recommended that clamping / recovery
diodes be used on inductive devices such as relays, etc that are connected to the room I/O board.
The internal voltage sources on the room I/O board are not compatible with fluorescent lamps, which have high
starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes. Also, some inductive loads may cause
difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans and solenoids).
Any jumpers that are removed to reconfigure the room I/O board outputs should be set aside such that they
are available for future use, if required.
®
®
NOTE: Indico IQ generators are shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry
contacts and JW19, JW21, JW23, and JW24 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.
Most of the outputs have factory-default functions assigned to them. These outputs can be reprogrammed
by the installer, if desired, as described in chapter 3C.
TABLE 3B-3
ROOM I/O BOARD OUTPUTS
CONNECTION FUNCTION OUTPUT TYPE
TB1-1 220 VAC * N/A
TB1-2 220 VAC * N/A
TB1-3 220 VAC * N/A
TB1-4 220 VAC * N/A
TB5-1 110 VAC * N/A

TB5-2 110 VAC * N/A
TB5-3 110 VAC * N/A
TB5-4 110 VAC * N/A
* The maximum loading on the 110 VAC and 220 VAC supplies is 350 VA combined,
i.e. 350 VA for the 110 VAC supply only, 350 VA for the 220 VAC supply only or 350
VA for any combination of loading on the 110 and 220 VAC supplies.
TB8-1 Output 7 (default = Bucky 1 select) Jumper configurable (dry or 24

TB8-2 Output 7 (default = Bucky 1 select) VDC / 110 VAC / 220 VAC).
TB8-9 Output 1 (default = Bucky 4 / tomo select) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB8-10 Output 1 (default = Bucky 4 / tomo select) VDC / 110 VAC / 220 VAC).
TB9-1 Output 6 (form C relay, normally open contacts) Dry contact only. Rated up to
TB9-2 Output 6 (form C relay, “common” contacts) 220 VAC.
TB9-3 Output 6 (form C relay, normally closed contacts)
TB9-5 Output 5 (default = room light) Dry contact only. Rated up to
TB9-6 Output 5 (default = room light) 220 VAC.
TB9-9 Output 2 (default = Bucky / tomo start) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB9-10 Output 2 (default = Bucky / tomo start) VDC / 110 VAC / 220 VAC).
®

TB10-11 Output 11 (Collimator bypass) Dry contact only. Rated up to
TB10-12 Output 11 (Collimator bypass) 48 VAC / DC, 60 W.
TB11-1 Output 8 (form C relay, normally open contacts) Jumper configurable (dry or 24
TB11-2 Output 8 (“common” [dry] or ground [live 24 VDC]) VDC). Rated up to 48 VAC /
TB11-3 Output 8 (form C relay, normally closed contacts) DC, 60 W in dry position.
TB12-1 Output 16 (default = tube 1 output) Dry contact only. Rated up to

(form C relay, N.C. contacts) 48 VAC / DC, 60 W.
TB12-2 Output 16 (default = tube 2 output)
(form C relay, N.O. contacts)
TB12-3 Output 16 (default = common for the tube 1 / tube 2
outputs)
(form C relay, “common”)
TB12-6 Output 12 (default = mag mode 1) Dry contact only. Rated up to
TB12-7 Output 12 (default = mag mode 1) 48 VAC / DC, 60 W.
TB12-12 Ground N/A
TB13-11 X-ray on Jumper configurable (dry or 24

TB13-12 X-ray on VDC). Rated up to 48 VAC /
DC, 60 W in dry position.
TB14-1 ALE out Bidirectional opto-coupler /

TB14-2 ALE out transistor darlington pair
outputs
®

TB17-1 HS out 1 Open-collector digital outputs.
TB17-2 HS out 2 Maximum 500 mA per output,
TB17-3 HS out 3 to a maximum of 2 A with all
outputs combined, 50 V.
TB17-4 HS out 4
TB17-5 HS out 5
TB17-6 HS out 6
TB17-7 HS out 7
TB17-8 HS out 8
TB17-9 +24 VDC N/A
TB17-10 +24 VDC N/A
TB17-11 Free wheeling diode for driver U67 N/A
TB17-12 Ground N/A
TABLE 3B-4
CONFIGURING OUTPUTS FOR 24 VDC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC
CONNECTION PROG CONNECTOR TO OUTPUT 24 VDC, 110 VAC or 220 VAC
TB8-1 Output 7 (default = JW4 in “live” position Jumper from TB20-1 to TB2 for +24V, TB20-1 to
Bucky 1 select) TB3 for 110 VAC or TB20-1 to TB4 for 220 VAC.
TB8-2 Output 7 (default =
Bucky 1 select)
Bucky 2 select)
Bucky 3 select)
Bucky 1 / tomo select) TB3 for 110 VAC or TB7-5 to TB4 for 220 VAC.
TB8-10 Output 1 (default
= Bucky 1 / tomo select)
Bucky 1 / tomo start) TB3 for 110 VAC or TB20-3 to TB4 for 220 VAC
TB9-10 Output 2 (default
= Bucky 1 / tomo start)
The jumpers referenced in this table must be supplied by the installer. Use insulated wire in the range of
2 2
16 to 20 AWG / 1.30 mm to 0.52 mm . Strip both ends of each jumper wire approximately 1/4 inch (6
mm) and insert one end of the wire into the appropriate terminal on TB7 or TB20. Then connect the
other end of the jumper wire to any free terminal on TB2 for +24V, TB3 for 110 VAC or TB4 for 220 VAC.
®
TABLE 3B-5
JUMPERS TO REMOVE IN ORDER TO DISABLE R-C SNUBBERS
CONNECTION FUNCTION SERIES JUMPER FOR R-C
SNUBBER
TB8-1 Output 7 (default = Bucky 1 select) JW9
TB8-2 Output 7 (default = Bucky 1 select)
TB8-9 Output 1 (default = Bucky 1 / tomo select) JW6
TB8-10 Output 1 (default = Bucky 1 / tomo select)
TB9-1 Output 6 (form C relay, normally open contacts) JW13
TB9-2 Output 6 (form C relay, “common” contacts) N/A
TB9-3 Output 6 (form C relay, normally closed contacts) JW10
TB9-5 Output 5 (default = room light) JW12
TB9-6 Output 5 (default = room light)
TB9-9 Output 2 (default = Bucky / tomo start) JW11
TB9-10 Output 2 (default = Bucky / tomo start)
TB11-2 Output 8 (“common” [dry] or ground [live 24 VDC]) N/A
®
3B.2.4 Room I/O Board Programming Jumpers
Figure 3B-3 shows the locations of the room I/O connectors along with the jumpers used to program the
inputs and outputs.
Figure 3B-3: Room I/O board / programming jumpers
®
(This page left intentionally blank)
®
CPI Canada Inc. Programming the Generator 3C
CHAPTER 3C
PROGRAMMING THE GENERATOR

CONTENTS:
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 3C-2

3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode.................................................................................. 3C-2
3C.1.2 Membrane Console Software Compatibility .................................................................. 3C-3
3C.1.3 Membrane Console Software Restart ........................................................................... 3C-5
3C.2.0 MEMBRANE CONSOLE MENU STRUCTURE ................................................................. 3C-7
3C.3.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU.......................................................................................... 3C-11
3C.4.0 UTILITY MENU ................................................................................................................ 3C-12
3C.4.1 Setting Time and Date ................................................................................................. 3C-12
3C.4.2 Error Log ...................................................................................................................... 3C-12
3C.4.3 Statistics ...................................................................................................................... 3C-13
3C.4.4 Console ........................................................................................................................ 3C-14
3C.4.5 APR Editor ................................................................................................................... 3C-17
3C.5.0 GEN CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3C-18
3C.5.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup ....................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.5.2 Generator Limits .......................................................................................................... 3C-25
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup ............................................................................................................ 3C-27
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration.......................................................................................................... 3C-33
3C.5.5 AEC Setup ................................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration ........................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup and Calibration ....................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration .......................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.9 DAP Setup ................................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.10 AK Setup .................................................................................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.11 Generator License using Membrane Console ........................................................... 3C-40
3C.5.12 Tube Starter Setup .................................................................................................... 3C-41
3C.6.0 DATA LINK ...................................................................................................................... 3C-42
3C.7.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES ........................................................................... 3C-42
3C.7.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu ........................................................................................ 3C-43
3C.7.2 APR Editor ................................................................................................................... 3C-45
3C.7.3 APR Backup / Restore ................................................................................................. 3C-51
3C.7.4 Date / Time Setup ........................................................................................................ 3C-54
3C.7.5 Receptor Symbols ....................................................................................................... 3C-55
3C.7.6 Touchscreen Setup...................................................................................................... 3C-56
3C.7.7 Touchscreen Calibration .............................................................................................. 3C-66
3C.7.8 Data Link ...................................................................................................................... 3C-67
3C.7.9 Configuration Backup / Restore ................................................................................... 3C-68
3C.7.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore ................................................. 3C-71
3C.7.11 Generator License using Touchscreen...................................................................... 3C-72
®
3C Programming the Generator CPI Canada Inc.
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
If you are using a conventional operator control console (i.e. membrane console), the
™
generator may be programmed and calibrated via the control console or via GenWeb . When
using the console for programming and calibration, all programming / calibration menus are
displayed on the LCD display window on the console. The ten “soft key” buttons (1 to 10 in
figure 3C-1 below) are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select and
enter values in this section.
If using GenWeb to perform setup, programming and calibration of the Indico IQ X-ray
®
generator, refer to the GenWeb™ user's guide accompanying this manual.
NOTE: WHEN ADVANCE MODE IN GENWEB™ IS ENABLED, THE MEMBRANE

CONSOLE CANNOT BE USED FOR SET-UP WITHOUT FIRST DOING
FACTORY DEFAULT.
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode
This section applies to generators supplied with membrane console.
NOTE: SOME FUNCTIONS THAT ARE AVAILABLE IN GENWEB™ MAY NOT BE

ACCESSIBLE WHEN USING THE MEMBRANE CONSOLE.
To enter into the programming mode if using the membrane console follow the steps below.
Figure 3C-1: Programming/calibration mode reference
Use these steps to access the GENERATOR SETUP menu
Step Action
1. Start with the generator switched OFF.

2.
While pressing and holding the RESET button, press the generator POWER ON
button on the console.
3. When the generator has finished the startup sequence, enter the password by pressing
the button sequence [1] – [8] – [4] – [5].
4. The GENERATOR SETUP menu will be displayed next.
®
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode (Cont)
NOTE: THE VALUES AND SETTINGS OF THE SCREENSHOTS ON THE

MEMBRANE CONSOLE SHOWN IN THIS CHAPTER ARE FOR
ILLUSTRATION PURPOSES. THE ACTUAL VALUES AND SETTINGS
SHOULD BE SET ACCORDING TO YOUR SPECIFIC GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION AND SETUP REQUIREMENTS.
3C.1.2 Membrane Console Software Compatibility

When a membrane console is used, software compatibility is checked during power up. The
system will start-up if the software on the membrane console is compatible with the
generator. However, if the software is not compatible, the console will present a software
upgrade menu. See troubleshooting guide for details.
If an upgrade can be done, i.e. the software upgrade file is available, follow the menu shown
in the figures below to proceed with the software upgrade. The system will not start up using
the membrane console until the software is upgraded to the level that is compatible with the
generator software.
Note that a service password is required to access the membrane console software upgrade
menu. A utility software is also needed to be able to load the upgraded software file to the
membrane console. Refer to Chapter 6, Regular Maintenance - Console Firmware Upgrade
section for guidance on how to perform the software upgrade.
®
3C.1.2 Membrane Console Software Compatibility (Cont)
®
3C.1.3 Membrane Console Software Restart
Pressing the keys #2, #5 and #8 (see Figure 3C-1) causes the membrane console to go into
the software restart or reboot sequence. This is only accessible if the generator is not
performing a Rad or Fluoro exposure or executing the auto-calibration sequence. The
software restart is implemented to avoid cycling off the generator power from the console if
the user wants to enter into the programming or service menu on the console.
Powering down the generator by pressing the OFF ( ) button on the membrane console
forces the generator to go through the entire bus discharge and charge cycle, consequently
opening and closing the main contactor. The repeated off/on cycle is best avoided as
repeated cycling of the power can sometimes damage the power components on the
generator.
Note that the generator remains ON while the membrane console is rebooted using
this method. When the reboot is done, the generator and membrane console will re-
establish communication and the membrane console prompts the user for a password. By
entering the correct password, the user will be routed to the programming (service) mode.
Otherwise, the console will go into the operator (exposure) mode. See figure below for more
information.
®
®
3C.2.0 MEMBRANE CONSOLE MENU STRUCTURE
Figure 3C-2, sheet 1: Generator setup menus. This diagram is meant to show the general menu structure only.
®
3C.2.0 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont)
®
3C.2.0 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont)
®
®
3C.3.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU
The GENERATOR SETUP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
Overview of the functions available within each of the options in the GENERATOR SETUP
menu.
MENU SUBMENUS
UTILITY • SET TIME & DATE
• ERROR LOG
• STATISTICS
• CONSOLE
APR EDITOR Enables / disables changes to APR techniques.
DIAGNOSTICS For factory use only.
GEN CONFIGURATION • TUBE SELECTION
• GENERATOR LIMITS
• RECEPTOR SETUP
• I/O CONFIGURATION
• AEC SETUP
• AEC CALIBRATION
• FLUORO SETUP
• TUBE CALIBRATION
• DAP SETUP
• AK SETUP
• GEN. LICENSE
• TUBE STARTER SETUP
DATA LINK • UTILITY
• FIRMWARE UPDATE
®
The Utility function is not supported by Indico IQ at this
time. For Firmware Update, follow the instructions under
Console Firmware Upgrade in Chapter 6. Also check section
3C.1.2, Membrane Console Software Compatibility in this
chapter.
EXIT SETUP • Returns to the normal operating mode (the non setup /
programming mode).
®
3C.4.0 UTILITY MENU
The UTILITY menu presents the user with the selections shown below. These are described
in detail in this section.
* UTILITY *
SET TIME & DATE
ERROR LOG
STATISTICS
CONSOLE
EXIT
3C.4.1 Setting Time and Date

This procedure allows the time and date to be set, or to be changed.
The SET TIME & DATE menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* SET TIME & DATE *
YEAR: 2012 HOUR: 22
MONTH: 03 MIN: 02
DAY: 21 +
-
EXIT
Use these steps to set the time and date.

Step Action
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select the UTILITY menu.
2. From the UTILITY menu, select the SET TIME & DATE menu.
3. Select YEAR. Use the + or – buttons to set the year.
4 Select MONTH. Use the + or – buttons to set the month.
5. Select DAY. Use the + or – buttons to set the date.
6. Select HOUR. Use the + or – buttons to set the hour (in 24 hour format).
7. Select MIN. Use the + or – buttons to set the minutes.
8. Press EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3C.4.2 Error Log
This utility allows display of the error messages stored in the generator’s error log.
Parameters such as kV, mA, time, receptor, focus, technique selection, field, film screen and
fluoro parameters will be displayed simultaneously on the console. The error log storage limit
is 200 messages at which point the generator will overwrite the messages beginning with the
oldest.
®
3C.4.2 Error Log (Cont)
The ERROR LOG menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* ERROR LOG *
ERROR # …..1.. OF 3 10-16-2011/10:08
E902: FACTORY DEFAULT SWITCH
CLOSED +
-
EXIT
Use these steps to review the error log.

Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu, select ERROR LOG.
2. Select ERROR # and use the + or - buttons to scroll through the error log.
The error code, error message, date and time of the error will be displayed in the
LCD window, and the associated parameters will be displayed on the console LED
displays.
If the error message length exceeds the pop-up window, the entire message can
be viewed using buttons #5 and #6 (see Figure 3C-1 for button locations).
Symbols (▲ & ▼) will also be visible beside buttons #5 & #6 to indicate that the
buttons now functions as scrollbars.
3C.4.3 Statistics
This utility shows the tube exposure count, accumulated fluoro hours, and the
accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows resetting of the tube 1 /
tube 2 exposure counters and the fluoro hours timer.
The STATISTICS menu for the membrane console is shown below.

* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP: 46 RESET TUBE 1 EXP
TUBE 2 EXP: 12 RESET TUBE 2 EXP
FLUORO HOURS: 0 RESET FLUORO HOURS
TOTAL EXP: 58
EXIT
NOTE: REFERENCES TO TUBE 2 AND FLUORO APPLY TO TWO-TUBE UNITS AND

FLUOROSCOPIC UNITS ONLY, RESPECTIVELY.
®
3C.4.3 Statistics (Cont)
Use these steps to view the generator statistics.

Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu, select STATISTICS.
2. The STATISTICS menu displays exposure data, and allows the exposure counters
and the fluoro timer to be reset as described below:
• The TUBE 1 EXP and TUBE 2 EXP counters display the tube 1 and tube 2
exposure count made since these counters were last reset.
• The FLUORO HOURS timer displays the fluoro hours accumulated since this
timer was last reset.
• TOTAL EXP displays the total rad exposure count. This is not resettable *
• Select RESET TUBE 1 EXP to reset the tube 1 exposure counter, and select
RESET TUBE 2 EXP to reset the tube 2 exposure counter.
• Select RESET FLUORO HOURS to reset the fluoro exposure timer.
* The subject exposure counter is reset when the factory defaults are reset.
Therefore, the “total exposure” count should be recorded before resetting the factory
defaults.
3C.4.4 Console
The CONSOLE menus allow setting of specific operating features to suit

operator preferences.
The CONSOLE menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* CONSOLE *
SLOW KEY REPEAT: 200MS LCD SCREEN
MED. KEY REPEAT: 150MS APR MODE: NO
FAST KEY REPEAT: 75MS +
-
EXIT >>
* CONSOLE *
KEY CLICK VOLUME: 8
WARNING VOLUME: 8
EXP. INDICATOR VOL: 8 +
FLUORO BEEP: REPEAT -
<< >>
®
3C.4.4 Console (Cont)
* CONSOLE *
LOGO: YES
LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS: NO +
PASSWORD -
<< >>
* CONSOLE *
2 2
DAP UNITS: mGycm , mGycm /s
AK/DAP PRINTER: OFF
+
-
<< RETURN
Definitions of CONSOLE setup items.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
SLOW KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected
REPEAT key is pressed for the first 5 counts.
MED. KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected
REPEAT key is pressed for the next 5 counts.
FAST KEY Determines the speed at which displays change while the selected
REPEAT key is pressed after 10 counts.
LCD SCREEN Toggles between normal and reverse video for the LCD display.
APR MODE Enables / disables the ability of the operator to select the technique
(AEC, mAs, mA/ms) in APR mode.
NO: Allows the operator to select an APR view, and still
have the ability to manually select receptors, focus,
technique, film screen, AEC fields, etc.
YES: Allows the operator to select all of the above EXCEPT
the technique selection (AEC, mAs, mA/ms) i.e. this
disables the ability to select AEC, mAs, mA/ms in APR
mode.
AEC, mAs, mA/ms changes can only be made by
selecting an APR technique that has been
programmed to the desired technique.
KEY CLICK Sets the speaker loudness in the range 1 to 10 for the key click
VOLUME function. This applies when an active key (button) on the console is
pressed.
WARNING Sets the speaker loudness in the range 1 to 10 for the warning
VOLUME function. This applies when a warning or error message is reported.
EXP. INDICATOR Sets the speaker loudness in the range 1 to 10 for the exposure
VOL indicator function. This applies when making a rad or fluoro exposure.
®
FLUORO BEEP Sets the audio indicator mode during
fluoroscopy.
SINGLE: The exposure indicator beeps once at the start of a
fluoro exposure, and once when the fluoro exposure
ends.
REPEAT: The exposure indicator beeps continuously during a
fluoro exposure, at one second intervals.
LOGO YES: The predefined logo is displayed briefly after the
generator is switched on.
NO: The logo is not displayed.
LANGUAGE Selects the language for status and error messages.
LOAD CONSOLE YES: Initializes the console CPU’s NVRAM to the factory-
DEFAULTS default settings when the generator is switched ON.
This restores the factory defaults for the APR and the
console settings.
NO: The NVRAM is not reset when the generator is
switched on.
The normal setting for this function is NO. Do not set to YES
unless you intend to restore the console factory defaults.
PASSWORD Allows the Programming Mode password to be changed.
µGym ,
2
DAP UNITS The DAP / DAP rate value will display as:
µGym /s:
2
• Standard resolution DAP chamber:
123456.7 µGym , 12345.67 µGym /s.
2 2
• High resolution DAP chamber:

123456.78 µGym , 1234.567 µGym /s.
2 2
2
mGycm , The DAP / DAP rate value will display as:
2
mGycm /s: • Standard resolution DAP chamber:
2 2
1234567 mGycm , 123456.7 mGycm /s.
• High resolution DAP chamber:
2 2
1234567.8 mGycm , 12345.67 mGycm /s.
High resolution DAP measurements are only
available if a high resolution DAP chamber is
used and if it is properly selected as described in
chapter 3F.
AK/DAP PRINTER OFF: AK/DAP Print function will be disabled.
DPU414: This printer type will be enabled.
SLP200: This printer type will be enabled.
®

Use these steps to set the console parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action
1. From the UTILITY menu, select CONSOLE.
2. Select SLOW KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “slow key repeat”
time.
3. Select MED. KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “med. key repeat” time.
4. Select FAST KEY REPEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the “fast key repeat” time.
5. Select LCD SCREEN. Toggle the button to select normal or reverse video.
6. Select APR MODE. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
7. Press >>.
8. Select KEY CLICK VOLUME. Use the + or – buttons to set the key click loudness.
9. Select WARNING VOLUME. Use the + or – buttons to set the warning and error
indicator loudness.
10. Select EXP. INDICATOR VOL. Use the + or – buttons to set the rad and fluoro
exposure indicator loudness.
11. Select FLUORO BEEP. Toggle the button to select SINGLE or REPEAT.
12. Press >>.
13. Select LOGO. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
14. Select LANGUAGE. Toggle the button to select the desired language.
15. Select LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
16. Select PASSWORD. Enter and then re-enter a new password as prompted.
BE SURE TO RECORD THE NEW PASSWORD BEFORE CHANGING THE
DEFAULT PASSWORD. IF THE NEW PASSWORD IS SUBSEQUENTLY LOST,
PLEASE CONSULT THE FACTORY.
17. Press >>.
2 2
18. Select DAP UNITS. Toggle the selection button to select mGycm , mGycm /s or
µGym , µGym /s.
2 2
19. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the UTILITY menu.
20. Press EXIT to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
3C.4.5 APR Editor
The APR EDITOR enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save
changes to APR techniques.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu showing the APR EDITOR is shown below.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY APR EDITOR: ENABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
®
3C.4.5 APR Editor (Cont)
No equivalent function exists in GenWeb™, as the APR EDITOR affects the console
operation only.
Definition of the APR EDITOR function.

APR EDITOR Enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save
changes to APR techniques.
ENABLED: Allows the operator to change the default APR
technique(s), and then save the changes to memory.
The APR will subsequently default to the changed
technique.
DISABLED: Allows temporary editing of APR technique(s), but does
not allow the changes to be saved to memory. The APR
will always default to the original technique when the
generator is switched OFF and then ON again.
The generator stores the last APR EDITOR setting before being
switched off. If the APR editor was previously ENABLED, APR
changes may subsequently be made and then saved in normal
operating mode without the need to manually set the APR editor to
ENABLED. To disable APR technique changes, the APR editor
must be set to DISABLED.
Use these steps to set the APR EDITOR. Refer to the definition in the previous table.
Step Action
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select APR EDITOR.
2. Toggle the button to select ENABLED or DISABLED.
3C.5.0 GEN CONFIGURATION
The GEN CONFIGURATION menus present the user with the selections shown below.
These are described in detail in this section.
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP FLUORO SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION TUBE CALIBRATION
EXIT >>
®
3C.5.0 GEN CONFIGURATION (Cont)
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
DAP SETUP
AK SETUP
GEN. LICENSE
TUBE STARTER SETUP
<<
* TUBE 1 – TUBE STARTER SETUP *

TUBE HOUSING TYPE:
HS BOOST TIME EXT (s)
LS BOOST TIME EXT (s)
EXIT
3C.5.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup
The TUBE SELECTION function allows the desired tube type to be selected and assigned to
tube 1 and tube 2, and it also allows setting of tube-related parameters and limits.
®
The Indico IQ membrane consoles have a preloaded library of compatible X-ray tubes. In
addition to the preloaded tube files, various user-selectable tubes can be uploaded to the
console.
If no user-selectable tube files have been uploaded, the first page of the tube selection
screens will be titled DEFAULT TUBE X SEL, where X is 1 or 2 - corresponding to TUBE 1
or TUBE 2. This page will list the first eight preloaded tubes. Additional preloaded tube types
will be displayed on subsequent pages, accessible by selecting the >> button.
• If user-selectable tube files have been uploaded, the first page of the tube selection
screens will be titled USER TUBE X SELECT, where X is 1 or 2 - corresponding to TUBE
1 or TUBE 2. This page will contain a maximum of eight tubes, which is the maximum
number of user-selectable tube files that can be uploaded to the console. Preloaded tube
types will be listed on subsequent pages, accessible by selecting the >> button.
• If user-selectable tube file(s) are uploaded to the console and if these file(s) are of a
newer revision than existing preloaded tube files, the latest user-uploaded files will not
overwrite similar (possibly older) files on the DEFAULT TUBE X SEL pages. In this case,
it is highly recommended that the latest revision of the tube file be used as this will
contain updated tube data.
• The actual tube file layout and the number of TUBE SELECTION screens may vary from
the illustrations below.
®
3C.5.1 Tube Selection / Tube Setup (Cont)

The TUBE SELECTION menus for the membrane console are shown below.
The menu below is only available on two-tube units. The remaining menus apply to one-tube
and two-tube units.
* TUBE SELECTION *
TUBE 1
TUBE 2
EXIT
The menu below will only be displayed if user-selectable tubes have been downloaded.
* USER TUBE 1 SEL *
USER DOWNLOADED TUBES ARE DISPLAYED

ON THIS SCREEN (IF APPLICABLE)
EXIT >>
The menus below display the factory-default tube selections.

* DEFAULT TUBE 1 SEL *
A192B 0.6/1.2 G256 0.6/1.0
A256 0.6/1.0 G292 0.6/1.2
A292 0.6/1.2 G1082 0.3/1.0
A272 0.3/0.6 RAD8 1.0/2.0
<< >>

RAD13 1.0/2.0 RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2 RAD60 0.6/1.2
RAD21 0.6/1.2 RAD68 1.0/2.0
RAD44 1.0/2.0 RAD74 0.6/1.5
<< >>

RAD92 0.6/1.2 E7255X 0.6/1.2
E7239X 1.0/2.0 MX75 1.0/2.0
E7242X 0.6/1.5 MX100 0.6/1.25
E7252X 0.6/1.2 RO1750 0.6/1.3
<< >>
®

PX1312 0.6/1.2 X50AH 1.2/2.0
PX1429 0.6/1.2 RTM78HS 0.6/1.2
PX1436 0.6/1.2 RTM90HS 0.6/1.0
X40 1.0/2.0 RTM90HS 0.6/1.2
<< >>

RTM90HS 0.6/1.5
RTM92HS 1.0/2.0
RTM101HS .6/1.2
RTM101HS 0.6/1.3
<< RETURN
The menus showing the tube limits and associated parameters for the membrane
console are shown below.
* TUBE 1: A192B 0.6/1.2 12° REV 1.3*
TUBE SPEED: DUAL MAX SF KW HS: 39.6
MAX SF KW LS: 24.9 MAX LF KW HS: 96.0
MAX LF KW LS: 62.5 +
MAX KV: 150 -
RETURN >>
* TUBE 1: A192B 0.6/1.2 12° REV 1.3*

MAX SF MA: 320
ANODE HU WARNING: 80%
ANODE HU LIMIT: 90% +
-
<< >>
* TUBE 1: A192B 0.6/1.2 12° REV 1.3*

SF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL BOOST: 200MS
LF STANDBY: 2.5A FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
SF MAX: 5.4A +
LF MAX: 5.4A -
<< RETURN
®
Definitions of TUBE SELECTION menu items.

TUBE SPEED Selects the dual speed starter mode (dual speed starter option only).
LOW: Low speed mode only is enabled.
HIGH: High speed mode only is enabled.
DUAL: Low and high-speed modes are both enabled. The
generator will determine when to switch modes,
based on exposure parameters and tube rating.
MAX SF KW LS Sets the maximum small focus low speed kW limit.
MAX LF KW LS Sets the maximum large focus low speed kW limit.
MAX KV: Sets the maximum kV allowed for the selected tube.
MAX SF KW HS Sets the maximum small focus high speed kW limit.
MAX LF KW HS Sets the maximum large focus high speed kW limit.
MAX SF MA Sets the maximum mA in small focus. This should be set as low as
possible to prevent focal spot track wear and focal spot blooming.
ANODE HU Sets the limit at which the anode heat-warning message is displayed.
WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT Sets the limit at which exposures will be inhibited. If the present
anode heating is under the threshold, the exposure will be inhibited
if the next exposure is calculated to exceed the anode HU limit.
SF STANDBY Sets the small focus standby filament current. The required value
should be obtained from the X-ray tube data sheets.
LF STANDBY As above but for large focus.
SF MAX Sets the small focus maximum filament current.
LF MAX As above but for large focus.
FIL BOOST Sets the filament rapid boost duration in order to quickly raise the
filament temperature. In installations where a spot film or equivalent
device is used, default boost and preheat values may be increased
if needed to allow for one second R/F change-over time.
FIL PREHEAT The time that the filament is held at the required emission level
before an exposure is permitted.
®
Use these steps to select the desired tube type.

Step Action
1. From the GENERATOR SETUP menu, select GEN CONFIGURATION.
2. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select TUBE SELECTION.
3. Select TUBE 1 or TUBE 2. (This step applies to two-tube units only).
4. Choose the tube type to be assigned to the current tube selection (tube 1 or tube 2)
by pressing the button adjacent to the desired selection. Use the >> and << buttons
to navigate through the tube selection menus if the desired tube is not displayed on
the current screen.
5. Once the desired tube has been selected, parameters for that tube are displayed
showing the default values. DO NOT adjust the default values at this time.
When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed. Please consult the X-ray
tube data sheet(s) before making any changes.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS
CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING
THE DEFAULT VALUES.
The dual speed starter 2 operates at 60 or 180 Hz (50, 100, 120, or 150 Hz for some tube
types) and is independent of line frequency.
NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL IN

THE X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK
FORM THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0.
THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW
(CHANGED) VALUES.
®
Use these steps to set the tube limits and the associated parameters. Refer to the definitions
in the previous table.
Step Action
1. Select TUBE SPEED. Toggle the button to select DUAL, LOW, or HIGH.
2. Select MAX SF KW LS. Use the + or – buttons to set the low speed, small focus kW
limit.
3. Select MAX LF KW LS. Use the + or – buttons to set the low speed, large focus
kW limit.
4. Select MAX SF KW HS. Use the + or – buttons to set the high speed, small focus
kW limit.
5. Select MAX LF KW HS. Use the + or – buttons to set the high speed, large focus
kW limit.
6. Select MAX KV. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum allowable kV.
7. Press >>.
8. Select MAX SF MA. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum small focus mA.
9. Select ANODE HU WARNING. Use the + or – buttons to set desired anode HU
warning %.
10. Select ANODE HU LIMIT. Use the + or – buttons to set desired anode HU limit %.
11. Press >>.
12. Select SF STANDBY. Use the + or – buttons to set the small focus filament standby
current.
13. Select LF STANDBY. Use the + or – buttons to set the large focus filament standby
current.
14. Select SF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to set the small focus maximum filament
current.
15. Select LF MAX. Use the + or – buttons to set the large focus maximum filament
current.
16. Select FIL BOOST. Use the + or – buttons to set the filament rapid boost duration.
17. Select FIL PREHEAT. Use the + or – buttons to set the filament preheat time.
18. Press RETURN and EXIT as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION
menu.
19. Select and then set up the parameters for the second X-ray tube by repeating the
previous steps (two-tube generators only).
When EXITING from the tube selection menu, a reminder will pop-up on the screen as shown
in the next figure. ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR(S) ARE
COMPATIBLE WITH THE LOW SPEED OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IN YOUR
GENERATOR.
®
Refer to STARTER PROGRAMMING SECTION in Chapter 2, Installation, for details.
New or replacement X-ray tubes must be auto-calibrated before the generator is placed
into service. Refer to TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION section in Chapter2, Installation, for
details.
Additional Information about tube settings:
Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should
be in the range of 700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure that there is no change in the signal
level 5 milliseconds after the start of an exposure, and that the mA starts at the selected level.
Standby current must be below the emission point. If the standby current is too high,
the lower fluoro mA values may not calibrate properly resulting in a high mA fault error
during fluoro operation.
If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube
manufacturer’s specifications.
3C.5.2 Generator Limits

The GENERATOR LIMITS function allows setting of the generator output limits defined
below.
The GENERATOR LIMITS menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* GENERATOR LIMITS *
MAX KW: 100 MIN MA: 25
MAX KV: 150
MIN KV: 40 +
MAX MA: 1000 -
EXIT >>
* GENERATOR LIMITS *
MAX MAS 1000
MIN MAS 0
MAX MS: 6300 +
MIN MS: 1 -
<<
®
3C.5.2 Generator Limits (Cont)
Definitions of GENERATOR LIMITS menu items.

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
MAX KW Sets the maximum MAX MAS Sets the maximum
generator kW limit. generator mAs limit.
MAX KV Sets the maximum MIN MAS Sets the minimum
generator kV limit. generator mAs limit.
MIN KV Sets the minimum MAX MS Sets the maximum
generator kV limit. generator mS limit.
MAX MA Sets the maximum MIN MS Sets the minimum
generator mA limit. generator mS limit.
MIN MA Sets the minimum
generator mA limit.
BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE
DATA SHEETS TO ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED LIMITS.
NOTE: BEFORE CHANGING GENERATOR LIMITS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY

TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM THAT
SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS
RECORDING OF THE DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED)
VALUES.
Use these steps to set the generator limits. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select GENERATOR LIMITS.
2. Select MAX KW. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum kW.
3. Select MAX KV. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum kV.
4. Select MAX MA. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum mA.
5. Select MIN MA. Use the + or – buttons to set the minimum mA.
6. Select MAX MAS. Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum mAs.
7. Press EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
®
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup
The RECEPTOR SETUP function allows each of the image receptors to be programmed as
defined in the table following the example menu screens.
The RECEPTOR SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *
TUBE: 1 INTERFACE OPTS: 0
TOMO: NO FUNCTIONAL OPTS: 0
FLUORO: NO +
SERIAL: NO -
EXIT >>

RECEPTOR SYM: [sym] MEMORY: DEF
FLUORO HANG: 30 SEC REM TOMO BUT: 2500 MS
RAD HANG: 0 SEC +
LAST IMAGE HOLD: 40 MS -
<< >>

SF/LF SWITCH: MAN DEFAULTS
AEC BACKUP: FIXED AEC CHANNEL: 1
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500 +
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200 -
<< >>

AEC LOCK EXPs: 3
+
-
<<
NOTE: THE [DEFAULTS] SELECTION IN MENU 3 IS ONLY AVAILABLE IF [MEMORY]

IN MENU 2 WAS SET TO [DEF]. RECEPTOR MENUS 5 AND 6, BELOW, ARE
ONLY ACCESSIBLE IF [DEFAULTS] IS ENABLED.
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*

TECHNIQUE: AEC LEFT FIELD: YES
FOCUS: SMALL CENTER FIELD: YES
FILM SCREEN: 1 RIGHT FIELD: YES
<< >>
®
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (Cont)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*

KV: DENSITY: 0
MA:
MS: +
-
<<
Definitions of RECEPTOR SETUP menu items.

TUBE Selects the tube number assigned to the current receptor. Tube 2 is
only available on two-tube units.
This function also allows the receptor to be disabled.
Membrane console:
NONE: Disables the currently selected receptor.
1: Assigns tube 1 to the currently selected receptor.
2: Assigns tube 2 to the currently selected receptor.
TOMO Enables or disables tomographic operation.
FLUORO Enables or disables fluoroscopic operation.

SERIAL Allows repeated (serial) X-ray exposures without the need to re-prep
after each exposure. Normally used with serial film changers or
digital imaging systems.
Note: The anode kW rating will be reduced by 20% when serial RAD
mode is selected.
INTERFACE Selects pre-defined digital interface options.
OPTS Refer to the digital imaging supplement in the front of this manual for
the appropriate selection for this configuration.
FUNCTIONAL Selects pre-defined special functional options.
OPTS Refer to the appropriate documentation to configure this option
RECEPTOR SYM Allows one of the predefined receptor symbols [sym] to be assigned
to the selected receptor.
FLUORO HANG Sets the time that the rotor will continue to spin after a fluoro
exposure has terminated.
RAD HANG Sets the time that the rotor will continue to spin after a rad exposure
has terminated.
LAST IMAGE Sets the time that the fluoro exposure will continue after the
HOLD footswitch has been released. This enables a frame store device to
complete the last image.
®
MEMORY Defines the techniques that will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected.
YES: The selected receptor will remember its last
techniques such that those techniques are displayed
when that receptor is re-selected.
NO: The selected receptor will not remember the last
techniques used on that receptor. The techniques
used will be the same as last used on the previous
receptor.
DEF: The techniques used for that receptor will be as
programmed. See receptor setup menus 5 and 6,
Figure 3C-2, Sheet 2.
REM TOMO BUT Sets the default tomo backup time when tomo is selected via the
REMOTE TOMO SELECT input.
SF/LF SWITCH Enables or disables the ability of the generator to automatically select
the large or small focus.
AUTO: Small or large focus will automatically be selected by
the generator. The small to large (and vice-versa)
switching will occur at the MAX SF MA set point.
MAN: The operator must manually select small or large focus.
AEC BACKUP Defines the AEC backup mode to be used.
FIXED: The generator will determine the maximum AEC
backup time, not to exceed preset AEC backup
mAs/ms values or system limits. The characters AEC
will be displayed in the time window of the LED display
during AEC operation.
MAS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup mAs, not
to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or
system limits. The mAs value will be displayed in the
time window of the LED display during AEC operation.
MS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup ms, not
to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or
system limits. The ms value will be displayed in the
time window of the LED display during AEC operation.
AEC BACKUP Sets the maximum AEC backup mAs, to a limit of 600 mAs.
MAS
AEC BACKUP MS Sets the maximum AEC back-up ms.
®
DEFAULTS This selection is available only if MEMORY was set to DEF in
RECEPTOR SETUP menu 2, Figure 3C-2, Sheet 2.
The DEFAULTS menus allow the default receptor techniques to be
programmed.
AEC CHANNEL Defines which AEC channel will be used by the selected receptor.
This must be set to a valid AEC input channel number, or to 0 (No
AEC) as described below.
Select 0 (No AEC) to disable AEC operation on the selected
receptor. If the AEC input is not disabled when required, an error
message will be presented. For example, if using an AEC board with
only 3 input channels, an error will be displayed when selecting the
fourth channel.
AEC LOCK EXPs Selects the number of AEC “scout” exposures that will be made in
order to determine the AEC exposure time during serial exposures.
The subsequent exposure time will be locked to that of the last scout
exposure.
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IF DEFAULTS WAS

ENABLED AS PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED.
TECHNIQUE Defines which technique will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected.
Membrane console:
MA: Defaults to mA/ms mode.
MAS: Defaults to mAs mode.
AEC Defaults to AEC mode.
FOCUS Defines which focus will be defaulted to when a receptor is selected.
Options are SMALL or LARGE. Micro focus is not available at this
time.
FILM SCREEN Defines which film screen will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected and AEC enabled. Options are film screen 1, 2, or 3.
LEFT FIELD Defines which field(s) will be defaulted to when a receptor is selected.
CENTER FIELD Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD YES: The selected field will be selected.
NO: The selected field will not be selected.
KV Selects the default kV.
MA Selects the default mA.
MS Selects the default ms.
DENSITY Selects the default density.
®

NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING
WORKSHEET BE FILLED IN FOR EACH RECEPTOR THAT IS
PROGRAMMED. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS
LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 4.0. THIS WILL PROVIDE A RECORD OF THE
RECEPTOR SETUP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
If the image receptor defaults are changed, the original defaults should be recorded in
a copy of the following table:
IMAGE RECEPTOR DEFAULT SETTINGS

FUNCTION RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM
SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER
FIELD
RIGHT
FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN ANY RECEPTOR SETUP
MENUS. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR SETUP
PARAMETERS NOT TO BE SAVED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE FIRST
RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING BE COMPLETED, THE RECEPTOR SETUP
MENUS BE EXITED TO THE GEN CONFIGURATION MENU, AND THEN THE
RECEPTOR SETUP MENU BE RESELECTED TO PROGRAM THE NEXT
RECEPTOR. THE ABOVE SHOULD BE REPEATED UNTIL ALL RECEPTORS
ARE PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT THE UPDATED
PARAMETERS ARE SAVED.
Use these steps to set up the receptor parameters. Refer to the definitions in the previous
table.
Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select RECEPTOR SETUP.
2. Select the first receptor to be programmed.
3. Select TUBE. Toggle the button to select NONE, 1, or 2.
Tube 2 is only available on two-tube units.
®
Step Action
4. Select TOMO. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
5. Select FLUORO. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
6. Select SERIAL. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
7. Select INTERFACE OPTS. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired interface
option.
8. Select FUNCTIONAL OPTS. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired interface
option.
9. Press >>.
10. Select RECEPTOR SYM. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired receptor
symbol.
11. Select FLUORO HANG. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired fluoro
hangover time.
12. Select RAD HANG. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired rad hangover time.
13. Select LAST IMAGE HOLD. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired last image
hold time.
14. Select MEMORY. Toggle the button to select NO, YES, or DEF.
15. Select REM TOMO BUT. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired tomo backup
time.
16. Press >>.
17. Select SF/LF SWITCH. Toggle the button to select AUTO or MAN.
18. Select AEC BACKUP. Toggle the button to select FIXED, MAS, or MS.
19. Select AEC BACKUP MAS. Use the + or – buttons to select the maximum backup
mAs.
20. Select AEC BACKUP MS. Use the + or – buttons to select the maximum backup
ms.
21. Select AEC CHANNEL. Use the + or – buttons to assign the desired AEC channel
to the selected receptor, or to disable AEC operation on that receptor.
22. Press >>.
23. Select AEC LOCK EXPs. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired number of
AEC scout exposures.
The following steps only apply if MEMORY in step 15 was set to DEF / default.
24. Press <<.
25. Select DEFAULTS.
26. Select TECHNIQUE. Toggle the button to select MA, MAS, or AEC.
27. Select FOCUS. Toggle the button to select SMALL or LARGE.
28. Select FILM SCREEN. Toggle the button to select 1, 2, or 3.
29. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
®
Step Action
30. Repeat the previous step for the CENTER and RIGHT fields.
31. Press >>.
32. Select KV, MA, MS, and DENSITY. Use the + or – buttons to select the default kV,
mA, ms, and density, respectively.
33. Press << five times to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
34. Repeat steps 3 to 35 for the remaining receptors. It is necessary to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu after programming each receptor to ensure that the
updated parameters are saved to memory.
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration
The I/O CONFIGURATION function allows programming the states of the exposure for the
inputs and the outputs on the room interface board. Note that in GenWeb™, the I/O
configuration setting should be set to BASIC mode otherwise the console will display the
message below and editing of the I/O settings using the membrane console is not possible.
Refer to the GenWeb™ documentation accompanying this manual for more information.
The I/O CONFIGURATION menus for the membrane console are shown below.
NOTE: The STATE settings during the different generator phases are shown for
illustration purposes only and should not be taken as a guide to set the
generator I/O settings. Refer to the appropriate section in this service
manual for details about setting the I/O configurations.
* INPUTS [sym] *
REMOTE EXP: —__—____ FLUORO EXP STATE
REMOTE PREP: ________—
REMOTE FL. EXP: __——___
CONSOLE EXP: —__—____
EXIT ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
CONSOLE PREP: —__—____ STANDBY STATE
TOMO EXP: __——____
REM.TOMO SEL.: ________—
I/I SAFETY: —__—____
<< ▲ >>
®
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (Cont)
* INPUTS [sym] *
COLL. ITLK: __——__— PREP STATE
BKY CONTACTS 1: —__—____
BKY CONTACTS 2: __——____
FL TIMER RESET: ——__——
<< ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
X-RAY DISABLE: __——__— RAD EXP STATE
ROOM DOOR ITLK: __——____
MULTI SPOT EXP: __——__—
BKY CONTACTS 2: __——__—
<< ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
BKY CONTACTS 4: —__—____ STANDBY STATE
INPUT 4: __——__—
MAG MODE IN 1: __——____
MAG MODE IN 2: —__—____
<< ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
MAG MODE IN 3: __——__— FLUORO EXP STATE
PF SELECT: __——__—
HIGH LVL SELECT: —__—____ :
INPUT 6: —__—____
<< ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
INPUT 11: __——__— STANDBY STATE
INPUT 12: __——__—
HISPEED INPUT 7 __——____
HISPEED INPUT 8 __——____
<< ▲ >>
* INPUTS [sym] *
CONSOLE FLUORO: —__—___ STANDBY STATE
<< ▲ >>
®
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
BKY 1 SELECT: __——__— GEN RDY STATE
BKY 2 SELECT: __——____
BKY 3 SELECT: __——__—
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL: __________
<< ▲ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
OUTPUT 2: __——____ STANDBY STATE
TOMO/BKY START: __________
OUTPUT 16: __________
COLL. BYPASS: __________
<< ▲ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
ROOM LIGHT: __________ GEN RDY STATE
MAG MODE OUT 3: __________
MAG MODE OUT 2: __________
MAG MODE OUT 1 __________
<< ▲ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
OUTPUT 8: __________ STANDBY STATE
OUTPUT 9: __________
OUTPUT 10: __——__—
X-RAY ON: __________
<< ▲ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
HISPEED OUTPUT 1: __——__— RAD EXP STATE
HISPEED OUTPUT 2: __________
<< ▲ >>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
HISPEED OUTPUT 5: __________ PREP STATE
HISPEED OUTPUT 6: __——__—
HISPEED OUTPUT 7 __________
HISPEED OUTPUT 8 __——__—
<< ▲ RETURN
®
Definitions of I/O CONFIGURATION menu items.
INPUTS: Please refer to Table 3B-1 (Room I/O Board Inputs) and Table 3B-2 (Room I/O
Board Programming Connectors), Chapter 3B (Room I/O Board Connections) for
details. The membrane console functions shown below will be the default
function assignment(s) in table 3B-1 and 3B-2.
REMOTE EXP Remote radiographic exposure input on the room I/O board. (Table
3B-1)
REMOTE PREP Remote prep input on the room I/O board. (Table 3B-1)
REMOTE FL. EXP Remote fluoro exposure input on the room I/O board. (Table 3B-1)
CONSOLE EXP Console expose button input on the Console Connector Board.
Note: Selecting any one of the Console Expose generator states
would automatically enable all of the generator states
CONSOLE PREP Console prep button input on the Console Connector Board.
Note: Selecting any one of the Console Prep generator states
would automatically enable all of the generator states
TOMO EXP Tomographic exposure input on the room I/O board. (Table 3B-1)
REM. TOMO SEL. Programs the remote tomo select input on the room I/O board.
(Tables 3B-1 and 3B-2)
I/I SAFETY Programs the I.I. safety input on the room I/O board. (Tables 3B-1
and 3B-2)
COLL. ITLK Programs the collimator interlock input on the room I/O board.
BUCKY CONTACTS Programs the Bucky inputs on the room I/O board. The Bucky
1, 2, 3 & 4 ready signals must be connected to these inputs. (Tables 3B-1 and
3B-2)
X-RAY DISABLE Inhibits X-Ray exposure. (Tables 3B-1 and 3B-2)
CONSOLE FLUORO Console Fluoro expose button input on the Console Connector
Board.
ROOM DOOR ITLK Programs the door interlock input on the room I/O board. (Tables
3B-1 and 3B-2)
MULTI SPOT EXP. Programs the multiple spot exposure compensation input on the
room I/O board. Refer to chapter 3D for details on this function.
INPUTS 4, 6, 11 & 12 Available user configurable spare inputs. (Tables 3B-1 and 3B-2)
®
MAG MODE IN 1, Programmable inputs to provide the generator the state of
2&3 magnification mode of the I.I. (Tables 3B-1 and 3B-2)
Note: If enabling more than one MAG input at the same time, the
generator will enable the highest value MAG input. For example, if
enabling MAG 3 and MAG 2 at the same time, the generator will
override MAG 2 and enable MAG 3.
PF SELECT Programs the Pulsed Fluoro mode. (Table 3B-1)
HIGH LVL Programs the High Level Pulse Fluoro or High Level continuous
SELECT Fluoro depending on the current active setting on the generator.
(Table 3B-1)
HISPEED INPUT 7 User configurable high speed inputs. (Table 3B-1)
&8
FL TIMER RESET If enabled, resets the Fluoro timer back to 0. The Fluoro timer allows
a maximum exposure time of 5 minutes or 9.6 minutes depending on
whether it is FDA or IEC standard, respectively.
OUTPUTS: Please refer to Table 3B-3 (Room I/O Board Outputs),Table3B-4 (Configuring
Outputs for 24VDC, 110VAC or 220VAC) and 3B-5 (Jumpers to remove in
order to disable R-C snubbers), Chapter 3B (Room I/O Board Connections)
for details. The membrane console functions shown below will be the default
function assignment(s) in table 3B-3 and 3B-4.
BKY 1, 2 & 3 Programs the Bucky 1,2 &3 release output on the room I/O board.
SELECT (Tables 3B-3, 3B-4 and 3B-5)
TOMO/BKY 4 Programs the Tomo / Bucky 4 release output on the room I/O board.
SELECT (Tables 3B-3, 3B-4 and 3B-5)
TOMO/BKY STRT Programs the Tomo / Bucky start output on the room I/O board. This
output is common to all Buckys. (Tables 3B-3, 3B-4 and 3B-5)
TUBE INDICATOR Programs the Tube 1 or Tube 2 indicator. (Table 3B-3)
COLL. BYPASS Programs the collimator bypass output on the room I/O board. (Table
3B-3)
ROOM LIGHT Programs the room light output on the room I/O board. (Tables 3B-3
and 3B-5)
MAG MODE OUT Programs the magnification mode selection on the I.I. (Table 3B-3)
1, 2 & 3 Note: If enabling more than one MAG output at the same time, the
generator will enable the highest value MAG input. For example, if
enabling MAG 3 and MAG 2 at the same time, the generator will
override MAG 2 and enable MAG 3.
OUTPUTS 6, 8, 9, User configurable outputs. (Tables 3B-3 and 3B-5)
10
X-RAY ON Provides indication on how long the x-ray switch is closed subject
exposure times set on the console. (Table 3B-3)
HISPEED User programmable high speed outputs. (Table 3B-3)
OUTPUTS 1 to 8
®
The inputs and outputs defined in the previous table are programmable as follows:
• Inputs may be programmed such that the selected input is active or inactive during
various states of the generator. Inactive inputs are ignored; unused inputs should
normally be programmed to be inactive.
• Outputs may be programmed such that the relay connected to the selected output is
energized or de-energized during various states of the generator. Unused outputs should
normally be programmed to be de-energized.
• The inputs and outputs must be programmed separately for each receptor. Each receptor
may have its own unique programming.
I/O States in the Membrane Console

The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The
word STATE is preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to the current level for the selected state. Moving to
the next state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:
• STANDBY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator is in standby
(idle) mode. Standby mode includes fluoroscopic hangover.
• PREP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator enters PREP
mode.
• GEN RDY Sets the state of the I/O when the generator has completed
PREP mode and is ready to expose.
• RAD EXP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a
radiographic exposure.
• FLUORO EXP Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a
fluoroscopic exposure.
Pressing the button next to the selected input or output on the left of the display selects that
function. The level of the selected state is changed by pressing the selection button again
(low = off / inactive, high = on / active).
For inputs, setting the level “low” means that the input is ignored during that state. Setting the
level “high” requires that the corresponding input is satisfied before the generator will
advance to that state. If multiple inputs are programmed “high”, for example if REMOTE
PREP and CONSOLE PREP are both high in the prep state, then both inputs will need to be
active before the generator will enter the prep state.
Setting an output level “low” causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. Setting the level “high” will cause the associated relay to be
energized during the selected state.
Refer to figure 3C-3 for examples of a TYPICAL input configuration.
®

1 2 3 4 5
REMOTE EXP:
1 = STANDBY STATE (shown high/active)
2 = PREP STATE (shown low/inactive)
3 = GEN RDY STATE (shown low/inactive)
4 = RAD EXP STATE (shown high/active)
5 = FLUORO EXP STATE (shown low/inactive)
FILE: ML_IOSTE.CDR
Figure 3C-3: Example of input states
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET BE

FILLED IN FOR EACH INPUT OR OUTPUT THAT IS PROGRAMMED. A BLANK
FORM THAT SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A.5.0.
THIS WILL PROVIDE A RECORD OF THE I/O CONFIGURATION FOR FUTURE
REFERENCE.
Use these steps for programming the I/O functions. Refer to the definitions in the previous
table.
Step Action
1. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select I/O CONFIGURATION.
2. Select the first receptor to be programmed.
3. Press the STATE button to select the first state that can be programmed for the
REMOTE EXP input. This is the PREP state.
Toggle the REMOTE EXP button to select the desired logic level (low or high) to
disable or enable that input during the prep state.
4. Repeat the previous step for the remaining states that can be programmed.
For the REMOTE EXP input, the only other state that can be programmed is the
RAD EXP state.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining inputs. Use the >> button to scroll through
all four INPUTS menus.
6. Press >> to select the first OUTPUTS menu.
7. Repeat the previous steps for the outputs. For outputs, all five states can be
programmed.
A logic low de-energizes the relay connected to that output during the selected
state. A logic high will energize the relay during the selected state.
8. When finished the I/O programming for the current receptor, exit to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
9. Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, and then select the next receptor to be
programmed.
Program all inputs and outputs for the selected receptor.
10. When finished programming all receptors, exit to the GEN CONFIGURATION
menu.
®
3C.5.5 AEC Setup
For AEC setup, refer to chapter 3D, AEC SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration
For AEC calibration, refer to chapter 3D, AEC SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup and Calibration
For fluoro setup and calibration, refer to chapter 3E, ABS SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration
Refer to chapter 2, the section TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION.
3C.5.9 DAP Setup
For setup and calibration of the optional DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter, refer to chapter 3F,
DAP / AK SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.5.10 AK Setup
For setup and calibration of the optional AK (Air Kerma) calculator and display, refer to
chapter 3F, DAP / AK SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.5.11 Generator License using Membrane Console
The license code enables options or features in the generator. Consult the factory to obtain a
new license code if it is desired to enable new features, or to reinstall the existing license
should the license code be accidentally overwritten.
The Gen. License menu can be accessed by going to the service mode following the
procedure in 3C.1.3. You need the service mode password to access the menu. Under
Generator Setup, select Gen Configuration and then select >> button.
The Gen. License key configuration menu can also be accessed in GenWeb™. Refer to the
GenWeb™ User’s Guide supplement SUP90562700 for instructions on how to use the Gen.
license key feature.
Shown below is the navigation structure of the license code menu and entry screens. Select
the appropriate button beside the item to view or enter the license information.
®
3C.5.12 Tube Starter Setup
For setup of the tube housing in CAN mode, refer to the LSS 2 or DSS 2 section of chapter 2,
Selecting the Tube Housing Type with a Membrane console in CAN mode.
Pressing the License Info menu displays the current license code and the system code of the
generator. A system code is a unique code assigned to each generator. Note that in the
figure above, the license and system codes shown are for example purposes only and does
not reflect the actual codes assigned to your system.
To enter a new license or to reinstall an existing license, select Enter License to access the
Gen. License entry screen. Enter the appropriate license code by pressing the buttons on the
right hand side of the screen beside the ▲ and ▼ symbols (buttons 5 & 6 , see figure 3C-1 and
figure above). The character on the license code where the ▲ symbol is currently located will
cycle through the numbers 0 to 9 and letters A to F. Select the number or letter by pressing
▲ or ▼ until the appropriate character is found. The next or previous character can be
selected by using ► and ◄ buttons (buttons 7 & 8, see figure 3C-1 and figure above). Navigate
through all the digits from left to right or vice-versa to enter the codes until the entire 16-digit
code entry is complete.
After the entire code is entered, check that it matches with the code provided by CPI. To
make a correction, simply move the pointer (▲) to the appropriate location and make the
change. When done, press the SEND button. The message LICENSE ACCEPTED or
LICENSE REJECTED will come up on the screen depending on the validity of the code
entered. Pressing the EXIT button returns the screen to the GEN. LICENSE menu.
®
3C.6.0 DATA LINK
UTILITY & FIRMWARE UPGRADE

®
Indico IQ does not currently support the UTILITY feature. FIRMWARE UPGRADE is done by
following the procedure outlined in Chapter 6, Regular Maintenance, section 6.6.1.
3C.7.0 TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES

This section applies to generators with the touchscreen option only. The system utilities menu
allows access to the following functions:
APR Editor Allows the APR to be edited. Changes may be saved to memory.
APR Backup / Restore Allows the APR data to be backed up, and backed-up APR data
to be restored. The factory-default APR is available in several
languages.
This also allows APR files to be saved to a USB flash drive, and
saved APR files to be downloaded from a USB flash drive.
Date / Time Setup Allows the touchscreen’s date and time to be set or changed.
Receptor Symbols Allows predefined receptor symbols to be assigned to each
image receptor button. Also allows receptor symbols to be saved
to a USB flash drive and saved receptor symbols to be
downloaded from a USB flash drive.
GenWeb™ Allows access to GenWeb™, a web-based utility software used
for the generator set-up and configuration. Consult the
GenWeb™ user's guide accompanying this manual for more
information. Note: Acquisition mode on the touchscreen
should be closed before any change is made in Genweb™.
Only have one application, either acquisition mode or
Genweb™, running at a time.
Touch Screen Setup • Allows for the setting of specific console operating
parameters.
• Sets the specific customer code for graphical user interfaces
(skin).
• Allows changing of the DAP units.
• Enables access to the the tube warm-up reminder and
reminder interval setting.
• Enables / disables compatible equipment (i.e. Infimed digital
interface).
• Allows the operator and service passwords to be changed.
Configuration Backup Allows the receptor symbols and auto-positioner data, if

/ Restore applicable, to be backed up, and backed-up receptor symbols
and auto-positioner data, if applicable, to be restored.
Main Menu Press to return to the main console menu.
®
3C.7.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu
Step Action
1. Enter the main console menu. One of two Main Menus will be displayed as shown
in figures 3C-4a and 3C-4b.
The Main Menu window shown in figure 3C-4a is the Default menu and will have
the Power OFF Generator button greyed out. .
Pressing the System Shutdown button will shut down the touchscreen console.
The generator can only be powered OFF by using the mini-console.
Figure 3C-4a: Default Main Menu

The Main Menu window shown in figure 3C-4b is the Optional menu. This menu
is enabled by performing the procedure outlined in step 2. The Power OFF
Generator button is selectable.
Pressing the Power Off Generator button will send a command to power off the
generator.
Pressing the System Shutdown button will send a command to power off the
generator and shut down the touchscreen console.
Figure 3C-4b: Optional Main Menu
®
3C.7.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu (Cont)
Step Action
2. To enable the Optional Main Menu shown in figure 3C-4b, perform the following
steps:
a) Login to GenWeb™.
b) Then select the Help tab and click GenWeb™ Preferences.
c) Click the Generator Boot Configuration menu tab.
d) Double click the Settings column of SysSfwPwrOffEn and select On.
e) Click the Apply button to save the changes.
f) Power cycle the generator OFF and then ON to enable the Optional Main Menu.
g) Press the System Shutdown button to shut off the touchscreen console.
h) Turn on the touchscreen console; this will refresh to the Optional Main Menu.
Use these steps to access the systems utilities functions.

Step Action
1. From the main console menu (figure 3C-4a or 3C-4b), press System Utilities. A
pop-up window will be displayed (figure 3C-5), requesting a password.
2. Press 1, 9, 7, 3 in sequence to continue. This is the factory-default service
password, and allows access to all of the functions listed above.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect password.
• Press Cancel to return to the main menu.
• Press Accept to access the system utilities menu. After a brief delay, the
system utilities menu (figure 3C-6) will be displayed. The message Access
Denied indicates that an incorrect password was used. The factory-default
password may be changed by a service engineer as described later in this
supplement. If this was done, the password defined above will not allow access
to the system utilities menu.
Figure 3C-5: Password window
®
3C.7.1 Accessing the Utilities Menu (Cont)
Figure 3C-6: System utilities menu on the touchscreen

3C.7.2 APR Editor
It is strongly suggested that you review the subsection ANATOMICAL PROGRAMMING

SELECTOR in section 4 of the operator’s manual before proceeding. A good
understanding of the terminology and APR menu structures is needed to make APR
changes.
Use these steps to access the APR editor function.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press APR Editor. A screen similar in appearance
to the normal acquisition screen will be displayed (figure 3C-7). However, as a
reminder that you are in APR editor mode, the word APR EDITOR will be
displayed in the APR window.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to change
parameters and technique for existing APR items, and to edit, add, or delete APR,
procedural, or menu items.
®
Figure 3C-7: APR editor window
NOTE: THE DISPLAY ON YOUR SYSTEM MAY VARY DEPENDING ON GENERATOR

TYPE AND ON PROGRAMMING AND TECHNIQUE SELECTIONS.
MINOR VARIATIONS MAY EXIST IN COLOR SCHEME AND GRAPHIC STYLES
(SKINS) TO SUIT SPECIFIC CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS.
NOTE: PRESS THE AUTO BUTTON ON THE SIDE OF THE TOUCHSCREEN TWO
TIMES TO CENTER THE IMAGE OR DISPLAY BUTTONS THAT ARE NOT
VISIBLE.
®
NOTE: When a region of interest (i.e. SKULL) is selected, a pop-up menu

will appear similar to that in normal APR mode. In addition to “new”
<Add>, <Edit>, and <Delete> buttons, a <Move Up> and <Move
Down> button will be displayed.
The <Move Up> and <Move Down> buttons allow the items in a menu
or submenu to be rearranged. To do this, select the item to be
moved. This will highlight the item. Press <Move Up> to move the
selected item up in the list, and <Move Down> to move the selected
item down in the list.
To change parameters or techniques for an existing APR item:

Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be changed. If the APR item is in a submenu of a menu or
procedural item, select the parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open
Sub-Menu. It may be necessary to drill down through several submenus to find
the desired APR item.
2. When the selected APR item is highlighted, select the patient size. The desired
parameters / technique may be changed for that patient size (rad / fluoro kV and
mA, mAs, ms, density, AEC / mA/ms / mAs, focal spot, film screen, AEC fields,
image receptor, AEC lock, fluoro mode (continuous / pulsed fluoro / HLF), I.I.
mode, dose, ABS). Repeat for all patient sizes for that APR item as required. The
highlight will change to red when the programmed APR has been altered.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for other APR items within that menu or submenu, if
applicable.
4. Press BACK when finished changing APR items in that menu / submenu. This
may need to be done more than once to return to the top APR menu for the
selected region of interest. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save
the changes. Press YES to save the changes; CANCEL cancels the changes.
NOTE: When editing or adding an APR item, menu item, or procedural

item, an English keyboard will pop up at the bottom of the screen. A
partial keyboard with international symbols corresponding to the
installer-selected language may be displayed at the top of the
screen. Characters may then be entered via either keyboard.
An ID code window may be displayed to the right of the window for
the item text. The ID code is used by some imaging systems, and
use of the proper code synchronizes the APR’s between the
touchscreen console and the imaging system. Refer to the
appropriate imaging system documentation for valid ID codes.
Touching the ID code window will move the cursor into that
window, allowing entry of the ID code. THE I.D. CODE IS NOT
AVAILABLE ON ALL SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS OF THE
StarQ™ TOUCHSCREEN.
®

To edit (change the name of) an APR item:
Step Action
1. Select the APR item as per step 1 under “To change parameters or technique
for an existing APR item”. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Edit. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described above, with the
current name of the APR item highlighted.
• Press CANCEL on the lower keyboard to exit without changing the name.
• Press DEL to delete the highlighted name on the keyboard.
• Type in the new name for that APR item. Use the BACKSPACE key to back
space if corrections are needed.
• Add / edit the ID code if desired (if displayed).
• Press ENTER when finished.
To delete an APR item:

Step Action
1. Select the APR item to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Delete. A pop-up window will display asking if you are sure you want to
delete this item. Press YES to delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.
To add an APR item:

Step Action
1. Select the appropriate location to add the APR item. An APR item may be added
directly to a main APR menu, or may be added to a submenu of another menu or
procedural item.
If the APR item is to be added to a submenu of a menu or procedural item, select
the parent menu item or procedural item, then press Open Sub-Menu. It may be
necessary to drill down through several submenus to find the desired location for
the new APR item.
2. Press Add. A pop-up window will display allowing you to select three item types to
be added. Select APR Item (this is the default selection, and the only available
selection if adding to a procedural menu).
3. Press OK to continue. Cancel will cancel this action.
4. Keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described previously.
• Type in the name of the new APR item.
• Add the ID code if desired (if displayed).
• The new APR item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
Change the parameters and technique as per the subsection “To change
parameters or technique for an existing APR item”.
®
To add, edit, or delete a procedural item:
NOTE: A PROCEDURAL ITEM HAS ONLY ONE SUBMENU, WHICH MAY ONLY
CONTAIN APR ITEMS.
A PROCEDURE ITEM WILL AUTOMATICALLY SELECT THE NEXT APR ITEM
ON ITS LIST WHEN THE PREP OR EXPOSE BUTTONS ARE RELEASED.
NOTE: A MENU ITEM HAS ONE OR MORE SUBMENUS, WHICH MAY INCLUDE
OTHER MENU ITEMS, PROCEDURAL ITEMS AND / OR APR ITEMS.
APR ITEMS CONTAINED WITHIN A MENU MUST BE SELECTED MANUALLY.
To add, edit, or delete a procedural item:

Step Action
1. To delete a procedural item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing
so will also delete the submenu associated with that procedural item.
2. To edit a procedural item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an
APR item”.
3. To add a procedural item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except
select APR Procedure in step 2.
• Type in the name of the new procedural item.
• The new procedural item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Select the newly added procedural item. The selection will be highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has been
automatically inserted in that submenu.
• You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique for
that APR item, and add additional APR items for that procedural item as per
previous steps.
®
To add, edit, or delete a menu item:

Step Action
1. To delete a menu item, follow the steps in “To delete an APR item”. Doing so will
also delete the submenu associated with that menu item.
2. To edit a menu item, follow the steps in “To edit (change the name of) an APR
item”.
3. To add a menu item, follow steps 1 to 3 in “To add an APR item”, except select
APR Menu in step 2.
• Type in the name of the new menu item.
• The new menu item will appear on the selected menu or submenu.
• Select the newly added menu item. The selection will be highlighted.
• Press Open Sub-Menu. A “generic” APR item named FIRST ITEM has been
automatically inserted in that submenu.
You may now edit the name and change the parameters and technique for that
APR item, and add additional APR items for that menu item as per previous steps.
®
3C.7.3 APR Backup / Restore
Use these steps to access the APR backup / restore function.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press APR Backup / Restore. A pop-up window
(figure 3C-8) will display showing the available backup files and the factory-default
APR files in various languages. Pressing Close will exit the backup and restore
menu.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to back-up the
current APR data, to restore saved APR data, and to upload and download APR
files to and from a USB flash drive. The entire APR (parameters and techniques,
APR text, menu structures, etc) is backed up.
Figure 3C-8: APR back-up and restore window
®
3C.7.3 APR Backup / Restore (Cont)
To back-up current APR data:

Step Action
1. Press Backup.
• Type in the name of the new backup file.
• Press ENTER when finished. The console will return to the APR backup /
restore menu.
• A pop-up window will display indicating that the backup was successful. Press
OK to continue.
To restore backed-up APR data:

Step Action
1. Select the APR data file to be restored. The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Restore.
3. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that the APR restore
was successful. Press OK.
To delete an APR data file:

Step Action
1. Select the APR data file to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
delete this file. Press YES to delete the file; NO cancels the deletion.
To restore the factory default APR data:

Step Action
1. Press Factory Defaults.
2. After a brief delay, a pop-up window will display indicating that the APR restore
was successful. Press OK.
®
3C.7.3 APR Backup / Restore (Cont)

USB file transfer utility:
Step Action
1. The APR USB file transfer utility allows APR files on the touchscreen to be saved
to a USB flash drive, or saved APR files on a USB flash drive to be downloaded to
the touchscreen.
2. In order to use this feature a USB flash drive is required.
On the touchscreen console, remove the back connector cover and connect the
USB flash drive to one of the USB ports located on the back of the touchscreen.
Press the button.

After a brief auto-detection sequence where the touchscreen looks for the USB
flash drive, the USB File Transfer Utility window will open.
Figure 3C-9: USB File Transfer Utility window
3. To copy an APR file from the touchscreen to the USB flash drive select the
desired file from the Touch Screen pane and press . When the file is
copied successfully it will appear in the USB Device pane of the USB File
Transfer Utility window.
4. To copy an APR file from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the desired
file from the USB Device pane and press . When the file is copied
successfully it will appear in the Touch Screen pane of the USB File Transfer
Utility window.
5. When finished, press Close to exit.
®
3C.7.4 Date / Time Setup
Use these steps to perform the date and time setup.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Date / Time Setup. A pop-up window that
allows setting of the date and time will display (figure 3C-10).
2. TO SET THE YEAR:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Year to select the desired year. The
selected year will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
3. TO SET THE MONTH:
Press the up or down arrows adjacent to Month to select the desired month. The
selected month will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
4. TO SET THE DATE:
Press to select the desired date on the calendar that is displayed.
5. TO SET THE HOUR
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Hour to select the desired hour. The
selected hour will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons. This must
be selected in 24 hour format, i.e. 2 PM would be entered as hour 14.
6. TO SET THE MINUTE
Press the up or down arrows to the right of Minute to select the desired minute.
The selected minute will display to the left of the up / down selection buttons.
The current time will be displayed under Current Time.
7. Press Apply to apply the current date and time settings without exiting the date
and time menu. Pressing OK will apply the current settings and return to the
system utilities menu. Cancel returns to the system utilities menu without applying
changes to the time or date.
Figure 3C-10: Date and time setup window

®
3C.7.5 Receptor Symbols
The current image receptor symbols may be replaced with predefined symbols chosen from
the receptor symbols library or downloaded from an external device.
Each image receptor button will always select a predefined image receptor (i.e. table Bucky,
wall Bucky, DR, etc.). Before changing the image receptor symbols, it must be clearly
understood which image receptors are selected by each image receptor button. Each image
receptor button should then have a logical and intuitive symbol assigned to that position.
Use these steps to change the receptor symbols.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Receptor Symbols.
2. A pop-up window will display (figure 3C-11) showing the image receptor buttons
with the currently assigned symbols near the right side of the receptor symbols
window, and the library of available receptor symbols near the left side of the
window.
3. Select the image receptor button for which the symbol is to be changed. The
receptor numbers in figure 3C-11 correspond to the receptor numbers in
GenWeb, and are shown for reference only.
4. Select an appropriate symbol for the selected receptor from the symbols library.
The selected symbol will be highlighted.
5.
Press to assign the selected symbol to the selected image receptor button.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each image receptor whose symbol is to be changed.
7. Press OK to continue or CANCEL to return to the system utilities menu without
making any changes. If OK was pressed, a pop-up window will display asking if
you wish to save the changes. Press YES to save the changes. Press NO to return
to the system utilities menu; CANCEL cancels the changes.
8. To delete unused symbols from the receptor symbols library, select the symbol to
be deleted. The selected symbol will be highlighted.
• Press .
• A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to delete the selected item.
Press YES to delete the item; NO cancels the deletion.
• DO NOT DELETE SYMBOLS YOU MAY WANT TO USE IN THE FUTURE.
9. To copy receptor symbol files to and from a USB flash drive press
to access the USB File Transfer Utility.

10. To copy a receptor symbol file from the touchscreen to a USB flash drive select
the desired file from the Touchscreen pane and press . When the file has
been successfully copied it will appear in the USB Device pane of the USB File
®
3C.7.5 Receptor Symbols (Cont)
Step Action
11. To copy receptor symbol files from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the
desired file from the USB Device pane and press the . When the file has
been successfully copied it will appear in the Touchscreen pane of the USB File
12. When finished press Close to exit.
Figure 3C-11: Receptor symbols window
3C.7.6 Touchscreen Setup
The touchscreen setup menu accesses submenus that allow the service engineer to perform
the following functions:
• Enable or disable certain console functions (continuous fluoro tone, audible generator
ready indication).
• Selection of date format (little or middle endian) for DAP / Air Kerma labels for SLP 440
printer.
• Select the language for operator and error messages and graphics (i.e. on buttons, etc).
• Select the generator type.
• Select the customer code.
• Select the digital interface type.
• Change the operator and service passwords.
®
3C.7.6 Touchscreen Setup (Cont)
• Select DAP units.

• Enable Tube warm-up reminder and reminder interval settings.
However, on the touchscreen console:
 These settings are accessible via the Windows operating system control panel and/or
the console hardware control buttons.
 The General Volume and Exposure Volume on the touchscreen console are not
independently adjustable, i.e. the speaker volume adjustment applies to both the
General and Exposure volume.
 The screen saver is factory set and should not require any changes or adjustments.
Use these steps to access the touchscreen setup menu.

Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Touch Screen Setup.
2. The touchscreen setup window will be displayed (figure 3C-12). This has four tabs,
SETTINGS, SETTINGS 2, FEATURES, and PASSWORDS that will be discussed
in sequence.
Figure 3C-12: Touchscreen setup window, Settings tab
• The System Code is a unique code assigned to each touchscreen on which the software
is installed.
• The License is a code specifically assigned to each touchscreen. This enables options in
the features tab. Please consult the factory to obtain a new license code if it is desired to
enable new features, or to reinstall the existing license should the license code be
accidentally overwritten.
• The Customer Code is a unique code assigned to each customer and selects the color
scheme and graphic style (skin) to be displayed on the touchscreen console.
®

SETTINGS
The functions near the left side of the settings window are enabled when checked (√).
Continuous Fluoro Sets the audio indicator mode during fluoroscopy.
Tone
On (√): The exposure indicator beeps continuously during
a fluoro exposure, at one-second intervals.
Off: The exposure indicator beeps once at the start of
a fluoro exposure, and once when the fluoro
exposure ends.
Indicate Generator Enables / disables the audible generator ready sounds.
Ready
On (√): A tone will sound when the generator is ready to
make an exposure (while pressing the PREP
button, or briefly before making an exposure while
the X-RAY button is pressed).
Off: A tone will not sound when the generator is ready
to make an exposure. A text message only will be
presented.
Date Format This selects the date format for DAP / Air Kerma labels for the SLP
[DD/MM/YYYY] 440 printer only.
On (√): Selects the date format DD/MM/YYYY (little
endian).
Off: Selects the date format MM/DD/YYYY (middle
endian).
Use these steps to change the parameters on the settings tab.

Step Action
1. Program the functions defined in the table above by checking or unchecking the
applicable item.
2. Note that there are only two serial COM ports available for use on the touchscreen
(COMM 1 and COMM 2). COMM 1 port is a fixed generator communication port
and COMM 2 used for some optional digital system interfaces.
3. Program the Languages. This selects the language for operator and error
messages, and for text on the buttons, etc. Languages indicated with the prefix *
will have all on-screen text fully translated into that language. Languages that are
not indicated with the prefix * will have all on-screen text remain in English,
however, the international keyboards will allow entry of the selected language.
®
Instructions to adjust the speaker Volume on the touchscreen console

1. Remove the back connector cover from the touchscreen and connect a keyboard to
an available USB port, and then a press the Windows key.

2. From the Windows taskbar (at the bottom of the screen), tap the volume control icon
[ ].
3. From the volume control image, adjust the slider to the desired volume level. A beep
will be heard once the slider is released indicating the selected volume level.
4. Tap anywhere on the screen to close the Windows menu and/or the Windows
taskbar.
5. Disconnect the keyboard from the touchscreen and reinstall the back connector
cover.
Instructions to adjust the LCD contrast & brightness on the touchscreen console
1. The brightness controls are located on the side of the console below the ON/OFF
button. To adjust the brightness, press anyone one of the buttons.
2. To increase the brightness, press the top button.
3. To decrease the brightness, press the bottom button.
4. Wait 3 seconds for the brightness control to automatically exit from the adjustment
screen.
Instructions to verify the COM1 and COM2 port settings on the touchscreen console

2.
From the Start Menu, select the ALL apps icon, and then tap Settings.
3. From the Settings Window, type “device manger” on the search bar and tap the
icon.
®
Instructions to verify the COM1 and COM2 port settings on the touchscreen console
4. Note: The COM settings will only be shown when a device is connected to COM
1 (generator communication port) and COM2 (digital options port)
The Device Manager window appears.
5. Tap on the Ports (COM & LPT) setting to see the COM1 and COM2 connections.
6. Close the Device Manager Window and Settings Window to get back to the
touchscreen’s Main Menu
Instructions to change the COM1 and COM2 port settings on the touchscreen console

2. From the Start Menu, select “ALL apps”, and then tap Settings.
3. From the Settings Window, type “device manger” on the search bar and tap the
icon.
®
4. Note: Only change the COM port setting if they are not assigned properly.
COM1 is a fixed generator communication port and COM2 is only used for
digital options.
Tap on the Ports (Com & LPT). Then tap on the Com port that needs to be assigned
a new Com port number.
5. Tap on the Port Settings tab to display the Port Settings window.
®
6. Tap on the bar. The advanced window appears.
7. Tap on the COM Port number tab to change the COM port number.
8.
Tap to exit back to Device Manger Window.
9. Close the Device Manager Window and Settings Window to get back to the
touchscreen’s Main Menu
cover.
®
SETTINGS 2
Use this tab to set the DAP units and the tube warm-up reminder settings.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select SETTINGS 2. The screen will show
the available settings under this tab.
Figure 3C-13: Touchscreen setup window, Settings 2 tab
Step Action
Check the µGym (DAP Units) to enable this unit. If unchecked, DAP
2
2.
2
measurements will use the mGycm unit.
3.
Select to change the tube warm-up reminder interval. A number pad will
pop-up on the screen. Type the desired number and select Clear, Apply or
Cancel as applicable. Repeat for the tube warm-up repeat interval.
Note that the tube warm-up reminder interval unit is in hours [hr], while the tube
warm-up repeat interval is in minutes [min]. The tube warm-up repeat interval
specifies the repeat interval of the reminder pop-up message once the tube warm-
up reminder is active.
®
FEATURES
Use these steps to select the digital functions.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select FEATURES. Available digital
interfaces will be shown on this screen.
Figure 3C-14: Touchscreen setup window, Features tab
Step Action
2. Check the applicable item to enable that function.
®
PASSWORDS
Use these steps to change the current operator and service passwords.
Step Action
1. From the touchscreen setup window, select PASSWORDS.
2. To change the operator password, press the … button to the right of the top
operator password line. A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
3. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second operator
password line.
Figure 3C-15: Touchscreen setup window, Passwords tab
Step Action
4. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
5. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to
save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL
cancels the changes.
BE SURE TO RECORD THE NEW SERVICE PASSWORD BEFORE CHANGING
THE FACTORY-DEFAULT PASSWORD. YOU WILL NEED TO CONSULT THE
FACTORY IF THE PASSWORDS ARE LOST.
®
Step Action
6. To change the service password, press the … button to the right of the top service
password line. A password window will pop up. Enter the new password.
• Press Clear to cancel an incorrect entry.
• Press Cancel to close the password pop-up window.
• Press Accept to accept the new password.
7. Repeat the previous step to enter the new password on the second service
password line.
8. Press OK to continue; CANCEL cancels the changes.
9. A pop-up window will display asking if you wish to save the changes. Press YES to
save the changes. Press NO to return to the system utilities menu; CANCEL
cancels the changes.
3C.7.7 Touchscreen Calibration
Follow the following procedure to calibrate the touchscreen:
Step Action
1. Remove the back connector cover from the touchscreen and connect a keyboard
to an available USB port, and then a press the Windows key.

2.
From the Start Menu, select the ALL apps icon, and then select the
HIDeGalaxTouchTool folder.
3.
Tap on the icon.
®
3C.7.7 Touchscreen Calibration (Cont)
Step Action
4. From the HIDeGalaxTouchTool V2.10.0.5626 window, click on the 25 Points
Linearization button.
5. A touch calibration screen will initalize. Proceed to touch each of the cross-hairs
within the time speciifed in order to properly caibrate the touchscreen.
6. Once the calibration is completed, the following screen will be displayed. Click OK
to save the calibration data.
7. Exit the Control Panel window to return back to the Main Menu screen.
cover.
3C.7.8 Data Link

®
This does not apply to Indico IQ at this time.
®
3C.7.9 Configuration Backup / Restore
Use these steps to access the Configuration Backup and Restore function. This function
backs up and restores the image receptor symbol assignment (Receptor Symbols) and the
auto-positioner symbol assignment (Auto Position Symbols) if applicable.
Step Action
1. From the system utilities menu, press Configuration Backup / Restore. A pop-up
window (figure 3C-16) will display showing the available backup files that are
stored on the touchscreen console's hard drive.
Pressing Close will exit the backup and restore menu.
2. Refer to the applicable subsections (following) for the procedures to back-up the
current receptor / auto-position symbols, to restore the current receptor / auto-
position symbols, and to upload and download receptor / auto-position symbols to
and from a USB flash drive.
Figure 3C-16: Configuration back-up and restore window
®
3C.7.9 Configuration Backup / Restore (Cont)
To back-up current receptor / auto-position symbols:

Step Action
1. Press Backup.
2. One or two keyboard(s) will display on the screen as described under APR Editor.
• Type in the name of the new backup file.
• Press ENTER when finished. The console will return to the configuration
backup / restore menu, and the backed up file will be displayed in the
Configuration Backup And Restore window.
To restore backed-up receptor / auto-position symbols:

Step Action
1. Select the desired backup file from the configuration backup and restore menu.
The selection will be highlighted.
2. Press Restore.
3. A pop-up window will briefly display indicating the file-restoration status. The file
restoration is finished when the pop-up window closes.
To delete a receptor / auto-position symbols file:

Step Action
1. Select the backup file to be deleted. The selection will be highlighted.
delete this file. Press YES to delete the file; NO cancels the deletion.
USB file transfer utility:

Step Action
1. The USB file transfer utility allows the configuration files on the touchscreen to be
saved to a USB flash drive, or saved configuration files on a USB flash drive to be
downloaded to the touchscreen.
2. In order to use this feature a USB flash drive is required.. On the touchscreen
console, connect the USB flash drive to an available USB port that is NOT a COMM
1 and/or a COMM 2 port.
Press .
After a brief auto-detection sequence where the touchscreen looks for the USB
flash drive, the USB File Transfer Utility window will open.
®
3C.7.9 Configuration Backup / Restore (Cont)
Figure 3C-17: USB File Transfer Utility window
Step Action
3. To copy a configuration file from the touchscreen to the USB flash drive, select the
desired file from the Touch Screen pane and press . Once the file is copied
successfully it will appear in the USB Device pane of the USB File Transfer
Utility window.
4. To copy a configuration file from a USB flash drive to the touchscreen select the
desired file from the USB Device pane and press . Once the file is copied
successfully it will appear in the Touch Screen pane of the USB File Transfer
Utility window.
5. When finished, press Close to exit.
®
3C.7.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore
CAUTION: The Software upgrade and restore procedure will restore the APR
parameters to their factory default values. The APR data should be backed-
up before performing this procedure and subsequently restored after the
procedure. This will ensure that any custom settings on the APR are
restored after the upgrade or restore is completed. To do this, follow the
steps under APR Backup and Restore section of this document.
Step Action
1 Note: Before upgrading or restoring the touchscreen console firmware, save
the APR data by performing an APR backup.
Gather the USB flash drive provided by CPI that contains the executable file for the
touchscreen console software installation. The USB flash drive (P/N 95036800) that
came with the manual can be used if the software becomes corrupted or if the
software boot sequence is not recoverable.
The files, setup.exe and StarqSetup.msi, will also be sent via a USB flash drive.
Ensure that the correct files are used for this procedure.
2 It is advisable to make a note of the current software version number displayed at
the lower right hand corner of the CPI touchscreen console Software Application
main menu for later comparison.
Note: All inputs to the screen from this point onwards should be done using the
stylus or your fingertips. For this procedure, a tap is equivalent to a mouse click. For
the purposes of this instruction, the words 'click', 'press', (and in some instances,
'open') is synonymous to a tap on the screen and a double-click means to tap twice
on the screen.
Before proceeding any further, make sure the touchscreen console is powered off
using the proper procedures as follows:
• If the current touchscreen console state is on the Windows desktop, power off
using the Windows Shutdown button and then turn off the generator from the
mini-console.
• If the current touchscreen console state is on the CPI Software Application,
navigate to the main menu, then use the System Shutdown button to initiate
the power-off sequence. Follow all on-screen procedures to turn off the
generator.
3 Proceed to switch the touchscreen console on (but not the generator) and wait until
the CPI touchscreen console Software Application is loaded.
Remove the back connector cover from the touchscreen and connect a keyboard to
an available USB port. Only use the USB ports on the back of the touchscreen.
Press the Esc key on the keyboard to exit from the CPI Software Application Main
Menu. The Windows desktop will be displayed.
4
Press the Start button and select Settings. On the Windows Settings, select
Apps to open the Apps & features window.
®
3C.7.10 Touchscreen Console Firmware Upgrade / Restore (Cont)
Step Action
5 Find and double click on the StarQ™ Console from the program list to uninstall this
program. Follow the on screen wizard to successfully remove the program. Close
the Apps & features window.
6 Note: If upgrading the firmware on the touchscreen, do not use the USB ports
located on the side of the touchscreen. Remove the back connector cover and
use one of the USB ports located on the back of the touchscreen.
Insert the USB flash drive, containing the touchscreen console software, gathered in
step 1 into a USB port.
Open the contents of the USB flash drive and double-click setup.exe to install the
CPI touchscreen console Software Application. Follow all instructions in the
installation wizard to complete the installation.
Note: You may need to confirm that this is a safe file to install if Windows requires
that confirmation.
Leave all the settings at default when installing the touchscreen console
software.
7 After installing the CPI touchscreen console Software Application, close all open
folders in Windows. Select the USB drive from the USB devices icon in the system
tray and press Eject to Safely Remove the Hardware before removing the USB
flash drive from the touchscreen console USB port.
8 Store the USB flash drive in a safe place such as in the service manual for future
use.
9 Disconnect the keyboard from the touchscreen and reinstall the back connector
cover.
10 Shutdown the touchscreen console using the Windows Shutdown button. Proceed
to turn on the touchscreen console again by pressing the power button. At this point
the touchscreen console should load the CPI touchscreen console Software
Application automatically. (You may also need to power up the generator at this
point.)
11 Locate the version of the software on the lower right hand corner of the CPI
touchscreen console Software Application main menu and compare with the one
obtained in step 2. If this is a software restore operation, the software versions
should be the same. If this is an update, the newly installed software version will be
higher than the previous version.
Note: It is recommended to perform a touchscreen calibration after upgrading the firmware.
3C.7.11 Generator License using Touchscreen
The license code enables options such as DAP, digital and other features in the generator.
Consult the factory to obtain a new license code if it is desired to enable new features.
When the new license code has been obtained, go to the System Utilities menu on the
touchscreen console and open GenWeb™. In GenWeb™, open the License Key
Configuration window and then enter the new license code. Refer to the GenWeb™ User’s
Guide supplement SUP90562700 for instructions on how open and use the license key
feature.
®
CPI Canada Inc. AEC Setup and Calibration 3D
CHAPTER 3D
AEC SETUP AND CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................... 3D-2

3D.2.0 WIRING THE AEC PICKUP DEVICE TO THE GENERATOR ....................................................................3D-2
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) .........................................................................................................3D-3
3D.2.2 AEC Board 734614 (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................3D-5
3D.2.3 AEC Board 737998 (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers)........................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ...........................................3D-12
3D.2.6 Pre-calibration Notes ...............................................................................................................................3D-16
3D.2.7 Required Test Equipment .......................................................................................................................3D-16
3D.3.0 INITIAL AEC SETUP ...................................................................................................................................3D-17
3D.3.1 AEC Setup using GenWeb™..................................................................................................................3D-18
3D.3.2 Membrane console setup........................................................................................................................3D-18
3D.4.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) .......................................................................................................3D-21
3D.5.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION .......................................................................................................3D-31
3D.6.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................................3D-32
3D.7.0 RLF COMPENSATION ...............................................................................................................................3D-35
3D.8.0 MULTIPLE SPOT EXPOSURE COMPENSATION ...................................................................................3D-38
3D.9.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) .........................................................................................................3D-39
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC) ..................................................................................................3D-42
3D.11.0 AEC USING A PMT .................................................................................................................................3D-43
3D.11.1 Setting the PMT high voltage for AEC ................................................................................................3D-43
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (DIGITAL APPLICATIONS) ..................................................................................3D-44
3D.12.1 AEC Setup for Digital Applications......................................................................................................3D-45
3D.12.2 AEC Calibration for Digital Acquisitions ..............................................................................................3D-48
3D.12.3 II Mag Compensation for Digital Acquisitions .....................................................................................3D-49
3D.12.4 AEC Calibration for DSA Acquisitions ................................................................................................3D-49
3D.12.5 II Mag Compensation for DSA Acquisitions .......................................................................................3D-50
3D.12.6 AEC Calibration for Cine Acquisitions ................................................................................................3D-50
3D.12.7 II Mag Compensation for Cine Acquisitions .......................................................................................3D-51
3D.13.0 AEC OVERVIEW AND BACKGROUND INFORMATION......................................................................3D-52
3D.13.1 Film/Screen Response vs. kV .............................................................................................................3D-52
3D.13.2 AEC Calibration Range .......................................................................................................................3D-53
3D.13.3 Multiple Spot Compensation ...............................................................................................................3D-54
3D.13.4 A Typical R&F Room ...........................................................................................................................3D-54
3D.14.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP....................................................................................................................3D-55
3D.14.1 AEC Setup Worksheet ........................................................................................................................3D-55
3D.14.2 AEC Pre-calibration Checks................................................................................................................3D-57
3D.14.3 AEC Chamber Installation ...................................................................................................................3D-58
3D.14.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) .................................................................................................3D-59
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-12 Rev. E Page 3D-1
3D AEC Setup and Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the interfacing, setup and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are
®
used in Indico IQ X-ray generators. Depending on the application and the AEC board that is fitted, the
following types of inputs may be used:
MEDIA AEC CHAMBER / PICKUP TYPE

Film Ion or solid-state AEC chamber.
Digital imaging systems PMT or photo diode (universal AEC board only).
THIS X-RAY GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH SPECIFIC AEC

DEVICE(S). REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL (FOR
HARD COPY MANUALS) OR INCLUDED ON THE CD (FOR SOFT COPY MANUALS) FOR THE
FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF THIS GENERATOR.
A SET OF AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRICES IS LOCATED AT THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL (FOR
HARD COPY MANUALS) OR INCLUDED ON THE CD (FOR SOFT COPY MANUALS). EACH AEC
BOARD HAS A CORRESPONDING AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIX, I.E. FOR AEC BOARD 734614-XX,
USE AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRIX SUP73461400.
THE AEC COMPATIBILITY MATRICES LIST THE AEC CHAMBERS / PREAMPLIFIERS THAT EACH
VERSION OF AEC BOARD IS COMPATIBLE WITH, AND THEY ALSO SHOW THE I/O PIN
CONNECTIONS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS, AS WELL AS RELATED NOTES.
This chapter contains background information that is relevant to AEC operation. This is located at the back
of this chapter, and should be understood before beginning AEC calibration.
3D.2.0 WIRING THE AEC PICKUP DEVICE TO THE GENERATOR
1. The AEC boards in figures 3D-1 to 3D-4 are compatible with various solid-state and ion chambers.
The universal AEC board, figure 3D-5, is required to interface with a PMT or photo diode or a
combination of AEC devices (i.e. solid-state and ion chambers and / or PMT / photo diode).
2. Connect the AEC device to the AEC board as per 3D.2.1 to 3D.2.5. Supplementary information is in
the AEC compatibility matrixes located near the front of this manual.
3. Ensure that AEC cables are not routed near electrically “noisy” cables such as the stator cables in
order to minimize induced noise on the AEC cables.
4. Note the following if you are using a PMT or photo diode for AEC:
• If you are using a PMT for ABS and AEC control, refer to the section ABS PICKUP
INSTALLATION / WIRING in chapter 3E. The figure Wiring a PMT for ABS and AEC control
shows the PMT connections to the generator control board for ABS control and the PMT
connections to the AEC board for AEC control during digital acquisitions.
• If you are using a PMT for AEC control only, refer to 3D.2.5.
• If you are using a photo diode for AEC control, refer to 3D.2.5.
®
Page 3D-2 Rev. E Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-12
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with the makes and models of solid-state chambers listed in
AEC compatibility matrix SUP73799200.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 7 pin in-line connectors (J11 to J14),
depending on the application.
Figure 3D-1: Dedicated solid-state AEC board (assembly 737992)
NOTE: WHEN PERFORMING THE INITIAL AEC SETUP (SECTION 3D.4.0), THE CHAMBER TYPE
MUST BE SET TO ION FOR THIS BOARD.
AEC board input assignment (example only, actual receptor assignments may vary):
• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
®
3D.2.1 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) (Cont)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:

• R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
Tables 3D-1 and 3D-2 show the pin-outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 7 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-1.
FUNCTION PIN
Anode, right (refer to note below) 3
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 4
Anode, middle 1
Cathode, middle 6
Anode, left (refer to note below) 2
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 5
Ground Connector shell
Table 3D-1: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector J1 to J4
FUNCTION PIN
Anode, right (refer to note below) 1
Cathode, right (refer to note below) 2
Anode, middle 3
Cathode, middle 4
Anode, left (refer to note below) 5
Cathode, left (refer to note below) 6
Ground 7
Table 3D-2: Pin outs for 7 pin in-line connector J11 to J14
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields from J1 to J4 and J11 to J14 as per the table below.
CHANNEL LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS AS PER LEFT / RIGHT FIELDS SWAPPED RELATIVE TO
TABLES 3D-1, 3D-2 TABLES 3D-1, 3D-2
1 Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 1-2 (N) Jumper JW1, JW2 pins 2-3 (R)
®
3D.2.2 AEC Board 734614 (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with the makes and models of ion chambers listed in AEC
compatibility matrix SUP73461400.
This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J11 to J14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to J4),
depending on the application.
CPI CANADA INC Made in Canada

AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER R79
J14
JW2 JW1 J5
J4
J13
JW4 JW3
J3
J12
JW6 JW5
J2
J11
R11 R12 R13 R14
JW8 JW7
J1 R1 R2 R3 R4
ML_IONBD.CDR
Figure 3D-2: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 734614)
• Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).

®
3D.2.2 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) (Cont)
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
• R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.
R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.
Tables 3D-3 and 3D-4 show the pin-outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-2. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID
ionization chambers. However, the installer must verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s)
being used.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+300 VDC output 1 Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
Left field select (refer to note below) 2
Middle field select 3
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-3: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J11 to J14)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14 as per the table below.
TABLE 3D-3 TABLE 3D-3
1 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 1-2 Jumper JW7, JW8 pins 2-3
®
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
+ or - 300 VDC output 2 only provided on configurations of this board
+45 VDC output 3 designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
+12 VDC output 4 these voltage outputs.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 +12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
Ground 7 the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
Reset / start 8 the ion chamber.
Right field select 9
Left field select 11
Chamber output 12
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector (J1 to J4)
®
3D.2.3 AEC Board 737998 (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with the makes and models of ion chambers listed in AEC
compatibility matrix SUP73799800.
This board is fitted with 9 pin D connectors J1 to J4.
Figure 3D-3: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board (assembly 737998)
• Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).

®
Table 3D-5 shows the pin-outs for the 9 pin D connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-3. The 9 pin
connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization chambers. However, the installer must verify
compatibility of the pin-outs with the chamber(s) being used.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

Not used 1
Left field select (refer to note below) 2 See note below.
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector (J1 to J4)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4 as per the table below.
®
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with the makes and models of three-of-five-field ion chambers
listed in AEC compatibility matrix SUP73938900.
This board is fitted with 15 pin D connectors J1 and J2.
3 OF 5 FIELD ION AEC BOARD

CPI CANADA INC.
J1 J2
J5
JW7
JW8
JW5
JW6
R11
R12
Figure 3D-4: Three-of-five-field ion chamber AEC board (assembly 739389)

NOTE: THE THREE-OF-FIVE FIELD ION AEC CHAMBER USES ONLY AEC CHANNELS 1 AND 2.
ANY RECEPTORS NOT USED FOR AEC OPERATION SHOULD BE PROGRAMMED EITHER
TO AEC OFF, AEC CHANNEL 1, OR AEC CHANNEL 2. DO NOT PROGRAM ANY
RECEPTORS FOR AEC CHANNEL 3 OR 4, DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE AEC BOARD TO
NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY.
AEC board input assignment:

• Ch 1 = J1.
• Ch 2 = J2.

®
3D.2.4 AEC Board (5-Field Ion Chambers) (Cont)
Table 3D-6 shows the pin-outs for the 15 pin D connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-4. The 15 pin
connectors are compatible with some models of three-of-five-field AID ion chambers.
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

Not used 1
Left field select (refer to note below) 2 See note below.
Reset / start 4
Chamber output 5
Right field select (refer to note below) 6 See note below.
-12 VDC output 7
+12 VDC output 8
Ground 9
Not used 10
Portrait 11
Not used 12
Inverted 13
Not used 14
Not used 15
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 15 pin D connector (J1 and J2)
NOTE:
Jumpers JW5 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 and J2 as per the table below.
NOTE: THE FIELD COMPENSATION VALUES (R FIELD COMP, C FIELD COMP, L FIELD COMP)
IN AEC SETUP MENU 2 MUST ALL BE SET TO 0. THE AEC FIELD BALANCE MUST BE
DONE AS PER A.I.D.’s RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE.
®
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation)
The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and it can be configured to be compatible
with most AEC pickups on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply for a
photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the
connectors to interface to the AEC pickup devices.
R94 R4 R93 R3 R92 R2 R91 R1
FILE: ML_UAEC2.CDR
Figure 3D-5: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation
(assembly 734654 consisting of PWBA 734630 and 728399)
In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which
contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted
from its actual position.
AEC board input / output assignment (example only, actual receptor assignments may vary):
• Ch 1 = J1 - Table radiographic Bucky.
• Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical wall Bucky or digital applications.
• Ch 3 = J3 - Spot film device or digital applications.
• Ch 4 = J4 - Digital applications.
• J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used).

®
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) (Cont)
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
Potentiometers R10, R19 and R24 adjust the output of the +300 / +500 VDC (ion chamber) and -1000 VDC
(PMT) high voltage supply. The +300 / +500 VDC outputs are available on J1 to J4 as per tables 3D-7 and
3D-8, and –1000 VDC is available on J7.
Logic circuits on the AEC interface board are connected to the AEC channel select lines. These switch the
potentiometers that adjust the high voltage into the circuit as follows:
• R10 is active when no AEC channel is selected, i.e. during ABS operation. The adjustment of this
potentiometer is described in chapter 3E.
• R19 is active when AEC channel 4 is selected. Channel 4 is typically used for digital applications. The
AEC pickup will usually be a PMT or photo diode. The adjustment of this pot is described later in this
chapter, under AEC USING A PMT.
• R24 is active when AEC channels 1, 2 or 3 are selected. Channels 1 to 3 may be used for film-based
AEC using an ion chamber or solid-state chamber, or they may be used for digital applications using a
PMT or photo diode, or any combination of the above.
• If AEC channels 1, 2 and 3 are all used with ion chambers, and all three channels require the same ion
chamber bias voltage, R24 should be adjusted to set the nominal +300 / +500 VDC outputs to the
required bias voltage.
• If AEC channel 1, 2 or 3 is used for digital applications using a PMT, R24 will need to be adjusted to
supply the required PMT voltage during AEC operation on those channels. The adjustment of this pot
for setting the PMT high voltage is described later in this chapter, under AEC USING A PMT. In this
case, the +300 / +500 VDC supply cannot be optimized for ion chamber use. If an ion chamber is
connected to any of the remaining channels, it must have a built-in high voltage bias supply.
Tables 3D-7 and 3D-8 show the pin outs for the 12 pin connectors J1 to J4 on the universal AEC board. The
pins on J7 are all connected in parallel, thus the PMT high voltage may be taken from any of the pins on that
connector.
®
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 +500, +300, +45 VDC outputs are provided for
+300 VDC output 2 ion chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC
+45 VDC output 3 outputs are typically used as the DC supply for
+12 VDC output 4 a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber.
-12 VDC output 5
-24 VDC output 6 The start command, and left, middle, right
Ground 7 field select outputs are jumper configured to
Reset / start 8 be active high or active low as per the AEC
Right field select 9 chamber requirements. The signal input is
Middle field select 10 jumper configured to accept a positive going
Left field select 11 or negative going ramp or DC signal as per
Chamber output 12 the AEC chamber output.
Table 3D-7: Ion chamber connections
FUNCTION PIN NOTE

+500 VDC output 1 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-12 VDC output 5 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
-24 VDC output 6 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Ground 7 Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the
Reset / start 8 common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8.
Right 9 Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle
Middle 10 to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT.
Left 11 Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8.
Chamber output 12 Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Table 3D-8: Solid-state AEC chamber connections
®
J4-7
47K
J4-12
PMT
J3-7
47K *
J3-12
J2-7
47K *
J2-12
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3 PMT H.V.
J7-4
UNIVERSAL AEC BOARD

Indico200_010.cdr
Figure 3D-6: PMT connections for AEC only
+12 V
J4-4
-12 V
J4-5
COMM
PHOTO DIODE J4-7
47K
J4-12
J3-7
47K *
J3-12
J2-7
47K *
J2-12
UNIVERSAL AEC BOARD

Indico200_011.cdr
Figure 3D-7: Photo diode connections for AEC
* Conventional R&F systems typically use AEC channel 4 for digital acquisitions and possibly AEC channel
3 for DSA acquisitions. For special procedures generators, AEC channel 4 is typically used for cine
acquisitions, channel 3 for DSA acquisitions and channel 2 for digital acquisitions. The PMT connections to
AEC channels 2 and 3 should be omitted if not needed for digital acquisitions, leaving these inputs available
for conventional AEC chambers, if required.
®
3D.2.6 Pre-calibration Notes
This section contains information that must be understood and confirmed before proceeding with AEC
calibration.
CAUTION: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO

AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE AND AN “AEC
DEVICE ERROR” MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED IF THE RAMP VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4%
OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME REACHES 20% OF THE
SELECTED BACK UP TIME.
• When using a PMT or photodiode for AEC, there is normally no need to calibrate all the kV break points.
It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint calibration value at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the
calibration values should be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the acquired digital images.
• During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the exposures
are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
• During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
• Ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields on the AEC pickup device before
placing the absorbers.
• The recommended absorber is Lexan. Water of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber. This
should be in a plastic container of uniform thickness.
• Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
• All components and assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those that will be used during
procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room.
• The generator must be known to be calibrated before proceeding.
• Care must be exercised when using table Buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 to 65 kV. This will adversely affect AEC operation.
• During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the
input signal level to the AEC board is too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at
the output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the
active AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V,
reduce the input signal level as required.
3D.2.7 Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for AEC calibration.

• Lexan or equivalent (or water) absorbers in various thicknesses. Water should be in a plastic container
of uniform thickness.
• Radiation dosimeter (for digital applications).
• A supply of film in each film speed that will be calibrated.
• A cassette with intensifying screen in each speed that will be calibrated.
NOTE: The values and settings of the screenshots on the membrane console shown in this
chapter are for illustration purposes. The actual values and settings should be set
according to your specific generator configuration and setup requirements.
®
3D.3.0 INITIAL AEC SETUP
NOTE: SOME OF THE FEATURES DESCRIBED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE OPTIONAL. DISREGARD
THE SECTIONS THAT DO NOT APPLY.
The basic AEC defaults must be set before proceeding with AEC setup and calibration. This section
describes the initial AEC setup procedure.
Definitions of AEC SETUP menu items applicable to the initial AEC setup.
LEFT FIELD Enables or disables the ability to select the left, center, or right AEC fields.
CENTER FIELD Membrane console:
RIGHT FIELD YES: The selected field is enabled.
NO: The selected field is disabled.
CHAMBER TYPE Selects the AEC chamber type.
Membrane console:
0: Ion chamber.
1: Solid-state chamber.
2: Apelem.
MEDIA Selects the media type for the selected AEC channel.
FILM The image will be recorded on film.
DIGITAL The imaging medium will be an I.I. or flat panel detector.
IF MEDIA = FILM
FILM SCREEN 1 Enables or disables the ability to select film screen 1, film screen 2, or film
screen 3.
FILM SCREEN 2
YES: The selected film screen is enabled.
FILM SCREEN 3
NO: The selected film screen is disabled.
R FIELD COMP Allows left, center, and right field balance. This applies to solid-state AEC
chambers only. The calibration procedure is described in the section AEC
C FIELD COMP CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY).
L FIELD COMP
F/S 1 GAIN This function is not used.
(Adjusts the film screen gain for film screens 1, 2 and 3).
F/S 2 GAIN
F/S 3 GAIN
IF MEDIA = DIGITAL
DIGITAL RAD Selects the AEC calibration curve (kV vs. AEC reference) that is assigned to the
selected AEC channel.
The available selections are curves 1, 2, or 3.

DR GAIN This function is not in use. (Adjusts the digital rad gain if digital media is in use).
®
3D.3.1 AEC Setup using GenWeb™
The GenWeb™ setup instruction is on a separate documentation. For instructions on using GenWeb™,
please refer to the accompanying GenWeb™ manual.
3D.3.2 Membrane console setup

If you are using a membrane console, use these steps to access the AEC SETUP menus.
Figure 3D-8 : AEC setup menus
®
3D.3.2 Membrane console setup (Cont)
Step Action
1. Enter into the programming mode as described in chapter 3C.
2. When the GENERATOR SETUP menu is displayed, select GEN CONFIGURATION.
3. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select AEC SETUP.
The AEC SETUP menus that relate to the AEC setup function for the membrane console are shown below.
* AEC SETUP *
AEC CHANNEL 1
AEC CHANNEL 2
AEC CHANNEL 3
AEC CHANNEL 4
EXIT MENU
* AEC SETUP-C1 *
LEFT FIELD: YES CHAMBER TYPE: 0
CENTER FIELD: YES MEDIA: DIGITAL
RIGHT FIELD: YES +
-
<< MENU >>
if MEDIA = FILM
* AEC SETUP-C1 *
FILM SCREEN 1: YES C FIELD COMP: 0%
FILM SCREEN 2: YES L FIELD COMP: 0%
FILM SCREEN 3: YES +
R FIELD COMP: 0% -
<< MENU >>
* AEC SETUP-C1 *
F/S 1 GAIN: 10
F/S 2 GAIN: 10
F/S 3 GAIN: 10 +
-
<< MENU >>
®
3D.3.2 Membrane console setup (Cont)
if MEDIA = DIGITAL
* AEC SETUP-C1 *
DIGITAL RAD: 1 II CINE COMP
DR GAIN: 10
II SPOT COMP +
II DSA COMP -
<< MENU
Use these steps to perform the initial AEC setup. Refer to the definitions in the previous table.
Step Action
4. From the main AEC SETUP menu, select the AEC channel that is to be programmed.
5. Select LEFT FIELD. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
6. Repeat the above for the center and right fields.
Select the center field only for digital applications.

7. Select CHAMBER TYPE. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired AEC chamber type.
Select 0 (Ion) for digital applications.
SELECT ION IF USING SOLID STATE AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737992.
8. Select MEDIA. Toggle the button to select FILM or DIGITAL.
9. Press >>.
Steps 10 to 14 apply if MEDIA = FILM
10. Select FILM SCREEN 1. Toggle the button to select YES or NO.
11. Repeat the above for film screen 2 and film screen 3.
12. Select R FIELD COMP. Use the + or – buttons to enter the value 0%. This may be optimized in
a later step if using a solid-state AEC chamber.
13. Repeat the above for C FIELD COMP and L FIELD COMP.
14. Repeat the applicable steps in this section for the remaining AEC channels.
15. Press << three times to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Steps 16 to 18 apply if MEDIA = DIGITAL
16. Select DIGITAL RAD. Use the + or – buttons to select the AEC calibration curve that is to be
assigned to the current AEC channel.
The AEC calibration curves will be established during the AEC calibration procedure.
17. Repeat the applicable steps in this section for the remaining AEC channels.
18. Press << three times to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
®
3D.4.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)
This section describes the AEC calibration procedure for table Bucky with film.
CTM
O.T.
WALL
BUCKY Absorber
SID
40 in(100cm)
Grid
AEC
Chamber
BUCKY
Cassette Tray
FILE: ML_IMREC
TYPICAL TABLE BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR
Figure 3D-9: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration
Follow the steps below to perform the table Bucky AEC calibration.
Step Action
1. If the AEC board being calibrated has short AEC time compensation potentiometers, the
short exposure time compensation must first be disabled.
To do this, adjust all short AEC exposure time compensation pots to zero by turning
each of these potentiometers fully clockwise. These are multi-turn potentiometers, and
must be turned by as much as 25 turns to reach the zero-ohms limit.
Failure to preset these pots will result in difficulty in performing AEC calibration.
2. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-9.
3. Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
4. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
5. Place the absorber with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-10 in the X-ray field, ensuring
that the radiation is completely blocked by the absorber.
®
(This page is intentionally left blank)
®
Figure 3D-10: AEC Calibration Menus
®
®
3D.4.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) (Cont)
The AEC CALIBRATION menus that relate to kV breakpoint calibration for the membrane console are
shown below.
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1 DIGITAL RAD 1
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
* AEC CAL, F/S1 *

50KV: 84.0 85KV: 42.8
55KV: 78.0 95KV: 38.0
65KV: 66.0 +
75KV: 54.0 -
<< MENU >>
* AEC CAL, F/S1 *

110KV: 34.0
130KV: 28.0
RLF COMPENSATION +
MULT. SPOT COMP: 0% -
<< MENU
Step Action
6 Ensure that under RECEPTOR SETUP, (GENERATOR SETUP>GEN
CONFIGURATION), each receptor has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer
to Receptor Setup in chapter 3C.
Note: Press >> and << buttons as necessary to be able to access the menus indicated
in the next steps.
7. In RECEPTOR SETUP, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC BACKUP MS
are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate the exposure.
Note: The purpose of the AEC backup timer is to prevent excessive patient radiation in
the event, there is a failure of the AEC system, operator error, or patient positioning
error. When selecting the AEC backup time mAs and/or ms values, ensure that the
settings meet the following requirements:
• The AEC exposure will not be terminated prematurely, thus creating an
underexposed image.
• The backup timer settings will limit the patient over exposure to the dose values
specified in any applicable regulations and will not result in a reportable over
exposure.
®
8. In RECEPTOR SETUP, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This will ensure
that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from the
previous receptor.
9. The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed.
10 In AEC CALIBRATION (GENERATOR SETUP>GEN CONFIGURATION), select FILM
SCREEN 1 (the slowest film /screen combination).
11 Select 75kV breakpoint and press the + and – button to adjust the value to 45.0.
CAUTION: DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE

SELECTED TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION
WHEN REPEATING EXPOSURES. MOST X-RAY TUBE MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER MINUTE.
NOTE: BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
FILM SPEED mAs @ 75 kV

100 16
200 8
400 4
800 2
Table 3D-9: Film speed vs. mAs @ 75 kV
The mAs values noted in the above table represent the approximate desired mAs at an SID of 40 in.
(100 cm), using a grid with a 12:1 ratio. All measurements were done with HVL = 3 mm Al @ 75 kV.
Step Action
12 Select image receptor button 1, (Table, with Bucky)
13. Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-10, remembering
that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first (example 320 mA for
100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
14. Confirm that the requested kV = 75 kV, then make an exposure and note the mAs. This must be
measured via an external mAs meter connected to the mA test jacks on the HV module.
15. Referring to table 3D-9, select the target mAs required for the film speed being calibrated i.e.
approximately 16 mAs at 75 kV for 100 speed film.
16. Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board while taking exposures until the mAs
noted in the previous step is obtained.
17. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
®
18. Measure the optical density. The desired value should have previously been recorded in a copy
of table 3D-14.
19. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, readjust the AEC gain pot to increase or decrease
the density, and then repeat the previous two steps.
20. Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, calibration number and O.D. in a
copy of table 3D-11.
21. Vary the absorber thickness and confirm that the mAs changes accordingly.
Step Action
STEPS 21 TO 24 APPLY TO SOLID-STATE AEC CHAMBERS ONLY
22. Note the mAs with the center AEC field only selected. Record this value.
23. Select the left field and note the mAs. Compare this value to the value noted for the center field.
24. If the field balance is not acceptable, adjust the left field compensation value up or down as
described in section 3D.3.2, Membrane console setup, such that the left field matches the
center field.
Do not adjust the center field (C) compensation value.

25. Repeat steps 22 and 23 for the right field.
For each breakpoint in the remainder of this section, start with the approximate mAs as per table
3D-10. After that mAs is achieved, a film must be exposed and the O.D. verified. If the O.D. is not the
desired value, further iterations may be required to achieve the desired optical density.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED.
FURTHER DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE MADE BY ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION
VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.
®
100 speed film screen

Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 20 cm H2O 16 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
55 kV 15 cm H2O 25 mAs 320 mA 320 mAs (MAX)
110 kV 25 cm H2O 6.3 mAs 200 mA 320 mAs (MAX)

Break point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kV knee pt. 20 cm H2O 8 mAs 250 mA 250 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 4 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
55 kVp 15 cm H2O 6.3 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 10 mAs 200 mA 200 mAs (MAX)

Break Point Absorber mAs Generator mA Generator BUT mAs
75 kVp knee pt. 20 cm H2O 2 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
50 kVp 15 cm H2O 5 mAs 100 mA 120 mAs (MAX)
Table 3D-10: Target breakpoint calibration factors
NOTE: For SID’s other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the mAs values in table 3D-10 by the factor [new
2
SID / 40 in. (100 cm)]
®
Step Action
26. Change the absorber thickness as specified in table 3D-10 for the 55 kV breakpoint. As before,
ensure that the absorber fully blocks the X-ray field.
Note: If you are using a membrane console, you have to use the >> and << button if you need to
access and change the required breakpoints
27. Set the requested kV to 55 kV.
28. Make an exposure and note the mAs. Use mA values as specified for the 55 kV breakpoint in
table 3D-10.
29. Adjust the 55 kV calibration number such that the actual mAs is equal to the target mAs at 55 kV
as per table 3D-10.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
30. Load the test cassette with fresh film and insert it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
31. Measure the optical density.
32. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, readjust the 55 kV calibration number, then repeat
the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
33. Once the desired density is achieved, record the value in a copy of table 3D-11.
Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained
AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.
FILM SCREEN 1 SPEED =

#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV mAs = CAL. NO. = O.D. =

®

Table 3D-11: Breakpoint calibration worksheet
Step Action
34. Repeat steps 26 to 32 for the remaining breakpoints: 50 kV, 65 kV, 110 kV, 130 kV, 85 kV and
95 kV. Do the breakpoint calibration in the stated order.
The 50 kV and 130 kV breakpoints only need to be calibrated if these kV ranges are used with
AEC. Refer to the comments below.
50 kV: At approximately 50 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low for
practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky. Unless special techniques are used
which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55 kV calibration number into the 50 kV
breakpoint.
130 kV: Unless special high kV techniques are used which require the 130 kV range, simply
enter the 110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint.
35. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
36. Repeat steps 10 to 34 for Film Screen 2, except:
When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 2, DO NOT adjust the AEC board gain
pot. mAs adjustments for film screen 2 at 75 kV must only be made by varying the 75 kV
breakpoint calibration numbers.
Note that film screen 2 must be the next highest film speed after film screen 1.
38. Repeat steps 10 to 34 for Film Screen 3, except:
When calibrating the 75 kV breakpoint for film screen 3, DO NOT adjust the AEC board gain
pot. mAs adjustments for film screen 3 at 75 kV must only be made by varying the 75 kV
breakpoint calibration numbers.
Note that film screen 3 must be the highest film speed.
®
3D.5.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
Follow the steps below to perform the short AEC exposure time compensation.
Step Action
THESE STEPS ONLY APPLY IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS
ARE REQUIRED, AND THE AEC BOARD HAS SHORT AEC TIME ADJUSTMENT POTS.
1. Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
2. Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select 75 kV.
3. Set the mA per table 3D-10 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per table
3D-10 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
4. Make an exposure and confirm the mAs readings as previously recorded in table 3D-11.
5. Increase the mA such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 10 ms.
6. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the
mAs is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4).
7. Increase the mA again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to approximately 6 ms (but
not less).
8. Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such that the
mAs is approximately the same as it was in step 4.
9. The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer exposure
times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot at 75 kV for the AEC channel
being calibrated to restore the mAs values to the values previously recorded in table 3D-11.
Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per table 3D-10 when readjusting the
AEC gain pot.
10. Using 75 kV exposures, films should be exposed and developed and the O.D. checked at AEC
exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film density is not
acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be necessary to tweak the
adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and the AEC gain pot by repeating
steps 3 to 8.
11. Repeat steps 1 to 10 for AEC channel to be short AEC time compensated.
12. Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
®
3D.6.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION
Please note the following points regarding density calibration:
• Up to eight density-plus and eight density-minus steps are available. If ± 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be inactivated per the procedure below. For example, if only
± 5 density steps are desired, then density steps ± 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.
• Once the desired number of ± density steps is known, the relative minimum and maximum mAs values
must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal mAs
(dose) and the maximum density step will typically double (100% increase) the nominal mAs (dose).
The nominal mAs is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-11.
• The relative mAs change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum mAs as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
• The relative mAs change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided by
the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of density
plus steps. This will yield the required mAs increment for each density minus step and for each density
plus step respectively.
For ± 8 density steps, this gives a mAs decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25% per
step = 50% mAs at -8 density) or a mAs increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5% per
step = 100% mAs increase at +8 density).
Refer to table 3D-12 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the mAs decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the mAs increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the mAs decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the mAs
increase is 20% per step.
®
3D.6.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)
Density Calibration number (- 8 density = Density Calibration number (- 5 density =

step half the dose, +8 density = double step half the dose, +5 density =
the dose) double the dose)
-8 50
-7 44
-6 38
-5 31 -5 50
-4 25 -4 40
-3 19 -3 30
-2 13 -2 20
-1 6 -1 10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
+1 13 +1 20
+2 25 +2 40
+3 38 +3 60
+4 50 +4 80
+5 63 +5 99
+6 75
+7 88
+8 99
Table 3D-12: Example density values
The DENS. SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* DENS. SETUP *
-8: ---
-7: ---
-6: --- +
-5: 62% -
<< MENU >>
* DENS. SETUP *
-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25% +
-1: 12% -
<< MENU >>
®
* DENS. SETUP *
+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37% +
+4: 50% -
<< MENU >>
* DENS. SETUP *
+5: 62%
+6: ---
+7: --- +
+8: --- -
<< MENU RETURN
Follow the steps below to perform AEC density calibration.
Step Action
1. Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-10) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is completely blocked by the absorber.
2. In the following steps for the membrane console, you will need to scroll back and forth between
the DENSITY SETUP (GEN CONFIGURATION>AEC CALIBRATION) menus using the >> and
<< buttons in order to access the required density steps.
Select DENSITY SETUP.
4. Referring to table 3D-11, note the mAs at 75 kV for film screen 1. This is the mAs required to
achieve 0 density.
5. Determine the highest density minus step to be used.
If there will be unused density steps, i.e. –8, -7, -6, these density steps must be disabled by
setting the values to --.
6. Select the highest density minus step that will be used, i.e. –5. Use the + or – buttons to set the
calibration number for that step to the desired relative density value (example 50, this will give
approximately 1/2 the density).
7. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured mAs is approximately the desired value.
8. Select the next density step (i.e. - 4) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that step.
Then repeat steps 7 and 8.
9. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step.
®
Step Action
10. Determine the highest density plus step to be used. If there will be unused density steps, i.e. +8,
+7, +6, these density steps must be disabled by setting them to --. This is done by using the –
button to scroll down until the -- symbol is displayed.
11. Select the highest density plus step that will be used, i.e. +5. Use the + or – buttons to set the
calibration number for that step to the desired relative density value (example 99, this will give
approximately double the density).
12. Make an exposure and confirm that the measured mAs is approximately the desired value.
13. If the measured mAs is not as expected, adjust the calibration number and repeat the previous
step.
14. Select the next lowest density step (i.e. +4) and enter the appropriate calibration number for that
step. Then repeat steps 12 and 13.
15. Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step.
16. Press << or RETURN as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
3D.7.0 RLF COMPENSATION
The following points should be noted regarding RLF compensation. RLF compensation is normally only
needed if special techniques are used that result in AEC exposures greater than 100 ms.
• If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at
longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To
compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures.
This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times. RLF
compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms and 1000-1500 ms) as shown
below.
The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your
installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following.
• Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-11, the AEC reference voltage is
constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms.
• At 50 ms, RLF compensation = 10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10
= 1.10 units.
• At 500 ms, RLF compensation = 20% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X
1.20 = 1.32 units.
• At 1000 ms, RLF compensation = 30% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase
by 30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then
1.32 X 1.30 = 1.72 units
• The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to the limit of the
backup timer.
• The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph shown.
®
3D.7.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
Figure 3D-11: Example RLF compensation curve
The RLF COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* RLF COMP, F/S1 *

50MSEC: 0%
500MSEC: 0%
1000MSEC: 0% +
-
<<
Follow the steps below to perform RLF compensation.
Step Action
1. Place the absorber with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-10 in the X-ray field, ensuring
that the radiation is completely blocked by the absorber.
2. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu, select the slowest film / screen to compensate. This will
normally be film screen 1.
3. Press >>.
4. Select RLF COMPENSATION.
5. From the RLF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
7. Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film.
8. Make an exposure and adjust the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 50 ms.
9. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor.
®
3D.7.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
10. Make an exposure using the techniques per step 6. Record the mAs, then develop the film.
11. Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was recorded during AEC calibration.
12. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500 ms.
13. Make an exposure using the techniques per the previous step. Record the mAs.
14. Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 10%.
15. Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and
develop the film.
16. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 11, adjust the 50 ms RLF
compensation value as appropriate.
17. Repeat the previous two steps until the required O.D. is obtained.
18. Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000 ms.
19. Select 500MSEC, and set the value to 0.
20. Make an exposure using the techniques per step 18. Record the mAs.
22. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and
develop the film.
23. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 11, adjust the 500 ms RLF offset value
as appropriate.
The following steps only apply if techniques are used resulting in AEC exposure times
greater than approximately 1500 ms.
25. Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of approximately 1500
ms.
26. Select 1000ms, and set the value to 0.
27. Make an exposure using the techniques per step 25. Record the mAs.
29. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an exposure and
develop the film.
30. If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 11, adjust the 1000 ms RLF offset
value as appropriate.
32. Repeat steps 2 to 31 for film screen 2 and film screen 3 if required.
33. Press << three times to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
®
3D.8.0 MULTIPLE SPOT EXPOSURE COMPENSATION
AEC CAL menu 2 for the membrane console with the MULT. SPOT COMP function is shown below.
* AEC CAL, F/S1 *

110KV: 34.0
130KV: 28.0
RLF COMPENSATION +
MULT. SPOT COMP: 0% -
<< MENU
• Multiple-spot exposure compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In
this mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of
scatter and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known
as multiple-spot exposure compensation.
• In order to enable multiple-spot exposure compensation, the R & F table must provide an output that
activates this function when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot exposure input on the
room I/O board is a dedicated input in the I/O setup standard configuration (Input 7, TB13 pins 3 and 4 by
default) and is installer-programmable in the I/O setup advanced configuration. Refer to I/O Setup in
chapter 3C for details.
Follow the steps below to perform multiple-spot exposure compensation.

Step Action
2. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu, select the slowest film / screen to compensate. This will
normally be film screen 1.
3. Press >>.
4. Select MULT. SPOT COMP:
5. Set the MULT SPOT COMP value to 0% using the + or - buttons.
7. Select mA appropriate for the film speed per table 3D-10.
8. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the spot film device.
9. Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film.
10. Verify that the film is evenly exposed and that the O.D. is the desired value.
11. Enable the spot film device multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the
mAs.
12. Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure.
®
3D.8.0 MULTIPLE SPOT EXPOSURE COMPENSATION (Cont)
Step Action
13. If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multi-spot
compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as appropriate.
14. Repeat steps 7 to 14 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures.
15. Repeat steps 2 to 13 for film screen 2 and film screen 3 if required.
16. Press << twice to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
3D.9.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)
CTM
WALL
BUCKY Absorber
O.T.
FRONT VIEW OF
WALL BUCKY
72 in(180cm)
TYPICAL WALL BUCKY IMAGE RECEPTOR
Figure 3D-12: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration
Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration:

• If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).
• If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should
ideally be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.
®
3D.9.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) (Cont)
NOTE: SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF.
A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH
150 LINE PAIR / INCH (STATIONARY).
TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND PROCESSING.
Grid Absorption
The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating the mAs if required: The
percentages listed are approximate.
A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13 cm)
from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18%
from center:
from center:
from center:
from center:
from center:
®
NOTE: BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY PREVIOUSLY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM
/ SCREEN COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE
REMAINING IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY
ESTABLISHED FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF A SPARE FILM / SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY USE, IT IS
SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE BE
ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD
BE USED FOR 40 IN. (100 CM) SID’S WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED
FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE USED WITH
THE SPARE FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180 CM) SID’S.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A SEPARATE
DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE ASSIGNED TO
THE 72 IN. (180CM) SID.
Follow the steps below to perform the wall Bucky AEC calibration.
Step Action
Steps 1 to 15 apply only if using one receptor select button for both SID’s, using
previously calibrated film screens.
1. Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-12. Use SID 72 in. (180 cm).
2. Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the image
receptor.
3. Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the central ray
remains centered relative to the image receptor.
5. Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
6. Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, and then select the appropriate mA for
that film screen per table 3D-10 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV, large focus,
and center field.
7. Make an exposure and note the mAs.
8. Referring to table 3D-11, note the previously established mAs at the 75 kV breakpoint for the
film speed being calibrated.
9. Adjust the gain potentiometer on the AEC board for the channel that is connected to the wall
Bucky while taking exposures until the mAs noted in the previous step is obtained.
DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR ANY PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED CHANNELS.
®
10. Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
11. Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of table
3D-14.
12. If the measured O.D. is not the desired value, adjust the gain pot to increase or decrease the
density, then repeat the previous two steps. Do not readjust the kV breakpoints that were
previously calibrated.
13. Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 10 to 12. Adjust the gain pot if necessary to
achieve an acceptable compromise between both SID’s.
14. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
15. Press << as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu
Steps 16 to 21 apply only if using two receptor select buttons (one for each SID), using
one previously calibrated film screen and one uncalibrated film screen.
16. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm) SID.
17. Repeat steps 1 to 12 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
18. Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
19. Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm) SID.
20. Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The AEC
calibration pot must not be readjusted, as it was calibrated at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID.
Calibration must be performed by adjusting the breakpoint calibration numbers ONLY.
21. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)
The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for the selected channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor.
• Do not readjust the gain pot for previously calibrated receptors.
• Do not readjust the breakpoint calibration for any previously calibrated film screens.
THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS CHAPTER MAY
NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.
®
3D.11.0 AEC USING A PMT
The PMT wiring for AEC operation is described under WIRING THE AEC PICKUP DEVICE TO THE
GENERATOR earlier in this chapter. The PMT high voltage adjustment using R19 and R24 on the AEC
interface board is described in this section.
3D.11.1 Setting the PMT high voltage for AEC
Follow the steps below to set the PMT high voltage.

Step Action
THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES IF A PMT IS USED FOR AEC.
1. Set the PMT high voltage (for AEC channel 4) to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation
using R19 on the AEC interface board. AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be
active.
USE ONLY TP5 ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-5) FOR THE HV METER
GROUND WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT THE GROUND LEAD
FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
THE FOLLOWING STEP ONLY APPLIES IF A PMT IS USED ON AEC CHANNEL 1, 2 OR 3.
2. Set the PMT high voltage (for AEC channels 1 to 3) to approximately -650 VDC using R24 on
the AEC interface board. AEC channel 1, 2 or 3 must be selected in order for R24 to be active.
®
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (DIGITAL APPLICATIONS)
Figure 3D-13: Equipment setup for digital imaging AEC
®
3D.12.1 AEC Setup for Digital Applications
Follow the steps below to perform AEC setup for digital applications.
The AEC CAL DR menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* AEC CAL DR1 *
50KV: 50.0 85KV: 50.0
55KV: 50.0 95KV: 50.0
65KV: 50.0 +
75KV: 50.0 -
<< MENU >>
* AEC CAL DR1 *

110KV: 50.0
130KV: 50.0
+
-
<< MENU
The II SPOT, II DSA and II CINE menus for the membrane console are shown below.
See figure 3D-8.
* II SPOT-C1 *
MAG1 COMP: 0%
MAG2 COMP: 0%
MAG3 COMP: 0% +
-
<< MENU
* II DSA-C1 *
MAG1 COMP: 0%
MAG2 COMP: 0%
MAG3 COMP: 0% +
-
<< MENU
* II CINE-C1 *
MAG1 COMP: 0%
MAG2 COMP: 0%
MAG3 COMP: 0% +
-
<< MENU
®
3D.12.1 AEC Setup for Digital Applications (Cont)
Step Action
1. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3D-13. Use a dosimeter with sufficient sensitivity to
measure the expected dose (typically 150 cc).
2. Set up the absorber as shown in figure 3D-13. Start with 20 cm of Lexan. Ensure that the
radiation is completely blocked by the absorber.
The central ray from the X-ray tube must coincide with the center of the image receptor.
3. Ensure that an anti-scatter grid, if used, is properly installed. The R-probe must be between the
grid and the image receptor input, even if this requires temporary repositioning of the grid.
4. Set the SID to the normally used position. This SID must be maintained for the balance of AEC
calibration.
5. Set the collimator to irradiate an area just beyond the detector circumference.
6. Be sure that all compensating filters are out of the active beam.
7. For an I.I. use the largest field of view, i.e. 12 inch in the remaining steps, unless directed
otherwise.
8. The short exposure time compensation for the AEC channels that will be used with digital
applications must be disabled before continuing. To do this, adjust the applicable short AEC
time compensation potentiometers on the AEC board to zero by turning the required
potentiometers fully clockwise. These are multi-turn potentiometers, and must be turned by as
much as 25 turns to reach the zero-ohms limit.
Do not adjust any pots that have previously been calibrated (i.e. for AEC channels using
film).
9. Ensure that in the Receptor Setup menus, each receptor has the desired AEC channel
assigned to it. Refer to Receptor Setup in chapter 3C.
10. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This will
ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from the
previous receptor.
The Memory function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is finished.
11. In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC BACKUP MS
are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate the exposure.
NOTE: IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS, IT IS ASSUMED THAT AEC CHANNELS 2, 3 AND 4 WILL BE
USED FOR DIGITAL ACQUISITIONS, DSA ACQUISITIONS AND CINE ACQUISITIONS
RESPECTIVELY.
THE AEC INPUTS, AEC CURVES, ETC MAY BE REASSIGNED AS REQUIRED, DEPENDING
ON THE ACTUAL INSTALLATION.
®
3D.12.1 AEC Setup for Digital Applications (Cont)
Dig Curve 1 (Digital acquisitions)

Break point Absorber Cal. No. Dose mAs Selected mA Exposure
Time
75 kV 20 cm Lexan 50 250 mA
65 kV 20 cm Lexan 250 mA
Dig Curve 2 (DSA acquisitions)

Break point Absorber Cal. No. Dose mAs Selected mA Exposure
Time
Dig Curve 3 (Cine acquisitions)

Break Point Absorber Cal. No. Dose mAs Selected mA Exposure
µR / frame Time
Table 3D-13: Digital breakpoint calibration worksheet (Digital)
®
3D.12.2 AEC Calibration for Digital Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the AEC calibration for digital acquisitions.
Step Action
1. Reselect the AEC Setup menu.
2. In the AEC SETUP menus, ensure that AEC channel 2 is set up to use DIGITAL RAD AEC
calibration curve 1. Refer to the section INITIAL AEC SETUP for details.
3. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select AEC CALIBRATION.
4. From the AEC CALIBRATION menu, select DIGITAL RAD 1.
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for digital acquisitions.
6. Select the 75KV breakpoint. Use the + or – buttons to enter the value 50.
7. Select 75 kV, 250 mA, large focus, AEC, mag mode 0.
8. Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
9. Adjust the gain pot on the AEC board for channel 2 to obtain the desired dose, typically 0.88
uGy. Record the final dose, mAs and ms for 75 kV (20 cm Lexan) in a copy of table 3D-13.
10. Confirm the dose at each kV breakpoint. Refer to table 3D-13. If required adjust the calibration
numbers only, not the AEC gain pot. Use absorber and mA values as per table 3D-13, under
Dig Curve 1.
Record the final calibration number, dose, mAs and ms for each iteration in a copy of table 3D-
13.
Some kV values are repeated in order to check AEC tracking with different absorbers.
®
3D.12.3 II Mag Compensation for Digital Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the II Mag compensation for digital acquisitions (systems with an I.I.
only).
Step Action
1. Select AEC SETUP.
2. Select AEC CHANNEL 2.
3. Ensure that MEDIA = DIGITAL. Press >>.
4. Select II SPOT COMP.
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for digital acquisitions.
Select mag mode 0 and note the image brightness.
6. Select MAG1 COMP. While making an exposure, use the + or – buttons to set the MAG1
COMP value such that the image brightness is the same as it was for mag mode 0.
3D.12.4 AEC Calibration for DSA Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the AEC calibration for DSA acquisitions.
Step Action
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for DSA acquisitions.
9. Adjust the gain pot on the AEC board for channel 3 to obtain the desired dose, typically 2.6 uGy.
Record the final dose, mAs and ms for 75 kV (20 cm Lexan) in a copy of table 3D-13.
®
3D.12.4 AEC Calibration for DSA Acquisitions (Cont)
Step Action
Dig Curve 2.
Record the final calibration number, dose, mAs and ms for each iteration in a copy of table 3D-
13.
Some kV values are repeated in order to check AEC tracking with different absorbers.
3D.12.5 II Mag Compensation for DSA Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the II Mag compensation for DSA acquisitions (systems with an I.I. only).
Step Action
4. Select II DSA COMP.
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for DSA acquisitions.
6. Select mag mode 0 and note the image brightness.
3D.12.6 AEC Calibration for Cine Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the AEC calibration for Cine acquisitions.
Step Action
®
3D.12.6 AEC Calibration for Cine Acquisitions (Cont)
Step Action
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for cine acquisitions. Select a cine frame rate of
15 fps.
7. Set the dosimeter to read µGy / frame.
10. Adjust the gain pot on the AEC board for channel 4 to obtain the desired dose, typically 0.17
uGy / frame. Record the final dose, mAs and ms for 75 kV in a copy of table 3D-13.
Dig Curve 3.
Record the final calibration number, dose / frame, mAs and ms for each iteration in a copy of
table 3D-13.
3D.12.7 II Mag Compensation for Cine Acquisitions
Follow the steps below to perform the II Mag compensation for cine acquisitions (systems with an I.I. only).
Step Action
4. Select II CINE COMP.
5. Select the image receptor that was configured for cine acquisitions.
6. Select mag mode 0 and note the image brightness.
®
3D.13.0 AEC OVERVIEW AND BACKGROUND INFORMATION
AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that
result in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.
RLF (reciprocity law failure) compensation is provided to compensate for longer AEC exposure times. An
offset may be added to each AEC calibration set (each film screen combination) to increase the AEC ON
time as exposure time increases. RLF compensation is applied to the following range of times:
• 50 ms to 500 ms.
• 500 ms to 1000 ms.
• 1000 ms and above.
3D.13.1 Film/Screen Response vs. kV
Film screen response to kV is not linear. Therefore, compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kV is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread over
three kV ranges as shown below:
• Low kV: 50, 55, 65 kV.
• Knee kV: 75 kV.
• High kV: 85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Refer to figure 3D-14.
Figure 3D-14: kV vs. relative density
®
3D.13.2 AEC Calibration Range
®
Since the Indico IQ family of X-ray generators allows for up to three separate film screen combinations to
be calibrated, the following points must be considered:
• The AEC board allows for a zero to a maximum of 10-volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film screens, densities and techniques).
• Most X-ray film-based applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all
of which will require different exposure doses.
• Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
• Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine the
maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).
• Figure 3D-15 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
Figure 3D-15: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output
®
3D.13.3 Multiple Spot Compensation
Separate density compensation is provided when a SFD (Spot Film Device) is used for doing multiple
exposures on a single film. In this mode of operation, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area.
Due to the resulting AEC field cutoff, an AEC offset may be required. This is designated multiple spot
compensation.
An external output from the SFD must be provided when multiple spots are requested in order to enable this
function.
3D.13.4 A Typical R&F Room
Figure 3D-16 shows source to image distances and image receptors as used in a typical R&F installation.
Figure 3D-16: Typical R&F installation
®
3D.14.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP
3D.14.1 AEC Setup Worksheet
Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all relevant information.
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR 5 RECEPTOR 6
Film / Screen 1.
2.
3.
Nominal optical density:
Grid ratio / SID:
Min - max kV range:
± Density steps
Density mAs +%:

(dose) change (per
step) -%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose

requirements?
Is film processing
maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
®
3D.14.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)
FUNCTION RECEPTOR 1 RECEPTOR 2 RECEPTOR 3 RECEPTOR 4 RECEPTOR 5 RECEPTOR 6
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-14: AEC setup worksheet
®
3D.14.2 AEC Pre-calibration Checks
It is recommended that a copy of the form below be reviewed before attempting AEC calibration.
1. Confirm that the AEC chambers are installed CHECK:

correctly. Note that some chamber types must be
physically isolated from equipment ground; refer
to figure 3D-17 as an example.
2. Confirm that each AEC chamber / AEC pickup CHECK:
device is properly connected to its intended input
channel on the AEC board.
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber / AEC pickup AEC Ch 1
device: ______________________________
AEC Ch 2
______________________________
AEC Ch 3
______________________________
AEC Ch 4
______________________________
4. Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The CHECK:
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board
in the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the
ground return conductor(s) in the AEC signal
cable.
5. Before calibrating, confirm that the AEC system is CHECK:
functioning. This includes the AEC chambers /
AEC pickup devices and the AEC circuits in the
generator. Each of the fields on the AEC chamber
must be able to terminate the exposure.
6. Techniques to be performed with the equipment
(high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?
7. Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs / kV range)?
Table 3D-16: Precalibration checklist
®
3D.14.3 AEC Chamber Installation
Figure 3D-17 illustrates an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material
to isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC
chambers.
Figure 3D-17: AEC chamber installation
®
3D.14.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview)
Review the applicable sections of chapter 3C for programming the image receptors to select the correct
AEC channel (or no AEC if desired). A typical R&F room configuration will consist of combinations of the
following:
* Table Bucky.
* Wall Bucky.
* Spot film Bucky.
* Digital acquisition.
Refer to Figure 3D-18 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only; refer to figures 3D-1 to 3D-
®
5 for the AEC board layout used in Indico IQ X-ray generators. A maximum of four AEC inputs are
available on the ACB board. More than one AEC input may be used for digital applications, but this will
reduce the available inputs for ion or solid-state AEC chambers.
AEC
BOARD
TABLE WALL BUCKY
AUX
DIGITAL
SPOT FILM
FILE: ML_AEC2.CDR
Figure 3D-18: AEC pickup connections
®
®
CPI Canada Inc. ABS Setup and Calibration 3E
CHAPTER 3E
ABS SETUP AND CALIBRATION

CONTENTS:
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................3E-2

3E.1.1 Required Test Equipment ...................................................................................................................3E-2
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION / WIRING ...............................................................................................3E-2
3E.2.1 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube) ...............................................................................................................3E-3
3E.2.2 Photo Diode ........................................................................................................................................3E-4
3E.2.3 DC Proportional...................................................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.4 ABS Jumper Matrix .............................................................................................................................3E-7
3E.3.0 PRE-CALIBRATION CHECKS AND SETUP .........................................................................................3E-9
3E.4.0 FLUORO SETUP MENU STRUCTURE ...............................................................................................3E-11
3E.5.0 INITIAL FLUOROSCOPIC SETUP.......................................................................................................3E-15
3E.6.0 DOSE LIMITS SETUP (WITHOUT S.I.D. COMPENSATION) .............................................................3E-20
3E.6.1 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) ...........................................................3E-21
3E.6.2 High-Level Fluoro Setup ...................................................................................................................3E-26
3E.6.3 High Level Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) ............................................................3E-27
3E.6.4 Pulsed Fluoro Setup .........................................................................................................................3E-30
3E.6.5 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) ..................................................................3E-33
3E.6.6 High Level Pulsed Fluoro Setup .......................................................................................................3E-37
3E.6.7 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) ................................................3E-38
3E.7.0 FLUORO-RAD AND ABS CURVES SETUP ........................................................................................3E-42
3E.7.1 Fluoro to Rad kV Curves Setup ........................................................................................................3E-42
3E.7.2 Fluoro ABS Curves Setup .................................................................................................................3E-46
3E.7.3 Pulsed Fluoro ABS Curves Setup .....................................................................................................3E-50
3E.8.0 I.I. INPUT DOSE SETUP AND CALIBRATION ....................................................................................3E-56
3E.8.1 Setting the PMT High Voltage...........................................................................................................3E-57
3E.8.2 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Continuous Fluoro..............................................................................3E-59
3E.8.3 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for Continuous Fluoro ........................................................................3E-61
3E.8.4 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Fluoro...............................................................................3E-61
3E.8.5 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for High-Level Fluoro .........................................................................3E-63
3E.8.6 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Pulsed Fluoro .....................................................................................3E-64
3E.8.7 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for Pulsed Fluoro ...............................................................................3E-66
3E.8.8 Pulsed Fluoro Frame Rate Compensation .......................................................................................3E-67
3E.8.9 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Pulsed Fluoro ..................................................................3E-68
3E.8.10 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for High-Level Pulsed Fluoro .........................................................3E-70
3E.9.0 DOSE LIMITS SETUP (WITH S.I.D. COMPENSATION) .....................................................................3E-71
3E.9.1 Initial Setup for S.I.D. Compensation ................................................................................................3E-71
3E.9.2 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) ................................................................3E-72
3E.9.3 High-Level Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) .................................................................3E-79
3E.9.4 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation)........................................................................3E-83
3E.9.5 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) .....................................................3E-89
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-13 Rev. D Page 3E-1
3E ABS Setup and Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section provides an overview of various ABS pickup devices, wiring information for connecting these
to the generator and the procedure for ABS setup and calibration.
3E.1.1 Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for ABS calibration.

• Resolution test phantom.
• Central ray alignment fixture.
• Collimator centering test phantom.
• A selection of Al filters for HVL determination.
• Water or lean (or equivalent) absorbers in various thicknesses. Water should be in a plastic container
of uniform thickness.
• Digital storage oscilloscope.
• Radiation dosimeter. Must be capable of measuring mGy / min and uGy / min as well as dose rate
per frame.
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION / WIRING
The ABS control signal that is used to regulate the kV and / or kV and mA during fluoroscopy is typically
supplied by a photo diode or a PMT, or a DC signal that is proportional to brightness commonly supplied
by the digital imaging system.
EACH GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR A SPECIFIC TYPE OF ABS PICKUP. REFER
TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FORM AT THE FRONT OF THIS
MANUAL (FOR HARD COPY MANUALS) OR INCLUDED ON THE CD (FOR SOFT COPY MANUALS).
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE
DISCHARGED BEFORE CONNECTING ANY ABS PICKUP DEVICES.
®
Page 3E-2 Rev. D Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-13
3E.2.1 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube)
A PMT may be used for kV and / or kV and mA control during ABS operation and for AEC control for
digital acquisitions, or for AEC control for digital acquisitions only. The generator must be fitted with the
“Universal AEC Board” assembly if using a PMT. The high voltage supply for the PMT is located on this
assembly.
1. Dress the PMT cable such as to allow the dynode high voltage lead to connect to J7 on the AEC
interface board. J7 is the high voltage output for the PMT; all pins on this connector are connected in
parallel and thus any of the pins on J7 may be used. Ensure that the high voltage cable is rated at
1500 VDC minimum.
NOTE: The total resistive load of all dynodes must be greater than 1 megaohm to prevent excessive
PMT power supply loading.
2. Wire the PMT as per figure 3E-1 if using a PMT for ABS and AEC control, or per chapter 3D if using
a PMT for AEC control only.
3. The signal lead from the PMT is connected to the input of the generator control board as shown.
Microphone type shielded cable is recommended. The PMT output is available at J1-2 on the
generator control board via a series resistor on this board. This output should be connected to the
AEC board as per figure 3E-1. Microphone type shielded cable is recommended here too.
* Conventional R&F systems will typically use AEC channel 4 for digital acquisitions and possibly
AEC channel 3 for DSA acquisitions. For special procedures generators, AEC channel 4 will typically
be used for cine acquisitions, channel 3 for DSA acquisitions and channel 2 for digital acquisitions.
The PMT connections to AEC channels 2 and 3 should be omitted if not needed for digital
acquisitions, leaving these inputs available for conventional AEC chambers, if required.
J2-7
*
J2-12
J1-3
J3-7
J1-1
*
J3-12
PMT
J1-2 J4-7
J4-12
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3 PMT H.V.
J7-4
GENERATOR
CONTROL
BOARD UNIVERSAL AEC BOARD
IndicoIQ_005.cdr
Figure 3E-1: Wiring a PMT for ABS and AEC control
4. Secure the PMT high voltage and signal cables such as to prevent mechanical stress on the
connections.
5. Configure the ABS-related jumpers on the generator control board as per table 3E-1.
®
3E.2.1 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube) (Cont)
6. The PMT high voltage calibration for ABS is described later in this chapter. The PMT high voltage
calibration for AEC is described in chapter 3D.
3E.2.2 Photo Diode
A photo diode may be used for kV and / or kV and mA control during ABS operation or for AEC control for
digital acquisitions.
1. If using a photo diode for ABS control, connect the photo diode to the generator control board as per
figure 3E-2.
PHOTO DIODE +12 VOLTS

TO J1 PIN 5
GENERATOR
TO J1 PIN 1
CONTROL BOARD
TO J1 PIN 3
TO J1 PIN 4
-12 VOLTS
IndicoIQ-008.cdr
Figure 3E-2: Wiring a photo diode for ABS control
2. Secure the wiring such as to prevent mechanical stress on the connections.
3. Configure the ABS-related jumpers on the generator control board as per table 3E-1.
4. Refer to chapter 3D if using a photo diode for AEC control.
®
3E.2.3 DC Proportional
A DC proportional signal is commonly generated by digital imaging systems, and this may be used for kV
and / or kV and mA control during ABS operation.
1. Wire the DC proportional signal as per figure 3E-3. Depending on the particular imaging system being
used, the ABS feedback signal may be connected to the generator control board via the digital I/O
board, or the ABS feedback signal may be via a separate cable that will be connected to J1 or J6 on
the generator control board.
ALTERNATE CONNECTION “B”
ALTERNATE CONNECTION “A”
J1-3
DIGITAL J1-1
J6
IMAGING
SYSTEM J1-20 J25-20
*
* REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING
SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE GENERATOR
DIGITAL I/O CONTROL
MANUAL FOR THE CONNECTOR
BOARD BOARD
AND PIN NUMBER FOR THIS FUNCTION
IndicoIQ_009.cdr
Figure 3E-3: Wiring proportional DC from an imaging system for ABS control
2. Secure the cables such as to prevent mechanical stress on the connections.
3. Position the ABS-related jumpers on the generator control board as per table 3E-1.
®
®
3E.2.4 ABS Jumper Matrix
The table below shows the ABS inputs and the required ABS jumper settings on the generator control board for compatibility with various
ABS pickups. The generator is shipped with the default jumper settings as shown in the ABS functional drawing MD-0986. This table
should be used in conjunction with functional drawing MD-0986.
ABS PICKUP TYPE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD INPUTS AND JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS
INPUT JW1 JW2 JW4 JW5 JW8 JW9 JW10
Photo Multiplier Tube J1 OUT OUT PINS
* * 1-2 * *
Photo Multiplier Tube J6 PINS IN OUT OUT PINS
1-2 1-2 * *
Photo Diode J1 OUT OUT PINS
(negative output) **
* * 1-2 * *
(positive output) **
* * 2-3 * *
Error signal J1 OUT OUT PINS
0 to 5 / 10 VDC * * 2-3 * *
negative/positive **
0 to 5 / 10 VDC * * 2-3 * *
negative/positive **
Proportional DC J1 OUT OUT PINS
0 to +5 / +10 VDC **
* * 2-3 * *
Proportional DC J6 PINS IN OUT OUT PINS
0 to +5 / +10 VDC ** 1-2 2-3 * *
0 to -5 / -10 VDC **
* * 1-2 * *
0 to -5 / -10 VDC ** 1-2 1-2 * *
Table 3E-1: ABS jumper matrix
®
3E.2.4 ABS Jumper Matrix (Cont)
ABS PICKUP TYPE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD INPUTS AND JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS
INPUT JW1 JW2 JW4 JW5 JW8 JW9 JW10
Proportional DC ABS input on
(0 to +5 / +10 VDC **) from digital I/O board * * * * * * *
the digital imaging system via
the digital I/O board.
(0 to +5 / +10 VDC **) from the
* * 2-3 * *
digital imaging system via
alternate connection “A” in
fig 3E-3.
(0 to +5 / +10 VDC **) from 1-2 2-3 * *
the digital imaging system
via alternate connection “B” in
fig 3E-3.
Composite video J6 PINS IN OUT OUT PINS OUT IN
terminated 50 Ω 2-3 3-4
Composite video J6 PINS IN OUT OUT PINS IN OUT

terminated 75 Ω 2-3 3-4
Composite video J6 PINS IN OUT OUT PINS OUT OUT

high impedance 2-3 3-4
Table 3E-1: ABS jumper matrix
* Don’t care i.e. jumper may be in any position.

** If the magnitude of this voltage is greater than ±5 VDC, JW3 and JW7 on the generator control board should be removed. These
jumpers should be installed if ABS control signal is less than or equal to ±5 VDC.
®
3E.3.0 PRE-CALIBRATION CHECKS AND SETUP
Before the ABS system can be calibrated, the imaging system must be functional and properly set up.
Please confirm the following:
• The image intensifier and its power supply are functional (if applicable).
• The TV camera is calibrated for this application (if applicable).
• All beam-attenuating devices are in place.
• The tabletop is in position.
• The fluoro grid is in the path of the X-ray beam.
• The imaging system is in the operational position.
• The imaging collimator is functional.
• The collimator opening varies as S.I.D. is changed.
• The collimator opening varies as the image intensifier’s MAG mode setting is changed (if applicable).
• The ABS pickup device must be installed and functional.
• The half-value layer of the beam must be determined before proceeding. Sufficient filters must be
added to the X-ray tube to provide the required HVL.
• The fluoro imaging and receptor devices have been programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
• The kV and mA must be in calibration. Refer to chapter 4.
®
®
3E.4.0 FLUORO SETUP MENU STRUCTURE
Figure 3E-4, sheet 1: Fluoro setup menus. This diagram is meant to show the general menu structure only, in non-S.I.D. configuration mode.
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-13 Rev. D Page 3E-11

3E.4.0 FLUORO SETUP MENU STRUCTURE (Cont)
Page 3E-12 Rev. D Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-13

3E.4.0 FLUORO SETUP MENU STRUCTURE (Cont)


3E.5.0 INITIAL FLUOROSCOPIC SETUP
NOTE: SOME OF THE FEATURES DESCRIBED IN THIS CHAPTER ARE OPTIONAL.

DISREGARD THE SECTIONS THAT DO NOT APPLY.
Note: Calibration and setup parameters are shown for illustrative purposes only. The
settings and limits shown do not represent CPI recommended settings to be used
during setup and calibration of the generator.
Default settings and limits that are provided in the generator software are not intended
as final values in installed generators. All settings and limits must be confirmed and /
or adjusted as required during setup and calibration of the generator.
Note: The default values in the Dose Limits menus were determined to limit the Air Kerma
Rate to 44 mGy / min (normal continuous fluoro, manual mode), 88 mGy / min (normal
continuous fluoro, ABS mode), 88 mGy / min (normal pulsed fluoro) and 176 mGy / min
(high-level continuous and pulsed fluoro) with the following test setup in the factory:
- Varian A196 (0.6/1.0) X-ray tube.
- 40 in. (100 cm) S.I.D.
- Total filtration 4.5 mm Al (X-ray tube / housing = 1.8 mm, Collimator = 0.7 mm, added
filtration = 2.0 mm).
The Air Kerma Rate limits calibration must be performed as described in this chapter
during generator setup and calibration. Do not simply use the default dose limit values.
NOTE: The values and settings of the screenshots on the membrane console shown in this
chapter are for illustration purposes. The actual values and settings should be set
according to your specific generator configuration and setup requirements.
The basic fluoroscopic defaults must be set before proceeding with fluoro setup and
calibration. This next section describes the initial fluoroscopic setup procedure.

3E.5.0 INITIAL FLUOROSCOPIC SETUP (Cont)
Definitions of initial fluoroscopic setup parameters.

MAX FLUORO KV Sets the maximum kV to be allowed in all modes of fluoro operation.
MIN FLUORO KV Sets the minimum kV to be allowed in all modes of fluoro operation.
II MODES Sets the maximum number of magnification modes in the I.I. (i.e. 2
correspond to 2 mag modes plus normal mode). If this is set to 0, the
console will not display the mag status. This may be desired if an
external mag mode control and display is used.
HLF SELECT Selects the location from which high-level fluoroscopy is selected for all
fluoro modes.
CONSOLE: In this mode, the console HLF button is used to
select the high-level fluoro mode. High-level fluoro
exposures will result when HLF is enabled via the
console HLF button and the fluoro foot switch is
activated. The high-level fluoro mode will remain
active until the HLF button on the console is
deselected.
This mode is applicable to therapy simulators
only.
REMOTE: In this mode, the high level fluoro select input on the
room I/O board selects high-level fluoro. HLF will
only be selected when this input is active. In
practice, a two-pole footswitch can be used where
the contacts from the first pole are connected to the
fluoro exposure input. The second pole on the foot
switch is then connected to the high level fluoro
select input. Pressing the fluoro foot switch to close
the first set of contacts will activate normal fluoro
mode. Fully depressing the fluoro foot switch will
close the second set of contacts, activating the high
level fluoro select input. This selects the high-level
fluoro mode.
In this mode, normal fluoro mode will resume as
soon as the fluoro foot switch is released
sufficiently to open the second set of contacts.
PF SELECT Selects the location from which pulsed fluoroscopy is selected for all
fluoro modes.
CONSOLE: Selection is via the console PF button.
REMOTE: Selection is via the pulsed fluoro select input on the
room I/O board.

FL TIMER Selects the fluoro timer mode.
FDA Alarms at 5.0 minutes and stops incrementing the
(5MIN): timer. Fluoro exposures may continue.
IEC Alarms at 5.0 minutes and stops incrementing the
(10MIN): timer at 9.6 minutes. Fluoro exposures will be
inhibited at 9.6 minutes.
FL/RAD KV DEF Selects the fluoro-to-rad kV transfer curve when a fluoro receptor is
selected.
NONE: The fluoro-to-rad kV transfer curve remains at its last
setting.
OFF: The fluoro - rad kV transfer function is disabled.
1, 2, 3: Selects the fluoro-to-rad kV transfer curve where 1 =
low, 2 = medium, 3 = high.
One fluoro-rad kV transfer curve is standard; three fluoro-rad
kV transfer curves are optional.
FL ABS Enables or disables the ability to select fluoro ABS.
OFF: ABS cannot be selected in fluoroscopy.
ON: ABS may be selected in fluoroscopy.
FL ABS DEFAULT Sets the ABS state when a fluoro receptor is selected.
NONE: The ABS will remain at its last setting.
OFF: The ABS will default to OFF.
ON: The ABS will default to ON.
FL ABS CURVE Selects the fluoro ABS curve default when a fluoro receptor is selected.
DEFAULT This applies to both low and high-level fluoro.
NONE: The fluoro ABS curve remains at its last
setting.
OFF: The fluoro ABS curve is disabled.
1, 2, 3 Sets the fluoro ABS default curve where 1 =
low, 2 = medium, 3 = high.
One ABS curve is standard; three ABS curves are optional.

Follow the steps below to perform the initial fluoroscopic setup. Refer to the definitions in the table
above.
The FLUORO SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* FLUORO SETUP *
FL TIMER: 5MIN FL ABS: ON
MIN FLUORO KV: 40 FL ABS DEFAULT: OFF
MAX FLUORO KV: 125 +
II MODES: 3 -
EXIT MENU >>
* FLUORO SETUP *
FL/RAD KV DEF: NONE FL SETUP
FL/RAD KV CURVES HLF SETUP
SID COMP PF SETUP
HPF SETUP
<< MENU >>
* FLUORO SETUP *
HLF SELECT: CONSOLE
PF SELECT: CONSOLE
<<
MENU
The FL SETUP menu for the membrane console is shown below.

* FL SETUP *
FL ABS SETUP FL II COMP
FL ABS CURVE DEFAULT: NONE
FL ABS CURVES
FL DOSE LIMITS
<< MENU

Step Action
3. From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select FLUORO SETUP.
4. From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select FL TIMER. Toggle the button to select 5MIN
(FDA) or 10MIN (9.6min IEC).
5. Select MIN FLUORO KV. Use the + or – buttons to set the desired minimum fluoro kV.
This should be set to 40 kV until the ABS calibration is finished. Make a note to set
this to the desired value after ABS setup and calibration is complete.
6. Select MAX FLUORO KV. Use the + or – buttons to set the desired maximum fluoro kV.
This should be set to 125 kV until the ABS calibration is finished. Make a note to set
this to the desired value after ABS setup and calibration is complete.
7. Select II MODES. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired number of II modes.
8. Select FL ABS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
9. Select FL ABS DEFAULT. Toggle the button to select NONE, OFF, or ON.
10. Press >>.
11. Select FL/RAD KV DEF. Toggle the button to select NONE, OFF, 1, 2, or 3.
NOTE: Fluoro to Rad kV transfer curves 2 and 3 are optional.
12. Press >>.
13. Select HLF SELECT. Toggle the button to select CONSOLE or REMOTE.
14. Select PF SELECT. Toggle the button to select CONSOLE or REMOTE.
15. Press <<
16. Select FL SETUP
17. Select the desired fluoro ABS curve default using FL ABS CURVE DEAULT. Toggle the
button to select NONE, OFF, 1, 2, or 3.
One ABS curve is standard; three ABS curves are optional.
18. PRESS << and RETURN as desired to get back to the Fluoro setup main menu.

3E.6.0 DOSE LIMITS SETUP (WITHOUT S.I.D. COMPENSATION)
Figure 3E-5: Typical Dose limits test setup

3E.6.1 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA allowed for each kV setting in both manual and ABS mode of
continuous fluoro operation for systems without SID compensation.
NOTE: THIS SECTION DESCRIBES DOSE LIMITS SETUP WITHOUT S.I.D. COMPENSATION.
REFER TO 3E.9.0 FOR DOSE LIMITS SETUP WITH S.I.D. COMPENSATION.
CAUTION: MAXIMUM INPUT DOSE LIMITS ARE USUALLY ESTABLISHED BY LOCAL, STATE
OR COUNTRY REGULATIONS. THESE LIMITS MUST BE DETERMINED IN
ADVANCE OF ATTEMPTING DOSE LIMITS SETUP, AND ADHERED TO DURING
GENERATOR CALIBRATION.
NOTE: THE DOSE LIMIT MEASUREMENTS MUST BE MADE WITH THE R-PROBE
CORRECTLY POSITIONED. THIS IS TYPICALLY AS PER FIGURE 3E-5, HOWEVER,
LOCAL REGULATIONS SHOULD BE CONSULTED TO CONFIRM THE PROPER TEST
SET-UP.
CAUTION: PROCEDURES IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-

RAYS. ESTABLISHED GUIDELINES MUST BE FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES TO
PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM RADIATION EXPOSURE.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT COPIES BE MADE OF ALL PAGES WHERE RESULTS

ARE TO BE RECORDED. THE RESULTS SHOULD THEN BE RECORDED ON THE
COPIES, LEAVING THE ORIGINALS BLANK.

3E.6.1 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) (Cont)
The FL MAN DL and FL ABS DL menus for the membrane console are shown below
(no SID comp).
* FL MAN DL *
40 kV: 6.0mA 80 kV: 4.0mA
50 kV: 6.0mA 90 kV: 3.3mA
60 kV: 6.0mA +
70 kV: 5.2mA -
<< MENU >>
* FL MAN DL *
100 kV: 2.8mA
110 kV: 2.3mA
120 kV: 1.8mA +
125 kV: 1.5mA -
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS DL *
40 kV: 6.0mA 80 kV: 6.0mA
50 kV: 6.0mA 90 kV: 6.0mA
60 kV: 6.0mA +
70 kV: 6.0mA -
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS DL *
100 kV: 5.2mA
110 kV: 4.5mA
120 kV: 4.0mA +
125 kV: 3.8mA -
<< MENU RETURN

Follow the steps below to set the continuous fluoro dose limits (without SID compensation).
Step Action
The initial fluoroscopic setup must be performed before continuing.
When setting the maximum Air Kerma Rate limits, use the minimum optional filtration
that will be used in this X-ray installation.
1. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-5, observing the note near the beginning of this
section regarding the required R-probe location within the X-ray field.
2. Temporarily disconnect the ABS pickup to the generator.
3. Ensure that the SID compensation function is disabled if this option is fitted. Refer to 3E.9.1.
4. Temporarily de-energize the I.I. power supply, or cover the I.I. with a minimum of 2.0 mm
lead (if applicable).
5. From the FL SETUP menu, select FL DOSE LIMITS.
6. Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the maximum available mA.
7. Repeat the above for 50 kV to 90 kV.
8. Press >>
10. Press <<.
11. Select a fluoroscopic image receptor.

12. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for non-ABS (manual) mode of normal
continuous fluoroscopy. Note the guidelines below.
FDA (USA) Health Canada IEC
44 mGy / min *. 50 mGy / min *. The maximum Air Kerma Rate must comply with
local regulations.
* The listed Air Kerma Rate values should be confirmed by consulting local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for Non-ABS (manual) mode:_____________ mGy /
min.
Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for ABS (automatic) mode of normal
local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for ABS (automatic) mode:_____________ mGy / min.

Step Action
13. Ensure that the generator is set for normal continuous fluoro mode and that ABS is switched
off.
14. Select 40 kV and the maximum available mA via the console fluoro mA controls.
15. While observing the dosimeter, make a fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the mA such that the
maximum permitted dose as recorded in step 13 for non-ABS mode is not exceeded.
16. Record the mA as determined in the previous step for the 40 kV setting.
Max mA for 40kV = ______(non-ABS).
17. Repeat steps 12 to 14 for 50 kV.
26. Reselect 40 kV and the maximum available mA via the console mA controls.
maximum permitted dose as recorded in step 12 for ABS mode is not exceeded. ABS must
remain off.
Max mA for 40kV = ______(ABS).

Step Action
38. Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the mA as determined in step 16 for 40 kV.
39. Repeat the above for 50 kV to 90 kV using the mA determined in steps 17 to 21.
40. Press >>.
42. Press >>.
43. Select the 40 kV step in the FL ABS DL menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 28 for 40 kV.
45. Press >>.
47. Press RETURN to return to FL SETUP menu.
48. Press << twice to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.6.2 High-Level Fluoro Setup
Definitions of HLF SETUP menu items applicable to high-level fluoro setup.

HLF Enables / disables the high-level fluoro option.
ON: High-level fluoro is enabled.
OFF: High-level fluoro is disabled.
FL-HLF MA MULT Sets the mA multiplication factor applied to low-level fluoro mA settings
to achieve high-level fluoroscopy. For example, if the normal fluoro mA
range is 0.5 to 6.0 mA and a multiplication factor of 3.0 is used, the HLF
range will be 1.5 to 18 mA.
HLF SETUP menu 1 for the membrane console is shown below.

* HLF SETUP *
HLF: ON ABS LEVEL 2: 2.61V
FL-HLF MA MULT: 3.0 ABS LEVEL 3: 3.53V
ABS LEVEL 0: 2.00V +
ABS LEVEL 1: 2.13V -
<< MENU >>
The HLF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (no SID comp).
* HLF DOSE L *
40 kV: 20.0mA 80 kV: 15.0mA
50 kV: 20.0mA 90 kV: 12.0mA
60 kV: 20.0mA +
70 kV: 20.0mA -
<< MENU >>
* HLF DOSE L *
100 kV: 9.0mA
110 kV: 8.5mA
120 kV: 7.0mA +
125 kV: 6.7mA -
<< MENU RETURN

3E.6.3 High Level Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA allowed for each kV setting in high-level fluoro mode for systems
without SID compensation.
SET-UP.


Follow the steps below to set the high level fluoro dose limits (without SID compensation).
Step Action
1. From the main FLUORO SETUP menu, press >>.

2. Select HLF SETUP.
3. From the HLF SETUP menu, select HLF. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
4. Select FL-HLF MA MULT. Use the + or – buttons to select the mA multiplier for HLF.
5. Press >> to go to HLF SETUP menu 2.

3E.6.3 High Level Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) (Cont)
Step Action
10. From HLF SETUP menu 2, select HLF DOSE LIMITS.
11. Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
13. Press >>.
15. Press <<.
17. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for high-level fluoroscopy. Note the
guidelines below.
176 mGy / min *. 150 mGy / min *. 176 mGy / min *.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for high-level fluoroscopy:_____________ mGy / min.
18. Ensure that the generator is set for high-level fluoro and that ABS is switched off.
19. Select 40 kV and the maximum available mA via the console mA controls.
maximum permitted dose as recorded in step 17 is not exceeded.
Max mA for 40kV = ______.

3E.6.3 High Level Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) (Cont)
Step Action
Max mA for 100kV = ______.
Max mA for 110kV = ______.
Max mA for 120kV = ______.
Max mA for 125kV = ______.
31. Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 21 for 40 kV.
33. Press >>.
35. Press RETURN.
36. Press << three times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.6.4 Pulsed Fluoro Setup
Definitions of pulsed fluoro setup parameters.

PF Enables / disables the pulsed fluoro option.
ON to enable PF.
OFF to disable PF.
PF DEFAULT Selects the pulsed fluoro default state when a pulsed fluoro receptor is
selected.
NONE: The PF will remain at its last setting.
OFF: The PF will default to OFF.
ON: The PF will default to ON.
PS SYNC FREQ Selects the pulsed fluoro sync frequency. The generator uses this to select
the appropriate PPS values.
50Hz: Sets the sync frequency range to 20-27 Hz or 41-55 Hz.
60Hz: Sets the sync frequency range to 28-40 Hz or 56-65 Hz.
PPS DEFAULT Sets the pulsed fluoro default PPS when pulsed fluoro is selected.
NONE: The PPS will remain at its last setting.
1PPS: The PPS will default to 1 PPS.
3PPS: The PPS will default to 3 PPS.
6/7.5PPS: The PPS will default to 6 or 7.5 PPS.
12/15PPS: The PPS will default to 12 or 15 PPS.
25/30PPS: The PPS will default to 25 or 30 PPS.
PF DEFAULT MA Sets the pulsed fluoro default mA when pulsed fluoro is selected in non-ABS
mode.
PF DEFAULT MS Sets the pulsed fluoro default ms when pulsed fluoro is selected in non-ABS
mode.
1 PPS When checked, allows the operator to select 1 PPS in normal pulsed fluoro
mode.
3 PPS When checked, allows the operator to select 3 PPS in normal pulsed fluoro
mode.
6/7.5 PPS When checked, allows the operator to select 6 / 7.5 PPS in normal pulsed
fluoro mode.
12.5/15 PPS When checked, allows the operator to select 12 / 15 PPS in normal pulsed
fluoro mode.
25/30 PPS When checked, allows the operator to select 25 / 30 PPS in normal pulsed
fluoro mode.

3E.6.4 Pulsed Fluoro Setup (Cont)
PF INTEGRATOR Sets the integration mode for the ABS feedback signal.
ON: The ABS feedback signal will be integrated. Use this setting if
the ABS feedback device is a PMT or other device that
provides a pulsed BS feedback signal in pulsed fluoro mode.
OFF: The ABS feedback signal will not be integrated. Use this
setting if the ABS feedback signal is integrated (smooth DC) in
pulsed fluoro mode, i.e. some imaging systems will integrate
the ABS signal.
PF ABS CURVE Selects the pulsed fluoro ABS curve default when a fluoro receptor is
DEF selected. This applies to low and high-level pulsed fluoro.
NONE: The PF ABS curve remains at its last setting.
OFF: The PF ABS curve is disabled.
1, 2, 3: Selects the PF ABS curve where 1 = low, 2 = medium, 3 =
high.
One PF ABS curve is standard; three PF ABS curves are optional.
The PF SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* PF SETUP *
PF: ON PF DEFAULT MS: 8
PF DEFAULT: ON PF SYNC FREQ: 60Hz
PPS DEFAULT: 12/15PPS +
PF DEFAULT MA: 20 -
<< MENU >>
* PF SETUP *
PF ABS SETUP PF II COMP
PF ABS CURVE DEFAULT: 1
PF ABS CURVES PF PPS SETUP
PF DOSE LIMITS
<< MENU

PF ABS SET menu 2 for the membrane console is shown below.

* PF ABS SET *
ABS DEADBAND: 5% 1PPS COMP: 0%
ABS DELAY: 30ms 3PPS COMP: 0%
ABS START KV: 75 +
PF INTEGRATOR: ON -
<< MENU >>
The PF PPS SET menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* PF PPS SET *
1 PPS: ON 25/30 PPS: ON
3 PPS: ON
6/7.5 PPS: ON +
12.5/15 PPS: ON -
<<
Follow the steps below to perform the pulsed fluoro setup. Refer to the definitions in the table above.
Step Action
2. Select PF SETUP.
3. From the PF SETUP menu, select PF. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
4. Select PF DEFAULT. Toggle the button to select NONE, ON or OFF.
5. Select PPS DEFAULT. Toggle the button to select NONE, 1PPS, 3PPS, 6/7.5PPS,
12/15PPS, or 25/30PPS.
6. Select PF DEFAULT MA. Use the + or – buttons to set the desired default mA.
7. Select PF DEFAULT MS. Use the + or – buttons to set the desired default ms
(approximately 10 ms is recommended).
8. Select PF SYNC FREQ. Toggle the button to select 50Hz or 60Hz.
9. Press >>.
10. Select PF ABS CURVE DEFAULT. Toggle the button to select NONE, OFF, 1, 2, or 3.
One PF ABS curve is standard; three PF ABS curves are optional.
11. Select PF PPS SETUP.
12. Select 1 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.

Step Action
14. Select 6/7.5 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
15. Select 12.5/15 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
16. Select 25/30 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
17. Press <<, then select PF ABS SETUP.
18. Press >>.
19. Select PF INTEGRATOR. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
20. Press << twice to return to PF SETUP menu 2.
3E.6.5 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA and the maximum pulse width allowed for each kV setting in
normal pulsed fluoro mode for systems without SID compensation.
SET-UP.



3E.6.5 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) (Cont)
The PF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (without SID comp).
* PF DOSE L *
40 kV: 16ms 60 kV: 16ms
40 kV: 30mA 60 kV: 30mA
50 kV: 16ms +
50 kV: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
70 kV: 16ms 90 kV: 9ms
70 kV: 30mA 90 kV: 30mA
80 kV: 13ms +
80 kV: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
100 kV: 8ms 120 kV: 8ms
100 kV: 27mA 120 kV: 16mA
110 kV: 8ms +
110 kV: 22mA -
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
125 kV: 8ms
125 kV: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU RETURN
Follow the steps below to set the pulsed fluoro dose limits (without SID compensation).
Step Action
The initial fluoroscopic setup and the pulsed fluoro setup must be performed before
continuing.

Step Action
5. Temporarily set the PF DEFAULT MS to the maximum value as described in the preceding
section.
6. From PF SETUP menu 2, select PF DOSE LIMITS.
7. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the maximum available ms.
8. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
9. Repeat the two previous steps for 50 to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the
next screen for the succeeding kV steps.
10. Press << three times to return to PF DOSE L menu 1.
12. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for normal pulsed fluoroscopy. Note the
guidelines below.
local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for pulsed fluoroscopy:_____________ mGy / min.
13. Ensure that the generator is set for pulsed fluoro and that ABS is switched off.
14. Select the highest PPS frame rate for determining the maximum dose.
16. While observing the dosimeter, make a fluoroscopy exposure. Reduce the 40 kV ms via the
PF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted dose as recorded in step 12 is not
exceeded. The ms should typically be in the range of 8 to 12 ms. If the 40 kV dose limits
need to be reduced further, reduce the mA via the fluoro control section of the console such
that the final ms is in the specified ms range.

Step Action
17. Record the ms and the mA as determined in the previous step for the 40 kV setting.
Max ms for 40kV = ______. Max mA for 40kV = ______.
27. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the
LCD display to enter the maximum ms as determined in step 17 for 40 kV.
28. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the
LCD display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 17 for 40 kV.
29. Repeat the two previous steps for 50 kV to 125 kV using the mA and ms determined in
steps 18 to 26. You need to press >> to advance to the next screen for the succeeding kV
steps.
30. Press RETURN and << to return to the PF SETUP
31. Set the PF DEFAULT MS to the desired value as described in the preceding section.

3E.6.6 High Level Pulsed Fluoro Setup
The HPF SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* HPF SETUP *
HPF: ON ABS LEVEL 1: 2.00V
PF-HPF MA MULT: 2.5 ABS LEVEL 2: 2.60V
PF-HPF MS MULT: 2.0 +
<< MENU >>
* HPF SETUP *
ABS LEVEL 3: 4.50V
HPF DOSE LIMITS
HPF II COMP +
HPF PPS SETUP -
<< MENU
The HPF PPS SETUP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* HPF PPS SET *
1 PPS: ON 25/30 PPS: ON
3 PPS: ON
6/7.5 PPS: ON +
12.5/15 PPS: ON -
<<
Definitions of HPF SETUP menu items applicable to high-level pulsed fluoro setup.
HPF Enables / disables the high-level pulsed fluoro option.
ON: HPF is enabled
OFF: HPF is disabled.
PF-HPF MA MULT Sets the mA multiplication factor applied to low-level pulsed fluoro mA settings
to achieve high-level pulsed fluoroscopy. For example, if the normal pulsed
fluoro mA is 10 mA and a multiplication factor of 2.5 is used, the HLF pulsed
fluoro will be 25 mA.
PF-HPF MS MULT Sets the ms multiplication factor applied to low-level pulsed fluoro ms settings
to achieve high-level pulsed fluoroscopy.
1 PPS When enabled, allows the operator to select 1 PPS in high-level pulsed fluoro
mode.
3 PPS When enabled, allows the operator to select 3 PPS in high-level pulsed fluoro
mode.
6/7.5 PPS When enabled, allows the operator to select 6 / 7.5 PPS in high-level pulsed
fluoro mode.

3E.6.6 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Setup (Cont)
12.5/15 PPS When enabled, allows the operator to select 12 / 15 PPS in high-level pulsed
fluoro mode.
25/30 PPS When enabled, allows the operator to select 25 / 30 PPS in high-level pulsed
fluoro mode.
Use these steps to perform the initial high-level pulsed fluoro setup. Refer to the definitions in the
previous table.
Step Action
continuing.
2. Select HPF SETUP.
3. From the HPF SETUP menu, select HPF. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
4. Select PF-HPF MA MULT. Use the + or – buttons to select the mA multiplier for HPF.
5. Select PF-HPF MS MULT. Use the + or – buttons to select the ms multiplier for HPF.
6. Press >>.
7. Select HF PPS SETUP.
10. Select 6/7.5 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
11. Select 12.5/15 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
12. Select 25/30 PPS. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
13. Press <<.
3E.6.7 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA and the maximum pulse width allowed for each kV setting in high-
level pulsed fluoro mode for systems without SID compensation.
SET-UP.

3E.6.7 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation) (Cont)


The HPF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (no SID comp).
* HPF DOSE L *
40 kV: 16ms 60 kV: 16ms
40 kV: 30mA 60 kV: 30mA
50 kV: 16ms +
50 kV: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
70 kV: 16ms 90 kV: 9ms
70 kV: 30mA 90 kV: 30mA
80 kV: 13ms +
80 kV: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
100 kV: 9ms 120 kV: 8ms
100 kV: 27mA 120 kV: 16mA
110 kV: 8ms +
110 kV: 22mA -
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
125 kV: 8ms
125 kV: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU RETURN

Follow the steps below to set the high-level pulsed fluoro dose limits (without SID compensation).
Step Action
5. Temporarily set the PF DEFAULT MS to the maximum value as described in the Pulsed
Fluoro Setup section.
6. From HPF SETUP menu 2, select HPF DOSE LIMITS.
7. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
display to enter the maximum available ms.
8. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu. Use the + button adjacent to the LCD
9. Repeat the two previous steps for 50 kV to 125 kV to enter the max mA and ms. You need
to press >> to advance to the next screen for the succeeding kV steps.
11. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for high-level pulsed fluoroscopy. Note
the guidelines below.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for high-level pulsed fluoro:_____________ mGy / min.
12. Ensure that the generator is set for high-level pulsed fluoro and that ABS is switched off.
15. While observing the dosimeter, make a fluoroscopy exposure. Reduce the 40 kV ms via the
HPF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted dose as recorded in step 11 is not
exceeded. The ms should typically be in the range of 8 to 12 ms. If the 40 kV dose limits
need to be reduced further, reduce the mA via the fluoro control section of the console such
that the final ms is in the specified range.

Step Action
26. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the
LCD display to enter the maximum ms as determined in step 16 for 40 kV.
27. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu. Use the + or - buttons adjacent to the
LCD display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 16 for 40 kV.
28. Repeat the two previous steps for 50 kV to 125 kV to enter the max mA and ms determined
in steps 17 to 25. You need to press >> to advance to the next screen for the succeeding kV
steps.
29. Press RETURN and press << two times to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
30. Set the PF DEFAULT MS to the desired value as described in the Pulsed Fluoro Setup
section.
31. Go back to the main FLUORO SETUP menu when finished.

3E.7.0 FLUORO-RAD AND ABS CURVES SETUP

®
Indico IQ X-ray generators include the following factory-default fluoro to rad kV transfer and fluoro ABS
curves:
Curve type Standard Optional

Fluoro to rad kV transfer One curve Three curves
Fluoro ABS mA, kV One curve Three curves
Pulsed fluoro ABS mA, kV, ms One curve Three curves
The next three sections describe the procedure to reprogram the factory-default curves, if required.
3E.7.1 Fluoro to Rad kV Curves Setup
This section describes the procedure for programming the fluoro to rad kV transfer curves. This should
be reviewed first, and only then should it be determined if the factory-default curves actually need to be
changed.
Figures 3E-6 to 3E-8 show the factory-default fluoro to rad kV transfer curves.
The F/R KV CUR1, F/R KV CUR2, F/R KV CUR3 menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* F/R KV CUR1 *
F/R KV CURVE 1: ON F-55KV: R- 50KV
F-40KV: R- 40KV F-60KV: R- 53KV
F-45KV: R- 44KV +
F-50KV: R- 47KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR1 *
F-65KV: R- 56KV F-85KV: R- 67KV
F-70KV: R- 59KV F-90KV: R- 70KV
F-75KV: R- 62KV +
F-80KV: R- 65KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR1 *
F-95KV: R- 73KV F-115KV: R- 82KV
F-100KV: R- 75KV F-120KV: R- 83KV
F-105KV: R- 77KV +
F-110KV: R- 80KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR1 *
F-125KV: R- 84KV
+
-
<< MENU >>

3E.7.1 Fluoro to Rad kV Curves Setup (Cont)
130
120
110
100
R
A 90
D
K 80
V
70
60
50
40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Fluoro to Rad kV transfer curve 1
IndicoIQ_FR_Curve1.CDR
Figure 3E-6: Factory-default fluoro to rad kV transfer curve 1
* F/R KV CUR2 *
F-40KV: R- 50KV F-60KV: R- 57KV
F-45KV: R- 51KV +
F-50KV: R- 53KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR2 *
F-65KV: R- 59KV F-85KV: R- 69KV
F-70KV: R- 61KV F-90KV: R- 72KV
F-75KV: R- 64KV +
F-80KV: R- 66KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR2 *
F-95KV: R- 74KV F-115KV: R- 82KV
F-100KV: R- 76KV F-120KV: R- 83KV
F-105KV: R- 79KV +
F-110KV: R- 81KV -
<< MENU >>

* F/R KV CUR2 *
F-125KV: R- 84KV
+
-
<< MENU >>
130
120
110
100
R
A 90
D
K 80
V
70
60
50
40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Figure 3E-7: Factory-default fluoro to rad kV transfer curve 2 (optional)
* F/R KV CUR3 *
F-40KV: R- 55KV F-60KV: R- 65KV
F-45KV: R- 58KV +
F-50KV: R- 60KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR3 *
F-65KV: R- 68KV F-85KV: R- 77KV
F-70KV: R- 70KV F-90KV: R- 80KV
F-75KV: R- 75KV +
F-80KV: R- 75KV -
<< MENU >>

* F/R KV CUR3 *
F-95KV: R- 83KV F-115KV: R- 93KV
F-100KV: R- 85KV F-120KV: R- 95KV
F-105KV: R- 87KV +
F-110KV: R- 90KV -
<< MENU >>
* F/R KV CUR3 *
F-125KV: R- 98KV
+
-
<< MENU RETURN
130
120
110
100
R
A 90
D
K 80
V
70
60
50
40
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Figure 3E-8: Factory-default fluoro to rad kV transfer curve 3 (optional)

Follow the steps below to program the fluoro to rad kV transfer curves.
Step Action
Before attempting to program the fluoro to rad kV transfer curves, graphs of the required
curves should be prepared in a format similar to those in figures 3E-6 to 3E-8.
2. Select FL/RAD KV CURVES.
3. From F/R KV CUR1 menu 1, select F/R KV CURVE 1. Enable or disable fluoro to rad kV
curve 1 by toggling the button to select ON or OFF.
4. Select the 40 kV fluoro step. Use the + or – buttons to enter the desired corresponding rad
kV.
5. Repeat the previous step for 45 to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the next
screen for the succeeding kV steps.
6. Disregard the next two steps if the three fluoro to rad kV transfer curves option is not
fitted.
7. Press >>,
8. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for fluoro to rad kV transfer curve 2.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 6 for fluoro to rad kV transfer curve 3.
10. Press RETURN.
11. Press << to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.
3E.7.2 Fluoro ABS Curves Setup
This section describes the procedure for programming the fluoro ABS curves. This should be reviewed
first, and only then should it be determined if the factory-default curves actually need to be changed.
For both low and high-level fluoro, with ABS on, the mA will follow the programmed curves. In high-level
fluoro mode, the mA is multiplied by the factor set via the FL-HLF MA MULT function. This is described
under High Level Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation).
Figures 3E-9 to 3E-11 show the factory-default fluoro ABS curves.
The FL ABS C1, FL ABS C2, FL ABS C3 menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* FL ABS C1 *
FL ABS CURVE 1: ON 70KV: 0.5mA
40KV: 0.5mA 80KV: 0.6mA
50KV: 0.5mA +
60KV: 0.5mA -
<< MENU >>

3E.7.2 Fluoro ABS Curves Setup (Cont)
* FL ABS C1 *
90KV: 0.7mA 125KV: 2.8mA
100KV: 1.0mA
110KV: 1.8mA +
120KV: 2.6mA -
<< MENU >>
10.0
9.5
9.0
8.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
M 5.5
A 5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Fluoro ABS curve 1
IndicoIQ_FL ABS Curve1.CDR
Figure 3E-9: Factory-default fluoro ABS curve 1
* FL ABS C2 *
40KV: 1.0mA 80KV: 1.7mA
50KV: 1.0mA +
60KV: 1.1mA -
<< MENU >>

* FL ABS C2 *
90KV: 2.4mA 125KV: 4.9mA
100KV: 3.5mA
110KV: 4.2mA +
120KV: 4.5mA -
<< MENU >>
10.0
9.5
9.0
8.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
M 5.5
A 5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Fluoro ABS curve 2
Figure 3E-10: Factory-default fluoro ABS curve 2 (optional)
* FL ABS C3 *
40KV: 1.5mA 80KV: 4.0mA
50KV: 1.5mA +
60KV: 2.0mA -
<< >>

* FL ABS C3 *
90KV: 5.0mA 125KV: 6.0mA
100KV: 6.0mA
110KV: 6.0mA +
120KV: 6.0mA -
<< RETURN
10.0
9.5
9.0
8.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
M 5.5
A 5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO KV
Fluoro ABS curve 3
Figure 3E-11: Factory-default fluoro ABS curve 3 (optional)
Follow the steps below to program the ABS dose curves for normal and high-level continuous fluoro.
Step Action
Before attempting to program the fluoro ABS curves, graphs of the desired curves should be
prepared in a format similar to those in figures 3E-9 to 3E-11.
2. Select FL SETUP.
3. Select FL ABS CURVES.
4. From FL ABS C1 menu 1, select FL ABS CURVE 1. Enable or disable fluoro ABS curve 1
by toggling the button to select ON or OFF.

Step Action
5. Select the 40 kV fluoro step. Use the + or – buttons to enter the desired corresponding mA.
6. Repeat the previous step for 50 to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the next
screen for the succeeding kV steps.
7. Disregard the next two steps if the three ABS curves option is not fitted.
8. Press >> so FL ABS C2 shows on the top of the menu. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for fluoro ABS
CURVE 2.
9. Press >> so FL ABS C3 shows on the top of the menu. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for fluoro ABS
CURVE 3.
10. Press RETURN and << twice to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.
3E.7.3 Pulsed Fluoro ABS Curves Setup
This section describes the procedure for programming the pulsed-fluoro ABS curves. This should be
reviewed first, and only then should it be determined if the factory-default curves actually need to be
changed.
For both low and high-level pulsed fluoro, with ABS on, the mA and ms will follow the programmed mA
and ms curves. The graphs show the mAs that results from the programmed mA and ms values. In high-
level pulsed fluoro mode, the mA and the ms is multiplied by the factors set via the PF-HPF MA MULT
and PF-HPF MS MULT functions respectively. This is described under High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose
Limits (without SID compensation).
Figures 3E-12 to 3E-14 shows the factory-default pulsed fluoro ABS curves.
The PF ABS C1, PF ABS C2, PF ABS C3 menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* PF ABS C1 *
PF CURVE 1: ON 50KV: 5mA
40KV: 2ms 60KV: 2ms
40KV: 5mA +
50KV: 2ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C1 *
60KV: 5mA 80KV: 5mA
70KV: 2ms 90KV: 4ms
70KV: 5mA +
80KV: 2ms -
<< MENU >>

3E.7.3 Pulsed Fluoro ABS Curves Setup
* PF ABS C1 *
90KV: 5mA 110KV: 12mA
100KV: 5ms 120KV: 7ms
100KV: 8mA +
110KV: 7ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C1 *
120KV: 20mA
125KV: 8ms
125KV: 20mA +
<< >>
Figure 3E-12: Factory-default pulsed fluoro ABS curve 1

3E.7.3 Pulsed Fluoro ABS Curves Setup (Cont)
* PF ABS C2 *
40KV: 3ms 60KV: 4ms
40KV: 5mA +
50KV: 4ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C2 *
60KV: 12mA 80KV: 17mA
70KV: 4ms 90KV: 5ms
70KV: 12mA +
80KV: 5ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C2 *
90KV: 20mA 110KV: 25mA
100KV: 8ms 120KV: 8ms
100KV: 25mA +
110KV: 8ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C2 *
120KV: 25mA
125KV: 9ms
125KV: 25mA +
-
<< MENU >>

Figure 3E-13: Factory-default pulsed fluoro ABS curve 2 (optional)
* PF ABS C3 *
40KV: 3ms 60KV: 6ms
40KV: 10mA +
50KV: 6ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C3 *
60KV: 20mA 80KV: 25mA
70KV: 7ms 90KV: 13ms
70KV: 25mA +
80KV: 11ms -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS C3 *
90KV: 25mA 110KV: 30mA
100KV: 13ms 120KV: 16ms
100KV: 25mA +
110KV: 13ms -
<< MENU >>

* PF ABS C3 *
120KV: 35mA
125KV: 16ms
125KV: 35mA +
-
<< MENU RETURN
Figure 3E-14: Factory-default pulsed fluoro ABS curve 3 (optional)

Follow the steps below to program the ABS dose curves for normal and high-level pulsed fluoro.
Step Action
Before attempting to program the pulsed fluoro ABS curves, graphs of the desired curves
should be prepared in a format similar to those in figures 3E-12 to 3E-14. Then reasonable
mA and ms values should be determined to give the desired mAs.
2. Select PF SETUP.
3. Press >>.
4. Select PF ABS CURVES.
5. From PF ABS C1 menu 1, select PF CURVE 1. Enable or disable pulsed fluoro ABS curve
1 by toggling the button to select ON or OFF.
6. Select the 40 kV (ms) step. Use the + or – buttons to enter the desired corresponding pulse
width (ms).
7. Select the 40 kV (mA) step. Use the + or – buttons to enter the desired corresponding mA.
8. Repeat the previous two steps for 50 to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the
next screen for the succeeding kV steps.
9. Disregard the next two steps if the three pulsed fluoro ABS curves option is not fitted.
10. Press >>.
11. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for PF ABS curve 2.
12. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for PF ABS curve 3.
13. Press RETURN.
14. Press << three times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.8.0 I.I. INPUT DOSE SETUP AND CALIBRATION
Figure 3E-15 I.I. input dose test setup

3E.8.1 Setting the PMT High Voltage
This procedure sets the PMT operating voltage. Disregard this section if a PMT is not used for ABS.
R10
R19
R24
Figure 3E-16: PMT high voltage adjustment (AEC interface board)
• R10 adjusts the PMT high voltage during ABS operation.

• R19 adjusts the PMT high voltage when AEC channel 4 is selected and R24 adjusts the high voltage
when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. Refer to chapter 3D for the procedure to adjust these
potentiometers for AEC operation.
•
Follow the steps below to adjust the PMT high voltage for ABS operation.
Step Action
1. Reconnect the ABS pickup plug that was temporarily disconnected in an earlier step.
Warning: Switch off the generator and ensure that all capacitors are discharged
before connecting and removing the PMT current-measuring equipment in the
following steps.
2. Connect a micro ammeter in series with the PMT signal output. Alternately, if a micro
ammeter is not available, use a series resistor as described below:
Alternative to a micro-ammeter:
Temporarily connect a 10K resistor in series with the PMT output (pin 1 of J1 on the
generator control board). The current can then be calculated by using a DVM to measure
the voltage developed across this resistor. However, this is not the preferred method of
measurement.

3E.8.1 Setting the PMT High Voltage (Cont)
Step Action
3. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-15. Use a dosimeter with sufficient sensitivity to
measure 5-500 µGy / min. Set the dosimeter to read µGy / min.
4. Set up the absorber as shown in figure 3E-15. 20 cm of Lexan is recommended. Ensure that
the absorber covers the full input field of the I.I.
The central ray from the X-ray tube must coincide with the center of the I.I.
5. Ensure that an anti-scatter grid, if used, is properly installed. The R-probe must be between
the grid and the I.I. input, even if this requires temporary repositioning of the grid.
6. Set the SID to the normally used position.
7. Select continuous fluoro. Ensure that the ABS is switched off. Select 75 kV and 1.5 mA.
8. Set the II to its 9-inch mode.
9. Make a fluoro exposure and measure the I.I. input dose.
10. Adjust the fluoro mA to obtain a reading of approximately 35 uGy / min.
11. Adjust the PMT high voltage using R10 on the AEC interface board (refer to figure 3E-16)
while pressing the fluoro footswitch such that the PMT current is 20 to 25 uA. This
corresponds to a voltage of 0.20 to 0.25 VDC across the resistor if using the series-resistor
method.
12. Measure the PMT high voltage at J7 on the AEC interface board using a suitable meter.
Use TP5 only on the AEC interface board for the HV meter ground when measuring
the PMT high voltage. Connect the ground first before measuring the high voltage.
The high voltage should be approximately -750 to –800 VDC.
13. If the desired current cannot be obtained within the stated PMT voltage range, the light
entrance to the PMT in the optic cube may need adjustment. Refer to the appropriate
manufacturer’s documentation for the procedure to adjust this.
14. Disconnect the meter and resistor, if applicable, that was connected in step 2. Then
reconnect the PMT signal lead if required.

3E.8.2 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Continuous Fluoro
The FL ABS SET menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* FL ABS SET *
ABS LEVEL 0: 1.00V SIGNAL GAIN: 30
ABS LEVEL 1: 0.60V ABS GAIN: 20
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS SET *
ABS DEADBAND: 3%
ABS DELAY: 30ms
ABS START KV: 75 +
-
<< MENU
NOTE: The fluoro ABS dose curve selection (off, low, medium, high) will need to be varied in
the following steps. For the membrane console, this is done via the FL ABS CURVE
function, which is accessed by pressing the MENU button. After selecting the desired
fluoro ABS dose curve, press << to return to the previous ABS setup screen.
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. input dose calibration for continuous fluoroscopy.
Step Action
2. Select FL SETUP, then Select FL ABS SETUP.
3. Connect a DVM from TP5 to TP6 or TP9 or TP26 or TP41 (ground) on the generator control
board.
Note: When adjusting the ABS gain, ensure the voltage at test point TP5 remains below +/-
10VDC when applying a maximum input voltage at J1 and J6 on the generator control
board.
4. Use the test set up as described in steps 3 to 6 of the section Setting the PUT High
Voltage, section 3E.8.1.
If the ABS signal is derived from the imaging system, follow the imaging system
manufacturer’s instructions for performing the ABS calibration of the imaging
system.
DO THIS BEFORE PROCEEDING.
In the following steps, you will need to scroll back and forth between FL ABS SET menu 1
and FL ABS SET menu 2 using the >> and << buttons in order to access the functions
described in this section.
5. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessible via MENU button.

3E.8.2 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Continuous Fluoro (Cont)
Step Action
6. Set the ABS START KV to the midpoint of the normal operating range, typically 75kV.
7. Ensure that ABS is on, and while making a fluoroscopic exposure verify stability of the ABS
system with continuous fluoroscopy. The imaging system should be panned over varying
absorber thicknesses to force the kV to fluctuate.
The ABS should stabilize without hunting or settling on the wrong kV value.
8. If the ABS is unstable, lower the ABS GAIN. This should reduce hunting and stabilize the
fluoro kV quickly.
9. If the deadband is excessive, adjust the ABS DEADBAND. This should normally be in the
range of 3 to 10%.
10. Set the ABS DELAY to 30 ms.
11. Confirm that the ABS stabilizes without hunting or settling on the wrong kV value while
panning the imaging system over varying absorber thicknesses.
If the three ABS curves option is not fitted, disregard the steps for calibrating ABS curves
MED and HIGH. Then use steps 14 and 15 to calibrate ABS curve LOW, adjusting ABS
LEVEL 0 (NO CURVE) in step 14 instead of ABS LEVEL 2 (CURVE 2).
12. Select the largest I.I. mode.
Ensure that ABS is on.
13. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed by pressing the MENU button. Select mag mode
0.
14. Select ABS LEVEL 2. Use the + or – buttons to set the ABS LEVEL 2 value to 1.00V as
measured on the DVM.
15. Select SIGNAL GAIN. While making a fluoroscopic exposure, use the + or – buttons to set
the I.I. input dose to 26 uGy (3 mR) / min.
This step adjusts the digital gain potentiometer in the ABS loop on the generator control
board. Increasing the signal gain value will reduce the dose, and vice versa.
Do not readjust the following parameters:
SIGNAL GAIN, ABS GAIN, ABS DEADBAND, or ABS START KV.
16. Select FL ABS CURVE = OFF, mag mode 0.
17. Set the fluoro mA to 2.0 mA.
18. Select ABS LEVEL 0. While making a fluoroscopic exposure, use the + or – buttons to set
the ABS LEVEL 0 value for an I.I. input dose of 26 uGy (3 mR) / min.
19. Select FL ABS CURVE = LOW, mag mode 0.
21. Select FL ABS CURVE = HI, mag mode 0.

23. Press << to return to the FL SETUP menu.
3E.8.3 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for Continuous Fluoro
The FL II COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.

* FL II COMP *
MAG1 MA MULT: 1.2
MAG2 MA MULT: 1.7
MAG3 MA MULT: 2.1 +
-
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. mag mode compensation for continuous fluoroscopy (if
applicable).
Step Action
1. From the FL SETUP menu, select FL II COMP.
2. Use the test set up as described in steps 3 to 6 of the section Setting the PMT High
3. Select the largest I.I. mode. Ensure that ABS is on.
4. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed via MENU button.
Select mag mode 0.
5. Make a fluoroscopic exposure and record the stabilized kV.
6. Select mag mode 1.
7. Select MAG1 MA MULT. While making a fluoroscopic exposure, use the + or – buttons to
set the MAG1 MA MULT value such that the mag 1 kV equals the kV noted in step 6.
8. Repeat steps 7 to 9 for the remaining magnification modes.
In high mag mode, the maximum dose limits may be reached when higher mA multiplication
factors are selected.
9. Press << four times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.
3E.8.4 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Fluoro
HLF SETUP menu 1 for the membrane console is shown below.

* HLF SETUP *
HLF: ON ABS LEVEL 2: 2.61V
FL-HLF MA MULT: 3.0 ABS LEVEL 3: 3.53V
<< MENU >>

3E.8.4 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Fluoro (Cont)
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. input dose calibration for high-level fluoroscopy.
Step Action
2. Select HLF SETUP.
.
3. Connect a DVM from TP5 to TP6 or TP9 or TP26 or TP41 (ground) on the generator control
board.
Note: When adjusting the ABS gain, ensure the voltage at test point TP5 remains below +/-
10VDC when applying a maximum input voltage at J1 and J6 on the generator control
board.
system.
The fluoro ABS dose curve selection (off, low, medium, high) will need to be varied in the
following steps. For the membrane console, this is done via the FL ABS CURVE function,
which is accessed by pressing the MENU button. After selecting the desired fluoro ABS
dose curve, press << to return to the previous ABS setup screen.
5. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed via the MENU button.
6. Select the largest I.I. mode. Ensure that HLF and ABS is on.
Select mag mode 0.
7. Ensure that the FL-HLF MA MULT is set correctly. This is described under High Level
Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation).
MED and HIGH.
9. Select FL ABS CURVE = OFF.
10. Set the fluoro mA to the value that was automatically set by fluoro ABS dose curve 2 in step
8.
12. Select FL ABS CURVE = LOW.
14. Select FL ABS CURVE = HI.
16. Press >> to go to HLF SETUP menu 2.

3E.8.5 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for High-Level Fluoro
The HLF II COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* HLF II COMP *
MAG1 MA MULT: 1.1
MAG2 MA MULT: 1.6
MAG3 MA MULT: 2.1 +
-
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. mag mode compensation for high-level fluoro (if applicable).
Step Action
1. From HLF SETUP menu 2, select HLF II COMP.
Select mag mode 0.
6. Select MAG = I.
7. Select MAG1 MA MULT. While making a fluoroscopic exposure, use the + or – buttons to
set the MAG1 MA MULT value such that the mag 1 kV equals the kV noted in step 6.
8. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each magnification mode.

3E.8.6 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Pulsed Fluoro
PF ABS SET menus 1 and 2 for the membrane console are shown below.
* PF ABS SET *
ABS LEVEL 0: 1.00V SIGNAL GAIN: 20
ABS LEVEL 1: 0.70V ABS GAIN: 20
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS SET *
ABS START KV: 75 +
PF INTEGRATOR: ON -
<< MENU >>
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. input dose calibration for pulsed fluoroscopy.
Step Action
2. Select PF SETUP. Then press >> and select PF ABS SETUP.
3. Connect an oscilloscope from TP5 to TP6 or TP9 or TP26 or TP41 (ground) on the
generator control board. An oscilloscope is needed since this is a pulsed signal.
system.
5. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessible via MENU button.
Select the largest I.I. mode. Ensure that ABS is on.
7. Select pulsed fluoro mode and 30 PPS.
In the following steps, you will need to scroll back and forth between PF ABS SET menu 1
and PF ABS SET menu 2 using the >> and << buttons in order to access the functions
described in this section.
8. Set the ABS START KV to the midpoint of the normal operating range, typically 75kV.

3E.8.6 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for Pulsed Fluoro (Cont)
Step Action
9. Ensure that ABS is on and verify stability of the ABS system with pulsed fluoroscopy. The
imaging system should be panned over varying absorber thicknesses to force the kV to
fluctuate.
The ABS should stabilize without hunting or settling on the wrong kV value.
10. If the ABS is unstable, lower the ABS GAIN. This should reduce hunting and stabilize the
pulsed fluoro kV quickly.
11. If the hysteresis is excessive, adjust the ABS DEADBAND. This should normally be in the
range of 3 to 10%.
12. Set the ABS DELAY to 30 ms.
13. Confirm that the ABS stabilizes without hunting or settling on the wrong kV value while
panning the imaging system over varying absorber thicknesses.
14. Set the radiation meter to measure dose per frame at 30 fps (frames per second).This is the
measurement unit in pulsed fluoro mode.
MED and HIGH. Then follow steps 15 and 16 to calibrate ABS curve LOW using PF ABS
LEVEL 0 in step 15.
15. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed via the MENU button. Then select mag mode 0.
16. Select ABS LEVEL 2. Use the + or – buttons to set the ABS LEVEL 2 value. Start at
1.50V, then adjust the value to get the desired brightness. It is advisable to keep this value
below 4.0V.
17. Select SIGNAL GAIN. While making a pulsed fluoro exposure, use the + or – buttons to set
the I.I. input dose to 0.018 uGy (2 uR) / frame.
This step adjusts the digital gain potentiometer in the ABS loop on the generator control
board. Increasing the signal gain value will reduce the dose, and vice versa.
Do not readjust the following parameters:
SIGNAL GAIN, ABS GAIN, ABS DEADBAND, or ABS START KV.
19. Set the fluoro mA to 20 mA.
20. Select ABS LEVEL 0. While making a pulsed fluoro exposure, use the + or – buttons to set
the ABS LEVEL 0 value for an I.I. input dose of 0.018 uGy (2 uR) / frame.
25. Press << to return to the PF SETUP menu.

3E.8.7 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for Pulsed Fluoro
The PF II COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.

* PF II COMP *
MAG1 MS MULT: 1.2
MAG2 MS MULT: 2.0
MAG3 MS MULT: 2.6 +
-
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. mag mode compensation for pulsed fluoro (if applicable).
Step Action
1. From the PF SETUP menu, select PF II COMP.
2. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed via the MENU button. Select mag mode 0.
8. Select MAG1 MS MULT. While making a pulsed fluoro exposure, use the + or – buttons to
set the MAG1 MS MULT value such that the mag 1 kV equals the kV noted in step 6.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for the remaining magnification modes.

3E.8.8 Pulsed Fluoro Frame Rate Compensation
PF ABS SET menus 2 and 3 for the membrane console are shown below.
* PF ABS SET *
ABS START KV: 75 +
PF INTEGRATOR: ON -
<< MENU >>
* PF ABS SET *
6/7.5PPS COMP: 0%
12/15PPS COMP: 0%
25/30PPS COMP: 0% +
-
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the pulsed fluoro frame rate compensation.
Step Action
1. From the main FLUORO SETUP menu, press >>. Then select PF SETUP.
2. Press >>, then select PF ABS SETUP. Press >> twice to go to PF ABS SET menu 3.
5. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED accessed via the MENU button. Select mag mode 0.
6. Select pulsed fluoro mode and 30 PPS.
7. Set the radiation meter to measure dose per frame at 30 fps (frames per second).
8. Select 25/30PPS COMP. Use the + or – buttons to set the 25/30PPS COMP value = 0.
9. Make a pulsed fluoro exposure and record the stabilized kV and the dose rate per frame.
10. Select 12/15PPS COMP. Make a fluoro exposure, and then set the 12/15PPS COMP value
such that the kV and dose rate per frame rate equals the kV and dose rate as per the
previous step.
11. Select 6/7.5PPS COMP. Make a fluoro exposure, and then set the 6/7.5PPS COMP value
such that the kV and dose rate per frame rate equals the kV and dose rate as per step 9.
12. Press <<.
13. Select 3PPS COMP. Make a fluoro exposure, and then set the 3PPS COMP value such that
the kV and dose rate per frame rate equals the kV and dose rate as per step 9.
14. Select 1PPS COMP. Make a fluoro exposure, and then set the 1PPS COMP value such that
the kV and dose rate per frame rate equals the kV and dose rate as per step 11.
15. Press << five times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.8.9 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Pulsed Fluoro
The HPF SETUP menus for the membrane console are shown below.
* HPF SETUP *
HPF: ON ABS LEVEL 1: 2.00V
PF-HPF MA MULT: 2.5 ABS LEVEL 2: 2.60V
PF-HPF MS MULT: 2.0 +
<< MENU >>
* HPF SETUP *
ABS LEVEL 3: 4.50V
HPF DOSE LIMITS
HPF II COMP +
HPF PPS SETUP -
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I input dose calibration for high-level pulsed fluoro.
Step Action
2. Select HPF SETUP.
3. Connect an oscilloscope from TP5 to TP6 or TP9 or TP26 or TP41 (ground) on the
generator control board. An oscilloscope is needed since this is a pulsed signal.
system.
The fluoro ABS dose curve selection will need to be varied in the following steps. This is
selected via the MENU in the membrane console.
6. Select mag mode 0 (if applicable).
Select the largest I.I. mode. Ensure that ABS is on.

3E.8.9 I.I. Input Dose Calibration for High-Level Pulsed Fluoro (Cont)
Step Action
7. Select high-level pulsed fluoro mode and 30 PPS.
8. Ensure that the PF-HPF MA MULT is set correctly. This is described under High-Level
Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (without SID compensation).
9. Set the radiation meter to measure dose per frame at 30 fps (frames per second).
MED and HIGH respectively.
12. Select ABS LEVEL 0. While making a pulsed fluoro exposure, set the ABS LEVEL 0 value
for an I.I. input dose of 0.035 uGy (4 uR) / frame.
16. Press >>.
18. Press << three times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu, or you can proceed to
the succeeding steps as outlined in the next section.

3E.8.10 I.I. Mag Mode Compensation for High-Level Pulsed Fluoro
The HPF II COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* HPF II COMP *
MAG1 MS MULT: 1.2
MAG2 MS MULT: 2.0
MAG3 MS MULT: 2.4 +
-
<< MENU
Follow the steps below to perform the I.I. mag mode compensation for high-level pulsed fluoro (if
applicable).
Step Action
1. From HPF SETUP menu 2, select HPF II COMP.
5. Select FL ABS CURVE = MED. Select mag mode 0.
6. Make a pulsed fluoro exposure and record the stabilized kV.
8. Select MAG1 MS MULT. While making a pulsed fluoro exposure, set the MAG1 MS MULT
value such that the mag 1 kV equals the kV noted in step 6.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 for the remaining magnification modes.
10. Press >> four times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.9.0 DOSE LIMITS SETUP (WITH S.I.D. COMPENSATION)
This section describes the procedure for setting up dose limits on systems with optional S.I.D.
compensation.
3E.9.1 Initial Setup for S.I.D. Compensation
Definitions of initial fluoroscopic setup parameters for units with S.I.D. compensation.
SID COMP Enables / disables SID compensation.
ON to enable SID compensation.
OFF to disable SID compensation.
SID MIN REF Sets the minimum SID for the imaging system.
SID MAX REF Sets the maximum SID for the imaging system.
SID INT. TYPE Selects the SID interface type.
0: NRT Celex table (serial communication).
Follow the steps below to perform the initial S.I.D. compensation setup.
Step Action
2. Select SID COMP from the FLUORO SETUP menu.
3. From the SID COMP menu, select SID COMP and toggle the setting from OFF to ON.
SID COMP must be ON if setting dose limits with SID compensation.
4. Set the table / positioner to its minimum S.I.D.
• Measure the table / positioners voltage output at minimum S.I.D. at TP5 on the room I/O
board if the S.I.D. input is via the room I/O board.
• If the S.I.D. input is via the digital I/O board, measure the voltage at the S.I.D. input on
the board as per the applicable supplement that will be included with this generator.
• Enter the value of the measured voltage at minimum S.I.D. into the SID MIN REF field.
5. Set the table / positioner to its maximum S.I.D.
• Measure the table / positioners voltage output at maximum S.I.D. at TP5 on the room
I/O board if the S.I.D. input is via the room I/O board.
• If the S.I.D. input is via the digital I/O board, measure the voltage at the S.I.D. input on
the board as per the applicable supplement that will be included with this generator.
• Enter the value of the measured voltage at maximum S.I.D. into the SID MAX REF field.
6. Select SID INT. TYPE. Use the + or – button to select the desired SID interface type.
7. Press >> twice to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.

3E.9.2 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA allowed for each kV setting in both manual and ABS mode of
continuous fluoro operation for systems with SID compensation.
SET-UP.
CAUTION: PROCEDURES IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF

X-RAYS. ESTABLISHED GUIDELINES MUST BE FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES TO

The SID COMP menu for the membrane console is shown below.
* SID COMP *
SID COMP: ON
SID INT. TYPE: 0
SID MIN REF: 120 +
SID MAX REF: 180 -
<< MENU
The FL MAN DL and FL ABS DL menus for the membrane console are shown below (with SID comp).
* FL MAN DL *
40 kV-minSID: 6.0mA 80 kV-minSID: 4.0mA
60 Kv-minSID : 6.0mA +
70 Kv-minSID : 5.2mA -
<< MENU >>
* FL MAN DL *
100 kV-minSID: 2.8mA
120 kV-minSID: 1.8mA +
125 kV-minSID: 1.5mA -
<< MENU >>

3E.9.2 Continuous Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) (Cont)
* FL MAN DL *
40 kV-maxSID: 6.0mA 80 kV-maxSID: 6.0mA
60 kV-maxSID: 6.0mA +
70 kV-maxSID: 6.0mA -
<< MENU >>
* FL MAN DL *
100 kV-maxSID: 5.0mA
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS DL *
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS DL *
<< MENU >>
* FL ABS DL *
<< >>
* FL ABS DL *
<< MENU RETURN

Follow the steps below to set the continuous fluoro dose limits (with SID compensation).
Step Action
3. Ensure that the SID compensation function is enabled if this option is fitted. Refer to 3E.9.1.
5. From FLUORO SETUP menu 2, select FL SETUP.
6. From the FL SETUP menu, select FL DOSE LIMITS.
7. Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu for minimum SID. Use the + button adjacent
to the LCD display to enter the maximum available mA.
8. Repeat the above for 50 kV to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the next screen
for the succeeding kV steps.
9. Press >>.
Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum available mA.
10. Repeat the above for 50 kV to 125 kV. You need to press >> to advance to the next screen
for the succeeding kV steps.
Press << three times.


Step Action
12. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for non-ABS (manual) mode of normal
local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for Non-ABS (manual) mode:_____________ mGy /
min.
Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for ABS (automatic) mode of normal
local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for ABS (automatic) mode:_____________ mGy / min.
13. Ensure that the generator is set for normal continuous fluoro mode, that ABS is switched off
and that S.I.D. compensation is on.
14. Set the imaging system to the minimum S.I.D. that was programmed in 3E.9.1.


Step Action
27. Set the imaging system to the maximum S.I.D. that was programmed in 3E.9.1.

Step Action
remain off.
remain off.

Step Action
66. Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu for minimum SID. Use the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 17 for 40 kV.
67. Repeat the previous step for 50 kV to 125 kV using the mA determined in steps 18 to 26.
You need to press >> to advance to the next screen for the succeeding kV steps.
68. Select the 40 kV step in the FL MAN DL menu for maximum SID. Use the + or - buttons
70. Press >> to get to FL ABS DL setup menu screen
71. Select the 40 kV step in the FL ABS DL menu for minimum SID. Use the + or - buttons

Step Action
73. Select the 40 kV step in the FL ABS DL menu for maximum SID. Use the + or - buttons
75. Press RETURN.
Press << as required to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.
3E.9.3 High-Level Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA allowed for each kV setting in high-level fluoro mode for systems
with SID compensation.
SET-UP.


The HLF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (with SID comp).
* HLF DOSE L *
40 kV-minSID: :20.0mA 80 kV-minSID: :15.0mA
50 kV-minSID: :20.0mA 90 kV-minSID: :12.0mA
60 kV-minSID: :20.0mA +
70 kV-minSID: :20.0mA -
<< MENU >>

3E.9.3 High-Level Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) (Cont)
* HLF DOSE L *
100 kV-minSID: :9.8mA
110 kV-minSID: :8.5mA
120 kV-minSID: :7.0mA +
125 kV-minSID: :6.7mA -
<< MENU >>
* HLF DOSE L *
40 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA 80 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA
50 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA 90 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA
60 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA +
70 kV-maxSID: :20.0mA -
<< MENU >>
* HLF DOSE L *
100 kV-maxSID: :19.0mA
110 kV-maxSID: :16.0mA
120 kV-maxSID: :13.0mA +
125 kV-maxSID: :10.0mA -
<< MENU RETURN
Follow the steps below to set the high-level fluoro dose limits (with SID compensation).
Step Action
3. Ensure that the SID compensation function is enabled. Refer to 3E.9.1.
5. From the main FLUORO SETUP menu, press >>. Select HLF SETUP
Press >>. From HLF SETUP menu 2, select HLF DOSE LIMITS.
6. Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + button

Step Action

8. Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
11. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for high-level fluoroscopy. Note the
guidelines below.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for high-level fluoroscopy:_____________ mGy / min.
12. Ensure that the generator is set for high-level fluoro, that ABS is switched off and that S.I.D.
compensation is on.


Step Action
Max mA for 100kV = ______.
Max mA for 110kV = ______.
Max mA for 120kV = ______.
Max mA for 125kV = ______.
Max mA for 100kV = ______.
Max mA for 110kV = ______.
Max mA for 120kV = ______.
Max mA for 125kV = ______.

Step Action
39. 1 Press << three times to return to HPF DOSE L menu 1.
Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + or - buttons
41. Press << three times to return to HPF DOSE L menu 1.
Select the 40 kV step in the HLF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + or - buttons
43. Press << four times to return to the HLF SETUP menu.
Press << three times to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.
3E.9.4 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA and the maximum pulse width allowed for each kV setting in
normal pulsed fluoro mode for systems with SID compensation.
SET-UP.



3E.9.4 Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) (Cont)

The PF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (with SID comp).
* PF DOSE L *
40 kV-minSID: 16ms 60 kV-minSID: 16ms
40 kV-minSID: 30mA 60 kV-minSID: 30mA
50 kV-minSID: 16ms +
50 kV-minSID: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
125 kV-minSID: 8ms
125 kV-minSID: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
40 kV-maxSID: 16ms 60 kV-maxSID: 16ms
40 kV-maxSID: 30mA 60 kV-maxSID: 30mA
50 kV-maxSID: 16ms +
50 kV-maxSID: 30mA -
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>

The PF DOSE L menus(Cont)

* PF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
125 kV-maxSID: 8ms
125 kV-maxSID: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU RETURN
Follow the steps below to set the pulsed fluoro dose limits (with SID compensation).
Step Action
continuing.
5. Temporarily set the PF DEFAULT MS to the maximum value as described in the section
Pulsed Fluoro Setup.
6. From PF SETUP menu 2, select PF DOSE LIMITS.
7. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + button
adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum available ms.
Select the 40kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + button

Step Action
8. Repeat the previous step for 50 to 125 kV.
9. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
Select the 40kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
11. Press << seven times to return to PF DOSE L menu 1.
13. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for normal pulsed fluoroscopy. Note the
guidelines below.
local regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for pulsed fluoroscopy:_____________ mGy / min.
15. Ensure that the generator is set for pulsed fluoro and that ABS is switched off.
18. While observing the dosimeter, make a fluoroscopy exposure. Reduce the 40 kV ms for
minimum SID (40kV-minSID) via the PF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted
dose as recorded in step 13 is not exceeded. The ms should typically be in the range of 8 to
12 ms. If the 40 kV dose limits need to be reduced further, reduce the mA via the fluoro
control section of the console such that the final ms is in the specified range.

Step Action
29. Press << seven times to return to HPF DOSE L menu 1.
Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum ms as determined in step 19 for
40 kV.
30. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 19 for
40 kV.
31. Repeat the previous two steps for 50 kV to 125 kV using the ms and mA recorded in steps
20 to 28.
maximum SID (40kV-maxSID) via the PF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted
dose as recorded in step 15 is not exceeded. The ms should be in the 5 – 12 ms range. If
the ms is too low, reduce the mA via the fluoro control section of the console such that the
final maximum ms is in the 5 – 12 ms range.


Step Action
45. Press << seven times to return to PF DOSE L menu 1.
Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the PF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum ms as determined in step 35 for
40 kV.
46. Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the PF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum mA as determined in step 35 for
40 kV.
47. Repeat the previous two steps for 50 kV to 125 kV using the ms and mA recorded in steps
36 to 44.
48. Press RETURN, then press << to return to the PF SETUP menu screen.
49. Set the PF DEFAULT MS to the desired value as described in the section Pulsed Fluoro
Setup. This was temporarily set to its maximum value earlier in this section.

3E.9.5 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation)
This procedure sets the maximum mA and the maximum pulse width allowed for each kV setting in high-
level pulsed fluoro mode for systems with SID compensation.
SET-UP.


The HPF DOSE L menus for the membrane console are shown below (with SID comp).
* HPF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>

3E.9.5 High-Level Pulsed Fluoro Dose Limits (with SID compensation) (Cont)
* HPF DOSE L *
125 kV-minSID: 8ms
125 kV-minSID: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* HPF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
<< MENU >>
* PF DOSE L *
125 kV-maxSID: 8ms
125 kV-maxSID: 16mA
+
-
<< MENU RETURN

Follow the steps below to set the high-level pulsed fluoro dose limits (with SID compensation).
Step Action
continuing.
1. From the main FLUORO SETUP menu, press >>. Select HPF SETUP
2. Select HPF. Toggle the button beside it to select ON.
High Level Fluoro must be ON in order to proceed with high-level pulsed fluoro dose limits
calibration.
3. Set the mA multiplication factor that will be applied to low-level pulsed fluoro mA settings to
achieve high-level pulsed fluoroscopy by selecting the button beside PF-HPF MA MULT,
and using the + & - buttons to adjust the value.
For example, if the normal pulsed fluoro mA is 10 mA and a multiplication factor of 2.5 is
used, the high-level pulsed fluoro mA will be 25 mA.
4. Set the ms multiplication factor that will be applied to low-level pulsed fluoro ms settings to
achieve high-level pulsed fluoroscopy by selecting the button beside PF-HPF MS MULT and
using the + & - buttons to adjust the value.
For example, if the normal pulsed fluoro ms is 6 ms and a multiplication factor of 2 is used,
the high-level pulsed fluoro ms will be 12 ms.
5. Press >>, then select HPF PPS SETUP.
6. Select the button beside 1 PPS to toggle the value to ON.
7. Repeat the above for 3 PPS.
8. Repeat the above for 6/7.5 PPS.
9. Repeat the above for 12.5/15 PPS.
10. Repeat the above for 25/30 PPS.
15. Temporarily set the PF DEFAULT MS to the maximum value as described in the section
Pulsed Fluoro Setup.
16. Press << or >> as required to go back to the HPF SETUP menu 2.
17. Select HPF DOSE LIMITS

Step Action
18. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + button
Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + button
20. Press >>.
21. Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + button
23. Press << seven times to return to HPF DOSE L menu 1.
25. Record the maximum permissible Air Kerma Rate for high-level pulsed fluoroscopy. Note
the guidelines below.
* The listed Air Kerma Rate values should be confirmed by consulting local
regulations.
Maximum permitted Air Kerma Rate for high-level pulsed fluoro:_____________ mGy / min.
27. Ensure that the generator is set for high-level pulsed fluoro and that ABS is switched off.
minimum SID (40kV-minSID) via the HPF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted
dose as recorded in step 25 is not exceeded. The ms should typically be in the range of 8 to
12 ms. If the 40 kV dose limits need to be reduced further, reduce the mA via the fluoro
control section of the console such that the final ms is in the specified range.

Step Action
41. Press the << seven times to return to the HPF DOSE L menu 1.
Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum ms as recorded in step 31 for 40
kV.
Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for minimum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum mA as recorded in step 31 for 40
kV.
42. Repeat the previous step for 50 kV to 125 kV using the ms and mA as determined in steps
32 to 40.

Step Action
maximum SID (40kV-maxSID) via the HPF DOSE L menu such that the maximum permitted
dose as recorded in step 25 is not exceeded. The ms should be in the 5 – 12 ms range. If
the ms is too low, reduce the mA via the fluoro control section of the console such that the
final maximum ms is in the 5 – 12 ms range.

Step Action
56. Press the << seven times to return to the HPF DOSE L menu 1
Select the 40 kV (ms) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum ms as recorded in step 46 for 40
kV.
Select the 40 kV (mA) step in the HPF DOSE L menu for maximum SID. Use the + or -
buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the maximum mA as recorded in step 46 for 40
kV.
57. Repeat the previous step for 50 kV to 125 kV using the ms and mA as determined in steps
47 to 55.
58. Set the PF DEFAULT MS to the desired value as described in the Pulsed Fluoro Setup
section. This was temporarily set to its maximum value earlier in this section
59. Press RETURN and << as required to return to the main FLUORO SETUP menu.


CPI Canada Inc. DAP & AK Setup & Calibration 3F
CHAPTER 3F
DAP & AK SETUP AND CALIBRATION

CONTENTS:
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 3F-2

3F.2.0 DAP INTERFACING ............................................................................................................................... 3F-2
3F.2.1 DAP Compatibility ............................................................................................................................... 3F-2
3F.2.2 DAP Installation................................................................................................................................... 3F-3
3F.3.0 DAP SETUP MENU STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................ 3F-4
3F.4.0 DAP SETUP ........................................................................................................................................... 3F-5
3F.4.1 DAP / AK Setup Menus ....................................................................................................................... 3F-7
3F.4.2 DAP Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 3F-9
3F.4.3 AK / DAP printer setup (Touchscreen and R&F console) ................................................................. 3F-10
3F.5.0 DAP CALIBRATION ............................................................................................................................. 3F-11
3F.5.1 Equipment Required ......................................................................................................................... 3F-11
3F.5.2 DAP calibration overview .................................................................................................................. 3F-12
3F.5.3 DAP Calibration Procedure ............................................................................................................... 3F-12
3F.5.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet.............................................................................................................. 3F-15
3F.6.0 AIR KERMA SETUP ............................................................................................................................. 3F-17
3F.6.1 AK Setup and calibration .................................................................................................................. 3F-17
3F.6.2 AK Setup and calibration worksheet ................................................................................................. 3F-25
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-14 Rev. F Page 3F-1
3F DAP & AK Setup & Calibration CPI Canada Inc.
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section describes setup and programming of the DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter and the AK (Air
®
Kerma) calculator and display, both being standard on Indico IQ X-ray generators.
Single tube generators will only use 1 DAP chamber, two tube generators may use 1 or 2 DAP chambers.
Any references made to tube 2 or the ability to switch tubes in this section applies to two tube generators
only.
Implementation of DAP requires hardware – a DAP chamber and DAP circuits in the generator to process
the DAP signal from the DAP chamber. The air kerma calculator requires no additional hardware. Air
kerma measurements are made at several kV stations; the resulting measurements, in mGy, are then
entered into the generator AK setup menu. The generator uses the measured values to build a look-up
table in order to calculate and display accumulated air kerma and air kerma rate.
Note: This chapter uses the R&F membrane console for the AK and DAP setup and calibration. If using
GenWeb™, refer to the GenWeb™ user's guide accompanying this document.
3F.2.0 DAP INTERFACING
3F.2.1 DAP Compatibility

®
Indico IQ X-ray generators’ DAP are compatible with the DAP devices listed below. The correct DAP
device(s) must be selected in the DAP Setup menu as described in sections 3F.3.0 to 3F.4.2, in order to
ensure device compatibility.
The DAP chamber(s), when fitted with the proper interconnect cable(s), connect to the generator via
connectors DAP 1 (J2) and DAP 2 (J1) on the external connections panel on the back of the generator.
When ordering the DAP chamber from the DAP manufacturer, specify the CPI compatible interconnect
cable, if available. This is a special cable terminated with a 9-pin male “D” connector that is designed to
plug directly into the DAP connectors on the generator. If this cable is not available from the DAP device
manufacturer, consult CPI product support for the required cable to connect the DAP chamber to the
generator. Refer to the table below for the CPI cable assembly part numbers.
DAP DEVICE INTERCONNECT CABLE

PTW PX-T11020 736145-00
VacuTec VacuDAP 2004 Contact VacuTec for this cable assembly.
VacuTec VacuDAP 2004 HS (High Resolution) Contact VacuTec for this cable assembly.
®
Page 3F-2 Rev. F Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-14
3F.2.2 DAP Installation
1. Switch OFF the AC line voltage to the generator at the main disconnect switch.
2. Install the DAP chamber as per the manufacturer instructions. The interconnect cable to the
generator must be as per 3F.2.1.
3. Route the generator end of the DAP interconnect cable(s) to the rear of the generator and then
connect the cables to the generator as per the next step. Ensure that DAP cables are not routed
near electrically “noisy” cables such as the stator cables in order to minimize induced noise on
the DAP cables.
4. Connect the cable from DAP device 1 (for tube 1) to connector DAP 1 (J2) and the cable from
DAP device 2 (for tube 2) to connector DAP 2 (J1) on the external connections panel on the back
of the generator. Then tighten the screw locks on the connectors to secure the cables.
5. Proceed with DAP setup and calibration as per the remainder of this procedure.
®
3F.3.0 DAP SETUP MENU STRUCTURE
NOTE: The values and settings of the screenshots on the membrane console shown in this chapter are for illustration
purposes. The actual values and settings should be set according to your specific generator configuration and setup
requirements.
FIGURE 3F-1: DAP SETUP MENUS (R&F console). THIS DIAGRAM IS MEANT TO SHOW THE GENERAL MENU STRUCTURE ONLY.
®
3F.4.0 DAP SETUP
Definitions of DAP SETUP parameters.

DAP Enables or disables the DAP device. This setting applies to both DAP
devices if two DAP devices are used.
ON: The DAP function is enabled.
OFF: The DAP function is disabled.
DAP MODE Selects the DAP mode of operation.
IND: The generator makes and displays
independent DAP measurements for each
tube
SUM: The generator sums the DAP

measurement from both tubes and displays
the single summed measurement when
either tube is selected
DEVICE TYPE 1 Selects DAP device 1 and 2.
DEVICE TYPE 2
• 0 / PTW = PTW PX-T11020*.
• 2 / VacuTec = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004*.
• 6 / VacuTec = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004HS*.
CAL. VALUE 1 Adjusting this value calibrates the DAP reading.
CAL. VALUE 2
TEST VALUE 1 A numeric value, supplied by the DAP device manufacturer, that
TEST VALUE 2 represents the number of pulses generated by the DAP device during
TEST mode.
The generator counts the number of pulses generated by the DAP
device during TEST mode, and reports a DAP failure error message if
the actual number of test pulses are not the same as the manufacturer-
supplied test count, within an allowable margin of error.
Setting Test Value 1 or Test Value 2 to 0 will disable DAP input
1 or DAP input 2, respectively. For single tube generators, Test
Value 2 should be set to 0.
ACC ALARM Sets the alarm level for accumulated DAP. The console will sound an
2
(mGycm ) audible alarm and display a visual warning when the accumulated dose
exceeds this limit.
®
3F.4.0 DAP SETUP (Cont)
RATE ALARM Sets the alarm level for the maximum DAP rate. The console will sound
2
(mGycm /s) an audible alarm and display a visual warning when the current dose
rate exceeds this limit.
DAP RATE Enables or disables the display of the DAP rate during fluoro or serial
DISPLAY rad operation.
ON: DAP rate is displayed during fluoroscopic
or serial rad operation. When the fluoro or
serial rad run is finished, the accumulated
DAP will be displayed.
OFF: Displays the accumulated DAP only during
fluoroscopic or serial rad operation.
AK/DAP PRINTER Allows selection of the DAP printer type, or disabling of the DAP printer
function.
(this feature is
under the OFF: Disables the DAP printer function.
UTILITY>CONSOLE
DPU414 Selects the Seiko Instruments DPU-414 printer.
menu and can be
accessed without SLP200: Selects the Seiko Instruments SLP-200 printer.
the need for a Refer to 3F4.2 steps 17 to 21 to access the settings and 3F.4.3 for the
service password) DAP / Air Kerma printer setup and installation information.
PRINT Prints a DAP label. The printer will print the date and time near the top of
2 2
the label, and the accumulated Dose-Area Product (mGycm or uGym )
near the middle of the label. This information is retrieved from the
generator at the time the label is printed. Several headings are also
printed on the labels; the corresponding patient information must be
manually entered.
[AK]/DAP RESET Resets the DAP display to zero.
DAP TEST Tests the DAP circuits by counting the number of test pulses (refer to
TEST VALUE, above). A pass / fail message will be presented after the
DAP test, and the actual number of test pulses counted will be
displayed.
®
3F.4.1 DAP / AK Setup Menus
Figure 3F-2: DAP / AK setup menus on the R&F membrane console. This diagram is meant to show the general menu structure only.
®
®
3F.4.2 DAP Setup
Follow the steps below to perform the initial DAP setup. Refer to the definitions in the table above.
Step Action
3. Press >>, then select DAP SETUP
4. From DAP SETUP menu 1, select DAP to and toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
5. Select DAP MODE. Toggle the button to select SUM or IND.
6. Select DEVICE TYPE 1. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired DAP 1 device.
7. Select TEST VALUE 1. Use the + or – buttons to select the test value for DAP device 1.
8. Select DEVICE TYPE 2. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired DAP 2 device.
9. Press >>.
10. Select TEST VALUE 2. Use the + or – buttons to select the test value for DAP device 2.
2
11. Select ACC ALARM (mGycm ). Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum permissible
accumulated DAP.
2
12. Select RATE ALARM (mGycm /s). Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum permissible
DAP rate for fluoro operation.
13. Select DAP RATE DISPLAY. Toggle the button to select ON or OFF.
14. Press MENU to access the DAP RESET, TEST, and PRINT functions.
15. Press Reset to reset the DAP display to zero.
16. Press TEST to test the DAP system. This will test the DAP chamber and DAP circuits in the
generator for the selected tube (tube 1 / DAP 1 or tube 2 / DAP 2).
17. Press << and EXIT as required to return to GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Note: The menu to enable and select the AK/DAP Printer is under UTILITY>CONSOLE
menu from the GENERATOR SETUP menu. Navigate to page 4 of the CONSOLE menu by
pressing >> three times and enable it from there by selecting the correct printer type. For the
menu layout information, see Chapter 3C-Programming, and Figure 3C-2 sheet 1, for details.
Also, service password is not necessary to enable the AK/DAP Printer. Follow the steps
below to do this.
18. While at GEN CONFIGURATION menu, press << and EXIT as required to return to
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
19. Select UTILITY>CONSOLE. Now press >> three times.
20. Select AK/DAP PRINTER. Toggle the button to select OFF, DPU414, or SLP200.
21. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
22. To access the menu to print DAP labels, follow steps 2, 3, 14 in sequence and press PRINT
to print a DAP label. Note: The printout will contain whichever function(s) are enabled, e.g.
DAP & AK or either one.
®
3F.4.3 AK / DAP printer setup (Touchscreen and R&F console)
NOTE: POWER OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING OR

DISCONNECTING J2, DATA LINK PORT ON THE MEMBRANE
CONSOLE.
Follow the steps below to set up and configure the DAP printer on the membrane console.
Step Action
1. Connect the DAP printer to J2, Data Link port on the rear of the membrane console.
2. Ensure that the correct DAP printer is selected as outlined in sections 3F.4.2 steps 17 to
21 and 3F.6.1 steps 8 to 12 of this chapter.
3. Verify proper printer operation in normal operating mode by printing a test label.
On the StarQ™ touchscreen console, only a USB based SLP 440 printer is supported and its driver is
already installed by default. Follow these steps if it is preferred to install a different printer.
Step Action
1. Connect a USB compatible DAP printer to a vacant USB port on the touchscreen
console. If an RS-232 printer is used, it will require port assignment according to the
printer manufacturer instructions. Additionally, you need a USB to Serial converter since
the touchscreen console only provides USB connectivity.
Follow the DAP printer manufacturer's instruction to successfully install the printer to the
windows operating system used in the touchscreen console.
2. Ensure that the correct DAP printer is selected as per the DAP and AK sections of the
®
Indico IQ operator’s manual.
3. Verify proper printer operation in normal operating mode by printing a test label.
NOTE: THE GENERATOR MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR A SPECIFIC

PRINTER. THE GENERATOR WILL BE COMPATIBLE ONLY WITH THE
SELECTED PRINTER, THEREFORE ONLY THAT PRINTER MODEL
MUST BE USED IN THIS INSTALLATION.
®
NOTE: THE PAPER OR LABELS USED IN THE PRINTER MUST MEET ALL
APPLICABLE REGULATIONS. MEDICAL GRADE PAPER OR LABELS,
APPROVED FOR MEDICAL RECORDS, MUST NORMALLY BE USED.
3F.5.0 DAP CALIBRATION
The DAP device must be calibrated before use and the calibration must be periodically checked as per
the DAP device manufacturers requirements, or as per local regulations.
3F.5.1 Equipment Required
The following equipment is required for DAP calibration.

• An X-ray cassette and film. The speed of the film / screen is not relevant, as the film is only used to
determine the area that is irradiated at the dose measurement plane.
An X-ray cassette and film is the preferred method to measure the irradiated area, but if this is not
readily available, for example if this is a digital only system, a procedure is given to determine the
required area using the imaging system.
• A film processor to develop the film, if required.
• A calibrated dosimeter.
• A ruler or tape measure with centimeter markings. This will be needed to measure the exposed area
of the film. If measuring in inches, use a calculator and multiply inches by 2.54 to obtain the
measurement in centimeters.
®
3F.5.2 DAP calibration overview
The first step involved in calibrating the DAP meter in the generator is to carefully make a dose
measurement at a given distance from the X-ray source. The next step is to expose a test film at the
same distance from the X-ray source as the dose measurement that was just made.
The dose-area product is calculated by multiplying the measured dose, in mGy, by the exposed area of
2 2
the film, in cm . This gives the actual dose-area product, in mGycm .
After the reference dose-area product is determined as described above, it is compared to the DAP
reading as measured by the generator. Adjustments are made to the Calibration Value parameters in
the Dap Setup window, such that the DAP display corresponds to the calculated dose-area product. This
procedure may need to be repeated several times until the required accuracy is obtained.
The reason the DAP device is able to accurately measure the dose-area product at its location at the
bottom of the collimator is that although the radiation level falls off at a rate inversely proportional to the
square of the distance from the source, the irradiated area increases as the square of the distance from
2
the source. For example, by doubling the distance, the dose falls to (½) = ¼ of the previous dose but the
2
area increases to 2 = 4 times the area. Therefore, the dose-area product will remain constant at a given
distance from the source. This is also the reason that care must be taken to ensure that the area
measurement is done at the same distance from the X-ray source as the dose measurement.
3F.5.3 DAP Calibration Procedure
CTM
TUBE 1
DAP chamber 1
70 cm
Dosimeter plane and film plane

20 cm
DAP chamber 2
TUBE 2
TYPICAL SETUP FOR DAP CALIBRATION

FILE: DAP.CDR
Figure 3F-2: Test setup for DAP calibration
®
3F.5.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
Use these steps to calibrate the DAP meter(s) in the generator.

Step Action
1. Set up the dosimeter as per figure 3F-2. The probe should be centered relative to the
central ray from the X-ray tube, and sufficiently far off the tabletop to minimize scatter
radiation.
Do not use any absorber during this procedure.
2. Open the collimator such that the field size at the location of the probe is approximately 12
cm X 12 cm. Ensure that the probe is fully irradiated.
3. Temporarily set the DAP Mode to IND. Refer to sections 3F.4.0.
4. Reset the DAP display to zero as per the DAP (DOSE-AREA PRODUCT) section of the
®
Indico IQ operator’s manual.
5. Select the desired DAP device to calibrate by selecting an image receptor that is
programmed to select the corresponding tube.
Start with tube 1 / DAP device 1.
6. Set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA and 20 ms.
7. Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Record the mGy value in a
copy of table 3F-1.
8. Note the DAP value as displayed on the console, and then record the value in a copy of
table 3F-1.
9. Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film if available. The film plane must be
at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 7.
If using an image sensor such as an I.I., CR, DR or other flat panel detector, the image
pickup plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 7.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS STEP CANNOT BE OVERSTATED: THE IRRADIATED
AREA MEASUREMENT MUST BE MADE AT A POINT THAT IS THE SAME DISTANCE
FROM THE X-RAY SOURCE AS THE DOSE WAS MEASURED AT.
10. Ensure that the collimator field at the measurement plane is smaller than the active area of
the image pick-up device (film, I.I. or flat panel detector). Refer to figure 3F-3.
Do not readjust the collimator from the setting that was used in step 2.
11. Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 6.
12. Develop the film (if used).
®
3F.5.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
Step Action
13. Measure the irradiated image area. For film, measure the length and width of the exposed
area and record the results in table 3F-1. Refer to figure 3F-3.
If using a digital imaging system, use the measurement tool if available to measure the
length and width of the area in question. If the digital imaging system does not allow image
size measurement, it is suggested that an X-ray opaque item of known dimensions be
placed at the image plane. A collimator test tool would be useful in this application. The
length and width of the irradiated area can then be extrapolated by comparison to the size
of the reference object.
Record the length and width of the irradiated area at the measurement plane in table 3F-1.
2
14. Calculate the irradiated image area, in cm . Use the length and width recorded in table 3F-
1.
15. Calculate the dose-area product by multiplying the area from table 3F-1 X the dose in
mGy from table 3F-1. Record the resulting value at step 3 in table 3F-1.
16. Calculate the percentage error between the manually calculated DAP measurement (table
3F-1, step 3) and the measured DAP value (table 3F-1, step 4). Record the percentage
error in step 5 of the table.
17. If the displayed DAP reading does not meet the required accuracy, increase or decrease
CAL. VALUE 1 (DAP Device 1) or CAL. VALUE 2 (DAP Device 2) by the same
percentage as the percentage error.
18. Repeat steps 7 to 17 until the required accuracy is obtained. Make as many copies of
table 3F-1 as required to record the results from all required iterations.
19. Repeat the above procedure for the second DAP device (tube 2).
20. Reset the DAP MODE as desired. This was temporarily set to IND in step 3.
X-RAY CASSETTE
13.2
EXPOSED 13.6
AREA
ILLUMINATED DEVELOPED FILM

COLLIMATOR
FIELD
Figure 3F-3: Irradiated area vs. available image area
®
3F.5.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet
Step Action Result
1. Measured dose: _____________ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of _____________ Length (cm)

the film (Length X Width).
_____________ Width (cm)
2
Calculate the exposed area in cm (length X
2
width). _____________ Area (cm )
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area

2 2
in cm (step 2). This will yield the actual _____________ DAP (mGycm )
2
dose-area product, in mGycm .
2 2
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm , as displayed _____________ DAP (mGycm )
by the generator.
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the _____________ % error

example at the end of this section.
THIS TABLE IS REPEATED BELOW FOR THE SECOND ITERATION OF THE DAP CALIBRATION.
Table 3F-1A and 3F-1B: DAP worksheets
Step Action Result
1. Measured dose: _____________ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of _____________ Length (cm)

_____________ Width (cm)
2
Calculate the exposed area in cm (length X
2
width). _____________ Area (cm )
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area

2 2
in cm (step 2). This will yield the actual _____________ DAP (mGycm )
2
dose-area product, in mGycm .
2 2
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm , as displayed _____________ DAP (mGycm )
by the generator.
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the _____________ % error

example at the end of this section.
Table 3F-1A and 3F-1B: DAP worksheets
®
3F.5.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet (Cont)
Refer to the sample DAP worksheet below:
STEP ACTION RESULT
1. Measured dose: ____5.4______ mGy
2. Measure and record the exposed area of ____13.6_____ Length (cm)

____13.2_____ Width (cm)
2
Calculate the exposed area in cm (length
2
X width). ___179.52____ Area (cm )
3. Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the

2 2
area in cm (step 2). This will yield the ____969.4____ DAP (mGycm )
2
actual dose-area product, in mGycm .
2 2
4. Record the DAP, in mGycm , as displayed ____1158_____ DAP (mGycm )
by the generator.
5. Calculate the percentage error: Refer to ____-16.3_____ % error

the example below.
Sample percentage error calculation (step 5):
969.4-1158 -188.6
X 100 = X 100 = -16.3%
1158 1158
®
3F.6.0 AIR KERMA SETUP

®
The Air Kerma (AK) setup function is standard on Indico IQ X-ray generators.
3F.6.1 AK Setup and calibration
Definitions of AK SETUP parameters.
AIR KERMA Enables or disables the AK (Air Kerma) calculator and display.
OFF: The Air Kerma function is disabled.
TUBE1 The Air Kerma function is enabled for Tube 1.
TUBE2 The Air Kerma function is enabled for T be 2 (applies to 2-
Tube Generator only.
MAX FILTERS A numeric value (0, 1, 2 or 3) that defines the number of collimator filters
that may be used in the installation.
0 = inherent filtration plus fixed added filtration only. 1, 2 or 3 means the
system may be used with the inherent + fixed filtration only or 1, 2 or 3
added filters may be used.
ACC ALARM Sets the alarm level for the accumulated Air Kerma. The console will
(mGy) sound an audible alarm and display a visual warning when the
accumulated Air Kerma exceeds this limit.
RATE ALARM Sets the alarm level for the maximum Air Kerma rate. The console will
(mGy/min) sound an audible alarm and display a visual warning when the Air Kerma
rate exceeds this limit.
AK/DAP PRINTER Select AK/DAP PRINTER. Toggle the button to select OFF, DPU414, or
SLP200.
(this feature is
under the
UTILITY>CONSOLE
menu and can be
Refer to 3F.6.1 steps 8 to 12 to access the settings and 3F.4.3 for the
accessed without the DAP / Air Kerma printer setup and installation information.
need for a service
password)
®
3F.6.1 AK Setup and calibration (Cont)
®
AK SETUP menu 1 and 2 for the Indico IQ membrane console is shown below.
Follow the steps below to perform the initial Air Kerma setup. Refer to the definitions in the table
above.
Step Action
3. Press >>, then select AK SETUP.
4. From AK SETUP menu 1, select AIR KERMA. Toggle the button to select OFF, TUBE1, or
TUBE2. The air kerma function will only be available on the selected tube.
5. Select MAX FILTERS. Use the + or – buttons to select the desired number of filters.
6. Select ACC ALARM (mGy). Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum permissible
accumulated air kerma (for radiographic operation).
7. Select RATE ALARM (mGy/min). Use the + or – buttons to set the maximum permissible air
kerma rate (for serial radiographic or fluoroscopic operation).
8. Press << and EXIT as required to return to GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
®
Step Action
Note: The menu to enable and select the AK/DAP Printer is under GENERATOR
SETUP>UTILITY>CONSOLE. Navigate to page 4 of the Console menu by pressing the >>
three times and enable it from there by selecting the correct printer type. See Chapter 3C-
Programming, and Figure 3C-2 sheet 1, for details. Also, service password is not necessary
to enable the AK/DAP Printer.
9. While at GEN CONFIGURATION menu, press << and EXIT as required to return to
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
10. Select UTILITY>CONSOLE. Now press >> three times.
11. Select AK/DAP PRINTER. Toggle the button to select OFF, DPU414, or SLP200.
12. Press << and EXIT as required to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
13. While at GENERATOR SETUP menu, press GEN CONFIGURATION.
14. While at GEN CONFIGURATION menu, press >>, then select AK SETUP.
15. Select MENU in order to access the PRINT menu if you need to print a label, or select >> to
continue with air kerma calibration. If calibration is not required, select EXIT to return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Note: The printout will contain whichever function(s) are enabled, e.g. DAP & AK or either
one.
®
Figure 3F-5:Typical test setup for air kerma measurements
®
®
AK SETUP menus 2 to 4 for the Indico IQ membrane console are shown below.
®
®
Follow the steps below to perform the AK calibration.
Step Action
1. Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3F-5.
This figure shows the typical probe placement for Air Kerma measurements; however, local
regulations should be consulted to confirm the proper test set-up.
2. Temporarily de-energize the I.I. power supply or cover the I.I with a minimum of 2.0 mm
3. Temporarily remove all added filters from the collimator. The collimator must contain only
inherent + fixed filtration at this point in the procedure.
AK SETUP menu 2, above, shows the maximum number of filters, i.e. with the MAX
FILTERS selection set to 3.
4. From AK SETUP menu 2, select FILTER 0.
5. Select 40 kV. This may be done one of two ways:
• Selecting the 40 kV step from AK SETUP menu 3. This will set 40 kV in the radiography
section of the console.
• Manually, via the radiography kV + / - buttons.
The generator mAs will automatically be set to 10 mAs. Do not adjust this value.
6. While observing the dosimeter, make a radiographic exposure.
7. Record the dosimeter reading, in mGy, in a copy of table 3F-2.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 at 50 kV, 60 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV.
9. If at least one external filter is used, temporarily insert filter 1 into the collimator. Record the
added filter in a copy of table 3F-2.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 8 for filter 1, if applicable.
11. If two external filters are used, temporarily insert filter 2 into the collimator. Record the
13. If three external filters are used, temporarily insert filter 3 into the collimator. Record the
15. Select the 40 kV step from AK SETUP menu 3. Confirm that this is for the FILTER 0
selection (FILTER 0 will be displayed at the top of the LCD).
16. Use the + or – buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the air kerma as recorded in
table 3F-2 (40 kV, filter 0).
17. Repeat the previous step for 50 kV, 60 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV using the Air Kerma
values recorded in table 3F-2.
®
Step Action
18. Steps 18 to 20 only apply if filter 1 is used:
Select FILTER 1, from AK SETUP menu 2.
19. Select the 40 kV step (FILTER 1 will be displayed at the top of the LCD).
Use the + or – buttons adjacent to the LCD display to enter the air kerma as recorded in
21. Press RETUR (RETURN) to return to AK SETUP menu 2.
28. This completes the air kerma setup and calibration.
Press << and EXIT as required to return to GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
®
3F.6.2 AK Setup and calibration worksheet
kV Filter 0 (mGy) Filter 1 (mGy) Filter 2 (mGy) Filter 3 (mGy)

No added Filter = Filter = Filter =
filter
40
50
60
80
100
120
Table 3F-2: Air Kerma worksheet
Note: The collimator filter mapping must be conveyed to the operator, i.e. which physical
filter corresponds to Filter 1, Filter 2 and Filter 3.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc. Acceptance Testing 4
CHAPTER 4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ................................................... 4-3
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ......................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Console Rad Tests ................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests ................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification .............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification ............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KV, TIME, MA AND MAS) .................................................................................. 4-10
4.4.1 Generator Rad and FluoroTests ......................................................................................................... 4-10
4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests ....................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES).............................................................................. 4-13
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC) ................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.6.1 AEC Backup Timer Test...................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS) ................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP) ................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) .................................................. 4-15
4.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SPARES ............................................................................................... 4-16
4.11.0 REVISION HISTORY .............................................................................................................................. 4-18
®
Indico IQ Series Service Manual Ch # 902975-15 Rev. F Page 4-1
4 Acceptance Testing CPI Canada Inc.
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within its limits.
This must be done at initial installation of the generator, and as required by local regulations. The
applicable sections of this chapter should be performed when the generator is reconfigured, or critical
component(s) are replaced. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HV module, generator
CPU board, generator control board, console connector board, generator control board, AEC board,
rectifier board, room I/O board, temperature sensor board, input distribution board, digital board, auxiliary
CPU board, inverter board, LSS 2/DSS 2 board and the filament board(s).
WARNING: 1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES; ACCIDENTAL CONTACT

MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2. AC MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR EVEN WITH
THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF VIA THE CONSOLE. THIS VOLTAGE IS
EXTREMELY DANGEROUS, USE EXTREME CAUTION.
3. THE DC BUS CAPACITORS PRESENT A HAZARD UP TO 5 MINUTES AFTER THE
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE
DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
WARNING: DO NOT ADJUST ANY POTENTIOMETERS WITHIN THE X-RAY GENERATOR

UNLESS OTHERWISE INSTRUCTED. IGNORING THIS WARNING COULD RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO THE X-RAY TUBE, HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES, AND HIGH VOLTAGE
MODULE, OR INCREASE THE RISK OF PATIENT OVER EXPOSURE.
WHEN VERIFYING KV ACCURACY, USE OF AN INVASIVE METER IS

RECOMMENDED, HOWEVER IF THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE, A NON-INVASIVE METER
MAY BE ACCEPTABLE. THE USE OF NON-INVASIVE METER REQUIRES EXTRA
PRECAUTIONS IN ORDER TO READ ACCURATE KV. FOR MORE INFORMATION,
REFER TO APPLICATION NOTE FOR USING NON-INVASIVE METER IN KV
MEASUREMENT, 906930.
WARNING: THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE
ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
WARNING: 1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED
TEST EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.
®
Page 4-2 Rev. F Indico IQ Series Service Manual Ch # 902975-15
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION (Cont)
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED BEFORE PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:
• The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product compatibility statement.
• The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual.
• The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual.
• If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this
manual.
• If the installation has ABS, verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of
this manual.
• If the installation has DAP, verify that the DAP chambers have been calibrated as per chapter 3F of
this manual.
• Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final position
and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.
• Ensure the AC mains are ON before beginning acceptance testing.
• Remove the generator covers before performing the generator preliminary test, the low speed starter
test, and the dual speed starter test.
4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.
• An invasive meter is recommended, however if a non-invasive meter must be used, refer to the
warnings described in the “Introduction” section in this chapter.
• Storage oscilloscope.
• mA / mAs meter.
• Radiation meter 0-10 µGy and 5–150 mGy/min.
• Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
• General purpose DVM.
• Strobe or reed tachometer.
• Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
• A set of HVL filters.
• Calculator.
®
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)

4.3.1 Console Rad Tests
Step Action Result Check
1. Press the power ON then power OFF buttons Generator switches ON/OFF and
on the console. console switches ON.
Note: If using the StarQ™ touchscreen
console, use the Mini Console to turn ON the
generator. Switch ON the touchscreen console
from ON/OFF button located on the side of the
touchscreen.
Note: Steps 2 and 3 apply only if a customer supplied external Emergency Power Off (EPO) switch is
connected. If no Emergency Power Off switch has been connected proceed to step 4. See Chapter 2,
section 2.6.9 and MD-0975 page 4 for further guidance.
2. Press the Emergency Power Off switch (if Unit will remain unpowered.
installed) and then the power ON button on the
console.
3. Reset the Emergency Power Off switch
3. Press power ON again to switch the unit on. Generator switches ON and
console switches ON.
Note: If using the StarQ touchscreen
console, use the Mini Console to turn ON the
generator. Switch ON the touchscreen console
from the ON/OFF button located on the side of
the touchscreen.
4. Press each of the receptor buttons that are For the membrane console verify
active (those that have been enabled during that the LED lights above for
generator configuration). each receptor. For receptor 6 on
the 23 X 56 cm console (adjacent
to the power ON button) only the
top LED will light.
Note: The TECHNIQUE / MODE SELECT button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 4, 5, 6 will
only be functional if APR mode has been set to NO during generator configuration (the TECHNIQUE
SELECT function is disabled if APR mode is enabled).
5. If applicable, select an active radiographic A: The AEC LED lights for the
receptor that has AEC programmed. membrane console.
Press the technique select button to select B: kV value is displayed.
AEC. C: mA value is displayed.
Verify the following displays: D: “AEC”, mAs value or ms value
is displayed depending on the
AEC backup mode selected.
E: Density value is displayed.
6. Press the technique select button to select A: The mAs LED lights for the
mAs. membrane console.
Verify the following displays: B: kV value is displayed.
C: mAs value is displayed.
7. Press the technique select button to select A: The mA/ms LED lights for
mA/ms. membrane console.
Verify the following displays: B: kV value is displayed.
C: mA value is displayed.
D: ms value is displayed.
®
4.3.1 Console RAD Tests (Cont)

8. Press the kV +/- buttons. kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
9. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). mA increases if mA + is pressed.
Press the mA +/- buttons. mA decreases if mA - is pressed.
10. Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms). ms increases if ms + is pressed.
Press the ms +/- buttons. ms decreases if ms - is pressed.
11. Ensure that AEC is selected. Density increases if density + is
Press the DENSITY +/- buttons. pressed.
Density decreases if density - is
pressed.
12. Press the focus select button. The large and small focal spot
LED’s alternately light as the
switch is toggled.
13. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three film-screen LED’s (I, II,
Press the film-screen select button. III) alternately light as the switch
is toggled.
14. Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms. The LED adjacent to the PREP
Press the PREP button. button lights.
15. Press the X-ray button. The X-ray warning indicator lights
during an X-ray exposure, and an
audible tone is heard from the
console.
16. Ensure that AEC is selected. The three field indicator LED’s
Press the FIELD select button (23 X 56 cm light to indicate field selection
console) or press the individual AEC field [L+C+R], [R], [C], [R+C], [L],
select buttons in sequence (all other [L+R], [L+C] as the switch is
consoles). toggled (23 X 56 cm console).
For other consoles, the LEFT,
CENTER, and RIGHT field
selection LED’s should light as
each field is selected.
17. Press the power OFF button on the console. The unit switches off.
For the touchscreen console, switch OFF the

generator from the mini-console.
®
4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests
This section applies only to Fluoro enabled units.

1. Press the power ON button on the console. Unit switches on.
2. Select an active fluoro receptor. A: The fluoro display area of the
console lights.
3. Press the DOSE button. The dose display on the LCD
display changes as the switch
is toggled.
4. Press the MAG button on the console. A: The MAG display on the
console LCD changes (IF I/I
MODES WAS ENABLED
DURING GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION) as the
MAG button is toggled.
B: The Mag display on the
console LCD increases if
MAG + button is pressed,
decreases if MAG - button is
pressed (IF I/I MODES WAS
ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION.
5. Press the ABS button on the console to enter A: The LED adjacent to the
ABS mode. button lights.
6. Press the ABS button on the console. The ABS indicator LED’s
adjacent to the ABS buttons on
the console switch off.
7. Press the fluoro kV +/- buttons on the console. kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
8. Press the fluoro mA +/- buttons on the mA increases if mA + is pressed.
console. mA decreases if mA - is
pressed.
9. Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on The accumulated time indicator
the console. will light, then extinguish on the
console as the switch is toggled.
10. Press the pulse fluoro button on the console (if The pulse fluoro indicator will
the pulse fluoro option is fitted). light, then extinguish as the
switch is toggled.
11. Press the power OFF button on the console. Unit switches off.
®
4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests

1. Ensure AC mains is ON and unit is switched DS5 on the input distribution
OFF. board is lit.
2. Switch the generator on. DS3 on the rectifier board is lit.
3. Switch the generator off via the console. The generator will not switch on
Move the NORMAL/LOCKOUT jumper (JW2) with the switch in the lockout
on the generator control board to the position.
LOCKOUT position (pins 2 and 3).
Switch the console ON.
4. Move the NORMAL/LOCKOUT jumper (JW2) The generator switches on.
on the generator control board to the
NORMAL position (pins 1 and 2).
Switch the console ON.
5. Verify that each active receptor (those that Receptor 1 Tube # _____
have been enabled during generator Receptor 2 Tube # _____
configuration) selects the desired X-ray tube. Receptor 3 Tube # _____
Receptor 4 Tube # _____
6. Switch off the generator. N/A
®
INDICO IQ X-RAY GENERATORS ARE FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, OR AN OPTIONAL
DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.3.4 OR 4.3.5, AS APPLICABLE, FOR YOUR GENERATOR.
Confirm that the tube(s) being used are compatible with the starter in this generator. The setup as
described in chapter 2 and in the supplement at the end of chapter 2 must be done correctly.
Tube 1 selection verified _______

Tube 2 selection verified _______
®
4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification

1. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 50 or 60 Hz waveform dropping
of tube 1. to less than half amplitude after
Switch ON the console. prep is complete.
Press and hold the PREP button.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be nominally as set in
chapter 2.
3. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost. Note: Some tubes require different
speeds and should be verified with
documentation provided by the
tube manufacturer.
FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER)
4. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 50 or 60 Hz waveform dropping
of tube 2. to less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button. prep is complete.
5. Measure the rotor boost time. Should be nominally as set in
chapter 2.
6. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost. Note: Some tubes require different
tube manufacturer.
7. Switch off the generator. N/A
®
4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification
THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER
TO VERIFY BOTH LOW AND HIGH SPEED MODES OF OPERATION.
• DO NOT DO SO IF A TUBE IS USED THAT CANNOT OPERATE AT BOTH LOW AND HIGH
SPEEDS.
• IF THE DSS IS PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED OR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY,
DISREGARD THE STEPS THAT DO NOT APPLY IN THE TABLE BELOW.
CAUTION: DO NOT BOOST AT HIGH SPEED FOR EXTENDED PERIODS OF TIME. DO NOT
EXCEED A MAXIMUM OF TWO (2) HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE.

1. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 60 Hz waveform dropping to less
of tube 1. than half amplitude after prep is
Switch ON the console. complete.
Select 70 kV, minimum mA, 50 ms.
2. Measure the rotor boost time. Should agree with the value in the
dual speed starter table in the
supplement at the end of chapter
2.
3. Select 100 kV, maximum mA, 50 ms, small A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
focus. less than half amplitude after prep
Press and hold the PREP button. complete.
dual speed starter table at the end
of chapter 2.
5. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
end of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1
and 3 to select low and high-speed modes
respectively. Note: Some tubes require different
tube manufacturer.
6. After a high-speed prep, verify that the Will hear the X-ray tube slow down
dynamic brake is applied. to 60 Hz.
FOLLOW STEPS 7 TO 12 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (DUAL SPEED STARTER)
7. Connect a current probe to the common lead A 60 Hz waveform dropping to less
of tube 2. than half amplitude after prep
Select 70 kV, minimum mA, 50 ms. complete.
of chapter 2.
9. Select 100 kV, maximum mA, 50 ms, small A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
focus. less than half amplitude after prep
Press and hold the PREP button. complete.
of chapter 2.
®
4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification (Cont)

11. Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 7 and 9
to select low and high-speed modes
respectively. Note: Some tubes require different
tube manufacturer.
12. After a high-speed prep, verify that the The X-ray tube will slow down to
dynamic brake is applied. low speed or below.
13. Switch off the generator. Generator turns OFF
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (kV, TIME, mA AND mAs)
4.4.1 Generator Rad and FluoroTests
• Use of an invasive meter is recommended, however if a non-invasive meter must be used, refer to the
warnings described in the “Introduction” section in this chapter.
• mA / mAs measurements must be made by connecting a mA / mAs meter to the mA measurement
jacks on the HV module.
• Measure ms at 75% of the peak kV value, i.e. from the time that the kV reaches 75% of its peak value
until it drops below the same value.
• All test equipment must be calibrated and the measurement tolerances of the equipment must be
appropriate for the measurement being made.
NOTE: THE RESULT COLUMN IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS SHOWS THE ACCEPTABLE
GENERATOR LIMITS FOR KV, MA, MAS AND MS. TEST AND MEASUREMENT
TOLERANCES MUST BE ADDED TO THE GENERATOR LIMITS SHOWN.
®
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAY RADIATION. USE
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.
For each step in the tables below, confirm the expected result. The measurement range shown in the
Result column includes the generator tolerances only. Test and measurement tolerances must be
added to the results shown.

1. Switch ON the generator and after initialization N/A
select the following radiographic technique:
kV = 100, mA = 100, Time = 100 ms.
Select an off-table receptor.
2. Make an exposure and verify the following Gen kV = 98-102 kV.
results: Gen mA = 94-106 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.
3. Repeat the previous step but set the values to Gen kV = 60.75-69.25 kV.
kV = 65, mA = 200. Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.
4. Repeat the previous step but set the kV to Gen kV = 117.75-132.25 kV.
kV = 125. Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
Gen ms = 97.5-102.5 ms.
5. Select 75 kV, 200 mA. A: Gen mAs = 1.6-2.4 mAs.
Select the exposure times shown below (3 B: Gen mAs = 3.4-4.6 mAs.
point operation). Verify the mAs shown. C: Gen mAs = 11 to 14 mAs.
D: Gen mAs = 17.8-22.2 mAs.
A: 10 ms.
B: 20 ms.
C: 63 ms.
D: 100 ms.
6. Select 75 kV. NOTE: The time associated with
Select the mAs shown below (2 point each mAs setting will vary
operation). depending on generator
configuration.
Use the ms displayed on the
console as the reference for the
measurements below.
A: 2 mAs. Gen ms per console.

B: 8 mAs. Gen ms per console.
C: 25 mAs. Gen ms per console.
D: 63 mAs. Gen ms per console.
In the above step, note the ms for the pending exposure. Then take the exposure and confirm
that the actual ms = the demanded ms within the allowed tolerance:
ms accuracy of the generator is:
• ± (2% + 0.5) ms for 5 ms to 6300 ms.
• ± (10% + 1) ms from 1 to 4 ms (≥ 0.5 mAs).
®
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests (Cont)

7. Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation).
A: Gen kV = 46.5-53.5 kV.
Select the kV values shown below. B: Gen kV = 56-64 kV.
C: Gen kV = 75-85 kV.
A: 50 kV.
D: Gen kV = 97-103 kV.
B: 60 kV.
E: Gen kV = 117.75-132.25 kV.
C: 80 kV.
D: 100 kV.
E: 125 kV.
8. Select 100 kV, 50 ms (3 point operation).
A: Gen mA = 46.5-53.5 mA.
Select the mA values shown below. B: Gen mA = 94-106 mA.
C: Gen mA = 189-211 mA.
A: 50 mA.
D: Gen mA = 379-421 mA.
B: 100 mA.
E: Gen mA = 474-526 mA
C: 200 mA.
F: Gen mA = 598-662 mA
D: 400 mA.
G: Gen mA = 759-841 mA.
E: 500 mA.
H: Gen mA = 949-1051 mA.
F: 630 mA.
G: 800 mA.
H: 1000 mA.
Note: The higher mA values will not be

available on all generator models and / or
programmed tube types.
4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests
This fluoro enabled units.

1. Place the generator into the fluoro mode of N/A
operation.
2. Place the imaging system into non-ABS mode N/A
or cover the fluoro receptor input with lead.
3. Select 3 mA fluoro.
Select the kV values shown below using the A: Gen kV = 46.5-53.5 kV.
fluoro section of the console. B: Gen kV = 61.75-.25 kV.
C: Gen kV = 75-85 kV.
A: 50 kV D: Gen kV = 97-103 kV.
B: 65 kV E: Gen kV = 106.8-113.2 kV.
C: 80 kV
D: 100 kV
E: 110 kV
®
4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests (Cont)

4. Select 70 kV fluoro. A: Gen mA = 0.0-1.5 mA.
Select the fluoro mA values shown below: B: Gen mA = 1.9-4.1 mA.
C: Gen mA = 4.8-7.2 mA.
A: 0.5 mA D: Gen mA as selected at left.
B: 3.0 mA Tolerance = ± (3% + 1) mA.
C: 6.0 mA
D: Maximum fluoro mA available.
5. Confirm that the fluoro “eye” symbol lights during a fluoroscopic exposure, and that
an intermittent tone is heard from the console.
6. Select pulsed fluoro if the pulsed fluoro option Verify that the pulsed fluoro rate
is fitted. Press the PPS + and - buttons. increases and decreases.
7. Select 70 kV pulsed fluoro (if available). A: Gen mA = 3.8-6.2 mA.
Select the PF mA values shown below: B: Gen mA = 37-43 mA
C: Gen mA = 75-85 mA.
A: 5 mA
B: 40 mA
C: 80 mA (if available).
8. If high-level fluoro is available, confirm that the frequency of the tone increases
during an exposure with high-level fluoro selected.
9. Run a sufficiently long fluoro exposure to Verify that the accumulated time
accumulate some time on the console fluoro is reset to zero after pressing
display. each of the ZERO buttons.
Press the ZERO button on the console.
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)
Refer to separate supplements at the front of this manual for further information IF APPLICABLE.
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)
For generators with AEC:
1. Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration.
2. Recheck the mAs, Dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate
steps in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.
3. Perform the AEC backup timer test as per section 4.6.1.
®
4.6.1 AEC Backup Timer Test

®
Indico IQ X-ray generators have a circuit that checks that the AEC ramp is at least 4% of the AEC
reference voltage in 20% of the AEC backup time. This procedure confirms that this circuit is working, and
that noise on the AEC input does not exceed the 4% threshold.
a) Close the collimator and point the X-ray tube away from the image receptor that has AEC channel 1
assigned to it. Alternately, close the collimator and cover the image receptor with a lead apron. Then
select this image receptor via the console.
b) Select AEC mode of operation, 100 mA.
c) Select the maximum kV used on that receptor and minimum density. Select the fastest film screen if
available.
d) Make an AEC exposure and verify that an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is displayed.
• An AEC DEVICE ERROR message indicates that the selected AEC channel has passed this test.
Repeat this procedure, starting with step (a) for the remaining AEC channels by selecting an
image receptor that has the desired AEC channel assigned to it.
• Go to step (e) if an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is not displayed when testing the current AEC
channel.
e) If the generator runs into backup ms or backup mAs, i.e. if an AEC DEVICE ERROR message is not
displayed, some troubleshooting is required to determine the reason that the generator is not
terminating the AEC exposure. Some troubleshooting tips:
• Repeat steps (a) to (d) but select the minimum kV used on the current receptor, maximum density
and the slowest film screen, if available. If an AEC DEVICE ERROR message results with these
settings, this almost certainly indicates that there is sufficient noise on the AEC input to exceed
4% of the AEC reference voltage under the test conditions in step (c), where the AEC reference
voltage is at its minimum. The cause of excessive noise on the AEC input now needs to be found.
∗ Measure the AEC reference voltage (PT REF). Then check that noise at the output of the
AEC board (PT RAMP) does not exceed approximately 2% of the AEC reference (PT REF)
voltage.
∗ Is the AEC cable routed along with other “noisy” cables i.e. stator cables?
∗ Are the stator cables shielded and properly grounded? Shielded cable is required for the low
speed starter and for the dual speed starter. The shield must be grounded at the tube end and
the generator end of the cable(s).
∗ Is the AEC cable shielded? The shield should only be grounded at the AEC board in the
generator.
∗ Is the AEC chamber isolated from chassis ground? Some chamber types must be isolated
• If the generator runs into backup ms or backup mAs under both sets of test conditions (maximum
kV, minimum density, fastest film screen AND minimum kV, maximum density, slowest film
screen):
∗ Recheck the troubleshooting steps in (e).
∗ Check the PT RAMP at TP32 on the generator control board using an oscilloscope.
f) Confirm that the AEC backup timer test has been performed for all AEC channels.
Refer to the section AEC Calibration Range in chapter 3D for background information on film screen
speed vs. AEC reference (PT REF).
®
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)
For fluoro enabled generators:

• Review section 3E: ABS calibration.
• Follow the appropriate steps in section 3E to verify the ABS calibration.
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)
For generators with DAP.

• Review Section 3F: DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
• Follow the appropriate steps in section 3F to verify the DAP calibration.
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)
The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity, and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917.
®
4.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SPARES
This section details the required test when a spare part listed in the table below is replaced or upgraded
on the generator. Before commissioning the generator back into service, validation tests are required to
ensure the generator is operating within its limits. Perform the test indicated by the check mark for the
spare part replaced or upgraded. Refer to the specific sections in this chapter to perform the required test.
Spare Part Gen Rad Gen DSS LSS HVL R&L Console Console AEC
Test Fluoro Rad Test Fluoro
Test Test
Resonant Assembly   
Inverter board 
LSS2 Board 
DSS2 Board 
DSS Plate Assembly 
LSS Plate Assembly 
Generator Control
Board
  
CPU Board  
Console Connector
Board
 
HV Module   
(Single Tube)
HV Module   
(Two Tube)
Room I/O Board  
AEC Board    
Fan Assembly (Large) 
Fan Assembly (Small) 
Auxiliary CPU Board  
Rectifier Board  
Input Distribution
Board
 
Input Fuse Mezzanine
Board
 
Temperature Sensor
Board
 
Digital Board 
®
4.10.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SPARES (Cont)
Part Gen Rad Gen DSS LSS HVL R&L Console Console AEC
Test Fluoro Rad Test Fluoro
Test Test
Filament Board   
Room I/O Transformer 
LSS Software Upgrade
Kit

DSS Software Upgrade
Kit

Handswitch 
Input Distribution
Fuses
 
Mezzanine Fuses
/Input Distribution
   
Fuses (F5, F8, F9)
Filament Fuses  
Rectifier Fuses  
Room I/O Fuses  
LSS2 Fuses 
DSS2 Fuses 
3-Phase DSS Fuses 
DC bus Kit
(80kW/100kW)
  
Console Cable
(Touchscreen)
 
Console Cable (R&F)    
Console Cable (Mini
Console)
 
Console (Touchscreen)    
Console (R&F)    
Console (Mini-Console)  
Cable DAP  
Generator Software*         
*Note: Perform the selected test(s) depending on the system configuration
®


F • Added note to section 4.3.4 and 4.3.5 to check the tube manufacturer’s Dec. 6, 2019
documentation to verify the anode speed.
• Added the Filament, IDB, Rectifier, Room I/O, and 3-Phase Starter fuses
to the table in section 4.10.0
®
CPI Canada Inc Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
SUPPLEMENT
REPRODUCIBILITY, LINEARITY,
& HVL TESTING
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP ...................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY........................................................................................................................................ 3
4.0 LINEARITY...................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION....................................................................................................................................... 9
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
The design and information contained in this document is proprietary to Communications & Power Industries
Canada Inc. (CPI), has been designed and developed at private expense, and is the exclusive property of CPI.
The information contained herein is loaned in confidence solely for the installation, operation, and maintenance of
CPI equipment. This document may not be duplicated in whole or in part, or be used for re-engineering, reverse
engineering, or otherwise reproducing in any form or creating or attempting to create or permitting, allowing or
assisting others to create or manufacture CPI’s product or products derived therefrom, without the express written
permission of CPI.
Copyright © 2007 by Communications & Power Industries Canada Inc. All rights reserved.
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00 Rev. C Page 1

Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing CPI Canada Inc
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This supplement describes reproducibility, linearity, and half - value layer (HVL) tests which may be used
to verify performance of medical X-ray generators.
NOTE: THIS SUPPLEMENT DETAILS TYPICAL REPRODUCIBILITY, LINEARITY, AND HVL TESTS.
LOCAL REGULATIONS SHOULD ALWAYS BE CONSULTED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
THESE TESTS, AS DETAILS MAY VARY IN SOME JURISDICTIONS, OR ADDITIONAL
TESTS MAY NEED TO BE PERFORMED.
WARNING: SOME EXPOSURES IN THIS SECTION MUST BE TAKEN AT THE MAXIMUM

GENERATOR KVP. THE X-RAY TUBE MUST BE KNOWN TO BE CAPABLE OF
OPERATION AT THAT KVP VALUE, AND THE TUBE SHOULD FIRST BE SEASONED
TO ENSURE THAT OPERATION AT HIGH KVP VALUES WILL NOT BE PROBLEMATIC.
Page 2 Rev. C X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement 740917-00

2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP
1. Place the radiation probe above the table approximately 25 cm (10”). Select an SID of
approximately 100 cm (40”).
2. Place a lead diaphragm over the detector and adjust its height so that the X-ray beam covers the
detector but does not over radiate the sides of the probe. Refer to figure 1.
X-RAY
TUBE
100 CM (40")
LEAD DIAPHRAGM
RADIATION PROBE
25 CM (10")
Figure 1: Dose measurement setup
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY
Calculate reproducibility as follows:
1. Using kV and mA/ms or mAs values per tables 1 to 4, make a series of 5 exposures.
2. Record each of the measured dose values, in mGy, in the appropriate table. Refer to step 3
before starting step 2.
To convert mR to mGy, divide the value in mR by 114.5. This will give the value in mGy.
(for example 114.5 mR = 1 mGy).
3. Record the preselected mAs for each series of exposures in the header of each table. For 3 point
generators, this is the calculated mAs value where mAs = mA X time in seconds (example for
160 mA and 125 ms, mAs = 160 X 0.125 = 20 mAs).

3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
4. Calculate and record the average dose K (kerma) in mGy.
5. Calculate the difference, K – K, for each exposure.
6. Square each difference from the previous step.
7. Calculate the sum of the differences squared.
8. Calculate the standard deviation (S) by using the formula.
9. Calculate reproducibility by dividing S by K.
10. Table 5 shows example reproducibility calculations.
11. If linearity is to be measured, it is suggested that dose measurements be taken at this time for
entry into tables 6 and 7. Refer to 4.0 LINEARITY for details.
IN TABLES 1 TO 4, 3 POINT MEANS THAT FOR GENERATORS WHERE KV, MA, AND TIME
SELECTION IS AVAILABLE, THE KV, MA AND MS VALUES SHOWN SHOULD BE USED. FOR
GENERATORS WHERE 2 POINT OPERATION ONLY IS AVAILABLE, THE KV AND MAS VALUES
SHOWN SHOULD BE USED.
3 point = Minimum kV, maximum mA, 100 ms.

2 point = Minimum kV, maximum mAs. mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (K) DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE2

mGy
1
2
3
4
5
Calculate each of the differences Square each difference. Then
K= ie: DIFF1 = K1 - K. calculate the sum of the difference2.
________ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _________
value.
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section: S = __________
Calculate reproducibility = S = _________ (not to exceed 0.045)

K
Table 1: Reproducibility

3 point = Maximum kV, minimum mA, 100 ms.

2 point = Maximum kV, minimum mAs. mAs = __________

mGy
1
2
3
4
5
value.

K
3 point = 50% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose.
2 point = 50% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose. mAs = __________

mGy
1
2
3
4
5
value.

K

3 point = 80% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose.
2 point = 80% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 mR (0.9 – 4.4 mGy) dose. mAs = __________
mGy
1
2
3
4
5
value.

K
EXAMPLE mAs = _20_

mGy
1 2.17 0.036 0.001296
2 2.14 0.006 0.000036
3 2.13 0.004 0.000016
4 2.11 0.024 0.000576
5 2.12 0.014 0.000196
_2.134_ Repeat for each remaining K Sum of difference2 = _0.00212_
value.
Calculate standard deviation (s) using formula at beginning of this section: S = _0.0230_
Calculate reproducibility = S = _0.011_ (not to exceed 0.045)

K

4.0 LINEARITY
1. Record two additional series of dose measurements for entry into tables 6 and 7:
• For table 6, use settings per table 3 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 3.
• For table 7, use settings per table 4 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 4.
• Record the mAs in the header of tables 6 and 7 as per 3.0 step 3.
1. Calculate and record the average dose K (kerma) in mGy for tables 6 and 7.
2. Record the preselected mAs and the average dose values taken from tables 3 and 4, and from
tables 6 and 7, at the top of the next page.
3. Using the appropriate mAs and K values, calculate X3, X4, X6, and X7 in tables 8 and 9.
4. Calculate the coefficient of linearity, L, as per tables 8 and 9.
mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mGy)
1
2
3
4
5
K = ________
Table 6: Linearity
mAs = __________
EXP No. DOSE (mGy)
1
2
3
4
5
K = ________
Table 7: Linearity

4.0 LINEARITY (Cont)
Record the mAs and K values taken from tables 3, 4, 6, and 7 below.
Table 3 mAs3 = _____ K3 = _____
Table 4 mAs4 = _____ K4 = _____
Table 6 mAs6 = _____ K6 = _____
Table 7 mAs7 = _____ K7 = _____
K3
X3 = = ________
mAs3
K6
X6 = = ________
mAs6
X3 - X6
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X3 + X6
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X3 - X6
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 8: Linearity
K4
X4 = = ________
mAs4
K7
X7 = = ________
mAs7
X4 - X7
L = = ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X4 + X7
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X4 - X7
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 9: Linearity

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION
1. Be sure the X-ray source assembly (X-ray tube and beam limiting device) is fully assembled and
functional.
2. Use the test setup as per figure 1.
3. Set the generator as follows: 3 point generators, 80 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 80 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs.
4. Take a series of three exposures and record the dose K (kerma) values in mGy in table 10.
Calculate and record the average of the three exposures.
5. Place 2 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 2 mm added), repeat the exposure and
record the K value in table 10.
6. Place an additional 1 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 3 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the K value in table 10.
7. Place an additional 3 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 6 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the K value in table 10.
8. The relative transmission for the average of the three K values where no Al was added is
assigned a value of 1.00. Using that base, assign relative transmission values to the remaining K
values. For example, if the average K value was 2.15 and has a relative transmission factor of
1.00, then 1.41 mGy will have a relative transmission of 1.41 / 2.15 = 0.66.
9. Plot the relative transmission values in figure 1. This should produce a straight line on the graph
since the X-axis is logarithmic.
10. Interpolate to determine the HVL. The Al thickness at a relative transmission of 0.5 will be the
required HVL value.
11. Repeat steps 4 to 10: 3 point generators, 100 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 100 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs. Use table 11 to record the values
and figure 2 to plot the results
12. Table 12 and figure 3 show example HVL determination.

5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)
ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER DOSE (mGy) RELATIVE TRANSMISSION

0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2 (total 2 mm)
1 (total 3 mm)
3 (total 6 mm)
Table 10: HVL dose values 80 kVp
Figure 1: HVL plot 80 kVp
For 80 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.9 mm Al.


0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings) 1.00
2 (total 2 mm)
1 (total 3 mm)
3 (total 6 mm)
Table 11: HVL dose values 100 kVp
Figure 2: HVL plot 100 kVp
For 100 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 3.6 mm Al.


0 2.17
0 2.13
0 2.16
0 (Average of above three readings) 2.15 1.00
2 (total 2 mm) 1.41 .66
1 (total 3 mm) 1.14 .53
3 (total 6 mm) 0.61 .28
Table 12: HVL dose values (example)
Figure 3: HVL plot (example)
By interpolating the thickness of Al at a relative transmission value of 0.5, it can be seen that the HVL is
approximately 3.3.

CPI Canada Inc. Troubleshooting 5
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 5-3

®
5.1.1 INDICO IQ Power Up .................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3.0 LED INDICATORS .......................................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.1 Rectifier Board ............................................................................................................................................ 5-52
5.3.2 Input Distribution Board............................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.3 Generator Control Board ............................................................................................................................. 5-53
5.3.4 Auxiliary CPU Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-54
5.3.5 Room I/O Board .......................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.3.6 CPU Board .................................................................................................................................................. 5-57
5.3.7 Dual Speed Starter Board ........................................................................................................................... 5-58
5.3.8 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Board ...................................................................................... 5-58
5.3.9 ADR Module Lid Board ............................................................................................................................... 5-63
5.3.10 Console Board (R&F membrane console) .................................................................................................. 5-63
5.3.11 AEC Board .................................................................................................................................................. 5-64
5.3.12 Digital I/O Board .......................................................................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS........................................................................................................................... 5-64
5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults ................................................................................................................................. 5-64
®
5 Troubleshooting CPI Canada Inc.
®
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
The Indico IQ console will display status and error messages during normal and abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter
contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
®
The messages shown cover all available Indico IQ options and configurations therefore the messages shown will depend on installed
options.
This chapter also contains tables that describe the status and diagnostic LEDs on various circuit boards.
®
5.1.1 INDICO IQ Power Up
®
When the Indico IQ generator is powered-up, the generator software will check the entire system. Included in this check are the following:
a) That the version of the software, if applicable, installed on the boards are up to date.
b) That the version number of the hardware being used is compatible with the entire system.
The generator typically powers up within 30 seconds. If a generator software update has been performed or a board assembly changed
then if necessary as determined in item a), it may take additional time for the generator to power up. If the generator system does not start
up quickly, DO NOT power it off immediately. Give the generator up to 10 minutes to process the update as required.
In the case of item b), a message will be issued on the console; make sure that replacement board(s) is/are compatible with the generator.
®
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES

®
The Indico IQ error messages are shown below. The messages are sorted from the lowest to the highest number for ease of reference
only, and not based on the severity of the error. Take note that regardless of the console being used, the same error message format will
be displayed on the screen. Touchscreen console, R & F membrane console, or GenWeb, will display the same error message format as
listed below.
For failure category series 5xx (Generator I/O Error), the console error messages shown are the default room input error messages. Room
™
input error messages can be modified during setup and installation via GenWeb and in such cases, the message may differ from the
defaults listed here. The touchscreen and GenWeb display the modified messages but the R&F console does not. Also, some pre-
assigned error codes reserved for certain inputs are not customizable. To modify the error messages, go to Gen Config > I/O Setup > Inputs
> Error Msg in GenWeb™. Refer to the GenWeb® manual and MD-0977 in chapter 9 for additional information.
Errors are logged in the error log; service personnel should review the previous errors to determine if the errors are generator induced or
induced externally before taking further action.
*Note: An invasive meter is recommended, however if this is not possible, a non-invasive meter may be used provided extra precautions
are taken in order to read accurate kV. For more information, refer to Application Note for Using Non-invasive Meter in kV Measurement,
906930.
ERROR CONSOLE ERROR PROBLEM ACTION

CODE MESSAGE
1 UNKNOWN HARDWARE The hardware revision of a subassembly This will normally occur if a board assembly has
REVISION is not valid. been replaced and its revision is not compatible
with the host.
2 WORK STATE The subsystem has reported an Switch generator off and then on again. Contact
MISMATCH incorrect work state to the main CPU. Customer Support if the error persists.
3 EXPOSURE SIGNAL The Exposure Signal is active in the Check the physical connections on the digital
ERROR Standby Phase. system and ensure they are properly connected.
4 EXPOSURE TRIGGER The external exposure trigger signal is Consult the external device manufacturer for
ERROR present at the wrong time. interfacing / troubleshooting information.
®

CODE MESSAGE
5 +35 VDC ERROR The +35 VDC rail is out of tolerance. Check the +35 V supply that is derived from the
switching regulator on the input distribution
board (MD-0975 in chapter 9).
6 -35 VDC ERROR The -35V DC rail is out of tolerance. Check the –35 V supply that is derived from the
switching regulator on the input distribution
7 RECTIFIER INTERLOCK The rectifier interlock signal on the Confirm that J10 on the input distribution board
ERROR auxiliary CPU board is open. is properly connected to J2 on the rectifier
board.
8 AUX INTERLOCK ERROR The auxiliary interlock signal on the Confirm that J4 on the auxiliary CPU board is
auxiliary CPU board is open. properly connected to J16 on the input
distribution board.
9 FAN 1 SPEED ERROR The fan 1 RPM is out of range. Check fan 1. Confirm that it is able to rotate
properly and replace if necessary.
®

CODE MESSAGE
15 GENERATOR CLOCK The generator’s real time clock is not 1. Try to reset the generator time and date.
ERROR functioning.
2. Check the lithium battery voltage on the
generator CPU board and replace if
necessary.
3. If the problem persists, contact Customer
Support.
16 BATTERY LOW ERROR The generator detects that the battery 1. Replace the battery on the generator CPU
voltage is low (< 2.5 V). board.
Support.
17 +12VDC ERROR The +12 VDC rail is out of tolerance. 1. Disconnect external loads on the +12VDC
rail, i.e. AEC board and recheck rail.
2. Check the +12 V supply that is derived from
the switching regulator on the input
distribution board (MD-0975 in chapter 9).
18 -12VDC ERROR The -12 VDC rail is out of tolerance. 1. Disconnect external loads on the -12VDC
2. Check the -12 V supply that is derived from
the regulator circuit on the generator control
rail, i.e. Digital Interface board and recheck
rail.
®

CODE MESSAGE
rail, i.e. Digital Interface board and recheck
rail.
21 DAP POWER SUPPLY The +15 V DAP supply is out of 1. Disconnect DAP chamber and recheck rail.
ERROR tolerance.
24 220VAC FAILURE The 220 VAC supply for room power is Check F2 on the room I/O board (MD-0977 in
lost. chapter 9).
lost. chapter 9).
®

CODE MESSAGE
lost. chapter 9).
27 18VAC PHASE 1 The 18 VAC supply for room power is Check F4 on the room I/O board (MD-0977 in
FAILURE lost. chapter 9).
28 18VAC PHASE 2 The 18 VAC supply for room power is Check F5 on the room I/O board (MD-0977 in
FAILURE lost. chapter 9).
90 FLUORO FOCUS The generator has detected a failure on 1. Check the selected focus on the X-ray tube
WARNING the selected Fluoro Focus. and ensure it is operating properly.
2. Check that the high voltage cables are
properly connected to the HV module and X-
ray tube.
3. Check the high voltage cables for damage.
91 UPDATING ACB The firmware for the ACB is currently Wait for the firmware to complete the updating
FIRMWARE updating. process for the ACB.
92 UPDATING RIOB The firmware for the RIOB is currently Wait for the firmware to complete the updating
FIRMWARE updating. process for the RIOB.
93 UPDATING DSS The firmware for the DSS is currently Wait for the firmware to complete the updating
FIRMWARE updating. process for the DSS.
®

CODE MESSAGE
101 DC BUS CHARGE The generator did not detect proper 1. Refer to MD-0975 in chapter 9. Measure the
TIMEOUT charging of the DC bus capacitors. The voltage across the DC bus capacitors during
main contactor in the generator will not power on. If this is not 500 – 740 VDC the
close until the DC bus is charged. capacitors have not charged properly.
2. Check for proper connection of cable on
rectifier board J1 to input distribution board
J25.
3. Check F11, F12 on the input distribution
board.
4. Confirm that K3 on the input distribution
board is closed to pre-charge the DC bus
capacitors.
5. Check that all three phases are present after
the main line fuses in the generator.
6. Check R1, R2, R38 and R39 on the rectifier
board.
102 DC BUS NOT CHARGING The DC bus voltage has not reached 1. Measure the DC bus voltage and check the
25% of its nominal voltage within 500 charging circuits. Refer to DC BUS
milliseconds. CHARGE TIMEOUT (Error Code #101)
above.
2. Check charging with the inverter(s) and / or
dual speed starter disconnected.
®

CODE MESSAGE
103 DC BUS DISCHARGE The DC bus is attempting to discharge 1. Try to reset the discharge circuit by switching
ACTIVE when the generator is on. the generator off and on.
2. Check for proper connection of the cable
between input distribution board J10 and
rectifier board J2.
Support.
104 DC BUS FAULT The DC bus voltage is out of tolerance. Measure the DC bus voltage and check the
charging circuits. Refer to troubleshooting steps
in Error Codes 101, 102, 103 above.
105 PHASE A VOLTAGE The phase A to ground voltage is out of Check the line voltage and the line fuses.
ERROR tolerance.
106 PHASE B VOLTAGE The phase B to ground voltage is out of Check the line voltage and the line fuses.
ERROR tolerance.
107 PHASE C VOLTAGE The phase C to ground voltage is out of Check the line voltage and the line fuses.
ERROR tolerance.
®

CODE MESSAGE
108 TUBE / HIGH VOLTAGE A resonant inductor over current 1. Check the tube for arcing by taking 3
ARC condition was detected. exposures at 40kV, 10mA, 20ms.
If error is reported, proceed to step 2.
Otherwise, take 3 exposures at 50kV, 10mA,
20ms.
20ms.
20ms.
If error is still not reported then proceed to
step 3.
2. Check the HV cables / connectors for signs
of arcing – reapply high voltage grease if
necessary or replace cables and then repeat
step 1. If after repeating step 1, the error is
not reported, continue on to step 3.
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.
3. Season the tube as per manufacturer’s spec
or replace if necessary.
Support.
109 TUBE / HIGH VOLTAGE An over current condition was detected Refer to ERROR CODE 108
ARC 1 on inverter 1.
®

CODE MESSAGE
112 TUBE ARC ANODE The anode current is too high. Refer to ERROR CODE 108
113 TUBE ARC CATHODE The cathode current is too high. Refer to ERROR CODE 108
114 OVER-VOLTAGE The kV exceeds the high kV tolerance 1. Check the kV reference output (test point KV
level. REF) on the generator control board. Refer
to MD-0980 in chapter 9.
2. Measure the output of the generator with a
kV measurement device* (see Note
described in the beginning of this section).
115 TANK CABLE The HV module is not properly 1. Check the cable from J3 on the HV module
INTERLOCK ERROR connected to the generator (MD-0979 in to J22 on the generator control board. Refer
chapter 9). to MD-0979 in chapter 9.
Support.
116 CAN CABLE INTERLOCK An internal CAN cable is unplugged or Check that all internal CAN cables are properly
ERROR open-circuit. connected.
117 RESERVED FOR Reserved for Future Use. Reserved for Future Use.
FUTURE USE
118 KV HIGH DURING The kV feedback signal is too high. 1. Check the kV reference output (test point KV
EXPOSURE REF) on the generator control board. Refer
2. Measure the output of the generator with
akV measurement device* (see Note
described in the beginning of this section).
®

CODE MESSAGE
119 KV LOW DURING The kV feedback signal is too low. 1. Check if the mains voltage drops out of
EXPOSURE tolerance during exposure.
2. If using a digital board, check that jumper
JW17 on the GCB is correctly installed.
3. Check the kV reference output (test point KV
REF) on the generator control board. Refer
4. Measure the output of the generator with a
kV * (see Note described in the beginning of
this section).
120 HIGH KV DURING The generator detected kV in the Switch the generator OFF. Prevent further use
STANDBY standby state. of the generator. Then contact Customer
Support.
121 MA HIGH DURING The generator detected mA greater than 1. Check the actual mA via the HV modules
EXPOSURE the allowed tolerance. mAs jack.
2. If mA is out of tolerance, perform tube
calibration.
Support.
122 MA LOW DURING The generator detected mA less than 1. Check the actual mA via the HV modules
EXPOSURE the allowed tolerance. mAs jack.
2. If mA is out of tolerance, perform tube
calibration.
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
123 ADR INTERLOCK J3-9 (ground) on ADR module not 1. Check that the ADR module is connected.
ERROR detected.
2. Check the 9-pin D-sub connector from J3 on
the ADR module to J7 on the Generator
Control board is connected.
3. Defective Generator Control board.
124 ADR OPEN CIRCUIT No reading detected from ADR module. 1. Check the HV cables for open circuits.
ERROR
2. Check that J3 on the ADR module and J7 on
the Generator Control board are connected.
3. Defective ADR module.
125 ADR SHORT CIRCUIT High reading detected from ADR 1. Check the HV cables for damage.
ERROR module.
2. Check the 9-pin D-sub connector from J3 on
ADR module to J7 on the Generator Control
board for damage.
3. Defective ADR module.
126 TUBE THERMAL ERROR The allowable set temperature of the X- Wait for the X-ray tube to cool.
ray tube has been exceeded.
127 HEAT EXCHANGER The heat exchanger cooling fluid level is 1. Check the fluid level in the Heat Exchanger
WATER WARNING low. and refill if low.
2. Check the ADR2 assembly and ensure the
Heat Exchanger Power (TB1), Heat
Exchanger Interlock (CNN3), and Pump
Power (CNN4) cables are properly
connected.
3. Check the cables from the Heat Exchanger
for damage.
®

CODE MESSAGE
128 HEAT EXCHANGER Cooling fluid flow not detected. 1. Check the ADR2 assembly and ensure the
FLOW ERROR Heat Exchanger Power (TB1), Heat
Exchanger Interlock (CNN3), and Pump
Power (CNN4) cables are properly
connected.
2. Check the cables from the Heat Exchanger
for damage.
3. Ensure the oil pump is running.
129 GRID NOT READY Generator does not detect the ADR2. 1. Check the cables connected to the Grid
Pulser Module and verify they are properly
connected.
2. Check the Power LED (DS1) on the Grid
Pulser Module lid and verify it is ON.
3. Check the Ready LED (DS2) on the Grid
Pulser Module lid and verify it is ON.
4. If LEDs DS1 & DS2 are OFF, check the +/-
35V and +/-12V supplies on the Filament
Supply board installed on the ADR2
Assembly.
5. A tube arc could also cause this error. Clean
and reapply grease to the high voltage
cables on the High Voltage Module and Grid
Pulser Module.
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
130 GETTER CABLE The generator does not detect the 1. Check the cables on the Getter board and
INTERLOCK ERROR Getter board. ensure they are not damaged.
2. Check if fuse F1 is open on the Getter
Supply Board.
3. Check the getter connection at the tube side.
4. Check if fuses F13 and F14 are open on the
Input Distribution board.
131 GETTER OVER- Generator detects an over current failure 1. Check if fuse F1 on the Getter Supply Board
CURRENT ERROR on the Getter board. is open.
2. Check that cables are properly connected on
the Getter board.
3. Check if the tube getter is operating properly.
4. If problem continues to persist, replace the
Getter board.
201 ROTOR ACTIVE IN The rotor ready signal is present when 1. Check that DS10 (DSS READY) on the
STANDBY Prep is not activated. generator control board is on.
2. Check the cable for proper connection
between generator control board J2 and
dual speed starter J1.
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
202 ROTOR BOOST ERROR Rotor ready signal not detected within 1. Check the X-ray tube stator and the stator
the allowed timeout period after prep wiring to the generator.
was activated.
2. Verify the proper tube selection via DIP
switches SW1, SW2.
Support.
203 ROTOR RUN ERROR Low rotor current detected in the main or 1. Verify the proper tube selection via DIP
shift windings. switches SW1, SW2.
3. Check the X-ray tube stator windings
impedances as per tube specification at the
dual speed starter.
4. If winding impedances are not correct, check
for open or short in rotor cable.
5. Disconnect rotor cable and recheck stator
windings impedance at the tube.
6. If winding impedances are not correct,
replace tube.
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
204 LF FEEDBACK TOO LOW The large focus filament feedback 1. Check the filament reference and feedback
voltage is too low. voltages. Refer to MD-0981 in chapter 9.
2. Check for an open-circuit large filament
connection (on the filament wiring & X-ray
tube).
205 SF FEEDBACK TOO The small focus filament feedback 1. Check the filament reference and feedback
LOW voltage is too low. voltages. Refer to MD-0981 in chapter 9.
2. Check for an open-circuit small filament
connection (on the filament wiring & X-ray
tube).
207 LF FEEDBACK HIGH IN The generator detected large focus Turn off the generator to prevent potential tube
STANDBY filament current greater than the limits in damage. Connect a substitute load to test the
standby mode. filament reference on standby.
208 SF FEEDBACK HIGH IN The generator detected small focus Turn off the generator to prevent potential tube
STANDBY filament current greater than the limits in damage. Connect a substitute load to test the
standby mode. filament reference on standby.
210 FILAMENT MISMATCH The focus enabled is not the focus 1. Check the X-ray tube filaments and verify the
selected. selected filament is ON when Prep is
enabled.
2. Check the Generator Control board and
verify the large filament board is connect to
J26 and the small filament board is connect
to J28.
212 DAP NOT READY The optional DAP is in its “warm-up” Allow the DAP chamber sufficient time to warm
state and not ready to make DAP up.
measurements.
®

CODE MESSAGE
213 DAP DEVICE ERROR The DAP device is not functional. 1. Perform DAP Reset.
2. Perform DAP Test.
3. Check the DAP wiring.
4. Check the DAP device and DAP software
configurations (correct DAP type and test
value).
5. Test DAP channel with another DAP device,
If the problem persists, contact Customer
Support.
214 AEC STOP SIGNAL The AEC PT STOP signal is present in 1. Disconnect the AEC chamber at the AEC
ERROR the Rad ready or prep state when AEC board and check if the problem is resolved;
mode is active. replace AEC cable and/or AEC chamber if
necessary.
Support.
215 AEC REFERENCE The AEC reference voltage is out of its Readjust the AEC calibration including density
ERROR operating range in the Rad ready or prep to operate within the required range.
state when AEC mode is active.
®

CODE MESSAGE
216 AEC DEVICE ERROR The generator has detected insufficient 1. Check that the X-ray tube is pointing at the
or no feedback signal from the AEC correct receptor.
device.
2. Check that the correct AEC fields are
selected, that the patient is properly
positioned and the beam is correctly
collimated.
3. Check that the exposure parameters are
correct for the examination.
4. Check the AEC cables for damage and
correct connections.
5. Check the AEC chamber(s) for proper
operation.
6. Check the AEC circuit. Refer to appropriate
functional drawing for the installed AEC
board.
®

CODE MESSAGE
217 AEC BACKUP TIME The programmed AEC Back-Up Time 1. Check that the X-ray tube is pointing at the
limit was reached and the exposure was correct receptor.
terminated by the generator.
selected, patient is properly positioned and
beam correctly collimated.
operation.
board.
7. Check if the X-ray tube can support the
exposure that was attempted.
When the FIXED AEC Back-Up mode is 8. Check that the AEC exposure has not
selected, an AEC BUT Error may also reached the X-ray tube kW or HU limit.
be reported if the X-ray Tube or 9. Check that the AEC exposure has not
Generator kW or HU limit is reached reached the generator kW or HU limit.
during an AEC exposure.
®

CODE MESSAGE
218 AEC BACKUP MAS The AEC exposure has exceeded the 1. Check that the X-ray tube is pointing at the
programmed AEC back-up mAs. correct receptor.
selected, patient is properly positioned and
beam correctly collimated.
operation.
board.
7. Check if the X-ray tube can support the
exposure that was attempted.
220 TOMO BACKUP TIME The tomo exposure has exceeded the 1. Check the exposure technique settings.
programmed tomo backup time.
2. Increase the tomo backup time, if necessary.
®

CODE MESSAGE
221 NO SYNC PULSE No sync input was detected when a 1. Check DS20 on the generator control board.
synchronized exposure is required. If it is not flashing at the sync frequency,
check the sync pulses from the digital
imaging system. Note: some digital systems
will only provide a sync pulse when
exposure switch is activated and Generator
is in its exposure phase.
2. If DS20 is not flashing, check the digital I/O
board and the generator control board.
Support.
222 INVERTER The generator has sensed high inverter 1. Check for proper airflow over the inverter
TEMPERATURE HIGH temperature. assembly and check the inverter cooling
fans.
2. Allow the generator to cool down before
resuming operation.
3. Check the connection of the temperature
sensor board.
Support.
223 RESONANT The generator has sensed high resonant 1. Check for proper airflow around the resonant
TEMPERATURE HIGH temperature. inductors and check the resonant cooling
fan.
resuming operation.
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
224 AMBIENT The generator has sensed high internal 1. Ensure the ambient temperature where the
TEMPERATURE HIGH ambient temperature. generator is located is less than 40°C.
2. Ensure generator cooling vents are not
blocked.
3. Check the cooling fans.
resuming operation.
Support.
225 GENERATOR DUTY The generator has exceeded its 1. Re-evaluate technique factors. Allow the
CYCLE LIMIT calculated duty cycle limit. generator to cool if possible. If exposures
are continued, serious generator damage
may result due to overheating.
Support.
226 TUBE THERMAL SWITCH The X-ray tube thermal switch for tube 1 1. Wait for X-ray tube 1 to cool.
1 OPEN is open.
2. Check the thermal switch inputs at J11-1 and
J11-3 on the input distribution board. Refer
Support.
®

CODE MESSAGE
227 TUBE THERMAL SWITCH The X-ray tube thermal switch for tube 2 1. Wait for X-ray tube 2 to cool.
2 OPEN is open.
2. Check the thermal switch inputs at J11-2 and
J11-3 on the input distribution board. Refer
Support.
229 DSS NOT CONFIGURED The DSS Tube Type has not been 1. Configure switches SW1 and SW2 (if
configured when attempting to start a applicable) on the DSS for the Tube Type.
tube rotor.
2. Select the Tube Type using GenWeb™.
230 DSS FAILED TO The DSS Tube Type failed to download. Verify the correct Tube Type was selected in
CONFIGURE GenWeb™.
231 DSS DIP SWITCH The DSS DIP Switches are set Verify that switches SW1, SW2, SW3, and SW8
WRONG incorrectly. are configured correctly on the DSS board.
232 DSS DATA CORRUPTED The DSS 400 VAC/480 VAC voltage Power cycle generator OFF and ON to
table has been corrupted. reconfigure.
233 DSS BUSY The DSS CPU has been in its Busy Power cycle generator OFF and ON to
state for too long. reconfigure.
234 DSS LOW SPEED NOT Low speed operation not supported. 1. Verify correct X-ray tube is selected in
SUPPORTED GenWeb™.
2. Enable Dual speed in tube configuration set-
up.
®

CODE MESSAGE
235 DSS HIGH SPEED NOT High speed operation not supported. 1. Verify correct X-ray tube is selected in
SUPPORTED GenWeb™.
2. Enable Dual speed in tube configuration set-
up.
236 DSS ROTOR INVERTER Rotor current detected when the DSS is Power cycle generator OFF and ON to
WRONG not enabled. reconfigure.
237 DSS MAIN CURRENT The tube main current is low. Check for an open in the stator cable.
LOW
238 DSS MAIN CURRENT The tube Main Current is high. Check for a short in the stator cable
HIGH
239 DSS SHIFT CURRENT The tube Shift current is low. Check for an open in the stator cable.
LOW
240 DSS SHIFT CURRENT The tube Shift Current is high. Check for a short in the stator cable.
HIGH
241 DSS INVERTER TRIP Detection circuit on DSS tripped due to 1. Check stator cable for damage.
excessive current detected during prep.
2. Turn off generator and remove the stator
cable from the generator. Turn ON the
generator and press prep.
3. If DS1 is OFF, replace the stator cable.
4. If DS1 turns ON, replace the DSS board.
243 DSS VBUS LOW The VBus reading is low. Verify DC bus voltage is above 400VDC on the
DSS.
®

CODE MESSAGE
244 DSS VBUS MISMATCH The DSS VBus reading does not match 1. Power cycle generator ON and OFF to
ACB DC Bus reading. reconfigure.
2. Contact CPI customer support for
assistance.
245 DSS CAP NOT FOUND The required DSS Capacitance is not 1. Verify switch SW3 on the DSS board is set
found. correctly.
2. Contact CPI customer support for
assistance.
246 ROTOR THAWING IN The Rotor Thawing process is currently Wait for the X-ray tube to complete the Rotor
PROGRESS in progress. Thawing process.
247 DSS PHASE CURRENT The Three Phase Starter phase current 1. Check that the stator cable is connected to
LOW reading is too low. the DSS board, at the tube end, and to the
output filter on the ADR2 assembly.
2. Check that the tube stator is not open circuit.
3. Check the stator cable for damage.
4. Check that DIP-switch SW1 on the DSS is
set correctly.
248 DSS PHASE CURRENT The Three Phase Starter phase current 1. Check the stator cable for damage.
HIGH reading is too high.
2. Check that DIP-switch SW1 on the DSS is
set correctly.
3. Check the X-ray tube stator for a short
circuit.
®

CODE MESSAGE
249 DSS FAN SPEED LOW The Three Phase Starter Fan speed is 1. Check and ensure the Fan cable is properly
too low. connected to J14 on the DSS board.
2. Verify the Fan blades are not obstructed with
debris.
3. Verify the correct Fan is installed.
4. If problem persist, replace the Fan.
250 DSS FAN SPEED HIGH The Three Phase Starter Fan speed is 1. Verify the correct Fan is installed.
too high.
2. Verify the Fan blades are not damaged.
251 DSS CPU The Three Phase Starter processor 1. Wait 5 minutes for the temperature of the
TEMPERATURE HIGH temperature is too high. processor to decrease.
2. If the problem persist, please contact
customer support.
252 ROTOR The Rotor thawing Process was not 1. Check the stator connections and cable for
THAWING/RESTARTING successful. damage.
FAILURE
2. Wait for the X-ray tube to warm up, and then
try again.
256 DSS INVERTER The DSS inverter temperature has 1. Check that all connections on the DSS
TEMPERATURE HIGH exceeded the set limit. board, ADR2 output filters, and tube are
properly connected.
2. Check and ensure the Fan cable is properly
connected to J14 on the DSS board.
3. Remove dust that has accumulated on the
fan blades.
4. Ensure the DSS Fan is spinning properly.
5. If the problem persist, replace the DSS Fan.
®

CODE MESSAGE
257 INVERTER The Inverter temperature is > 60̊ C. 1. Check for proper airflow over the inverter
TEMPERATURE assembly and check the inverter cooling
WARNING fans.
resuming operation.
3. Check the connection of the temperature
sensor board.
258 AMBIENT The ambient temperature is > 40̊ C. 1. Ensure the ambient temperature where the
TEMPERATURE generator is located is less than 40°C.
WARNING
2. Ensure generator cooling vents are not
blocked.
3. Check the cooling fans.
resuming operation.
301 INVALID CORE DATA The core data in the SRAM is corrupt. Load the factory defaults.
302 INVALID TUBE DATA The tube data in the flash memory is Load the factory defaults.
corrupt.
303 INVALID STARTER DATA The starter data in the flash memory is Load the factory defaults.
corrupt.
304 INVALID GEN LIMITS The generator limit data in the flash Load the factory defaults.
memory is corrupt.
305 INVALID REC DATA The receptor data in the flash memory is Load the factory defaults.
corrupt.
®

CODE MESSAGE
306 INVALID ROOM I/O DATA The room I/O data in the flash memory Load the factory defaults.
is corrupt.
307 INVALID AEC DATA The AEC setup data in the flash memory Load the factory defaults.
is corrupt.
308 INVALID AEC CAL DATA The AEC film / digital calibration data in Load the factory defaults.
the flash memory is corrupt.
309 INVALID AEC DENSITY The AEC density data in the flash Load the factory defaults.
DATA memory is corrupt.
310 INVALID FLUORO DATA The fluoro setup data in the flash Load the factory defaults.
memory is corrupt.
311 INVALID CF DATA The continuous fluoro setup data in the Load the factory defaults.
flash memory is corrupt.
312 INVALID PF DATA The pulsed fluoro setup data in the flash Load the factory defaults.
memory is corrupt.
313 INVALID HLCF DATA The high-level continuous fluoro setup Load the factory defaults.
data in the flash memory is corrupt.
314 INVALID HLPF DATA The high-level pulsed fluoro setup data Load the factory defaults.
in the flash memory is corrupt.
315 INVALID DAP DATA The DAP setup data in the flash memory Load the factory defaults.
is corrupt.
316 INVALID AK DATA The Air Kerma setup data in the flash Load the factory defaults.
memory is corrupt.
®

CODE MESSAGE
317 INVALID SID DATA The SID setup data in the flash memory Load the factory defaults.
is corrupt.
318 INVALID FRTC DATA The fluoro to rad kV transfer curve setup Load the factory defaults.
data in the flash memory is corrupt.
319 INVALID CAL DATA The tube calibration table is invalid. Perform the full tube auto-calibration (chapter 2)
to rebuild the tube calibration table.
320 INVALID STATISTICS The generator statistics data in the flash The data is reset to the defaults automatically in
memory is corrupt. case of an error.
321 INVALID ERROR LOG The generator error log is invalid. Load the factory defaults.
322 INVALID DATA BACKUP The backup data file is invalid. Choose the correct generator backup file.
FILE
323 INVALID PS DATA The Power Supply Configuration Data is Load the factory defaults.
corrupted.
324 INVALID CINE DATA The Cine Setup configuration data is Load the factory defaults.
invalid.
325 INVALID LLCF DATA The Low Level Continuous Fluoroscopy Load the factory defaults.
configuration data is invalid.
326 INVALID LLPF DATA The Low Level Pulsed Fluoroscopy Load the factory defaults.
configuration data is invalid.
327 INVALID EPF SETUP The Enhanced Pulsed Fluoroscopy Load the factory defaults.
DATA configuration data is invalid.
328 INVALID SOUND SETUP The Sound configuration data is invalid. Load the factory defaults.
DATA
®

CODE MESSAGE
401 AUTO-CAL MINIMUM MA The minimum generator mA was 1. Reduce the filament standby current.
ERROR exceeded at the start of the tube auto
calibration.
Support.
403 AUTO-CAL NO MA During auto calibration no mA was 1. Check that the filament is lit. Check the
ERROR detected. filament supply fuses / boards / interfacing
cables.
2. Check the X-ray tube and high voltage cable
connections and polarity (anode/cathode).
3. Check that the kV feedback is present on
TP39 of the generator control board.
Support.
404 AUTO-CAL TABLE Auto calibration has exceeded its 1. Increase filament standby current and / or
EXCEEDED maximum exposure limit. lower generator max mA limit.
2. Retry auto calibration.
405 AUTO-CAL MAXIMUM The maximum Filament current was 1. Increase the maximum filament current and /
FILAMENT CURRENT exceeded during auto calibration. or lower the generator max mA limit.
2. Retry auto calibration.
®

CODE MESSAGE
501 BUCKY CONTACTS 1 The state of INPUT 1 (BUCKY 1. Check that the device (BUCKY 1) connected
ERROR CONTACTS 1) was not satisfied for its to INPUT 1 is powered on and functioning
programmed state. properly.
2. Check that the device (BUCKY 1) is properly
connected to TB15-1 and TB15-2 on the
Room I/O Board (refer to MD-0977 in
chapter 9).
3. Confirm that the corresponding input is
configured for the applied signal (“dry” or
“live”).
4. Verify that the BUCKY CONTACTS 1
(INPUT 1) is correctly programmed via
GenWeb as per Gen Config, I/O Setup,
Inputs, in chapter 3C.
chapter 9).
“live”).
®

CODE MESSAGE
chapter 9).
“live”).
504 INPUT 4 ERROR The state of INPUT 4 was not satisfied 1. Check that the device connected to INPUT 4
for its programmed state. is powered on and functioning properly.
2. Check that the device is properly connected
to TB15-9 and TB15-10 on the Room I/O
Board (refer to MD-0977 in chapter 9).
“live”).
4. Verify that INPUT 4 is correctly programmed
via GenWeb as per Gen Config, I/O Setup,
®

CODE MESSAGE
chapter 9).
programmed for the applied signal (“dry” or
“live”).
506 INPUT 6 ERROR The state of INPUT 6 was not satisfied 1. Check that the device connected to INPUT 6
for its programmed state. is powered on and functioning properly.
“live”).
4. Verify that INPUT 6 is correctly programmed
via GenWeb as per Gen Config, I/O Setup,
507 INPUT 7 ERROR Reserved for INPUT 7. No Action – INPUT 7 is defaulted for MULTIPLE
SPOT INPUT function.
®

CODE MESSAGE
508 COLLIMATOR The state of INPUT 8 (COLLIMATOR 1. Check that the device (COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK ERROR INTERLOCK) was not satisfied for its INTERLOCK) connected to INPUT 8 is
programmed state. powered on and functioning properly.
2. Check that the device (COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK) is properly connected to
TB10-8 and TB10-9 on the Room I/O Board
(refer to MD-0977 in chapter 9).
“live”).
4. Verify that the COLLIMATOR INTERLOCK
509 ROOM DOOR The state of INPUT 9 (ROOM DOOR 1. Check that the device (ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK ERROR INTERLOCK) was not satisfied for its INTERLOCK) connected to INPUT 9 is
programmed state. powered on and functioning properly.
2. Check that the device (ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK) is properly connected to
TB10-6 and TB10-7 on the Room I/O Board
(refer to MD-0977 in chapter 9).
“live”).
4. Verify that the ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK
®

CODE MESSAGE
510 II SAFETY ERROR The state of INPUT 10 (II SAFETY) was 1. Check that the device (II SAFETY)
not satisfied for its programmed state. connected to INPUT 10 is powered on and
functioning properly.
2. Check that the device (II SAFETY) is
properly connected to TB10-4 and TB10-5
on the Room I/O Board (refer to MD-0977 in
chapter 9).
“live”).
4. Verify that the II SAFETY (INPUT 10) is
correctly programmed via GenWeb as per
Gen Config, I/O Setup, Inputs, in chapter
3C.
511 INPUT 11 ERROR The state of INPUT 11 was not satisfied 1. Check that the device connected to INPUT
for its programmed state. 11 is powered on and functioning properly.
“live”).
4. Verify that INPUT 11 is correctly
programmed via GenWeb as per Gen
Config, I/O Setup, Inputs, in chapter 3C.
®

CODE MESSAGE
512 INPUT 12 ERROR The state of INPUT 12 was not satisfied 1. Check that the device connected to INPUT
for its programmed state. 12 is powered on and functioning properly.
“live”).
4. Verify that INPUT 12 is correctly
513 INPUT 13 ERROR Reserved for INPUT 13 (REMOTE No Action – INPUT 13 is defaulted for REMOTE
TOMO SELECT). TOMO SELECT function.
514 INPUT 14 ERROR Reserved for INPUT 14 (MAG MODE No Action – INPUT 14 is defaulted for MAG
INPUT 1). MODE INPUT 1 function.
517 XRAY DISABLE ERROR The state of X-ray Disable Input was not No Action – defaulted for X-RAY DISABLED
satisfied for its programmed state. INPUT.
518 FLUORO RESET ERROR The state of Fluoro Reset Input was not No Action – defaulted for FLUORO RESET
satisfied for its programmed state. INPUT.
®

CODE MESSAGE
590 HS INPUT 1 ERROR The state of HS INPUT 1 was not 1. Check that the device connected to HS
satisfied for its programmed state. INPUT 1 is powered on and functioning
properly.
to TB16-1 on the Room I/O Board (refer to
MD-0977 in chapter 9).
3. Verify that HS INPUT 1 is correctly
properly.
properly.
®

CODE MESSAGE
properly.
properly.
3. Verify that HS INPUT 5is correctly
properly.
®

CODE MESSAGE
properly.
properly.
601 COMM ERROR The console failed to respond to a 1. Ensure that the console is properly
generator command after 3 attempts. connected to the generator.
2. Check the serial communication circuits as
per MD-0989 in chapter 9.
602 INVALID The message sent to the generator by 1. Check the console cable.
COMMUNICATION the control console does not conform to ®
2. Confirm that the Indico IQ generator
MESSAGE the generator protocol.
supports the console in use.
3. Confirm that the generator type is set to
®
“Indico IQ ” on the touchscreen console.
®

CODE MESSAGE
603 MESSAGE NOT The generator has received a valid 1. Obtain the required function if it is optional.
SUPPORTED request from the console, but the
2. Confirm that the required option is enabled.
generator does not support the
requested function.
604 MESSAGE NOT The generator has received a valid Wait until the generator has entered the
ALLOWED request from the console, but the required state.
generator is in a state that does not
allow the requested function to be
executed.
605 DIGITAL COMM ERROR The external handshake signal is Consult the external device manufacturer for
missing. information regarding correct interfacing of that
device to the generator.
606 ACB CANBUS COMM The main CPU failed to communicate 1. Check the “heartbeat” on the auxiliary CPU
ERROR with the CPU on the auxiliary control board (LED DS1 HEART BEAT).
board.
2. Check the CAN bus cabling from the
auxiliary CPU board through to the
generator control board.
607 RIOB CANBUS COMM The main CPU failed to communicate 1. Check the “heartbeat” on the room I/O board
ERROR with the CPU on the room I/O board. (LED DS30 HEARTBEAT).
2. Check the CAN bus cabling from the room
I/O board through to the generator control
board.
608 DSS CANBUS COMM The main CPU failed to communicate 1. Check the “heartbeat” on the dual speed
ERROR with the CPU on the dual speed starter starter board (LED DS5).
board.
2. Check the CAN bus cabling from the dual
speed starter board through to the generator
control board.
®

CODE MESSAGE
609 AEC CANBUS COMM The main CPU failed to communicate 1. Check the “heartbeat” LED on the AEC
ERROR with the CPU on the AEC board. board.
2. Check the CAN bus cabling from the AEC
board through to the generator control
board.
610 COMMUNICATION The communication with an external Check the communication connection of the
TIMEOUT ERROR device has timeout. external device and ensure it is properly
connected.
FUTURE USE
FUTURE USE
703 INVALID LICENSE The generator receives an invalid Get the proper licence code base on the correct
license code or file. system ID of the generator.
901 MANUALLY The exposure switch was released 1. Re-take the exposure, if necessary.
TERMINATED before the exposure was finished.
2. Check for faulty switch contacts or wiring if
EXPOSURE
this problem persists.
902 FACTORY DEFAULT The factory default switch is active at Ensure that JW27 on the generator control
SWITCH CLOSED power on. board is set to short pins 2 and 3 (NORM
position).
903 PREP SWITCH CLOSED The prep input was active during the 1. Check the prep switch for shorted contacts.
generator’s power on phase.
2. Check the console and generator prep
circuits. Refer to MD-0979 in chapter 9.
®

CODE MESSAGE
904 X-RAY SWITCH CLOSED The X-ray input was active during the 1. Check the X-ray switch for shorted contacts.
generator’s power on phase.
2. Check the console and generator X-ray
905 FLUORO SWITCH The fluoro input was active during the 1. Check the fluoro foot switch for shorted
CLOSED generator’s power-on phase. contacts.
2. Check the console and generator fluoro
circuits. Refer to MD-0979 and / or MD-0977
in chapter 9.
906 PREP TIMEOUT The generator has been in the Prep Reduce the length of time in the Prep state.
state too long.
907 RECEPTOR TIMEOUT The receptor is not responding. The Digital Interface is waiting for an input
signal, refer to the Digital Interface Supplement
for the interface option requirements.
908 GENERATOR KW LIMIT Indicates that the generator kW limit has Reduce the kV or mA to reduce the kW.
been reached.
909 GENERATOR KV LIMIT Indicates that the generator kV limit has Increase or decrease the kV as required.
been reached.
910 GENERATOR MA LIMIT Indicates that the generator mA limit has Reduce or increase the mA as required.
been reached.
911 GENERATOR MS LIMIT Indicates that the generator ms limit has Reduce or increase the ms as required.
been reached.
912 GENERATOR MAS LIMIT Indicates that the generator mAs limit Reduce or increase the mAs as required.
has been reached.
®

CODE MESSAGE
913 TUBE KW LIMIT Indicates that the tube kW limit has been Reduce or increase the kV, mA, mAs or ms to
reached. reduce the kW.
914 TUBE KV LIMIT Indicates that the tube kV limit has been Reduce or increase the kV as required.
reached.
915 TUBE MA LIMIT Indicates that the tube mA limit has been Reduce or increase the mA as required.
reached.
916 AEC DENSITY LIMIT Indicates that an AEC density step is Reduce or increase the AEC density.
requested that is outside the
programmed AEC density range.
917 FLUORO PPS LIMIT Indicates that the fluoro PPS limit has Reduce or increase the PPS as required.
been reached.
918 TUBE CALIBRATION Indicates that an uncalibrated mA value Recalibrate* the selected tube over the full
LIMIT has been selected. intended operating range.
920 KV CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the kV in Set the generator to a state that allows the kV to
ALLOWED the current state. be changed.
921 MA CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the mA Set the generator to a state that allows the mA
ALLOWED in the current state. to be changed.
922 MS CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the ms Set the generator to a state that allows the ms
923 MAS CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the mAs Set the generator to a state that allows the mAs
924 RECEPTOR CHANGE Attempts were made to change the Set the generator to a state that allows the
NOT ALLOWED receptor in the current state. receptor to be changed.
®

CODE MESSAGE
925 MODE CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the Set the generator to a state that allows the
ALLOWED mode (exposure technique) in the mode (exposure technique) to be changed.
current state.
926 FOCUS CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the Set the generator a state that allows the focus
ALLOWED focus in the current state. to be changed.
927 TUBE CHANGE NOT An attempt to change the tube via an Ensure that generator is in the proper state to
ALLOWED external device was not valid. allow tube changes via an external device.
928 AEC CHANNEL CHANGE An attempt to change the AEC channel Ensure that generator is in the proper state to
NOT ALLOWED via an external device was not valid. allow AEC channel changes via an external
device.
929 AEC DENSITY CHANGE Attempts were made to change the Set the generator to a state that allows the
NOT ALLOWED density in the current state. density to be changed.
930 AEC FILM SCREEN Attempts were made to change the film Set the generator to a state that allows the film
CHANGE NOT ALLOWED screen in the current state. screen to be changed.
931 AEC FIELDS CHANGE Attempts were made to change the AEC Set the generator to a state that allows the AEC
NOT ALLOWED fields in the current state. fields to be changed.
932 MAG CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the mag Set the generator to a state that allows the mag
ALLOWED mode in the current state. mode to be changed.
933 PPS CHANGE NOT Attempts were made to change the Set the generator to a state that allows the PPS
ALLOWED fluoro PPS in the current state. to be changed.
934 APR COMMAND NOT Attempts were made to enter an APR Set the generator to a state that allows the APR
ALLOWED parameter in the current state. parameter to be entered.
®

CODE MESSAGE
935 RECEPTOR NOT The selected receptor is not enabled. Enable the selected receptor in GenWeb under
ENABLED Gen Config, Receptor Setup, Receptor
Properties. Check Tube 1 or Tube 2 to enable
the selected receptor.
936 FLUORO NOT ENABLED Fluoro is not enabled on the selected Enable Fluoro in GenWeb under Gen Config,
receptor. Receptor Setup, Receptor Properties.
937 ABS NOT ENABLED Fluoro ABS is not enabled. Enable fluoro ABS in GenWeb under Gen
Config, Cont. Fluoro, ABS.
938 PPS NOT ENABLED The selected PPS is not enabled. Enable the requested PPS in GenWeb under
Gen Config, Pulsed Fluoro, General (normal
PF) or Gen Config, High Lvl Fluoro, High Level
PF for high-level PF.
939 DAP NOT ENABLED DAP is not enabled. Enable DAP in GenWeb under Gen Config,
DAP Setup, DAP State dropdown field.
940 AK NOT ENABLED Air Kerma is not enabled. Enable Air Kerma in GenWeb under Gen
Config, AK Setup, Air Kerma dropdown field.
941 AEC NOT ENABLED AEC is not enabled for the selected Enable AEC for the selected receptor in
receptor. GenWeb under Gen Config, Receptor Setup,
AEC, AEC Channel, then assign the desired
AEC channel.
942 AEC FILM SCREEN NOT The selected AEC film screen is not Enable the required film screen in GenWeb
ENABLED enabled. under Gen Config, AEC Setup, FS Options.
943 AEC FIELD NOT The selected AEC field is not enabled. Enable the required AEC field(s) in GenWeb
ENABLED under Gen Config, AEC Setup, Setup.
®

CODE MESSAGE
944 NO TUBE SELECTED The selected receptor has no tube Assign a valid tube to the requested receptor in
assigned. GenWeb under Gen Config, Receptor Setup,
Tubes.
945 NO FOCUS SELECTED No focus is selected for the operation. Select the proper focus for the operation.
946 NO RECEPTOR No receptor is selected for the operation. Select the proper receptor for the operation.
SELECTED
947 NO AEC CHANNEL No AEC channel is programmed for the Assign a valid AEC channel to the selected
SELECTED selected receptor. receptor in GenWeb under Gen Config,
Receptor Setup, AEC.
948 NO AEC FILM SCREEN No AEC Film Screen is selected for the Assign a valid AEC film screen to the selected
SELECTED operation receptor in GenWeb under Gen Config,
949 NO AEC DENSITY No AEC Density is selected for the Assign a valid AEC density to the selected
SELECTED operation receptor in GenWeb under Gen Config,
950 NO AEC FIELD No AEC Field(s) is selected for the Assign a valid AEC field to the selected receptor
SELECTED operation in GenWeb under Gen Config, Receptor Setup,
AEC.
951 ANODE HEAT WARNING The anode has exceeded its heat Wait for the tube to cool.
warning limit. Continued exposures risk
overheating the anode.
952 ANODE OVER HEAT The anode has exceeded its heat limit. Wait for the tube to cool.
955 DAP ACCUM WARNING The accumulated DAP value has Reset the DAP.
reached the programmed limit.
®

CODE MESSAGE
956 DAP RATE WARNING The current DAP rate exceeds the Reduce the DAP rate by reducing the
programmed DAP rate limit. generators dose output via the kV, mA, mAs or
ms settuings, or increase the programmed DAP
rate limit. To reduce the programmed DAP rate
limit via GenWeb, select Gen Config, DAP
Setup.
957 AK ACCUM WARNING The accumulated Air Kerma value has Reset the Air Kerma display.
reached the programmed limit.
958 AK RATE WARNING Not applicable at this time.The current Reduce the Air Kerma rate by reducing the
Air Kerma rate exceeds the programmed generators dose output via the kV, mA mAs or
Air Kerma rate limit. ms settings, or increase the programmed Air
Kerma rate limit.To reduce the programmed Air
Kerma rate limit via GenWeb, select Gen
Config, AK Setup.
959 FLUORO TIMER The fluoro interval timer exceeds 4.2 Reset the fluoro timer.
WARNING minutes in FDA mode or 4.6 minutes in
IEC mode.
960 FLUORO TIMER LIMIT The fluoro interval timer has reached 4.9 Reset the fluoro interval timer.
minutes in FDA mode or a fluoro
exposure has been continuously
activated for a period of 9.6 minutes in
IEC mode.
961 FLUORO ABS CHANGE An external system will not allow the Consult the external device manufacturer for
NOT ALLOWED requested ABS mode change. information regarding the mode change
restriction.
962 EXPOSURE NOT An external system is in a state that Consult the external device manufacturer for
ALLOWED does not allow exposures to be information regarding the exposure release
released. restriction.
®

CODE MESSAGE
963 MAS TIMEOUT Desired mAs value not achieved within 1. Recalibrate the X-ray tube*.
allocated time.
Support.
964 AEC DOSE LIMIT Requested AEC Dose exceeds the AEC Set the generator to a state that allows the AEC
Dose Range specified in the AEC Setup dose limit to be changed.
965 DAP VALUE OVERFLOW The accumulated DAP reading exceeds Reset the DAP.
9999999 in normal mode or 99999999 in
high-res mode.
966 FLUORO MAG NOT The selected Fluoro MAG is not Enable the required receptor for Fluoro MAG in
ENABLED enabled. GenWeb™.
967 FLUORO ABS CURVE The selected Fluoro ABS curve is not Enable the required receptor for Fluoro ABS
NOT ENABLED enabled. Curve in GenWeb™.
968 CINE MAG CHANGE NOT The selected Cine MAG change is not Set the generator to a state that allows the Cine
ALLOWED allowed. MAG to be changed.
969 CINE FRAME RATE The selected Cine frame rate change is Set the generator to a state that allows the Cine
CHANGE NOT ALLOWED not allowed. frame rate to be changed.
970 CINE ABS CURVE NOT The Cine ABS Curve is disabled. Ensure the selected ABS curve is enabled.
ENABLED
971 CINE RUN TIME LIMIT The Cine Run Time Limit has been Reset the Cine Run Time limit.
exceeded.
972 RAD RUN TIME LIMIT The maximum Rad Run Time has been Reset the Rad Run Time limit.
exceeded.
®

CODE MESSAGE
990 REMOTE PREP SWITCH The remote prep input was active during 1. Check the remote prep switch for shorted
CLOSED the generator’s power on phase. contacts.
2. Check the console and generator prep
991 REMOTE X-RAY SWITCH The remote X-ray input was active 1. Check the remote X-ray switch for shorted
CLOSED during the generator’s power on phase. contacts.
2. Check the console and generator X-ray
992 REMOTE FLUORO The remote fluoro input was active 1. Check the remote fluoro foot switch for
SWITCH CLOSED during the generator’s power-on phase. shorted contacts.
2. Check the console and generator fluoro
circuits. Refer to MD-0979 and / or MD-0977
in chapter 9.
993 CINE PREP SWITCH The Cine Prep Switch is active during Ensure that the Prep switch is not activated.
ACTIVE the generator’s power on phase.
994 CINE X-RAY SWITCH The Cine X-ray switch is active during Ensure that the Cine X-ray switch is not
ACTIVE the generator’s power on phase. activated.
*Note: The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before the start of the auto calibration routine in order to save
the new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during general troubleshooting, and should only
be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA fault is displayed, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional
and actually needs recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator the calibration data may be
incomplete.
®
5.3.0 LED INDICATORS
The following tables describe the normal states and functions of the status and diagnostic LEDs on the circuit
boards in the generator.
A change in the state of an LED may be for a brief duration, especially during a fault or an exposure.
NOTE: SEVERAL LED’S DESCRIBED BELOW INDICATE THAT POWER IS ON OR HIGH VOLTAGE IS
PRESENT. BECAUSE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF COMPONENT FAILURE (FUSES BEING THE
MOST LIKELY FAILURE), LED INDICATORS SHOULD NEVER BE SOLELY USED TO INDICATE
A SAFE CONDITION. CONFIRM THAT POWER IS OFF AND HIGH VOLTAGES ARE
DISCHARGED WITH A DVM THAT IS KNOWN TO BE FUNCTIONING PROPERLY BEFORE
SERVICING.
5.3.1 Rectifier Board
LED NORMAL STATE FUNCTION

DS1, DS2 Lit These LED’s are connected in series across the DC bus.
These indicate that the DC bus capacitors are charged. The DC
bus must be charged before the main line contactor K1 can
close.
DS3 Lit Indicates that the main contactor K1 or the soft-start contactor
K3 on the input distribution board is closed, providing rectified
AC mains to light DS3.
DS4 Lit Indicates that +12 V from the input distribution board is present.
5.3.2 Input Distribution Board

DS1 Lit Indicates that the drive for the main contactor K1 on the rectifier
MAINS board is active, i.e. this LED indicates that driver Q1 on the input
CONTACTOR distribution board is on, supplying +12 V to pull in the main
contactor K1.
DS2 N/A Indicates that the drive for the fluoro (resonant) contactor is
FLUORO active i.e. this LED indicates that the driver for the fluoro
CONTACTOR contactor (Q2 on the input distribution board) is on, supplying
+12 V to pull in the fluoro contactor. This will be active during
Rad and pulsed fluoro mode.
DS3 Lit Indicates the presence of the high voltage supply (approximately
DC BUS 560 to 680 VDC) for the switching regulator on the input
distribution board.
DS4 N/A Indicates that the drive for the tube 2 select relay in the HV
TUBE 2 module is active i.e. this LED indicates that Q14 on the input
distribution board is on, supplying +24 V to close the tube 2
select solenoid.
DS5 Off Indicates that the drive for soft-start relay K3 on the input
SOFT START distribution board is active. This should only be on for
approximately 5 seconds after the generator is switched on.
®
5.3.3 Generator Control Board

DS1 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is receiving data on the internal
CAN RX CAN bus.
DS2 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is sending data via the internal CAN
CAN TX bus.
DS3 N/A Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure has been requested via
FLUORO the console fluoro foot switch input.
DS4 N/A Lights to indicate that a console X-ray request is in progress.
XRAY
DS5 Lit Indicates that +24 V derived from the input distribution board is
+24V present on the generator control board.
DS6 Lit Indicates that the generator is not in an error state.
SOFTWARE
STATUS
DS8 N/A Lights to indicate that tube 2 on the dual-speed starter is
TUBE 2 selected.
DS9 N/A Lights to indicate that high-speed operation has been selected
HI/LO on the dual-speed starter.
DS10 N/A Indicates rotor ready (sufficient stator current).
DSS READY In low speed mode DS10 is on at prep.
In high-speed mode DS10 is on after prep is finished (while the
dual speed starter is in RUN mode).
DS11 Off Lights to indicate that Prep has been selected.
PREP
DS12 Flashes at the sync rate if sync pulses are supplied to the
ROOM I/O generator via the room I/O board by the digital imaging system.
BOARD SYNC
DS13 N/A Lights to indicate that a console prep request is in process.
PREP
DS14 N/A Indicates that the generator is sending serial data to the console.
CON TX
DS15 N/A Indicates that the generator is receiving serial data from the
CON RX console.
DS16 N/A Indicates the generator is receiving serial communications from
REM FL RXD the remote fluoro control.
DS17 N/A Indicates the generator is sending serial communications to the
REM FL TXD remote fluoro control.
DS18 N/A Lights to indicate that DAP channel 1 is selected.
DAP CH 1
DS19 N/A Lights to indicate that DAP channel 2 is selected.
DAP CH 2
DS20 N/A Flashes at the sync rate if sync pulses are supplied to the
DIO BOARD generator via the digital I/O board.
SYNC
®
5.3.3 Generator Control Board (Cont)

DS21 N/A Lights to indicate that the small filament is selected (units with a
FIL 1 single filament board only).
SM/LRG
DS22 Lit (when the small Indicates that the filament current supplied by the small / single
FIL 2 READY filament supply filament supply board is above the “fault” level i.e. greater than
is active) approximately 1.7 amps.
DS23 Lit (when the large / Indicates that the filament current supplied by the large / single
FIL 1 READY single filament filament supply board is above the “fault” level i.e. greater than
supply is active) approximately 1.7 amps.
DS24 N/A This applies to 80 kW and 100 kW generators only. This
INV3 indicates that inverter #3 is active i.e. the generator is in high
power rad mode.
5.3.4 Auxiliary CPU Board

DS1 Flashing Flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that micro-controller U5 on the
HEARTBEAT auxiliary CPU board is in normal operating mode. Flashes at 2
Hz to indicate that the CPU board is in bootloader mode.
DS2 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the auxiliary CPU board is
CAN RX receiving data on the internal CAN bus.
DS3 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the auxiliary CPU board is
CAN TX transmitting data on the internal CAN bus.
DS4 N/A LSS. Not applicable at this time.
LSS REL EN
DS5 Lit This is a cable interlock indicator. When the LED is off, it
RECT ITLK indicates that the cable from J10 on the input distribution board
to J2 on the rectifier board is unplugged.
LSS ITLK
PM SMFT SEL
REL
LSS RELAY
T2 RTR SEL REL
T1 RTR SEL REL
DS11 N/A Indicates that the ACB is activating Tube 2.
TUBE SEL
RELAY HLD
®
5.3.4 Auxiliary CPU Board (Cont)

DS12 N/A Indicates that the resonant contactor is closed, i.e. during rad
RES CON HLD and pulsed fluoro modes.
DS13 Lit Indicates that the main contactor is closed.
MAIN CON HLD
DS14 Off Indicates that the drive for soft-start relay K3 on the input
SS REL distribution board is active. This should only be active for
approximately 5 seconds after the generator is switched on.
DS15 Lit Indicates that the emergency off switch is closed, or in the
absence of an emergency-off switch that J14-1 and J14-2 on the
input distribution board is jumpered.
DS16 Off Indicates that the crowbar for the PWM regulator supply is
active. The crowbar is activated if the +12 V supply is over-
voltage, if any of the +12 V, +24 V, +35 V, -24 V, or –35 V
supplies are lost, or if the +12 V or +24 V supplies stay on for
more than approximately 400 ms after the generator is switched
off.
DS17 Lit Indicates that the DC supply derived from secondary winding
T1B (pages 5, 6 of MD-0975) is present. This is used to power
the PWM regulator portion of the main switching regulator circuit.
5.3.5 Room I/O Board

DS1 Lit Indicates the presence of the +24 V supply on the room I/O
+24VDC board.
If JW2 on the input distribution board is in the “On Always”
position, DS1 will be lit whenever the generator is connected to
live AC mains. If JW2 on the input distribution board is in the “On
with Generator” position, DS1 will only be lit when the generator
is switched on.
DS2 Lit Indicates that 110 VAC is present on the room I/O board after
110VAC fuse F1. If this LED is off, the most likely suspect is a blown fuse
F1.
F2.
F4.
F5.
F3.
DS7 N/A Indicates that HS INPUT 3 is active.
HS_IN3
®
5.3.5 Room I/O Board (Cont)

HS_IN7
HS_IN6
HS_IN5
HS_IN4
DS12 N/A Indicates that K11, the OUTPUT 8 relay is active.
OUT 8
OUT 11
OUT 13
DS15 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the room I/O board is
CAN RX receiving data on the internal CAN bus.
OUT 7
OUT 12
OUT 1
OUT 15
OUT 9
OUT 10
OUT 6
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 5
DS26 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the room I/O board is
CAN TX sending data on the internal CAN bus.
OUT 16
OUT 4
®
5.3.5 Room I/O Board (Cont)

OUT 14
DS30 Flashing Flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that micro-controller U65 on
HEARTBEAT the room I/O board is operational. Flashes at 2 Hz to indicate it
is in bootloader mode.
HS_IN8
HS_IN1
HS_IN2
5.3.6 CPU Board

DS5 Lit Indicates that the +5V output on USB connector J2 on the CPU
USB VBUS board is active.
DS6 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is receiving data from external CAN
CAN RX1 bus port 1.
DS7 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is sending serial data to external
CAN TX1 CAN bus port 1.
DS8 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is receiving data from external CAN
CAN RX2 bus port 2.
DS9 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is sending serial data to external
CAN TX2 CAN bus port 2.
DS10 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is receiving serial data via comm.
RX1 port 1 on the CPU board.
DS11 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is sending serial data to comm. port
TX1 1 on the CPU board.
DS12 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is receiving serial data via comm.
RX2 port 2 on the CPU board.
DS13 N/A Indicates that the main CPU is sending serial data to comm. port
TX2 2 on the CPU board.
DS14 Lit Indicates that the +5V isolated, +12V isolated, and -12V isolated
+5V ISOL supplies are within preset limits.
DS16 Flashing Flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that the CPU on the CPU
HEARTBEAT board is operational.
DS17 Off When lit, indicates a CPU board fault. The generator cannot be
POWER OFF switched on when this LED is lit.
DS19 Off When lit, indicates that one of the power supplies on the CPU
PNG PWR board are below normal limits.
ERROR
®
5.3.7 Dual Speed Starter Board

DS1 Off If lit, indicates that excessive current has been drawn from the
DC Bus. This indicates a DSS fault, if lit without a tube stator
connected.
5.3.8 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Board

DS1 Off If lit, indicates that excessive current has been drawn from the
DC bus. This indicates a DSS fault if lit without a tube stator
connected.
DS3 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the dual speed starter
CAN TX board is sending data on the internal CAN bus.
DS4 N/A Indicates that the micro-controller on the dual speed starter
CAN RX board is receiving data on the internal CAN bus.
DS5 Flashing Flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that the microcontroller on the
dual speed starter board is operational. Flashes at 2 Hz to
indicate it is in bootloader mode.
DS6 On Indicates the 3.3VDC supply is active.
DS7 Off Indicates prep is active if lit.
DS8 Off Indicates high speed operation has been selected if lit.
DS9 Off Indicates tube 2 stator is selected if it.
DS11 Off Indicates Ready signal is active if lit.
®
5.3.8 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Board (Cont)
7 Segment-LED operation display status

The LSS 2/DSS 2 contains 8 LEDs arranged into a 7-segment display and one LED used for error
indication. The different combination of lit yellow LEDs will indicate the current LSS 2/DSS 2
operation.
7 Segment–LED display code Operation Status

Initialization phase state
Standby state
Low speed Run state
Low speed Brake state
Low speed Boost state
High speed Boost state
High speed Run state
High speed Brake state
®
7 Segment-LED error display status
7 Segment-LED error display code Condition Action

Low Speed not supported • If in CAN bus mode, verify the
correct tube type number was
uploaded to the generator. (Refer to
the Genweb™ supplement and
Tube Compatibility supplement
746026)
• If in legacy mode, check that SW1

and SW2 are set correctly. (Refer
746026)
• Check that SW3 is set correctly.

(Refer to chapter 2, section 2.7.0, of
installation).
High Speed not supported • If in CAN bus mode, verify the
the Genweb™ supplement and
746026)

746026)
Check that SW3 is set correctly.

installation).
Stator Main current is too • Check for open circuit in the rotor
low cable main connection.
®

Stator Shift current is too • Check for open circuit in the rotor
low cable shift connection.
Inverter Trip detected • Check for hardware fault.

a) Turn the generator off and
remove rotor cable from the
LSS 2/DSS 2 board.
b) Turn generator ON and press
prep. Check if DS1 is lit on the
LSS 2/DSS 2 board.
c) If DS1 is lit, the board may
need replacing.
d) If light stays off, check the rotor
cable and stator for short
circuits.
746026)

installation).
VBUS input less than 400V • Check fuses on the LSS 2/DSS 2
PWBA.
• Measure DC Buss at the fuses on

LSS 2/DSS 2 PWBA.
• Check for low AC mains line input.
• Check that the main contactor is

closed.
Communication mode • Check that SW8 is set correctly.
wrong (Refer to chapter 2, section 2.7.0, of
installation).
®

Requested shift • Check that SW3 is set correctly to
capacitance not available match the LSS2/DSS2 tab type.
(Refer to chapter 2, section, 2.7.0,
of installation).

installation).
• If in CAN bus mod, verify the

Genweb™ supplement and Tube
Compatibility supplement 746026)

746026)
Tube 1/ board type • Check that SW8 is set correctly.
mismatch (Refer to chapter 2, section 2.7.0, of
installation).
Tube 2/ board type • Check that SW8 is set correctly.

mismatch (Refer to chapter 2, section 2.7.0, of
installation).
Voltage table is corrupted • Cycle power to the generator.
Tube is not configured • If in CAN bus mode, verify the

(invalid switch setting) correct tube type number was
Genweb™ supplement and Tube
Compatibility supplement 746026)

746026)

(Refer chapter 2, section 2.7.0, of
installation.)
®
5.3.9 ADR Module Lid Board

DS1 N/A This LED will flash at the current PPS rate when the ADR
module is active.
DS2 N/A This LED will flash at the PPS rate if the ADR module is not
discharging when it should be, and it will be lit continuously if the
ADR module is always attempting to discharge.
DS3 Lit This LED is connected to +24 V inside the ADR module via a
series resistor. This LED will light when the ADR module is
connected to the generator and +24 V is supplied by the
5.3.10 Console Board (R&F membrane console)

DS41 N/A Indicates that the R&F membrane console is sending serial data
to the generator.
DS42 N/A Indicates that the R&F membrane console is receiving serial
data from the generator.
DS43 N/A Indicates that the R&F membrane console is receiving serial
data from a device connected to serial port J2 on the console.
DS44 N/A Indicates that the R&F membrane console is sending serial data
to a device connected to serial port J2 on the console.
DS45 Flashing Flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that the CPU on the console
board is operational.
®
5.3.11 AEC Board
Refer to MD-0985 in chapter 9.
5.3.12 Digital I/O Board
Refer to MD-0987 in chapter 9.
5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS
5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults
SYMPTOM: In some environments that are “electrically noisy”, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM
data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed.
2
SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm ) or larger from the ground stud on the rear
of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure “rear of control console” in chapter 2)
to the ground stud located to the left of the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND in the
figure “generator mains connection” in chapter 2.
®
CPI Canada Inc Regular Maintenance 6
CHAPTER 6
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR SERVICE / UPDATE RECORD ..................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4.0 OIL FILL (HV MODULE) .................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.5.0 CLEANING........................................................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.6.0 EEPROM REPLACEMENT & FIRMWARE UPGRADE .................................................................................... 6-9
6.6.1 Console Firmware Upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 6-9
6.6.2 Generator Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.3 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Firmware Upgrade .................................................................. 6-14
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults .......................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT............................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.8.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ........................................................................................................... 6-17
6.8.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview) ..................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.8.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) ................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.9.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE ............................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.10.0 REVISION HISTORY ...................................................................................................................................... 6-20
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-17 Rev. J Page 6-1
6 Regular Maintenance CPI Canada Inc
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This chapter provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Indico IQ family of X-ray
generators.
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR SERVICE / UPDATE RECORD
The X-ray generator service / update record is included on the next page of this manual. The initial installation
date and location, as well as all service, maintenance and repairs should be recorded on this form.
The record should be as thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that was performed (all
service and maintenance and a record of all replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person
performing the work should date and sign the record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of the
generator.
®
Page 6-2 Rev. J Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-17
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR SERVICE / UPDATE RECORD (Cont)
X-RAY GENERATOR SERVICE / UPDATE RECORD

INSTALLED BY: __________________ DATE: ______________ LOCATION: _________________________
Service Date Description of Service Performed By
®
®
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

WARNING: MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL
WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS
EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DETERMINED BY CERTAIN

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE
INSTALLATION IS LOCATED. ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS
WHEN DETERMINING A MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5
MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE
MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
WARNING: OBSERVE ESD PRECAUTIONS. KEEP ALL STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND

CIRCUIT BOARDS IN THEIR STATIC-SHIELDING PACKAGING UNTIL READY TO
INSTALL. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE TAKING APPROPRIATE ESD PRECAUTIONS AT ALL
TIMES WHEN HANDLING STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS.
WARNING: WHEN SERVICING THE HV MODULE, ENSURE THAT IT REMAINS UPRIGHT AT ALL TIMES.
DO NOT LAY IT ON ITS SIDE AS OIL MAY LEAK FROM THE HV MODULE. IF OIL IS
SPILLED, ENSURE THAT IT IS REMOVED THOROUGHLY FROM THE AREA USING A
SUITABLE ABSORBER AND CLEANING SOLUTION TO AVOID ANY SLIP HAZARD. THE
SOURCE OF OIL DEPOSIT MUST BE DETERMINED TO ENSURE OPERATION OF HV
MODULE IS NOT COMPROMISED.
CAUTION: AFTER SERVICING, TIGHTEN ALL HARDWARE PROPERLY. ENSURE THAT NO LOOSE
HARDWARE OR HARDWARE THAT CAN COME LOOSE OVER TIME IS LEFT INSIDE THE
GENERATOR. LOOSE HARDWARE CAN CAUSE SHORT CIRCUITS THAT WILL RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY.
®
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont)
Maintenance Description of Preventative Maintenance

Frequency
As governed by local Mandatory
regulations:
1. Check and recalibrate the DAP meter in the generator per chapter 3F (units
with the DAP option).
2. For units with the AK (Air Kerma) option, verify the Air Kerma calibration per
chapter 3F.
3. Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to chapter 4 of this manual.
4. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this installation.
Every 6 Months AND Mandatory
whenever a related
certifiable X-ray 1. Clean and re-grease the HV connections on the HV module if using vapour-
component is replaced: proof compound. See note following this table.
2. Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration, refer to chapter 2. This is required
within 6 months of the initial auto-calibration when installing a new X-
ray tube and annually thereafter.
3. For all hardware used to secure the control console wall mount: check that
there are no damages and replace if necessary, especially those that are
used to secure the movable adjustments. Also ensure the screws are
tightened properly.
4. Check that all cables attached to the touchscreen are not worn out or
damaged and replace if necessary.
Recommended (but not mandatory)

1. Clean the control console and main cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0
CLEANING before proceeding.
2. For units with the touchscreen console, perform touchscreen calibration.
Refer to chapter 3C for the calibration procedure.
3. Remove accumulated dust from the external cooling slots on the back of the
generator and from the fan housings and fan blades inside the generator.
4. Check all visual displays (warning and status lights, technique displays,
exposure indicators, etc) for normal operation.
5. Check all audible indicators for normal operation, and check that the
loudness settings are adequate for the environment.
®
Every 12 months: Mandatory

1. Check the insulating oil in the high voltage output connectors on the HV
module (if applicable). See note following this table.
2. Clean the control console and main cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0
CLEANING before proceeding.
3. For units with the touch screen console, perform touch screen calibration.
Refer to chapter 3C for the calibration procedure.
4. Remove accumulated dust from the external cooling slots on the back of the
generator and from the fan housings and fan blades inside the generator.
5. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator. Disconnect the
tube thermal switch(s) and then verify the correct error message and that X-
ray exposures are inhibited.
6. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any damaged
components:
• The exterior of the control console including the membrane switch
assembly.
• The cable between the control console and the generator main cabinet.
• The hand switch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables connecting
these to the console.
7. Check all visual displays (warning and status lights, technique displays,
exposure indicators, etc) for normal operation.
8. Check all audible indicators for normal operation, and check that the
loudness settings are adequate for the environment.
9. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible damage:
Missing or loose ground connections, oil leakage, damaged cables etc.
10. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the external cooling
slots on the generator cabinet.
11. Measure the lithium battery, replace if less than 2.8V.
Every 5 years: Mandatory
1. Replace the lithium battery (CR2032 or equivalent) on the generator CPU
board in the main cabinet and on the CPU board in the membrane control
console (if applicable). Refer to 6.7.0 for the battery replacement procedure.
2. Replace the cooling fans in the generator. If replacing these with non CPI-
supplied fans, the airflow vs. static pressure must be considered when
replacing the fans. Replacement fans must have performance characteristics
similar to the original fans. Consult the factory if in doubt.
®
Note: The high voltage receptacles on the HV module must either be filled with insulating oil (preferred) or
coated with vapour-proof insulating compound. The method used at the X-ray tube’s high voltage connectors is
at the discretion of the installer / service engineer, however it must be adequate to prevent arcs / flashover at
the X-ray tube end as tube high voltage arcs will impact the generator’s usability.
6.4.0 OIL FILL (HV MODULE)
The oil is factory-filled to the correct level and the HV module is then sealed. An air-filled “bladder” within the
HV module will expand and contract as the oil volume changes with pressure and temperature changes. Field
maintenance is neither necessary nor possible with the HV module. If there is evidence of oil loss, contact CPI
NOTE: FOR THE HV MODULE IN FIGURE 6-1, ENSURE THAT THE VENT TUBE (“VENT” IN FIGURE
6-1) IS NOT BLOCKED.
NOTE: HV CONNECTORS ARE NOT SHOWN IN FIGURE 6-1.
Figure 6-1: HV module
Do not adjust SW1 / SW2 on the HV module
®
6.5.0 CLEANING
• Do not use any liquids or solvents such as flux, water, acetone, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, toluene, or
ammonia to clean the surface of the R & F console LED display. Use a dry clean cloth and gentle wipe the
LED display to properly clean.
• If console surfaces need to be disinfected, use Actichlor or equivalent with a Hypochlorite concentration of
3 to 5%.
∗ Dilute the disinfectant 50/50 with water.
∗ Spray or dampen a lint-free cloth with the diluted disinfectant. The cloth must be damp only, not wet.
∗ Gently wipe the console surfaces with the damp cloth.
• Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
• Ensure that no water or other liquid enters the equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
• Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
• If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
• Spray disinfectant is not recommended because it may enter the X-ray equipment.
• If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the plastic
sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
6.6.0 EEPROM REPLACEMENT & FIRMWARE UPGRADE
WARNING: PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN

HANDLING THE SERIAL EEPROMs.
6.6.1 Console Firmware Upgrade
NOTE: A PERMANENT BACKUP FILE OF THE APR DATA SHOULD BE KEPT IN THE EVENT THE
CONSOLE SOFTWARE IS CORRUPTED OR A “CONSOLE DEFAULTS” IS REQUIRED. THE
BACKUP FILE SHOULD BE STORED ON AN EXTERNAL STORAGE DEVICE SUCH AS A
LAPTOP OR USB FLASH DRIVE.
®
Indico IQ X-ray generators are available with several different control consoles. As a result, there are different
procedures for upgrading the console firmware.
• R&F membrane console (described in this chapter).
• Touchscreen console (described in chapter 3C).
®
6.6.1 Console Firmware Upgrade (Cont)
R&F membrane console.

For the R&F membrane console, the firmware resides in the flash memory. Follow steps A to F to upgrade the
firmware. In this instruction, the term computer refers to the computer or the laptop that will be used to upgrade
the console firmware, and the term console refers to the R&F membrane console.
A. Install GenWareMP®
WARNING: DO NOT USE GenWareMP® TO SERVICE OR SETUP THE GENERATOR. GenWareMP®

®
IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE INDICO IQ GENERATOR. ONLY USE GenWeb™ TO
SERVICE OR SETUP THE GENERATOR.
A CD containing the GenWare® Utilities p/n 737984 Rev. W or higher is required to upgrade the console
firmware. Install only the software GenWareMP® p/n 902243 Rev. G or higher from that CD into the
computer. To install, navigate to the directory on the CD drive:\GenwareMP\ and double click on the file
Genware_Console32.msi.
B. Obtain a copy of the updated software file

Once a copy of the updated software file is available, copy it into an accessible location such as the
computer’s hard drive. The updated software file may be distributed by various means including CD, e-mail,
etc. There is only one file to be copied, in the format 123456A.cpm. Note the folder to which this file has
been copied.
C. Set-up the membrane console
• Turn off the generator. Connect a null-modem cable from the serial port on the computer to J2 data link
connector on the console.
• Turn the console/generator on and access the service mode. Go to: generator setup>data
link>firmware update. See Chapter 3C if you need guidance on how to navigate through the console
menu. The console should now be ready to receive the software update as shown below:
®

D. Start Genware32 Console Utilities
Start the Genware32 Console Utilities program installed in step A from the Start menu.
E. Select "Start the Console Firmware Updater" button
F. Follow the steps from 1 to 7 in the Flash Program Utility window
®
1. Select the File option button.

2. Click the Browse button. Locate the file copied in Step B in your computer.
3. Check that the correct file is loaded.
4. Click the Start Download button.
5. The Progress bar should indicate the percentage (%) of the file download completion.
6. NEVER TURN OFF the power until the download is finished. If the power is lost in the middle of the
upgrade, the console needs to be sent to the factory to be reprogrammed.
7. In the Message/Output text box, UPDATE SUCCESSFUL displays when the firmware update is done.
G. Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in this chapter before re-energizing the generator.
Troubleshooting firmware update problems:
Certain conditions might prevent the firmware update from being completed successfully. Follow the solutions
outlined here to fix the problem.
* If the message "Console type is not matched!" is displayed, this indicates that the software file is not
compatible with the console. Make sure the file you are using is the correct file for the console and that
the file is not corrupted.
* The computer COM port failed to communicate with the console. This can be caused by a couple of
problems:
1. Ensure that the correct serial cable type is used (null-modem) and that it is plugged in properly to the
correct ports on the computer and the console.
2. The COM port assignment (on the computer) may be wrong. If this is the case, do the following:
• If the version of the Genware32 Console Utilities is 1.1.0 or higher, click the Setup button on the
Flash Program Utility window. The setup window will open and allows you to change the Com Port
as shown. Select another Com Port, and then click OK. You may have to try consecutive Com
Ports by trial and error; repeating the process until the correct Com Port is selected.
®
• If the version of the Genware32 Console Utilities is 1.0.9, you need to enable the Setup
button when the Flash Program Utility is executed. To do this from Windows XP or Windows
7, follow this procedure:
o In Windows XP, click > START > Run, type 'FlashProgramUtility setup' into the >
Open: field, and click > OK.
o In Windows 7, click > START > type 'FlashProgramUtility setup' into the > Search
programs and files field, and click >Enter.
The Flash Program Utility as shown in Step F should be up on the screen at this point,
with the Setup button enabled. Click on the Setup button and select another Com
Port, then click OK. You may have to try consecutive Com Ports by trial and error
repeating the process until the correct Com Port is selected.
6.6.2 Generator Firmware Upgrade
NOTE: PERFORM A GENERATOR BACK-UP TO SAVE THE GENERATOR CONFIGURATION

INFORMATION, IF APPLICABLE. ALSO SAVE THE INSTALLATION REPORT AND PUT IN A
SECURE LOCATION FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
WARNING: WHEN POWERING ON THE GENERATOR FOR THE FIRST TIME AFTER COMPLETION
OF THE FIRMWARE UPDATE, THE GENERATOR MAY TAKE UP TO 10 MINUTES TO
UPDATE THE FIRMWARE FOR ALL OF THE SUBSYSTEMS. DURING THIS TIME, DO NOT
POWER OFF THE GENERATOR. WAIT FOR THE GENERATOR TO CLOSE ITS MAIN
CONTACTOR AND ENTER ITS STANDBY STATE.
The generator firmware is updated via GenWeb. Refer to the GenWeb™ documentation accompanying this
manual for guidance on how to upgrade the firmware on the generator. CPI will provide the generator firmware
if it is required.
When updating the generator firmware to revision 3.XX.XX on a Rev. D CPU board, the CPU will save a copy
of the generator firmware. This feature allows the generator to recover if an interruption or failure has occurred
during a firmware update. If a failure has occurred during an update, turn the generator OFF then back ON,
and restart the generator firmware updating process. This feature is only available for Rev. D CPU boards.
Lower Rev. CPU boards will not have this feature, and the CPU board will need to be returned to the factory if a
failure has occurred during a firmware update.
After updating the firmware, compare the installation report from before upgrading to after upgrading to verify
the generator settings are correct.
Verify from GenWeb™ or from the membrane console that the generator firmware revision number is correct
after the update is completed. The generator firmware revision is displayed when the console is first turned on.
®
6.6.2 Generator Firmware Upgrade (Cont)
If there are any issues with the generator after updating the firmware, contact CPI customer support for
assistance.
6.6.3 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 Firmware Upgrade
For LSS 2/DSS 2 board 903132-04 or 903132-03 in CAN bus mode, the firmware is embedded in the
generator firmware and is updated when the generator firmware is updated. The firmware will update if the
LSS 2/DSS 2 software revision number is different from the software revision number on the starter board.
Refer to Updating Generator Firmware in GenWeb™ user’s guide for instructions on how to update the
firmware.
Serial EEPROM (If fitted)
If the generator is equipped with LSS 2/DSS 2 board 903132-00 or 903132-04 operating in Legacy mode,
the firmware is updated using a Serial EEPROM.
1. Switch the generator mains power OFF AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS TO
FULLY DISCHARGE.
2. Locate the Serial EEPROMs (U19 and U31, refer to chapter 1E, section 1E.2.3 and figure 1E-4).
Carefully remove (if applicable) and install the upgrade as required. Make sure the component(s) is/are
inserted in the orientation shown in figure 1E-4. Follow steps below after installing the EEPROM.
a) Apply power to the LSS 2 or DSS 2 board by switching on the generator.
b) When generator is turned ON, the HEARTBEAT LED DS5 will start to flash very rapidly while the
software is being updated.
c) Wait until the HEARTBEAT LED DS5 flashing rate changes to 1 Hz (0.5s on; 0.5s off).
d) Power off the generator.
e) The Serial EEPROM at U31 can NOW be either removed from the socket or left in place.
f) Cycle the generator ON and observe that the HEARTBEAT LED DS5 is flashing as described in
step c.
g) Before placing the generator back into service, perform the Dual-Speed or Low-Speed Verification
procedure found in the acceptance section of the service manual.
®
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults
Resetting of the factory defaults will restore the CPU’s NVRAM / flash memory contents to their factory default
state. This will be required if a major firmware upgrade is done. Minor firmware upgrades, such as revision
upgrades, do not require resetting of the factory defaults.
The factory defaults should not be reset casually as this will erase all custom programming made to
the console or generator.
Determining the part # and revision of the current firmware:

• R&F membrane console: The current part number and revision of the console and power (generator)
software is displayed on the console’s initial startup screen.
• Touchscreen console: The current part number and version of the console firmware is displayed when
starting the touchscreen console firmware upgrade procedure. Information regarding the power (generator)
software is not displayed on the touchscreen console.
• GenWeb: The GenWeb part number, revision and software version is displayed on the About tab, under
®
Help. The Indico IQ power (generator) software version is also displayed on this tab.
• LSS 2/DSS 2: The revision of the LSS 2/ DSS 2 firmware is printed on a label applied below the Serial
EEPROMs on LSS 2 / DSS 2 board. If the LSS 2/DSS 2 is in CAN bus mode, then the version is displayed
in the About tab under Help in GenWeb™.
Procedure for resetting factory defaults:
Note: Be aware that the modified APR data will be lost with this process.
• R&F membrane console:

∗ In chapter 3C, refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is in the UTILITY menu, under the
Console submenu. Set LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS to YES.
∗ Briefly switch the generator OFF and then ON again, or preferably, use the Membrane Console
Software Restart as outlined in Chapter 3C, section 3C.1.3 to restart the console. The console will
prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select YES to load the
defaults for the console settings and then for the APR memory when prompted.
∗ This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR
to the factory default settings.
∗ The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator is
switched on.
®
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults (Cont)
• Touchscreen console:
∗ To restore the APR to the factory default settings, go to System Utilities > APR Backup / Restore
and then select Default APR. Refer to TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES, APR Backup / Restore
in chapter 3C for further details.
∗ To restore the receptor and auto-position symbols (if applicable), go to System Utilities >
Configuration Backup / Restore. Then select the backup file that you want to restore and select
Restore. This utility can only restore receptor and auto-position symbols from a previously created
backup file. Refer to TOUCHSCREEN SYSTEM UTILITIES, Configuration Backup / Restore in
chapter 3C for further details.
• Generator CPU factory defaults:

∗ With the power OFF, set jumper JW27 on the generator control board to pins 1 and 2 (FACTORY
DEFAULT position).
∗ Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the message FACTORY DEFAULT
SWITCH CLOSED will be displayed (touchscreen consoles, R&F console and GenWeb).
The following items will be reset to their factory defaults: Tube selection, generator limits, receptor
setup, I/O configuration, AEC setup and calibration, fluoro setup and calibration, Air Kerma and DAP
setup and calibration, time & date, error log, statistics, IP address and passwords.
∗ Power OFF the generator. Reset jumper JW27 on the generator control board to pins 2 and 3 (NORM
position).
∗ The generator may now be powered on again. All applicable setup and calibration will need to be
performed and / or backed up data will need to be restored via GenWeb before the generator can be
placed back into service. Note that the X-ray tube calibration curves are NOT reset after the factory
defaults are reset.
®
6.7.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
INSERT THE BATTERY WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY AS PER STEP 2 BELOW. IF
THE BATTERY IS INSERTED UPSIDE DOWN THE CPU MAY REPORT A LOW
BATTERY ERROR MESSAGE. IF THIS OCCURS, REMOVE AND RE-INSERT THE
BATTERY WITH THE CORRECT POLARITY.
IF THE REVERSED POLARITY CONDITION CONTINUES LONG ENOUGH THE
BATTERY MAY OVERHEAT CAUSING LEAKAGE, RUPTURE, FIRE OR EXPLOSION
AND MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
DISPOSE OF THE OLD BATTERY ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATIONS.
To replace the battery on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below.
1. Turn off the AC mains and wait 5 minutes for high voltage capacitors to discharge.
2. Remove the front cover of the generator. Refer to chapter 2 Installation for instructions on how to
remove the cover.
3. Before proceeding, check the voltage of the new battery. This should be nominally 3.0 V, do not use if it
is under 2.85 V.
4. Locate battery B1 on the generator CPU board.
∗ Note the orientation of the battery in its holder once it is free of the cradle (“+” up).
∗ Gently remove the battery by using the two notches from the top and bottom of the battery holder.
NOTE: WHEN REMOVING THE BATTERY, AVOID USING ANY TOOLS TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO THE CPU BOARD.
∗ Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth before inserting the battery.
∗ Gently insert the replacement battery into the holder, positive (+) side up.
∗ Confirm that the battery has been installed correctly before continuing.
6.8.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING
Tube conditioning or “seasoning” is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should also be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or “seasoning” procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:
6.8.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview)
The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube
normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV station. The
tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and seasoned. Finally
the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the following
procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.
®
6.8.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview) Cont
NOTE: THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,

MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
NOTE: LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES
IN ORDER TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR
WINDINGS OR THE ROTOR BEARINGS.
X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at high
mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.
6.8.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure)
X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear.
The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube before attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, simply follow steps 3, 5, 7, 8 and 9.
1. Note current RAD Anode Hangover value, then temporarily set this to 60 seconds.
2. Note the current maximum radiographic mA setting in the generator limits menu, then temporarily set
this to 250 mA.
3. Start the tube auto calibration sequence and immediately terminate the exposure when the calibration
is finished at 70 kV.
3. Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
4. Restart the tube auto calibration sequence and immediately terminate the exposure when the
calibration is finished at 100 kV.
6. Restart the tube auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to finish.
9. Repeat the previous step at 140 kV, and then at 145 kV.
10. Reset the radiographic mA and RAD Anode Hangover to the desired value (this was temporarily set to
250 mA, and 60 seconds in step 1 and 2), then restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto
calibration sequence to finish in its entirety.
®
6.9.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE

The generator’s useful life is estimated to be 10 years from point of sale. This will vary depending on use and
environmental conditions. Older generators starting with serial numbers AMQ00001 – AMQ00100 are non-
RoHS compliant and hazardous materials should be dispose of according to local environmental regulations
once useful service life has been completed. Generators starting with serial number AM00101 and greater are
RoHS compliant and if it has completed its useful service life, local environmental regulations must be complied
with in regard to disposal of other possible hazardous materials used in the construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this generator are
itemized below:
ITEM
• Electrical insulating oil in HT module. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (25 Liter, 6.5 U.S. gal).
• Solder (RoHS compliant).
• Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.
• Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.
• Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).
• Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).
• Electrical and electronic components: IC’s, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
WARNING: DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY IN THIS

PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE
OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT
IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY
LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE LCD DISPLAY IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH
HANDLING OR DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON
YOUR HANDS, IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT
LEAST 15 MINUTES. SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT
AFTER WASHING.
®

J Note added to section 6.7.0 to avoid using tools when removing the battery. 10-15-19
®
CPI Canada Inc Theory of Operation 7
CHAPTER 7
THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION ............................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Interconnect Diagram (MD-0974).......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 System ON (MD-0976).......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.3 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0975) ............................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.4 Room interface (MD-0977) .................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.5 Fans, Interlocks, Tube 1 / Tube 2 Select, etc (MD-0978) ................................................................... 7-12
7.2.6 Prep & X-ray exposure (MD-0979)...................................................................................................... 7-13
7.2.7 kV control and feedback (MD-0980) ................................................................................................... 7-15
7.2.8 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0981) .......................................................................................... 7-17
7.2.9 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 (MD-0983) ....................................................................... 7-20
7.2.10 AEC (MD-0985) ................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.2.11 ABS (MD-0986) ................................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.2.12 Digital interface (MD-0987) ................................................................................................................. 7-31
7.2.13 DAP (MD-0988) ................................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.2.14 Serial communications (MD-0989) ...................................................................................................... 7-38
7.2.15 Internal CAN bus (MD-0990) ............................................................................................................... 7-40
7.2.16 ADR, Fluoro Select, & Power Mode Select (MD-0984) ....................................................................... 7-40
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-18 Rev. H Page 7-1
7 Theory of Operation CPI Canada Inc
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This chapter contains the theory of operation for the Indico IQ series of X-ray generators. The theory of
operation is organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.
7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION

Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation in
this chapter.
Warning: Various circuits described in this chapter operate at high voltage. Follow high voltage
safety procedures at all times and use extreme caution if live high voltage
measurements must be made.
7.2.1 Interconnect Diagram (MD-0974)

®
This drawing shows the cabling between the major subassemblies in the Indico IQ X-ray generator.
Some of the major subassemblies are optional as indicated in the drawing, and depending on your
generator configuration, that subassembly and its associated cable may not be present on your system.
The second page of this diagram shows the interconnection between the generator, console, and other
external devices.
7.2.2 System ON (MD-0976)
The left side of this drawing shows the wiring from the ON and OFF switches on the X-ray mini-console,
and the R&F membrane console to the generator control board. These consoles connect to J3 and J9 on
the console connector board, respectively.
The generator control board includes power ON and OFF switches S1 and S2 that may be used to switch
the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment. These switches are connected in parallel
with the power ON and OFF switches that are located on the mini console, and the R&F console.
The +24 V supply (+24VSB) that powers the ON / OFF circuit is always on when the generator is
connected to live AC mains. It is independent of the ON / OFF status of the generator.
Pressing one of the power ON switches on the mini console, the R&F console, or on the generator control
board will turn on Q37 on the generator control board. This will turn Q36 on, holding the collector of Q36
low. Q37 is latched on via D118, Q40, Q39, D14 and R536 only if +12V turns on.
The collector of Q36 is connected to J23-16 via D74. J23-16 will be pulled low when the generator is
switched on, i.e. when Q36 is on. Pulling J23-16 low will start the generator power-on sequence as per DC
bus & power distribution (MD-0975), sheets 7 and 8.
A fault latch circuit, shown at the bottom right of MD-0976, is connected in parallel with the power OFF
switches described above. This circuit will switch the generator off under certain fault conditions, lighting
DS17 on the CPU board when active.
If JW26 is in the LOCKOUT position, the base of Q37 will be held high. This will prevent Q37 from turning
on, ensuring that the generator cannot be inadvertently switched on.
Pressing any of the OFF switches on the, mini console, or the R&F console will turn on Q38 on the
generator control board. This will turn Q37 off, turning off Q36. With Q36 off J23-16 will no longer be held
low, causing the generator to switch off.
For generator units using the touchscreen console (refer to MD-0976 sheet 2):
The touchscreen console requires the use of the mini-console to power on (or off) the generator (as
described above). The touchscreen ON switch turns on the console only which is powered by an external
power supply. Use only the IEC approved AC adaptor included with the touchscreen console.
®
Page 7-2 Rev. H Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-18
7.2.3 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0975)
Refer to MD-0975, sheet 1:

Sheet 1 applies to 400-480 VAC three phase 50 kW units only. If the AC mains is connected to the
generator and switched on, AC line voltage will be supplied to line fuses F10, F15 and F16 on the input
distribution board. From the load side of the line fuses, the three phases are fed to the line side of the
main power contactor K1 on the rectifier board via EMC inductor L4. Two of the phases are routed to the
soft-start circuit via F11 and F12 on the input distribution board and also to the primary of the room
transformer via F6, F7 and K1 or K2 on the input distribution board. The three phases from the input side
of L4 are brought into E11/E15, E10/E14 and E12/E16 to drive equipment such as DIN rail power
distribution option, while the output of L4 are also brought into E4, E5 and E7 to power the switching
regulator circuit as shown on page 3.
Assuming that no fault is detected during the start-up diagnostics, soft-start relay K3 will close when the
generator is switched on. This will cause the DC bus capacitors to charge via R1 & R38, R2 & R39 and D7
on the rectifier board. If the DC bus charges normally, i.e. to 87% of its final charge within approximately
10 seconds, soft-start relay K3 will open and the mains power contactor K1 will close. The DC bus voltage
is scaled by voltage dividers R25, R26, R27 and R30, R31, R32 on the rectifier board. The scaled DC bus
voltage is routed to J18-31 and J18-29 on the input distribution board.
The 400-480 VAC mains supply, rectified by D1 to D6, will turn on opto-coupler U1 on the rectifier board
when the soft-start relay K3 or the main power contactor K1 is closed. Opto-coupler U2 will be held on by
the +12V supply produced on the input distribution board. The outputs of U1 and U2, which are connected
in parallel, connect from the gate to emitter of Q1 on the rectifier board. This holds Q1 off, disabling the
DC bus discharge circuit when opto-couplers U1 or U2 are energized.
Opto-coupler U4 on the rectifier board will only turn on if the DC bus is discharging when the generator is
turned on, i.e. if the generator was turned off and then on again immediately or if Q1 turns on or fails
short-circuit while the generator is switched on. The output of U4, which should normally be high, is taken
to the auxiliary CPU board via J18-32 on the input distribution board.
When the generator is switched off, the 400-480 VAC mains will be removed from diode bridge D1 to D6,
causing U1 to turn off. The + 12V rail will also collapse, causing U2 to turn off. With U1 and U2 de-
energized, the short circuit is removed from the gate to emitter of Q1 on the rectifier board, therefore
allowing Q1 to turn on. The DC bus capacitors will then discharge rapidly through R51, R20 & R21, R23 &
R24, Q1, R43, and F1. A discharge over-current fault will cause F1 to fail open-circuit, isolating the
discharge circuit from the DC bus capacitors. LS1 will provide an audible warning to indicate that F1 has
failed and that the DC bus discharge path is open-circuit. The DC bus capacitors will not rapid-
discharge if F1 on the rectifier board is open-circuit.
The auxiliary CPU board in the generator automatically detects the line voltage. For 400 V units, K1 on the
input distribution board will close, connecting mains voltage to the two series-connected 200 V windings
on the primary of the room power transformer. For 480 V units, K2 will close, connecting mains voltage to
the series-connected 240 V windings on the room power transformer. K1 and K2 can be configured to only
close when the generator is switched on, or these relays can be configured to close whenever the AC
mains is on. This gives the option of the 24 VDC, 26 VAC, 110 VAC and 220 VAC supplies on the room
I/O board being on whenever AC mains is connected to the generator, or only when the generator is
switched on. The selection of these supplies being “on always” or “on only if the generator is on” is made
by JW2 on the input distribution board. Refer to page 4 of MD-0975 and to chapter 2 for details.
The driver circuit for the main power contactor K1 on the rectifier board is shown near the bottom right
side of sheet 1. When the soft-start pre-charge cycle is finished, K1 is closed via the PULL line which is
active for approximately 100mS. After this time, the contactor is held in place by pulling the HOLD line low
for as long as the generator is on. DS1 on the input distribution board turns on to indicate that the main
contactor K1 is closed.
®
7.2.3 DC bus & power distribution (Cont)

Refer to MD-0975, sheet 1: (cont)
An interlock is used on the rectifier board (J2-7). This will enable microcontroller U5 of the auxiliary CPU
board to determine if the rectifier board is connected.

Sheet 2 applies to 400-480 VAC three phase 65, 80 and 100 kW units. If the AC mains is connected to the
generator and switched on, AC line voltage will be supplied to line fuses F1, F2 and F3 on the input fuse
mezzanine board. The three phases are taken from the load side of the line fuses to the line side of the
main power contactor K1 on the rectifier board via EMC inductor L4 on the mezzanine board. From the
input fuse in the mezzanine board, E17/E11, E18/E10 and E19/E12 are taken in order to drive equipment
such as the DIN rail power distribution option, and from the output side of L4 on the mezzanine board, E5,
E7 and E4 are wired to the input distribution board. Two of the phases are routed to the soft-start circuit
via F11 and F12 on the input distribution board and also to the primary of the room transformer via F6, F7,
and K1 or K2 on the input distribution board. The three phases are also brought to the switching regulator
circuit as shown on page 3.
Assuming that no fault is detected during the start-up diagnostics, soft-start relay K3 will close when the
generator is switched on. This will cause the DC bus capacitors to charge via R1 & R38, R2 & R39 and D7
on the rectifier board. If the DC bus charges normally, i.e. to 87% of its final charge within approximately 5
seconds, soft-start relay K3 will open and the mains power contactor K1 will close. The DC bus voltage is
scaled by voltage dividers R25, R26, R27 and R30, R31, R32 on the rectifier board. The scaled DC bus
voltage is routed to J18-31 and J18-29 on the input distribution board.
The 400-480 VAC mains supply, rectified by D1 to D6, will turn on opto-coupler U1 on the rectifier board
when the soft-start relay K3 or the main power contactor K1 is closed. Opto-coupler U2 will be held on by
the +12V supply produced on the input distribution board. The outputs of U1 and U2, which are connected
in parallel, connect from the gate to emitter of Q1 on the rectifier board. This holds Q1 off, disabling the
DC bus discharge circuit when opto-couplers U1 or U2 are energized.
Opto-coupler U4 on the rectifier board will only turn on if the DC bus is discharging when the generator is
turned on, i.e. if the generator was turned off and then on again immediately or if Q1 turns on or fails
short-circuit while the generator is switched on. The output of U4, which should normally be high, is taken
to the auxiliary CPU board via J18-32 on the input distribution board.
When the generator is switched off, the 400-480 VAC mains will be removed from diode bridge D1 to D6,
causing U1 to turn off. The + 12V rail will also collapse, causing U2 to turn off. With U1 and U2 de-
energized, the short circuit is removed from the gate to emitter of Q1 on the rectifier board, therefore
allowing Q1 to turn on. The DC bus capacitors will then discharge rapidly through R51, R20 & R21, R23 &
R24, Q1, R43, and F1. A discharge over-current fault will cause F1 to fail open-circuit, isolating the
discharge circuit from the DC bus capacitors. LS1 will provide an audible warning to indicate that F1 has
failed and that the DC bus discharge path is open-circuit. The DC bus capacitors will not rapid-
discharge if F1 on the rectifier board is open-circuit.
The auxiliary CPU board in the generator automatically detects the line voltage. For 400 V units, K1 on the
input distribution board will close, connecting mains voltage to the two series-connected 200 V windings
on the primary of the room power transformer. For 480 V units, K2 will close, connecting mains voltage to
the series-connected 240 V windings on the room power transformer. K1 and K2 can be configured to only
close when the generator is switched on, or these relays can be configured to close whenever the AC
mains is on. This gives the option of the 24 VDC, 26 VAC, 110 VAC and 220 VAC supplies on the room
I/O board being on whenever AC mains is connected to the generator, or only when the generator is
switched on. The selection of these supplies being “on always” or “on only if the generator is on” is made
by JW2 on the input distribution board. Refer to page 4 of MD-0975 and to chapter 2 for details.
®

The driver circuit for the main power contactor K1 on the rectifier board is shown near the bottom right side of
sheet 1. When the soft-start pre-charge cycle is finished, K1 is closed via the PULL line which is active for
approximately 100mS. After this time, the contactor is held in place by pulling the HOLD line low for as long as the
generator is on. DS1 on the input distribution board turns on to indicate that the main contactor K1 is closed.
An interlock is used on the rectifier board (J2-7). This will enable microcontroller U5 of the auxiliary CPU board to
determine if the rectifier board is connected.

400 or 480 VAC from sheets 1 and 2 is fed to diode bridge D45 to D50 via fuses F5, F8 and F9 on the input
distribution board. The output of the diode bridge, approximately 560 VDC for 400 V inputs and 680 VDC for 480 V
inputs, feeds a switching circuit consisting of Q10, T1, Q9, etc via R50, R53 and L3. This switching circuit is live
whenever AC mains is applied to the generator.
The secondary of T1 has taps that provide the + 12V, ± 24V, and ± 35V supplies, and it also has a tap that powers
the switching regulator circuit on sheet 5. The DC supplies derived from T1 are designed for tight voltage tracking
between each of the outputs.
The base of Q5 will be held low when the generator is switched off, turning Q5 and U3 on. The relatively low series
resistance of R22, Q5 and U3 will quench Vgate 20V when the generator is off, disabling the switching circuit.
When the generator is switched on, the base of Q5 will be pulled high via circuits on page 5. This will turn Q5 and
U3 off, allowing Vgate 20V to rise to its nominal value, approximately 20 VDC. Simultaneously, variable width gate
drive pulses will be applied to Q9 directly and to Q10 via T2 whose primary is switched by Q6. The switching
transistors Q10 and Q9 drive the primary of T1, generating the + 12V, ± 24V, and ± 35V supplies when gate drive
pulses are present.
Also shown on sheet 3 is a zero-cross detector U5 that is used to determine the line frequency, a -12V regulator
U1 and a 24 VDC supply (+24VSB) that is active at all times that the generator is connected to live AC mains. This
is used for circuits that must be powered even with the generator switched off.
Lastly, the 400-480 VAC line voltage is scaled by voltage divider networks R65, R66 & R67, R70, R71 & R72 and
R76, R77 and R79. The scaled line voltage is then fed to the auxiliary CPU board via J18-24, J18-4 and J18-2 on
the input distribution board.

This sheet shows the several miscellaneous functions:
• The coils of K1 to K3 on the input distribution board are shown. These coils are driven by circuits on the auxiliary
CPU board.
• The logic-low signal from the ON/OFF circuit on the generator control board when the generator is switched on is
brought to J8-16 on the input distribution board. This signal is routed to the auxiliary CPU board via J16-38 on the
input distribution board.
• The connector for the emergency-off switch and for a power distribution relay is shown near the top left side of the
page. An installer-supplied emergency-off switch may be connected from J14-1 to J14-2. If an emergency-off
switch is not connected, a wire jumper must be installed from J14-1 to J14-2.
• 24 VDC is available to drive the coil of a power distribution relay in installations with installer supplied power
distribution circuits at J14-3 and J14-4 (ground) when the emergency-off switch in the previous step is closed or
the wire jumper is installed. It can also be used to supply an illuminated switch utilizing a 24V light. The maximum
current available from this source is 500 mA.
• JW2 selects whether the 24 VDC, 26 VAC, 110 VAC and 220 VAC supplies on the room I/O board are always on,
i.e. whenever the generator is connected to live AC mains, or whether these supplies are only on when the
generator is switched on. To select “on always” jumper JW2 pins 2-3, and to select “on only if the generator is on”
jumper JW2 pins 1-2.
®
• The correct JW1 setting ensures that the software allows sufficient time for the DC bus capacitors to
charge before it looks for a “fully charged” condition. For 400-480 VAC 100 kW units, jumper JW1
pins 1-2. For all other units, jumper JW1 pins 2-3.
• For 400-480 V generators, J16-29 on the input distribution board is hard-wired to +12V.

When the generator is switched off, only the +24VSB and the resulting +12VSB and +5VSB supplies
remain active. Therefore the comparator & logic circuit near the top right side of the page that indirectly
detects the line voltage 400-480 V is always active. The +5VSB supply is used as a voltage reference for
the comparator & logic circuit. The +24VSB supply is scaled and compared to this reference voltage. For
480 V operation, logic circuits turn on Q14 and Q13 which drive relay K2 on the input distribution board.
For 400 V operation, the logic circuits turn on Q16 and Q15 which drive K1 on the input distribution board.
K1 or K2 can only be energized when +12 V is present on the emitters of Q14 and Q16. If JW2 (page 4) is
in the “on always” position, +12 V will be available to drive the relays whenever the generator is connected
to live AC mains. If JW2 is in the “on only if the generator is on” position, +12 V will only be available to
drive the relays if the generator is switched on. Relays K1 and K2 connect 400 V or 480 V to the primary of
the room power transformer as shown on pages 1 and 2.
If an emergency-off switch or a jumper is connected to the emergency-off contacts on J14 on the input
distribution board (page 4), the line connected to J4-34 on the auxiliary CPU board will be high (+24 V).
This will light DS15 and turn on U4 on the auxiliary CPU board. With U4 on, U7 will turn on when the
cathode of U7 is pulled low by the generator ON/OFF circuit as described next.
When the generator is switched on, the logic low signal from the ON/OFF circuit on the generator control
board makes its way to J4-38 on the auxiliary CPU board. This will turn on U7, assuming that U4 is on as
described above. With U7 on, pin J7-16 on the auxiliary CPU board will be pulled high. This will turn off Q5
on sheet 3, allowing the switching regulator to start its operation, generating the + 12V, ± 24V, and ± 35V
supplies. PWM regulator U25 on the auxiliary CPU board monitors the +12 V supply via U21. The PWM
regulator will adjust the pulse width (the “on” time) of Q10 and Q9 on the input distribution board in order
to regulate the +12 V output of the switching regulator on pages 5 and 6. Because of the tight voltage
tracking between the outputs of T1, regulating the +12 V output will regulate all outputs.
The switching regulator circuit includes a current-limit circuit consisting of Q18 and associated
components. Current-limit transistor Q18 will enter a high impedance state when excess current is
detected, for example when the “crowbar” is active as described below.
The switching regulator circuit includes several protection circuits:

• A “DC bus ready” logic circuit consisting of D7, Q1, etc that crowbars the supply for the PWM
regulator if the +12 V or +24 V supplies stay on for more than approximately 400 ms after the
generator is switched off.
• A “Loss of voltage” detection circuit consisting of D26, Q3, etc that will activate the crowbar if any of
the +12 V, +24 V, +35 V, -24 V, or –35 V supplies are lost.
• A +12 V over voltage detector that will activate the crowbar if the +12 V supply is above preset limits.
The crowbar will be activated if either Q1 or U3 on the auxiliary CPU board turn on, pulling the cathode of
U6 low. This will turn on latch Q8 and Q9, placing a low impedance path across the DC supply for the
PWM regulator and lighting DS16. With the crowbar active and Q18 in the resulting high impedance state,
the DC supply for the regulator will be quenched to the extent that the PWM regulator shuts down,
shutting down the switching regulator circuit. Note that the crowbar acts through zener diode D28 – it does
not take the voltage to zero.
®

Shown near the bottom of sheet 5 is the auxiliary CPU board microcontroller and associated circuits. The
microcontroller has its own embedded firmware, and it communicates with the main CPU via the CAN bus
(page 6). Microcontroller U5 is initialized when its + 3.3V supply is established. Before entering normal
operation, the microcontroller confirms compatibility with the firmware in the main CPU, configures itself
as needed and runs some diagnostics i.e. it confirms that the DC bus discharge circuit is not active.
An interlock at J4-32 on the auxiliary CPU board ensures that this board is firmly inserted into the input
distribution board.
Shown are four of the outputs and five of the inputs for microcontroller U5:
• The output at J4-3 on the auxiliary CPU board drives FET Q15 via R11/Q17 on the input distribution
board, shown on pages 1 to 2.
• The output at J4-2 provides the drive for U10 on the input distribution board, shown on pages 1 to 2.
DS13 on the auxiliary CPU board will be lit when this output is active.
• J5-1 drives the coil of the soft-start relay K3 on the input distribution board. DS14 on the auxiliary CPU
board will be lit when this output is active.
• LED DS1 will flash at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that the microcontroller is operational.
• The + and – 35 V supplies are scaled by voltage divider networks to be within the input voltage range
of U5 and are monitored by U5.
• J5-3 is the input to U5 from JW1 on page 4.
• J4-29 is the input to U5 from the 400-480 V.
• J4-32 is the auxiliary CPU board to input distribution board interlock.
Sheet 5 also shows voltage regulators on the auxiliary CPU board (+3.3 V, +12VSB, +5VSB and +130 V
which is used by the tube 2 solenoid in the HT module).

Sheet 6 shows additional inputs to microcontroller U5 on the auxiliary CPU board that are related to the
DC bus and power distribution functions.
• The scaled DC bus voltage from the voltage dividers on the rectifier board enters the auxiliary CPU
board at J5-29 and J5-31. This differential voltage, which represents the DC bus voltage, is processed
by U20B and monitored by U5. If the DC bus charges normally, i.e. to 87% of its final charge within
approximately 10 seconds, U5 will send a request for soft-start relay K3 on the input distribution board
to open and the main power contactor to close.
• The AC mains phase-to-ground voltages that have been scaled by the voltage divider networks on
pages 5 and 6 are brought to J5-24, J5-4 and J5-2 on the auxiliary CPU board. They are further
scaled by U11A, U11B, U20A and associated resistor networks to fit within the input range of U5.
• The output of U4 on the rectifier board (pages 1 to 4), which is normally high, is routed to J5-32 on the
auxiliary CPU board.
• Pin J5-33 on the auxiliary CPU board is an interlock input. This will be low if the cable connecting J10
on the input distribution board to J2 on the rectifier board is disconnected.
• Microcontroller U5 on the auxiliary CPU board communicates with the main CPU via the CAN bus.
®

Sheet 7 shows the following circuits:
• DC-DC converters and voltage regulators on the generator control board (-12V, -15V_RIOB, -15 VA,
+15 VA, -15V_RIOB, and +15 V_DAP,).
• LED DS5 on the generator control board that is lit when the +24 V that originates on the input
distribution board is present.
• Schmitt-trigger buffer U95 that passes the zero-cross pulses from pages 5 and 6 to the FPGA on the
CPU board.
• An A-D converter U50 that monitors the +24 V, +15 V_A, +15 V_DAP, +12 V, -12 V, -15 V_A and –24
V supplies. The output of the A-D converter is processed on the CPU board such that an out-of-
tolerance voltage will result in an error message being displayed.
• The Indico IQ CPU board has on-board +5 V, +3.3 V, +3.0 V, +1.0 V, +1.2 V, +1.8 V, +2.5V, voltage
®
regulators and isolated supplies +5V_ISOL, +12V_ISOL and –12V_ISOL. Most of these supplies are
used internally on the CPU board, but the +5 V and +3.3 V supplies are also used by other circuits in
the generator.
• DS14 and associated circuits monitor the +5V_ISOL, +12V_ISOL and –12V_ISOL supplies. DS14 will
light if these voltage supplies are within preset limits.
• The +1 V, +1.2 V_PHY and +1.8 V regulators (U11, U34 and U39 respectively) each have an output
that is pulled low if the voltage output from these regulators falls below normal limits. DS19 will light
accordingly.
• DS16 on the CPU board flashes at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that the processor on the CPU board is
functional.
• U57 on the CPU board monitors the voltage of battery B1 on the CPU board. The battery powers
volatile RAM on the CPU board that stores thermal data. This ensures that the generator will continue
to track the heat units when it is switched off.

Sheet 8 shows the DC power distribution to the R&F membrane console.
The StarQ™ Touchscreen Console uses an external power supply that is IEC 60601 approved and can be
turned on independently from the generator. A mini-console is needed to power up the generator (see
MD-0976). The console provides an on-screen message if the generator is off, and a reminder to power
off the generator when the console is shut down.
®
7.2.4 Room interface (MD-0977)

Sheet 1 shows the first nine room I/O board inputs (the remaining inputs are shown on pages 2, 3 and
pages 6, 7 for the high-speed inputs). The room I/O board inputs are shown on the left side of the
drawing. The first input at the top of sheet 1 is the S.I.D. input, which is an analog input. The variable
resistance of the S.I.D. sensor is converted to a voltage that varies with the resistance of the sensor.
When jumper JW53 is installed (default position), it allows the installation of a potentiometer to the S.I.D
input. The potentiometer will control the voltage produced from the current source circuit on the room I/O
board. If jumper JW53 is removed, this disconnects the current source circuit allowing an injection of 0 to
10 volts on the S.I.D. input. The S.I.D. voltage is then fed to the isolation and conversion circuits and to
potentiometer R227 which is used for calibrating the gain of the circuit. To accurately calibrate the gain of
the circuit, monitor TP5 and TP14; then tune R227 such that at maximum input at TP5, TP14 does not
exceed 5V. The S.I.D. voltage output, which is proportional to the S.I.D., is fed to microcontroller U65 on
the room I/O board. The microcontroller processes the S.I.D. information and sends it to the main CPU,
where it is used to set S.I.D.-dependent exposure parameters.
All digital inputs on this page have a 4-pin programming connector in series with each opto-coupler that
may be configured such that shorting the input via a relay contact or other low impedance switching device
turns on the opto-coupler, or these inputs may be configured such that applying 24 VDC across the input
energizes the opto-coupler.
The outputs of the opto-couplers (i.e. U11, U10, U9, etc) are fed to microcontroller U65 via data buffers.
U65 determines whether the output of each opto-coupler is “low” or “high”, and it communicates this
information to the main CPU via the CAN bus.
An external sync signal is applied to the input of U24. The external sync source can supply a minimum of
0 to 4V at 10mA or a maximum of 0 to 30V at 14mA at a switching threshold of 2.4V to energize U24. The
high-current draw prevents triggering an inadvertent exposure due to noise on the cables attached to the
sync input. The output of U24 on the room I/O board drives opto-coupler U4 on the generator control
board. From the output of U4, the sync signal is fed to the CPU board via schmitt-trigger buffer U74 on the
The room I/O board contains ambient temperature sensor U80 which will only function if the generator
software revision is 3.01.00 of later. If the generator software is an earlier version, the auxiliary control
board will monitor the temperature via the temperature sensor installed adjacent to the input distribution
board.
Sheet 1 also shows the +3.3 V regulator that powers microcontroller U65.

Sheet 2 shows the next five inputs. Each of these inputs has a 4-pin programming connector in series with
the opto-couplers. These inputs function as described on page 1.
Also shown on sheet 2 are the circuits connected to the secondary of the room transformer (the primary of
the room transformer is shown on MD-0975 pages 1 to 4). The room transformer has the following
outputs:
• 220 VAC that is connected to TB4 on the room I/O board (page 4) and to TB1 (page 5). The 220 VAC
also drives opto-coupler U2, whose output is fed to microcontroller U65 via data buffer U32. This
provides detection for loss of the 220 VAC supply, typically indicating an open fuse F2 on the room I/O
board (the 220 VAC supply is optional).
• 110 VAC is connected to TB3 on the room I/O board (page 4) and to TB5 (page 5). The 110 VAC also
drives opto-coupler U1, whose output is fed to microcontroller U65 via data buffer U32. This provides
detection for loss of the 110 VAC supply, typically indicating an open fuse F1 on the room I/O board
(the 110 VAC supply is optional).
®
7.2.4 Room interface (Cont)
• The 26 VAC output is used for the collimator lamp. This is connected to TB18-1 and TB18-2 on page
8. It also drives opto-coupler U5, whose output is fed to microcontroller U65 via U32. This provides
loss-of-26 VAC detection, usually indicating an open fuse F3 on the room I/O board.
• The 19 VAC output is rectified by D6 to provide 24 VDC. The +24V supply is connected to TB2 (page
4) and to TB19-1 and TB19-2 (page 8). It also lights DS1 on the room I/O board. The 19 VAC supply
from each tap on the room transformer drives opto-couplers U3 and U4. The outputs of U3 and U4
are fed to microcontroller U65 via data buffer U32. These outputs provide detection for loss of the 19
VAC supply, typically indicating an open fuse F4 or F5 on the room I/O board.

Sheet 3 shows the remaining conventional room inputs. Each of these inputs has a 4-pin programming
connector in series with the opto-coupler(s). These circuits function as described on page 1.
The right side of page 3 shows two options for connecting the room door interlock switch. For fluoro
exposures, use Configuration A if you want new exposures to be inhibited if the door interlock switch is
open before the exposure starts but in-process fluoro exposures will not be interrupted if the door is
opened during a fluoro exposure. To inhibit new exposures if the door interlock switch is open before the
exposure starts and to stop in-process fluoro exposures if the door is opened during a fluoro exposure,
use Configuration B.

Sheet 4 shows the first nine room I/O board outputs. The first five outputs (outputs 7, 3, 4, 1 and 2) can be
configured to output 220 VAC, 110 VAC or 24 VDC when the corresponding relay closes, or these outputs
can be configured as dry contacts. To output 220 VAC, 110 VAC or 24 VDC in the live contact positions,
connect a jumper from TB7 or TB20 to TB4 for 220 VAC, from TB7 or TB20 to TB3 for 110 VAC or from
TB7 or TB20 to TB2 for 24 VDC. For example, connect a jumper from any terminal on TB3 to TB20-1 to
output 110 VAC at output 7 when K4 closes (assuming that JW4 is set to the live position).
The next three outputs (outputs 5, 6 and 11) are dry relay contacts only. Output 8 can be configured as a
dry output or as a live output via JW23. The dry contact position is self-explanatory; in the live contact
position the relay outputs +24V when K11 closes.
All outputs on page 4 except output 11 have an R-C snubber connected across the relay contacts. These
snubbers are designed to quench arcs that can result when the relay opens if the output is connected to
an inductive load. If the output drives an opto-coupler or other low current device, the leakage current
through the R-C snubber when the relay is open can result in sufficient current to energize the load. If this
is observed, the snubber should be disabled by removing the shorting jumper, i.e. to disable C9 & R17
remove JW9.
Microcontroller U65 drives the relay coils via U69 and U70. The main CPU communicates with the
microcontroller via the CAN bus.

Sheet 5 shows the remaining relay-driven outputs. Outputs 9, 10 and 15 can be configured as dry outputs
or as live outputs. The remaining relay-driven outputs are dry contacts only. The drive circuits for the
relays on this page are shown at the left side of page 5.
Sheet 5 also shows ALE (Actual Length of Exposure) and X-ray “on” outputs that provide an indication of
X-ray exposure time. The X-ray on output via K16 is not accurate for short exposures due to response
time of the relay, while the bidirectional ALE output (ALE OUT) provides a highly accurate indication of
exposure time.
®
7.2.4 Room interface (Cont)
Drivers U69 and U70, whose outputs are connected in parallel, drive relay K16 and opto-coupler U61. U69
is driven under software control via microcontroller U65 when high voltage is requested while U70 is
driven by a hardware-generated high voltage “on” signal (HV ON) that is active whenever high voltage is
on.
Lastly, sheet 5 shows 110 VAC outputs at TB5-1 to TB5-4 and 220 VAC outputs at TB1-1 to TB1-4. These
outputs are available to drive 110 / 220 VAC loads that are within the current ratings shown.
Refer to MD-0977 sheet 6 and sheet 7:

The HS inputs are normally programmed as remote exposure or remote mode selection inputs i.e. tomo
exposure, remote HLF select, etc. The factory-default input functions are shown on MD-0977, but these
inputs can be reprogrammed as described in chapter 3C.
If HS INPUT 7 (TB16-7 to ground) is active, DS8 will light and U57 & U38 will turn on. With U38 on, its
output will be low. The main CPU monitors the output of U38 via U14 on the room I/O board and U44 on
the generator control board. A logic low at the output of U38 tells the CPU that an input request has been
received via HS INPUT 7.
In response to the exposure request, the CPU will pull the emitter of U57 low via U44 on the generator
control board and U18 & U68 on the room I/O board. With the emitter of U57 low and U57 turned on, the
collector of U57 will be pulled low. The resulting EXPOSURE ENABLE signal, which must be low in order
for an exposure to be made, is routed to the generator control board where it inhibits the MOSFET gate
drive signals as described under MD-0979.
Sheet 6 (and 7) also shows a last-image hold circuit, composed of U62, U59, C68, R205-207, U63, D40-
47. This circuit will add up to 80 milliseconds after the fluoro foot switch has been released. The
Exposure Enable will be active for the duration of the fluoro exposure plus the time of the “Last Image
Hold (ms)” setting, up to 50 ms, in the receptor setup menu (Chapter 3C). This circuit will be active if the
exposure is activated via the room interface using any of the high-speed inputs indicated. To do this,
remove the jumper block on any of the JW45-JW52, corresponding to the high-speed input that needs to
utilize the last-image hold circuit.
The remaining HS inputs on pages 6 and 7 operate in a similar fashion to that described above.
Refer to MD-0977 sheet 8:

Sheet 8 shows the eight high-speed digital outputs from driver U67. U67 is driven by opto-couplers that
are in turn driven by data latch U19 on the room I/O board and by data buffer U44 on the generator control
board. Driver U67 has open-collector outputs. It can sink up to 500 mA per output for a total of 2A
maximum with all outputs combined, and each output can withstand up to 50 V in the off state.
The room I/O board also includes an exposure sound output jack, shown at the top of page 8. This can
drive an external speaker (minimum 8 ohms, do not use externally amplified speakers).
Lastly, sheet 8 shows 26 VAC outputs at TB18-1 and TB18-2 for a collimator lamp and 24 VDC outputs at
TB19-1 and TB19-2 for devices such as tube stand locks. The maximum current rating for these sources
is shown.
®
7.2.5 Fans, Interlocks, Tube 1 / Tube 2 Select, etc (MD-0978)

Sheet 1 shows the generator’s inverter and ambient temperature sensor circuits along with the X-ray tube
thermal sensor inputs.
The inverter temperature sensor is mounted on a thermal sensor board that is attached to one of the
inverter 1 heat sinks. The output of the inverter temperature sensor is connected to J7-2 on the input
distribution board. From the input distribution board, the sensor output is taken to the input of U31A on the
auxiliary CPU board. The sensor output, 10 mV / °C, is amplified by U31A and fed to microcontroller U5
on the auxiliary CPU board. U5 processes the inverter temperature signal and sends the inverter
temperature data to the main CPU via the CAN bus.
The ambient temperature sensor is mounted on the chassis below the filament boards. The output of this
sensor is taken to J7-8 on the input distribution board. The sensor output (10 mV / °C) is routed to the
input of U32A on the auxiliary CPU board. The sensor output is amplified by U32A and fed to
microcontroller U5 on the auxiliary CPU board. U5 processes the ambient temperature signal and sends
the ambient temperature data to the main CPU via the CAN bus. The generator uses the ambient
temperature data for its duty cycle calculations.
The X-ray tube thermal switch inputs are part of the chassis-mounted stator terminal blocks. These
terminal blocks are mounted on the chassis above the HT module. The tube 1 thermal switch connections
are routed to J11-1 on the input distribution board, and the tube 2 thermal connections are brought to J11-
2 on the input distribution board. Closed X-ray tube thermal switches will turn on opto-couplers U29 and
U30 on the auxiliary CPU board for tube 1 and tube 2, respectively. Therefore, the output of U29 will be
low if the tube 1 thermal switch is closed and the output of U30 will be low if the tube 2 thermal switch is
closed. Microcontroller U5, which monitors the outputs of U29 and U30, sends the tube 1 / tube 2 thermal
switch status to the main CPU via the CAN bus.

®
Sheet 2 shows the fan driver circuits and the tube 1 / tube 2 relay driver and feedback circuits. Indico IQ
X-ray generators use three to five fans, depending on configuration. The fan speed is continuously
variable, ranging from off to high depending on the cooling requirements.
Microcontroller U5 on the auxiliary CPU board supplies a DC control voltage to U4 on the input distribution
board that is proportional to the required fan speed. Pulse width modulator U4 converts this DC voltage to
variable width pulses where the pulse width is proportional to the fan voltage (no pulses = 0 V = fans off,
50% duty cycle pulses = 12 V = fans at high speed). The variable-width pulses drive Q8 on the input
distribution board, which in turn drives the fans. Each fan has a tachometer output, which is a pulse rate
proportional to the actual fan speed. The tachometer output from each fan is fed to MUX U24 on the
auxiliary CPU board and then to microcontroller U5. The microcontroller sends the fan speed data to the
main CPU via the CAN bus, where it is used to trigger an error message should any of the fans be locked-
up.
The auxiliary CPU board controls the drive signals required by the tube 1 / tube 2 select relay. When tube
2 is selected, microcontroller U5 through driver U10 will momentarily trigger the PULL line, providing a
+130VDC power to the tube select relay in the HV module closing it quickly. After approximately 100-
millisecond, U5 and U10 on the auxiliary CPU board turns on the +24 volts to the coil of the tube select
relay via the HOLD line, keeping it in the closed position while tube 2 is selected. A LED indicator, DS4, on
the input distribution board turns on to indicate that tube 2 is selected.
®
7.2.5 Fans, Interlocks, Tube 1 / Tube 2 Select, etc (Cont)
The tube 1 / tube 2 switch in the HV module includes a set of contacts that close in the tube 2 position.
Assuming that the tube 1 / tube 2 switch is closed so that tube 2 is selected, +12 V will be provided to J22-
1 on the input distribution board. This will turn on U9 and U8 on the input distribution board, pulling the line
at J18-23 on the input distribution board high and J18-27 low in the tube 2 position. For the tube 1
position, the logic levels on these two lines will be reversed. Microcontroller U5 on the auxiliary CPU board
monitors the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback signals from the outputs of the opto-couplers. The tube 1 / tube 2
tellback data is sent by the microcontroller to the main CPU via the CAN bus, where an error message will
be displayed if the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback signals do not match the requested tube selection.
7.2.6 Prep & X-ray exposure (MD-0979)

The keyboard assembly and console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the R&F membrane console
only. The prep and X-ray portions of these circuits for the X-ray mini-console and the touchscreen
consoles are shown on pages 2, 3 and 4.
Pressing Prep on the console or on the hand switch will pull J4-7 on the generator control board low via
U2 on the console board and the console connector board. This will turn on U103 on the generator control
board. The output of U103 is monitored by the main CPU via U58 and U49 on the generator control board.
The CPU recognizes a prep request when the output of U103 is low, i.e. during the prep state.
Pressing X-ray on the console or on the hand switch will pull J4-9 on the generator control board low via
U4 on the console board and the console connector board. This will turn on U110 and U109 on the
generator control board. The output of U110 is monitored by the CPU via U33 and U49 on the generator
control board. An X-ray request is recognized by the CPU when the output of U110 is low. When the CPU
receives an X-ray request, it will pull the emitter of U109 low via U49, U32 and Q53 on the generator
control board. With U109 turned on and the emitter of U109 held low, the collector of U109 will be held
low. The line connected to the collector of U109 is the Exposure Enable line; an X-ray exposure is only
allowed when this line is low. Further details are on page 4.
Pressing the fluoro foot switch, if fitted, will pull J4-1 on the generator control board low via U3 on the
console board and the console connector board. This will turn on U107, U106 and U105 on the generator
control board. The output of U107 is monitored by the CPU via U55 and U49 on the generator control
board. The CPU recognizes a fluoro exposure request when the output of U107 is low. When the CPU
recognizes a fluoro exposure request, it will pull the emitter of U106 low via U49, U32 and Q52 on the
generator control board. With the emitter of U106 held low and U106 turned on, the collector of U106 will
be low. The line connected to the collector of U106 is the Exposure Enable line as described on page 4.
The generator control board contains a last-image hold circuit consisting of U105, U9, U104, C10 etc. The
last image hold circuit will keep U104 on for up to 80 milliseconds after the fluoro foot switch has been
released. The emitter of U104 will be held low by the main CPU for the duration of the fluoro exposure
request plus the time of the “Last Image Hold (ms)” setting, up to 50 ms, in the receptor setup menu
(chapter 3C). This will hold the collector of U104 low for the duration of the requested fluoro exposure.
The collector of U104 is tied to the Exposure Enable line, which is described on page 4. The last image
and hold circuit can be disabled for radiographic exposures by jumpering JW16 to pins 2 & 3. Jumpering
JW17 to pins 2 & 3 enables the last image hold function for any exposure switch inputs wired via the
digital interface board.
The X-ray mini-console connects to J3 and the touchscreen console connects to J9 on the generator
control board. The Prep and X-ray controls on the mini console activate the same functions on the
generator control board as described for the R&F membrane console.
®
7.2.6 Prep & X-ray exposure (Cont)
For the R&F membrane console, the console CPU (U18) monitors the output of U3, U2 and U4 on the
console board, recognizing a foot switch closure via-the-console when the output of U3 is low, a console
prep request when the output of U2 is low, and a console X-ray request when the output of U4 is low.

For the X-ray mini-console, the Prep and X-ray switches and the associated connections are shown.

A handswitch may be connected to J30 (HS) at the back of the console. If a fluoro foot switch is required,
it can be connected to the room interface board HS INPUT 3 (TB16-3 and TB16-10), as described in MD-
0977.
The touchscreen console does not have the Prep and X-ray switches and requires the use of the mini-
console to activate those functions. The fluoro foot switch can be connected to the room interface board
HS INPUT 3 (TB16-3 and TB16-10), as described in MD-0977.

Opto-coupler U127 on the generator control board, which is part of the interlock circuit for the HV module,
will be on when the HV module is connected to the generator control board. The output of U127, which will
be low when the HV module is connected, is monitored by the main CPU via U96 on the generator control
board. If the HV module interlock is open, the CPU will not permit the generator to enter the ready state
and an HV module interlock message will be displayed.
The Exposure Enable line from page 1 is connected to the base of Q32 via R389 on the generator
control board. This will be low during a valid exposure request. This will turn Q32 on and Q31 off. With
Q31 off, diodes D103, D104 and D109 will isolate Q31 from the bases of Q27, Q28 and Q33, respectively.
In addition to the Exposure Enable line being low, two other conditions are required to enable an X-ray
exposure:
• The line connected to J32-47 on the generator control board must be low.
• The line connected to J31-21 on the generator control board must be high.
If the line connected to J32-47 on the generator control board is low, Q29 will be off. If the line connected
to J31-21 on the generator control board is high, Q47 will be on and Q27 will be off. With Q29 and Q27
off, the Drive Enable line will be pulled high via R386. The Drive Enable line enables a pair of AND gates
that are part of the inverter gate drive circuit. This is described under kV control and feedback (MD-
0980).
If the Exposure Enable line from page 1 is high (no exposure request), Q32 will be held off and Q31 will
be turned on. This will supply +5 V to the bases of Q27, Q28 and Q33 via D103, D104 and D109,
respectively. This will turn Q27, Q28 and Q33 on. Q27 and Q28 will hold the Drive Enable line low,
inhibiting inverter gate drive pulses and Q33 will turn Q34 on, inhibiting kV demand as described below.
Q33 on the generator control board will turn on when the output of Q47 is high, i.e. when the generator is
not ready for an exposure. This will turn on Q34, supplying +15 V at the cathode of D56. This is connected
to the input of the error amplifier, holding the error amplifier in the “no kV demanded” state. When the
generator is ready to expose, Q33 will turn off, turning Q34 off, thus isolating +15 V from the input of the
error amplifier. Further details are in MD-0980.
®
7.2.7 kV control and feedback (MD-0980)

D/A converter U86 on the generator control board provides the kV reference voltage when the CPU is
satisfied that all requirements have been met to allow an X-ray exposure. The kV reference voltage is
buffered by U80A, inverted by U77B and then summed with the positive going kV feedback signal from
U77A at the input of error amplifier U72A. Error amplifier U72A will regulate the kV by producing a DC
output voltage that is proportional to the difference between the kV reference voltage and the kV feedback
voltage.
The HT primary current is sampled by T4 on the generator control board and is rectified by D98 to D101 to
produce a current-limit signal, which is a negative voltage proportional to the primary current. This is fed to
the input of U72B, where it will limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds normal limits. The
output of the full-wave rectifier on the output of T4 is also taken to comparator U118, which generates a
fault pulse if excessive HT primary current is sensed. This fault pulse is fed directly to the CPU, such that
the presence of a fault will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive-enable signals, inhibiting
the inverter gate drive thus preventing inverter damage due to an over-current condition.
The output of U72B will swing increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is
buffered and inverted by U68A and then routed to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator).
The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses is
inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T5
synchronizes the start of the pulses.
The output pulses from the VCO are fed to one set of inputs on AND gates U45B and U45C. The Drive
Enable signal from MD-0979 is routed to the VCO and also to the second set of inputs on U45B and
U45C, enabling the VCO and the AND gates if all logic conditions to allow an X-ray exposure are satisfied
(Drive Enable signal high). The gate pulses from U45B and U45C are fed to MOSFET driver U37, which
drives the gates of the MOSFET drivers on the generator control board as shown on page 2. A
supervisory circuit on the CPU board disables U37 until the CPU reset signal is de-activated.
The differential kV feedback voltage from the HV module is brought to J22 on the generator control board.
This is fed to the inputs of U73A and U73B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R195 (Note:
R195 SHOULD NOT BE ADJUSTED ONCE IT LEAVES THE FACTORY). The differential feedback signals are
then summed by U77A. The output of U77A supplies a kV feedback signal to error amplifier U72A as
described earlier and to U76B as described below. The kV feedback signal is also fed to the generator
CPU via buffer U122 and A/D converter U62 on the generator control board, where it is used to monitor
the output voltage during an exposure. Lastly, the kV feedback signal is routed to the high kV detector
U82 on the generator control board. U82 will produce a positive-going pulse when the kV exceeds
approximately 132 kV for 125 kV generators and 157 kV for 150 kV generators. This positive going pulse
is fed to the generator CPU, where it will inhibit the inverter gate drives if an over-voltage condition is
detected. Jumper JW25 must be set to the generators maximum kV rating, shorting pins 1-2 for 125 kV
generators and pins 2-3 for 150 kV generators. This jumper should not be adjusted inadvertently and
should match the generator power level.
The output of kV reference buffer U80A on the generator control board is also fed to the input of U76A,
which is part of the “HV ON” circuit. The kV reference signal is inverted by U76A and summed with the kV
feedback signal at the input of U76B. The output of U76B drives Q35, which produces a logic high HV ON
signal when the high voltage is on, if jumper JW22 is in position 1 & 2 (default setting for backwards
compatibility).
If jumper JW22 is in position 2 & 3, there is improved timing accuracy for some configurations, such as
system installations using ADR (Active Dose Reduction).
®
7.2.7 kV control and feedback (Cont)
The HV ON signal is brought to the room I/O board where it is used to drive the ALE OUT opto-coupler as
described in MD-0977 page 5, and to the digital interface board (MD-0987) where it is available for digital
imaging systems that require this signal to synchronize the exposure.

The drive pulses from page 1 are fed to the input of the gate-drive circuit on the generator control board.
The gate-drive circuit consists of MOSFETs that form a full bridge driver. This circuit provides current gain
for the high frequency gate pulses. The gate-drive pulses are then routed to the gates of the power
MOSFETS on the inverter board(s) via J8 on the generator control board.
®
The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (Indico IQ X-ray generators
use one, two, or three inverter boards, depending on output power). The outputs of the inverter board(s)
drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the sharing inductors and resonant capacitor on the
resonant assembly.
During radiographic and pulsed fluoro operation, contactor K1 on the resonant assembly shorts out the
resonant inductor. This inductor is in circuit during continuous fluoroscopy, and it optimizes the output
tuning during this mode of operation. The drive circuit for K1 is described in the section ADR, Fluoro
Select, & Power Mode Select (MD-0984).
For 80 and 100 kW units, the drive to inverter board #3 is disabled by relay K2 on the generator control
board during low power operation as described in ADR, Fluoro Select, & Power Mode Select (MD-
0984). In addition to the drive for inverter #3 being disabled during low power operation, the output of
inverter #3 is disconnected from the HV module by relay K2 on the resonant assembly.

The HV module has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their
own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode
voltage, 0 to 75 kV and the cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -75 kV. The anode and
cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback voltages. The kV
feedback from the HV module is brought to J22 on the generator control board as described earlier in this
section.
The left side of page 3 shows inverter fault detectors that protect against an inverter “shoot-through” fault.
If an inverter shoot-through fault is sensed, current sense transformers on the inverter board(s) will supply
a current pulse that is fed to the generator control board at J10-4 & 8, J10-6 & 7 or J10-1 & 5, depending
on the number of inverter boards. The over-current condition is detected by comparator circuits on the
generator control board, resulting in a positive-going pulse that is fed to the generator CPU via the output
of the inverter 1 fault detector, the inverter 2 fault detector or the inverter 3 fault detector. The generator
CPU will immediately disable gate drive pulses if an inverter “shoot-through” fault is detected.
The HV module is not field-repairable. Defective HV modules must be exchanged with equivalent units.
®
7.2.8 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0981)

D/A converter U86 on the generator control board provides the required filament reference voltage when
the generator CPU receives a prep request. The filament reference outputs from U86 are buffered by
U83A (large filament reference) and U83B (small filament reference). The large filament reference voltage
is fed to the large / single board filament supply via J26-6 and the small filament reference voltage is fed to
the small filament board via J28-8 on the generator control board. Rad-only X-ray generators are usually
fitted with a single board filament supply with an on-board relay to switch between the large and small
filaments. Fluoro generators are typically fitted with two separate filament supply boards, one to drive the
large filament and one to drive the small filament. For generators with a single filament board, the large
filament reference output provides the reference voltage to drive the single filament board in the large and
small focus modes. For units with two filament supply boards, the large filament reference drives the large
filament board and the small filament reference drives the small filament board.
The outputs of U83A and U83B are clamped to zero under the conditions stated below by Q20 and Q19.
Both transistors are held on by U85 on the generator control board until the power-on reset signal from the
CPU board is de-activated. The main CPU also controls Q19 and Q20 via D69 and D70 respectively, on
the generator control board. These transistors are turned off by the main CPU when the generator is in
non-error state.
For the large / single board filament supply, the filament current feedback (scaled 1 V = 1 A) is buffered by
U90A and then fed to A/D converter U62. The filament current feedback for the small filament supply, if
used, is buffered by U90B and also fed to A/D converter U62. The output of the A/D converter is fed to the
main CPU where it is monitored in order to confirm that the actual filament current is equal to the
requested filament current.
The filament board(s) will output a filament fault signal at J2-10 that indicates that filament current is below
approximately 1.7 amps. For the large / single board filament supply, the filament fault signal will turn off
opto-coupler U129 on the generator control board and for the small filament supply board it will turn off
opto-coupler U128. The output of each opto-coupler is monitored by the CPU via U31 and U49 on the
generator control board. The CPU will inhibit further exposures and cause a filament fault error message
to be displayed if a filament fault is detected.
For generators with a single board filament supply, the CPU will turn on Q22 on the generator control
board when the small filament is to be selected. The collector of Q22 drives the coil of the large / small
filament-select relay on the single board filament supply, energizing the filament-select relay when the
small filament is requested. Refer to page 2 for further details.
®
7.2.8 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)

Page 2 shows the filament boards and the filament circuits from the HV module through to the X-ray tube.
The filament reference from page 1 is routed to the input of U1B via J2-6 on the large / single board
filament supply and via J2-8 on the small filament supply board. The output of U1B is summed with the
output of current limit clamp U1A. The current limit clamp sets the filament current limit at 5.5 or 6.5 amps
via JW1.
The filament reference voltage from the output of U1B is summed with the filament feedback voltage at
the input of error amplifier U4B. When the filament reference voltage is greater than the filament feedback
voltage, the output of U4B rises, causing the pulse width at the output of U3 to increase.
PWM (pulse width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETs Q6, Q7, Q12 and Q13 via common-base drivers Q2,
Q3, Q8 and Q9. The MOSFETs, which form a full bridge inverter, convert the + and - 35 V supplies to high
frequency AC to drive the primary of the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency
(approximately 40 kHz) via C22, the primary of T1, R96 and R97 or K1, J5 on the filament supply board
and J4 on the HVM lid board.
For units with two separate filament supply boards, R97 is fitted on the large filament board and R96 is
fitted on the small filament board. The primary of the large filament transformer in the HV module will be
driven via J5-1 and J5-2 on the large filament supply board and the primary of the small filament
transformer will be driven via J5-3 and J5-4 on the small filament supply board.
For units with a single board filament supply, R97 will be removed and K1 will be installed. The primary of
the large filament transformer in the HV module will be driven via J5-1 and J5-2 on the single board
filament supply and the primary of the small filament transformer will be driven via J5-3 and J5-4 on the
same board.
The filament transformers in the HV module provide high voltage isolation and drive the X-ray tube
filaments via the cathode high voltage connector as shown.
The output from the secondary of filament current sense transformer T1 is rectified by D12, D13, D27 and
D28 and fed to the RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The output of the
RMS converter circuit drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback is
calibrated by R21 such that 1 volt = 1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage,
representing actual filament current, appears at the input of buffer U2B and at the summing input of error
amplifier U4B where it is summed with the filament reference voltage as described above.
The output of U2B, which is also scaled 1 V = 1 amp of filament current, is brought to J2-2 on the large /
single board filament supply, and to J2-4 on the small filament supply board. The filament current
feedback signal(s) are then brought to the CPU via the generator control board as shown on page 1.
The filament feedback voltage from the output of U2B is compared with a preset reference voltage by
U2A. The output of U2A will swing low if the filament current drops below approximately 1.7 amps,
indicating a filament fault. This will turn off Q1 on the filament supply board, pulling J2-10 on the filament
board high via R242, DS23, U129 and / or R241, DS22 and U128 on the generator control board.
®
7.2.8 Filament drive and mA control (Cont)

X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and cathode boards during an X-ray
exposure. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube current, is
taken to J22 on the generator control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards clamp the
voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs.
The “ground” sides of the high voltage boards in the HV module are connected to the mA test jack E17 -
E18 on the HVM lid board. Transient protectors on the HVM lid board clamp the voltage across the mA
measuring device during high voltage arcs and prevent the voltage at E17 and E18 from rising above
approximately 15 volts if the shorting strap for the mA test jack is removed.
The anode mA feedback at J22-1 and J22-2 on the generator control board, which is scaled
approximately 0.4 volts = 100 mA of anode current, is fed to the input of differential amplifier U64B. The
output of U64B is taken to the anode over-current detector U63, which will generate a positive-going pulse
during an anode over-current condition. The CPU, which monitors the output of U63, will immediately
disable the kV and display an anode mA error message if an anode over-current fault is detected.
The output of U64B is also connected to JW30. With JW30 jumpered from pins 2-3 (factory-default
setting), the anode current feedback will be fed to the inputs of U56A and U57. U56A provides a scaled
mA feedback voltage, calibrated by R148, such that 1 volt = approximately 100 mA at the output of U56A.
The output of U56A is fed to A/D converter U62 on page 1. The main CPU uses the mA feedback to
adjust the filament current in order to ensure that the actual X-ray tube current is equal to the requested
mA.
The output of U56A is also fed to U52A, which has a voltage gain of 10. This scales the anode current 1
volt = approximately 10 mA. The output of U52A is fed to A/D converter U62 on page 1. This “high
sensitivity” mA feedback signal provides improved accuracy at low mA.
U57 is a high gain amplifier that provides a scaled mA feedback voltage 1 volt = approximately 2.0 mA.
R194 calibrates the mA feedback and R193 provides offset voltage adjustment. The output of U57 is fed
to the CPU via U52B and A/D converter U62 on page 1. This mA feedback path provides increased mA
accuracy during fluoroscopy.
The cathode mA feedback at J22-3 and J22-4 on the generator control board is used for cathode over-
current detection and may be used for X-ray tube mA monitoring (future applications only). The cathode
mA feedback is brought to the input of differential amplifier U64A. The output of U64A is taken to the
cathode over current detector U78, which will generate a positive-going pulse during a cathode over-
current condition. The generator CPU, which monitors the output of U78, will immediately disable the kV
and display a cathode mA error message if a cathode over-current fault is detected.
The output of U64A is also connected to the input of U138, where it is inverted. The output of U138 is then
connected to JW30, such that setting JW30 to jumper from pins 1 to 2 will result in cathode current being
measured. JW30 must remain in the factory default position, shorting pins 2 to 3. The “cathode”
position, JW30 pins 1-2 is intended only for specific configurations.
®
7.2.9 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 (MD-0983)
LSS 2/ DSS 2 PWBA 90313204: Refer to MD-0983, sheets 1:
Power is supplied from J5 of the generator control board to J8 of the dual speed starter board. This
12VDC is: 1) used to supply the circuits that drive gates and relays and 2) is converted to power the low
voltage logic circuits requiring 5VDC via linear regulator U33 and 3.3VDC via switching regulator U27.
The microcontroller U20 will read the DIP SW 1,2,3 and 8 during power up to determine the configuration
and operating mode of the LSS 2/DSS 2. It will use this information to determine which relays to drive via
U24, as well as the drive parameters used for a particular tube. The setting of DIP switches SW1 and
SW2 determines, for tube 1 and 2 respectively, all stator drive parameters, i.e., boost voltage and boost
time, run voltage, brake voltage and brake time, etc. DIP SW3 is used to select the configuration of the
shift capacitors used in the subassembly, while SW8 is used to: select between CAN bus or Legacy
mode, select the board assembly number, and enable or disable other software configurable options
supported by the board.
The generator CPU will determine whether the pending exposure should be made at low-speed or high-
speed operation. The CPU will output the high-speed / low-speed command which is sent via data latch
U29 and driver U19. The LSS 2/DSS 2 receives the command via opto-isolator U12, microcontroller U20
sets low or high-speed operation accordingly. The main CPU determines the selection of tube 1 or 2 via
data latch U29, driver U19. The LSS 2/DSS 2 board receives the command via opto-isolator U14,
microcontroller U20 selects tube 1 or 2.
The CPU will output the prep command to data buffer U49, data latch U29 and driver U19 on the
generator control board. A low output on driver U19 will light DS11 on the generator control board and light
DS7 on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. The microcontroller monitors the output of the opto-isolator U13 and
starts the boost cycle based on the output of the opto-isolator.
After the prep cycle, the microcontroller on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board will output an active low to the input of
driver circuits U24 via the Ready signal. The driver circuits will output a low signal on the LSS 2/DSS 2
board and turn of DS11. DS10 and U98 on the generator control board will turn ON. The CPU will monitor
the output of opto-isolator U98 via data buffer U49 and U31 for the Ready signal.
The current operation of the LSS 2/DSS 2 is displayed on the 7 segment LEDs. Different lit LEDs will
correspond to the different operational states such as, initialization, standby and low speed run. The 7
segment LEDs will also display different errors as described in chapter 5 of troubleshooting
®
7.2.9 Low Speed Starter 2/Dual Speed Starter 2 (Cont)
LSS 2/ DSS 2 PWBA 90313203 - 90313204: Refer to MD-0983, sheets 2:
The Low Speed Starter 2(LSS 2) functions in the same manner as the Dual Speed Starter 2(DSS 2). The
main differences between the two boards are the shift capacitors used and the LSS 2 does not provide
high speed operation.
The LSS 2/DSS 2 has two modes of operation, remote configuration mode and local configuration mode.
The mode of operation is determined by the setting of switch 7 on SW8 .
Power is supplied from J5 on the generator control board to J8 of the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. This 12VDC is
used to supply the circuits that drive gates and relays and is converted to power the low voltage logic
circuits requiring 5VDC via linear regulator U33 and 3.3VDC via switching regulator U27.
During power up and initialization of the generator, the ACB will monitor the mains input voltage of
400VAC or 480VAC. This information is sent to microcontroller U20 on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. DS5
(Heartbeat) on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board will flash at 1Hz (if no errors have been detected) to indicate the
microcontroller is operational. DS3 and DS4 will flash ON and OFF to indicate there is CAN bus
communication between the main CPU and the LSS 2/DSS 2 board.
When prep is enabled from the console, the main CPU sends this command to the LSS 2/DSS 2 board
through the CAN bus. The main CPU waits for the rotor status from microcontroller U20 on the LSS
2/DSS 2 board. The CPU will output the high-speed / low-speed command which is sent via the CAN bus
to U130, U16, and J11 on the generator control board. The LSS 2/DSS 2 receives this command via J4/J5
(see MD-0990), U22, U21 and microcontroller U20, which sets low or high-speed operation accordingly.
The selection of tube 1 or 2 operation is also determined by the main CPU and sent via the CAN bus lines
In remote configuration mode the tube type number, which is selected via GenWeb™, will provide the
CPU with the stator drive parameters such as the boost voltage, boost time, run voltage, brake voltage
and brake time. The stator drive parameters from the main CPU are sent to Microcontroller U20 via U21
and U22 on the LSS2/DSS 2 board when prep is enabled.
In local configuration mode the stators drive parameters are set by configuring DIP switches SW1 and
SW2 (only configured for 2 tube stator) on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. Microcontroller U20 will monitor DIP
switches SW1 and SW2 via shift registers U17 and U18. Microcontroller U20 will provide the stator drive
parameters to drive the X-ray tube when prep is enabled.
Microcontroller U20 on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board will read DIP-switch SW3 and SW8 during power up to
determine if the configuration of the shift capacitors and the board’s operating mode is correct.
The current operation of the LSS 2/DSS 2 is displayed on the 7 segment LEDs. Different lit LEDs will
correspond to the different operational states such as, initialization, standby and low speed run. The 7
segment LEDs will also display different errors as described in chapter 5 of troubleshooting.
®
LSS 2/DSS 2 PWBA 90313203 - 90313204: Refer to MD-0983, sheets 3:
The DC bus voltage used to power the inverter is brought from E18 and E19 of the rectifier board to E9
and E10 of the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. Current sensors U39 and U40 whose outputs are sent to the
microcontroller via U41 and U43 measure and monitor the DC bus. If the current is beyond the normal
operating range, U10 will latch into a state that shuts down the gate drive circuits preventing damage. At
the same time during this state, the microcontroller receives this status via the IDC TRIP line. With the IGBT
shut down, DS1 will be lit, indicating an inverter fault, inhibiting further operation until the error is cleared
through a generator restart.
To drive the anode of the X-ray tube, the DC bus voltage is modulated to produce a sinusoidal current, the
value of which is calculated by the microcontroller using pulse width modulation to provide the tube with
the right amount of drive, via gate drive lines Driver 1 and Driver 2. These drive signals are ANDed with
the Enable signal (U11, Q5, Q6, etc.), whose state is determined by the microcontroller depending on the
status of the generator. Furthermore, if one of the drive signals is locked up at a wrong state, U28 will
latch a value disabling the Enable signal providing additional protection. U11 and U28 will also send a
signal to tell the microcontroller the status of the gate drives, e.g. whether it is enabled or not.
In CAN bus mode, the DC bus (VBUS at TP2) is also monitored via U26 and its associated resistor divider
circuits, so the correct amount of voltage drive can be calculated for the tube in use, regardless of whether
the generator is connected to a 400VAC or 480VAC line, which results in a DC bus voltage of
approximately 560VDC to 680VDC. The voltage drive produced by the LSS 2/DSS 2 board inverter, Q1 to
Q4, is independent of the line voltage frequency and can be at 50, 60, 100, 150, or 180 Hz, using precise
switching of the DC bus. The microcontroller on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board controls the switching of the
inverter via the driver circuit consisting of U1-U11 and T1-T4.
The main and shift currents of the tube are also measured via U34 and U35 respectively. These values
are sent to the microcontroller for monitoring. If the values are outside of their normal range, the Enable
signal is disabled, U20 microcontroller on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board sends the error status and error
message to the generator CPU board via the CAN bus, and consequently inhibiting further generator
operation.
K1 on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board will close at the start of the prep cycle if tube 1 is selected, and K2 will close
if tube 2 is selected. K4 will close at the same time that K1 or K2 is energized. This ensures that the high
voltage is isolated from the stator terminals at all times except during normal operation of the LSS 2/DSS
2.
The modulated output from the inverter is fed to the common stator terminal via one leg of the inverter and
via K4. The main current is taken from the other leg of the inverter passing the current sensor U34 into
K1-B and K2-A for tube 1 and tube 2 respectively. The main current branches off to the shift capacitors
whose output is measured by current sensor U35 and into K1-A and K2-B for tube 1 and tube 2
respectively.
Shift capacitor selections are switched using relays K3, K5 and K7. Depending on the shift capacitors
installed, the relays are configured to produce the right combination of capacitance required by the tube.
In order to do this, DIP SW3 of the LSS 2/DSS 2 board should be configured properly during installation.
See chapter 2 of the service manual for more information.
J6 allows connections to the tube thermal switches but ARE CURRENTLY RESERVED FOR FUTURE
USE ONLY AND IS NOT APPLICABLE AT THIS TIME. Pins 1-2 is for tube 1 and pins 3-4 is for tube 2.
When used, the microcontroller will inhibit the exposures if the tube thermal switch opens such as when
the tube is overheated.
Updates to tube drive parameters can be done using EEPROMs at locations U31 or U19, if applicable.
Depending on the requirement, one or both EEPROMs can be installed in the field.
Other circuits that are shown on sheets 2 & 3 of MD-0983:

®
Refer to MD-0983, sheets 3: (cont)
• Switches SW4 to SW7 may be used to test the dual-speed starter circuits for tube 1 and tube 2 in
both low and high-speed modes. These inputs go directly to the microcontroller.
• 7-segment display DS2 will display error codes for the LSS 2/DSS 2. See troubleshooting section,
chapter 5 of this manual.
• DS5 will flash at a 1 Hz rate to indicate that microcontroller U20 is operational.
• The settings for SW3 and SW8 are described in chapter 2 of this manual.
• In normal CAN bus mode, microcontroller U20 will output a low signal and turn on opto-isolator U30
on the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. The CPU/generator CPU board will monitor the output of U30 to detect the
presence of the LSS 2/DSS 2 board. See MD-0990 and MD-0983 for details.
7.2.10 AEC (MD-0985)

This shows the circuits on the CPU board and on the generator control board that connect to the AEC
board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select signals, the field-select signals, and the start signal to
the AEC board via U49, U41 and driver U42 on the generator control board. D/A converter U86 on the
generator control board provides the AEC reference voltage. This is buffered by U80B and fed to the AEC
board via J24-10 on the generator control board. The magnitude of the AEC reference voltage is set by
the CPU according to the pending AEC exposure, and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts.
The AEC ramp voltage (PT RAMP) from the AEC board is scaled by R189 and R188 and then fed to A/D
converter U62. The CPU monitors the output of the A/D converter during an AEC exposure.
The AEC board will generate the PT stop signal when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the AEC
reference voltage. This signal, which will switch low when the exposure is to be terminated, is fed to the
main CPU via U79A on the generator control board. An active PT stop signal will terminate the AEC
exposure immediately.

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 734614, used with ionization type AEC chambers. The
AEC chambers are connected to J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13 and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be
fitted with 12 pin in-line connectors or 9 pin ‘D’ connectors, depending on the application. The AEC signal
from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the AEC board. These
analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals exit from the generator control board as shown on sheet 1. Only one chamber
may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D and U3F and connected to the control inputs of
the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the selected
AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to
preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a non-
inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output and as an inverting
amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output.
The start signal also originates on the generator control board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on
the AEC board to be lit. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low at
the output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during standby
operation and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog switches
are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel will be
closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4
corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage
depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an
integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output
voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC
chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch
opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start processing the AEC signal.
The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp
voltage is processed by U4A and U4B and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit
consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the
chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the
phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is
disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum short-
time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected to
U2B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is fed to the generator control board where it is processed as described earlier in
this section and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference
voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the
reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The START and LEFT, MIDDLE and RIGHT field select signals from the generator are brought to the
AEC chambers via J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13 and J4/J14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly
output the active low signal from the generator control board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output
+12 V or +24 V if the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high
outputs, the start, right, middle or left field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4,
respectively. The active low signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either
+12 V or +24V (depending on factory configuration) at the collector when active.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3 and JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the left field select signal to pin 6 and the right field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the left field select signal to pin 2 and the right field select
signal to pin 6.
The AEC board also contains a DC-to-DC converter that produces +45 V, + or - 300 V and +500 VDC.
The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79 and associated
components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors and + or - 300 V is
permanently connected to J1 to J4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either
+ or - 300 V or +500 V to J11 to J13 and to pin 1 on J1 to J4 (in addition to the + or - 300 V fixed output at
pin 2).
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

This page shows the input circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. This board is used with solid-state
AEC chambers. The AEC chamber outputs are connected to the anode and cathode inputs of J1/J11,
J2/J12, J3/J13 and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will be fitted either with 7 pin in-line connectors or with
circular style connectors, depending on the application. U2A, U2B, U8A, U8B, U16A, U16B, U3A, U3B,
U9A, U9B, U17A and U17B are extremely high gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the
AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps, typically) to a useable voltage.
The output of each preamplifier is connected to an analog switch that is used for field selection. Selecting
the desired field closes the corresponding analog switch, connecting the output of that preamplifier to the
summing node at the junction of R69, R9, R22 for channel 1, R40, R47, R55 for channel 2, R70, R11, R23
for channel 3 and R41, R49, R56 for channel 4.
JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields. Jumpering pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers (JW1, JW2 for
channel 1, JW3, JW4 for channel 2, JW5, JW6 for channel 3 and JW7, JW8 for channel 4) selects the
normal left-right orientation and jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector jumpers reverses the left-right field
selection
Selecting an active AEC channel closes U4D for channel 1, U14D for channel 2, U5D for channel 3 and
U15D for channel 4. The output from the selected AEC channel will then be passed on to the signal
processing circuits as shown on the next sheet of MD-0985.

This shows the signal processing circuits for AEC board assembly 737992. The AEC channel 1 to channel
4 outputs are connected to the inverting input on U12A, which is a variable gain amplifier where the gain of
this stage depends on the number of AEC fields that are selected. With one field selected, the gain of this
stage will be at its maximum and with three fields selected the gain of this stage will be divided by three.
The variable gain of U12A compensates for the variable voltage output of the input preamplifiers, thus
keeping the signal output from U12A constant relative to the number of fields that are selected.
The output of U12A feeds the inverting input of U11B. A sample and hold circuit is connected to the non-
inverting input on U11B. This circuit samples any electrical noise at the output of U12A during standby
operation and subtracts this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U11B is proportional to the AEC chamber output only and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U11B is connected to the input of U11A via the gain adjustment pots R1 to R4 and the
analog switches for channels 1 to 4.
U11A is an integrating amplifier where C31 starts to integrate the AEC voltage when the AEC exposure
starts. This is accomplished by opening the analog switches that are in series with R35, R38, R42 and
R59 at the start of the exposure. This produces a ramp whose slope is proportional to the input voltage at
U11A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section and is also fed to comparator U10 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference
voltage. The output of U10 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals
the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)
chamber-select signals are inverted by U6 and are then connected to the control inputs on analog
switches U4D, U14D, U5D and U15D (sheet 3) for AEC channel selection and to the analog switches in
series with R1 to R4 to select the required gain pot.
The field select signals from the generator control board are also active low. These signals are inverted by
U6, and then connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U12A and to the analog switches
that select the fields on the previous sheet.
The start signal from the generator control board is inverted by U6 on the AEC board, and then inverted
again by Q2. The output of Q2 is connected to the analog switches in the feedback loop of U11A. The
extra inversion provided by Q2 is required to open those analog switches during an exposure.

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 737998, used with ionization AEC chambers. The AEC
chambers are connected to J1 to J4. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of
analog switches U1A to U1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-
select signals.
chamber-select signals are inverted by U6 and connected to the control inputs of the analog switches
described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC channel will
be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to the input of U7A.
The start signal also exits from the generator control board. This is inverted by U6 and then inverted again
by Q4 and Q5. The output of Q5, when active, opens the analog switch that is part of the sample and hold
circuit at the input of U8A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other times. The
sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U7A during standby operation and
subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the output of U8A is
proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U8A connects to the common inputs of the analog switches that are in series with gain pots
R11 to R14. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch
corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U8A to the AEC gain
adjustment potentiometer R11 to R14 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be
a ramp, is now fed to the input of U8B. The analog switch in the feedback loop of U8B is opened during an
exposure, allowing the AEC ramp to appear at the outputs of U4A and U4B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator control board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and fed to comparator U9 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U9 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board.
The START signal from Q4, and the LEFT, MIDDLE and RIGHT field select signals from Q1, Q2 and Q3
respectively are brought to the AEC chambers via J1 to J4.
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J1 to J4. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3 and JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the left field select signal to pin 6 and the right field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the left field select signal to pin 2 and the right field select
signal to pin 6.
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)

This page shows the AEC input connectors J1 to J4, the PMT high voltage connector J7, and the DC to
DC converter circuits on the AEC interface board. Also shown are the switching circuits for the start signal
and the chamber-select logic circuits on the AEC board that provide switching signals for the high voltage
adjustment potentiometers R10, R19 and R24.
The DC to DC converter circuit produces +45, +300 and +500 VDC for use with ion chambers, and up to -
1000 VDC for photo multiplier tubes. The output of the converter circuit is set by potentiometers R10, R19
and R24. These pots are switched into the circuit when required, as described next.
The chamber-select signals from the generator control board are active when low. If AEC is deselected,
as will be the case during fluoroscopic operation, all four chamber-select lines will be high. The input of
U1E will then be pulled high via R23, taking the output of U1E low and the output of U1F high. This will
close analog switch U2A on the AEC interface board, switching R10 into the circuit during non-AEC
operation. This potentiometer is adjusted to set the PMT high voltage during fluoro ABS operation. When
AEC channel 4 is selected, the chamber 4 select line will be low and the output of U1D will be high. This
will close analog switch U2D on the AEC interface board, switching R19 into the circuit. AEC channel 4 is
typically used for digital applications, and R19 allows the PMT high voltage to be optimized for AEC with
digital operation.
If AEC channels 1, 2 or 3 are selected, the output of U1A, U1B or U1C will be high. This will close analog
switch U2C on the AEC interface board, switching R24 into the circuit. R24 may be used to set the PMT
high voltage if a PMT is used on AEC channel 1, 2 or 3, or R24 may be used to set the output of the +45 /
+300 / +500 VDC supplies for AEC channel 1, 2 or 3 if using an ion chamber that does not have a built-in
high voltage bias supply.
The start signal from the generator control board is active when low. This signal is inverted by Q4 and
made available without inversion via D24, D28, D32 and D33. R29 is installed on boards that require +24
V for the start and left, middle and right field-select signals, and R90 is fitted on boards that require +12 V
for the start and left, middle and right field-select signals. Jumpers JW29, JW31, JW33 and JW35 select
+12 or +24 V start signals for AEC channels 1 to 4 respectively, and JW30, JW32, JW34 and JW36 select
active low (0 V) start signals for AEC channels 1 to 4 respectively.

This page shows the high-gain preamplifiers U6A, U6B, U14A and U14B for solid-state AEC chambers,
the switching circuits for the left, middle and right field-select signals, and switching circuits that connect
the output of solid-state chambers to the high-gain preamplifiers.
For Ion Chambers:

The field-select signals from the generator control board are active when low. These signals are inverted
by Q2, Q1 and Q3 and made available without inversion by D19, D21, D25 and D29 for the left field, D1,
D3, D5 and D7 for the middle field, and D8, D12, D14 and D16 for the right field. Jumpers JW5, JW13,
and JW21 select +12 V (if R90 is fitted) or +24 V (if R29 is fitted) for the left, middle and right fields for
AEC channel 1. Likewise, jumpers JW7, JW15 and JW23 apply to channel 2, JW9, JW17 and JW25
apply to channel 3 and JW11, JW19 and JW27 to channel 4. Jumpers JW6, JW14 and JW22 select
active low (0 V) signals for AEC channel 1. Similarly, jumpers JW8, JW16 and JW24 apply to channel 2,
JW10, JW18 and JW26 apply to channel 3, and JW12, JW20 and JW28 to channel 4.
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)
For Solid-State Chambers:

For solid-state AEC chambers, the start signal (pin 8) must be connected to ground (pin 7) at the AEC
input connectors J1 to J4. Then JW47, JW52, JW57 or JW62, as applicable, must be installed. This
grounds the non-inverting inputs of U6A, U6B, U14A or U14B. The common anodes on the solid-state
AEC chamber are then connected to ground, and the cathodes are wired to the right, middle and left field-
select lines.
The left field-select signal from Q2 (high = active) closes U19C, U17B, U16D and U16A. Likewise, the
middle field-select signal from Q1 closes U19B, U17A, U16C and U17D, and the right field-select signal
from Q3 closes U19A, U19D, U16B and U17C. These analog switches route the AEC chamber outputs to
the preamplifiers as described next.
Jumpers JW73, JW72 and JW71 route the signal from the left, middle and right cathodes of solid-state
AEC chamber 1 to the inverting input of U6A via the analog switches described in the previous paragraph.
In the same way, JW68, JW67 and JW74 route the signal from the cathodes of AEC chamber 2 to U6B,
JW63, JW70 and JW69 route the signal from the cathodes of AEC chamber 3 to U14A, and JW66, JW65,
and JW64 route the signal from the cathodes of AEC chamber 4 to U14B.

This page shows the input buffers, sample and hold circuits, integrator circuits and output comparator
circuits. The output signal from ion chambers is fed to R86 for channel 1, R85 for channel 2, R84 for
channel 3 and R83 for channel 4. The amplified AEC signal from solid-state chambers is applied to the
connections labeled S/S OUT 1, S/S OUT 2, S/S OUT 3 and S/S OUT 4.
For Ion Chambers, Photo Diodes and PMT:

For AEC channel 1, JW44 must be inserted for devices with a negative (-) output and JW45 must be
inserted for devices with a positive (+) output. JW43 has no effect for inverting (-) configurations, but is
required on most non-inverting (+) configurations of this board. Regardless of the polarity of the input, the
output of U7B will be a positive DC signal or positive ramp, depending on the AEC device type.
The output of U7B is fed to the input of U5B and to the input of the sample and hold circuit consisting of
U4A, C9 and U7A. When using solid-state or ionization type AEC chambers, this circuit samples any
electrical noise at the input of U5B during standby operation, and subtracts this noise from the AEC signal
during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the output of U5B is proportional to the AEC chamber output
only, and is not influenced by noise. C9 must be shorted if a photo diode or PMT is used for AEC on
channel 1.
The output of U5B is connected to gain pot R1 and the input of U5A. The gain of U5A depends on the
setting of R1. JW2 must be installed to configure U5A as an integrating amplifier for AEC devices with a
DC output, and JW3 must be installed for AEC chambers that output an integrated signal (a DC ramp).
Analog switch U4C is connected to the start signal. This switch opens when an AEC exposure starts,
allowing U5A to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal.
The output of U5A is applied to U3B, which only closes if channel 1 is selected. With channel 1 selected,
the output of U5A is connected to the AEC short-time adjustment circuit consisting of R91, R120, R121
and C39. This circuit is disabled when the wiper of R91 is at the ground end of the potentiometer, and
maximum short-time compensation is provided when the wiper is set to the end of the potentiometer
connected to U3B.
The AEC ramp is buffered by U18A and U18B, resulting in a positive ramp at the output of U18B. This
ramp is taken to the generator control board via R53, where it is processed as described earlier in this
section. The ramp is also fed to comparator U2 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U2 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator control board. The
circuit description for AEC channels 2 to 4 is similar to that for channel 1. When configuring AEC channels
2 to 4, the corresponding jumpers must be used.
®
7.2.10 AEC (Cont)
For Solid-State Chambers:

For solid-state AEC chambers, the amplified AEC signal from sheet 9 is fed to the connection labeled S/S
OUT 1. Jumper JW46 must be inserted in order to connect the AEC signal to the non-inverting input of
U7B. The remainder of the signal flow is as described above.

This is the functional schematic of AEC assembly 739389, used with various 3-of-5-field ion chambers.
The AEC chambers are connected to J1 or J2. The AEC signal from the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the
input of analog switches U1C or U1D on the AEC board. These analog switches are controlled by the
chamber-select signals.
may be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 and DS2 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U6. The signals CH 1 and CH 2 are connected to the control inputs
of the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the
selected AEC channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal to the
input of U7A.
The channel 3 and channel 4 select lines from U6 are inverted by Q6 and Q7. The outputs of Q6 and Q7
are re-designated as the PORTRAIT and INVERTED signals, respectively. These signals select four
different combinations of the L-M-R fields from the five available fields on the AEC chamber.
The start signal also exits from the generator control board. This is inverted by U6, and then inverted
again by Q4 and Q5. The output of Q5, when active, opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U8A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U7A during standby
operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U8A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U8A connects to the common inputs of the analog switches that are in series with gain pots
R11 and R12. These analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch
corresponding to the active channel will be closed. This connects the output of U8A to the AEC gain
adjustment potentiometer R11 or R12 corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be
a ramp, is now fed to the input of U8B. The analog switch in the feedback loop of U8B is opened during an
exposure, allowing the AEC ramp to appear at the input of U4A via a phase-lead network that provides
short time compensation.
The AEC ramp from U4A is again inverted by U4B and taken to the generator control board where it is
processed as described earlier in this section, and fed to comparator U9 on the AEC board where it is
compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of U9 is normally high, switching low when the
magnitude of the AEC ramp equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the
®
7.2.11 ABS (MD-0986)
For systems using composite video, the input is typically via J6 on the generator control board. The
composite video signal is amplified by U101A. For systems using proportional DC from various sources,
the signal is typically fed to J1 on the generator control board. The jumpers (JW8) on the generator control
board select the input source, input polarity, gain, etc. Refer to chapter 3E for the required positions for
these jumpers.
The signal from J1 or from the output of U101A is routed to gain stages U1A and U1B for further
processing. A digital gain pot U5 sets the ABS signal level at the output of U101B. The ABS signal at the
output of U101B is fed to the sample and hold circuit, which samples the ABS value during exposure in
pulsed fluoro operation and holds that value for the A/D converter. A/D converter U62 converts the analog
output from the sample and hold circuit to a digital signal that is sent to the CPU board. The ABS feedback
signal is used by the generator to maintain constant image brightness by regulating the fluoro kV and / or
the fluoro mA.
For inputs to J1 or J6 on the generator control board, U12C will be held closed under control of the main
CPU.
If a digital imaging system is used that supplies the ABS control signal, this signal will typically be routed
from the digital imaging system to the digital I/O board and then to the ABS circuits on the generator
control board (the DIG I/O BRD ABS signal on MD-0986). For this ABS control signal, analog switch
U12A will be held closed under control of the main CPU. This will feed the DIG I/O BRD ABS signal to the
input of U1B for processing as described above. Alternately, the ABS signal may be passed from the room
I/O board to the generator CPU board (the RM I/O BRD ABS signal on MD-0986). This signal is selected
when analog switch U12B is closed under control of the main CPU.
U101B has two integrating and two linear feedback paths that are switched into the feedback circuit by
U102A to U102D. These switches are controlled by U49 and U28 under control of the CPU.
The ABS signal at J1-1 on the generator control board is split by R269 and fed to J1-2 in order to make
this signal available for AEC control. An example is using a PMT for ABS control and also for AEC control
on AEC channel 4. Refer to chapter 3D, the section AEC USING A PMT for further details.
®
7.2.12 Digital interface (MD-0987)

This page shows the circuits in the generator that interface with the various digital I/O boards. Included are
eight data and address lines and three control lines for the data and address bus.
The HV ON signal that originates on the generator control board is described under kV control and
feedback (MD-0980), and it is routed to the digital I/O board as shown.
An EXPOSURE ENABLE request signal is generated by some imaging systems. This is OR’ed together
with the exposure enable request signal that is generated by the generator control board for local
exposure requests and also with the exposure enable request signal from the room I/O board for remote
exposure requests. Refer to Prep & X-ray exposure (MD-0979) for a description of the EXPOSURE
ENABLE request signal.
Some digital imaging systems generate an ABS control signal (DIG I/O BRD ABS) that is fed to the ABS
circuits as described under ABS (MD-0986).
When jumper JW6 is set to position 1 & 2, a digital sync input can be connected to J15-9 (MD-0984) on
the generator control board. The optional sync signal is fed to the CPU via U69 and U74A on the
generator control board and synchronizes the start of the exposure.
Refer to the imaging system documentation and the appropriate CPI digital imaging supplement in this
manual for detailed installation information.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733752. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data and driver U6 provides the required current
gain to drive the output devices. The emitter of U10 is pulled low by U6 when the generator is ready to
make an exposure, and the imaging system will request an exposure by taking the cathode of U10 low.
This results in the collector of U10 being pulled low when the generator is ready to make an exposure and
the imaging system requests an exposure. The output of U10 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command,
described on sheet 1.
DS4 and DS6 to DS10 indicate the status of the outputs.
Multiplexer U7 selects one of two ABS feedback signals, designated as the DIG I/O BRD ABS signals,
which are fed back to the generator interface board as shown on sheet 1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (the inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 to
U13. When active, these opto-couplers will light DS3 to DS1 respectively and pull the inputs of U8 low.
The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The HV ON signal from page 1 is fed directly to driver U6, which drives DS4 (EXON) and the
corresponding input on the imaging system.
U14 and U16 provide isolation for the corresponding outputs on the digital I/O board.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
®
7.2.12 Digital interface (Cont)

decode the address and data bus. U13 and U14 latch the output data, and drivers U15 and U16 provide
the required current gain to drive the output devices. Q2 and Q3 provide level translation for these two
outputs (Q2 and Q3 source +24 VDC when active).
The HV ON signal from page 1 is fed to Q1 via D3. This takes the collector of Q1 low when the high
voltage is on. Monostable timer U17 is triggered at the start of the HV ON signal, generating a 13
millisecond pulse. This ensures that the high voltage remains on for a minimum of 13 milliseconds, while
having no effect on high voltage pulses longer than 13 milliseconds.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (the inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U3 to U8.
When active, these opto-couplers will pull the inputs of U12 low. The output of U12 is read by the
generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 735921. The circuits that interface with the
digital imaging system are the same as those on assembly 733947. These circuits are shown reduced in
size on sheet 4 (within the dashed outline), and full size on sheet 3.
Digital I/O board assembly 735921 is used with some imaging systems that have integrated generator
control functions. Such installations do not need a separate control console to control and monitor the X-
ray exposure parameters, but they do require the “X-ray mini consoles” with on / off and prep / X-ray
controls and prep and X-ray exposure indicators.
Assembly 735921 includes the circuits described on sheet 3, plus data latch U18, driver U19 and
connectors J4 to J7. J4 on the digital I/O board connects to J20B on the generator control board. The X-
ray mini consoles connect to J6 and J7.
The on / off and prep and X-ray commands originate on the X-ray mini console as described on sheet 5.
These signals are routed from J6 on the digital I/O board to J20B on the generator control board.
U18 latches the data to drive the speakers and the prep and exposure indicators on the mini consoles,
and U19 provides the required current gain to drive these devices.
A version of this board exists without the digital imaging interface circuits that are shown within the dashed
outline. This board is used with some imaging systems that have integrated generator control functions,
and connect to the generator via a serial port instead of the digital I/O board.
®

This sheet shows the optional CPI mini consoles. These are typically used in installations where the digital
imaging system has integrated generator control functions. Such systems allow control and monitoring of
generator exposure parameters, but typically do not contain on / off and prep & X-ray controls and
indicators. The CPI mini consoles provide these control and monitoring functions in installations requiring
them.
The X-ray mini console connects to J6 on the digital I/O board. It includes on / off and prep & X-ray
controls as shown. These functions are routed to the generator control board, where they perform the on /
off and prep & X-ray functions. An optional hand switch may be connected to the X-ray mini console.
Power ON indicator DS4 is connected to J6-5 (ground), and lights whenever the generator is switched on.
The appropriate bit in U18 is latched high or low in order to turn LS1, LS2 and DS1 to DS3 on or off. Driver
U19 provides current gain to drive these devices via J6-3, J6-4, and J6-6 to J6-8.
The optional mini console X-ray exposure indicator connects to J7 on the digital I/O board and contains
prep and exposure indicators and two speakers. U19 drives DS1, DS2 and LS1, LS2 via J7-1, J7-4, J7-5
and J7-7 as described above.

gain to drive U7, U10 and U16. U7 and U10 pull the associated inputs on the imaging system low when
active.
The emitter of U14 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an exposure, and the imaging
system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U14 high. This results in the collector of U14 being
pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system requests an exposure, turning on U16.
The output of U16 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE request, described on sheet 1. The output of U15, which
will also be low when an exposure is requested, is monitored by generator CPU via U8 and the address
decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (the inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and
U13. When active, these opto-couplers will pull the corresponding inputs of U8 low. The output of U8 is
read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
This I/O board assembly includes an on-board +5 V regulator, U12 that connects to J2-21 and to the
anode of U11.
be compatible with the imaging system in use
®

gain to drive U7, U10 and U13 to U15. These opto-couplers pull the associated inputs on the imaging
system low when active. DS3, DS4 and DS7 to DS9 light to indicate the active outputs.
The HV ON signal is NAND’ed with an output from U4 at the input of U3C. With both inputs to U3C high,
the output of U3D will be high. This energizes U15 via driver U6 and DS9.
U12. When these inputs are active, DS5 and / or DS6 will light and the corresponding inputs of U8 will be
low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O
board.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736894. CPLD U1 decodes the address and
data bus and latches the output data. The output data is fed to drivers U3, U11 and U17. U3 and U11
provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding inputs on the imaging system. The associated
LEDs will light to indicate which outputs are active. U17 drives the base of Q1, which provides level
translation for that output (sources +24 VDC when active). U17 also energizes K1 and pulls the emitters of
U5, U7, U14 and U16 low when the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Signals from the table or imaging system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U4, U6, U13 or
U15 high. This will energize opto-couplers U4 / U5, U6 / U7, U13 / U14 or U15 / U16 respectively. The
outputs of U5, U7, U14 and U16 are OR’ed together, and provide the EXPOSURE ENABLE request,
described on sheet 1.
The outputs of U4, U6, U13, U15 and U8 are monitored by the generator CPU via U1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (the inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U2, U9,
U10 and U12. The outputs of these drivers are monitored by the generator CPU via U1. The LED in series
with each input will light to indicate the status of that input.
The ABS control signal (DIG I/O BRD ABS) is taken directly from the imaging system to J1-20.

decode the address and data bus. U4, U6 and U17 latch the output data and driver U18 provides the
required current gain to drive the outputs via J6 and J7. U11 to U13 provide level translation for the X-ray,
prep, and generator outputs, resulting in TTL level (5V) differential outputs. The output associated with
U14 is not used at this time.
The HV ON signal is fed to U10 via U3D and U3C. This takes the output of U3C high when the high
voltage is on. Monostable timer U7 is triggered at the start of the HV ON signal, generating a 13
millisecond pulse. This ensures that the high voltage remains on for a minimum of 13 milliseconds, while
having no effect on high voltage pulses longer than 13 milliseconds. U10 provides level translation for the
HV ON signal, providing a TTL level differential output.
®

With the input to U16 low, the base of Q1 will be pulled high, taking the collector of Q1 low. The collector
of Q1 is monitored by the generator CPU via U8. U15 is not used at this time.
be compatible with the imaging system in use. JW101, JW102 and JW103 will be installed for systems
using the circuits described on sheet 10.

This page shows the circuits connected to J101, J102 and J103.
With the input of U103 pulled low the output of U103 will be low. An exposure request (EXP_REQ) signal
is then sent to the digital system via J101-8. The digital system will send an exposure acquire (EXP_ACQ)
signal to U106 via J101-2. This active low signal will turn on U106. Driver U105 provides the required
current gain to drive U16 on the previous sheet.
The logic high signal on the output of U101 will turn off the preset input of U102. On the next positive
going edge of the X-RAY ON signal the output of U102 is pulled low, triggering monostable timer U104,
generating a short pulse. The output of U104 will pull the base of Q101 high, turning on Q101. The output
of Q101 (EXP_END) is read by the digital system and disables the EXP_ACQ signal.
+24V_EXT is supplied to the digital I/O board by the digital system via J102.

This page shows the circuits connected to J6 and J9 on digital I/O board assembly 738947. CPLD U9
decodes the address and data bus and latches the output data. The output data is applied to drivers U7,
U8, U10 and U11. Drivers U7, U8 and U10 provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding
inputs on the table.
Signals from the table request an exposure by taking the anode of U12 or U14 high. This will turn on opto
couplers U12 / U13 and U14 / U15. U11 energizes K1, and pulls the emitters of U13 and U15 low when
the generator is ready to make a table-requested X-ray exposure or a table-requested fluoroscopic
exposure, respectively. The outputs of U13 and U15 are OR’ed together, and provide the EXPOSURE
ENABLE request, described on sheet 1. DS1 indicates that the table is requesting a fluoroscopic
exposure and DS2 indicates that the table is requesting an X-ray exposure.
A prep signal from the table lights DS3 and energizes U19. The output of U19 is monitored by the
generator CPU via U9.
The S.I.D. (Source to Image Distance) signal from the table is an analog signal that is buffered by U23A
and fed to the input of U20, an analog to digital converter that outputs a digital signal representing the
source to image distance.
The sync signal is fed from the imaging system via J7 (sheet 12) to J8-22, or from the table via J6 to J8-
22.

This page shows the circuits connected to J1 to J4, J7, J10, J11 and the voltage regulator circuits. CPLD
U9 decodes the address and data bus and latches the output data. The output data is applied to drivers
U3, U4, U5, U6 and U11. Drivers U3 to U6 provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding
inputs on the table. U11 drives the base of Q1, Q2, Q4 and Q5, turning on these transistors when the
corresponding input or output is to be energized.
®

U2. The outputs are monitored by the generator CPU via U9.
The HV ON signal is fed to U5 via U18B and U17 in parallel with D2. Therefore, the input of U5 will be
high when the high voltage is on. Monostable timer U17 is triggered at the start of the HV ON signal,
generating a 13 millisecond pulse. This ensures that the high voltage remains on for a minimum of 13
milliseconds, while having no effect on high voltage pulses longer than 13 milliseconds.
Regulator circuits U16, U21 and U22 produce regulated outputs of +3.3 V, +10 V, and +2.5 V respectively.
The ABS signal is brought from the digital imaging system to the generator interface board via J7-1 and
R41 to J8-20, and the sync signal from J7-3 or J7-5 is brought to J8-22 as described under sheet 11.

This page shows the circuits connected to drivers U14 and U27, MUX U24, and all of the connections to
J1, J4 and J9. The connections to J3 are split between this page and page 14, and the connections to J6
and J7 are split between this page and pages 14 and 15.
The output data from U10 is fed to driver U14, which provides the required current gain to directly drive
the output J6-17. U14 also drives opto-couplers U26 and U16 / U18 and pulls the emitters of U22 / U32
and U23 / U30 low when active. The collectors of U26 and U16 / U18 drive the outputs shown on J6.
Opto-couplers U21 / U23 are turned on when J7-24 is pulled low, U20 / U22 are turned on when J7-23 is
pulled low, U29 / U30 are energized when J7-16 is pulled high and U31 / U32 are energized when J6-16 is
pulled high. The outputs of U20, U21, U29 and U31 are monitored by U10, and the outputs of U22, U23,
U30 and U32 pull the EXPOSURE ENABLE line J8-14 low.
The sync signal is routed from J7-16 to J8-22, and MUX U24 selects the desired ABS signal to be brought
to the generator interface board via J8-20.
The X-ray control and communication commands are routed directly between J4 and J1 / J3.

This page shows the circuits connected to driver U2, all of the connections to J2, the balance of
connections to J3 and additional connections to J6 and J7 (in addition to those on pages 13 and 15).
Driver U2 provides the required current gain to drive the outputs J3-3, J3-4 / J2-1, J3-6 / J2-5, J3-7 / J2-7
and J3-8 / J2-4.
Opto-couplers U1, U3 to U8, U9, U11, U12, U17 and U25 are energized when their inputs are pulled low
via the associated pin on J6 or J7. The output of each opto-coupler is monitored by the generator CPU via
U10.

This page shows the balance of the connections to J6 and J7.
Driver U19 provides the required current gain to drive the outputs J6-9, J6-10, J6-11, J6-12, J7-9, J7-10,
J7-11 and J7-12. LED’s DS11 to DS14 and DS22 to DS25 indicate which of the eight outputs of U19 are
pulled low.
®

This page shows the circuits connected to drivers U14 and U27, MUX U24 and connections to J1, J3, J4,
J10, J11 and J12. The balance of connections to J3, J10, J11 and J12 are split between this page and
pages 17 and 18.
The output data from U10 is fed to driver U14, which provides the required current gain to directly drive
the output J12-10. U14 also drives opto-couplers U26 and U16 / U18 and pulls the emitters of U22 / U32
and U23 / U30 low when active. The collectors of U26 and U16 drive the outputs shown on J10.
Opto-couplers U21 / U23 are turned on when J12-11 is pulled low, U20 / U22 are turned on when J12-12
is pulled low, U29 / U30 are energized when J12-8 is pulled high and U31 / U32 are energized when J12-5
is pulled high. The outputs of U20, U21, U29 and U31 are monitored by U10, and the outputs of U22, U23,
U30 and U32 pull the EXPOSURE ENABLE line J8-14 low.
The sync signal is routed from J12-8 to J8-22, and MUX U24 selects the desired ABS signal to be brought
to the generator interface board via J8-20.
The X-ray control and communication commands are routed directly between J4 and J1 / J3.

This page shows the circuits connected to driver U2, all of the connections to J2 and additional
connections to J3, J10, J11 and J12.
Driver U2 provides the required current gain to drive the outputs J3-3, J3-4 / J2-1, J3-6 / J2-5, J3-7 / J2-7
and J3-8 / J2-4.
Opto-couplers U1, U3 to U8, U9, U11, U12, U17 and U25 are energized when their inputs are pulled low
via the associated pin on J10, J11 or J12. The output of each of these opto-couplers is monitored by the
generator CPU via U10.

This page shows the balance of the connections to J10, J11 and J12.
Driver U19 provides the required current gain to drive the outputs J11-5, J11-1, J11-3, J11-2, J11-7, J12-
6, J12-4 and J10-1. LED’s DS11 to DS14 and DS22 to DS25 indicate which of the eight outputs of U19
are pulled high.

This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 903121. Driver U6 directly drives six of the
outputs:
• Five of these outputs are derived from the CPU and latched by U4.
• The sixth directly driven output is the X-ray on signal, which is derived from the HV ON signal in the
generator.
The last output from U6 is inverted by Q1, and this drives the output at J2-14. DS1 to DS 6 indicate that
the related outputs are low when these are lit, and DS7 indicates that its output is high when it is lit.
®

This board also has three inputs:
• The ABS feedback signal at J2-16 is routed to the ABS circuits in the generator via J1-20.
• When the READY input at J2-4 is low, it will turn on Q2, which turns on Q3. The logic state at the
output of Q3 is read by the CPU via data buffer U8. The READY input also supplies the sync input via
the collector of Q4.
• When the TRIGGER ACKNOWLEDGE input at J2-4 is low, it will turn on Q5, which turns on Q6. The
logic state at the output of Q6 is also read by the CPU via data buffer U8.
7.2.13 DAP (MD-0988)

The DAP circuits operate under control of the main CPU via data buffer U49, data latch U26 and driver
U17 on the generator control board. The +5V and +15V_DAP_IO supplies that control and test the DAP
chambers are switched on and off by transistors Q24, Q4, Q8, Q25, Q5 and Q9 via driver U17 under
control of the CPU. Fuse F4 on the generator control board provides short circuit protection for the
+15V_DAP_IO supply.
The differential output from the DAP chamber(s) is routed to U23 for DAP chamber 1 via L11, R346 and
R347 and to the input of U22 for DAP chamber 2 via L12, R72 and R339. The outputs of the opto-
couplers are directly connected to the inputs of buffer / gates U111 and U112.
The output of U111 is enabled by U26 under control of the main CPU. The output enable command that
drives U111 is inverted by U24 in order to enable the output of U112 when U111 is disabled. The DAP
pulses at the outputs of U111 and U112 are passed to the main CPU, where they are processed in order
to provide the display of Dose-Area Product.
DS 18 will light to indicate that DAP channel 1 is active and DS19 will light to indicate that DAP channel 2
is active.

Sheet 2 shows the DAP input connections, where J2 on the console connector board is the input for DAP
chamber 1 and J1 is the input for DAP chamber 2.
7.2.14 Serial communications (MD-0989)

Sheet 1 shows the serial communications circuits for the R&F membrane console and its connections to
the console connector board as well as the touchscreen connections to the console connector board.
When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are completed, the console CPU will
attempt to communicate with the generator CPU. The console will send data to the generator and then
wait for a response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue.
If the console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error message
will be displayed.
DS41 on the console board will flash when the console is sending data to the generator. DS42 will flash to
indicate that the generator is sending data to the console. The console communicates with the generator
via data buffers U8 / U16 and RS-232 driver U1. U5 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the
serial port, J2. DS44 and DS43 will flash to indicate that data is being sent to and received from the
console’s serial port.
®
7.2.14 Serial communications (Cont)

DS45 on the console board will flash at a 1 Hz rate if the console CPU is operational.
The remainder of sheet 1 shows the routing of the communication signals on the R&F membrane console
and touchscreen console through the console connector board.

Sheet 2 shows the serial communication circuits on the generator control board that are applicable to the
R&F membrane console.
The generator control board includes RS-232 and RS-422 drivers, jumpers JW11, JW12, JW13, JW14,
JW15 and buffers U39A and U39B that isolate the +5 V logic on the generator control board from the +3.3
V logic on the CPU board. The jumpers must be in the RS-232 position for communicating with the R&F
membrane console and the touchscreen consoles. The RS-422 position is used for special applications
that require the RS-422 protocol.
LED DS14 indicates that serial data is being sent from the generator to the console and DS15 indicates
that data is being sent from the console to the generator.

Sheet 3 shows the external communications ports on the CPU board. These include:
• Two external RS-232 comm. ports J5 and J8 on the console connector board. These are driven by
RS-232 drivers U27 and U69 via digital isolators U65 and U66.
• A 10/100/1000 Ethernet port J1.
• A USB port J2.
• External CAN ports J6 and J7 on the console connector board. In order to minimize signal reflections,
the CAN bus termination switches must be set as follows:
∗ Switches 1-4 and 2-3 on SW2 must be closed if the generator is the first or last node in the CAN
bus connected to CAN BUS PORT 2.
∗ Switches 1-4 and 2-3 on SW1 must be closed if the generator is the first or last node in the CAN
bus connected to CAN BUS PORT 1.
®
7.2.15 Internal CAN bus (MD-0990)
Refer to MD-0990, sheets 1 & 2:

The room I/O, dual speed starter and the auxiliary CPU boards connect to the generator CPU board via
the CAN bus. Each of these boards is equipped with a microcontroller, a CAN-SPI controller and a
transceiver.
To tell the generator CPU that the CAN bus equipped boards are ready, the microcontroller on each board
pulls the line connected to an opto-coupler low, turning it on. These are opto-couplers U60, U30 and U28
for the room I/O, the dual speed starter and the auxiliary CPU boards respectively. Once these opto-
couplers are on, U108 on the generator CPU board will turn on, via R327 & R328, consequently pulling
U94A output low. This tells the generator CPU that the CAN bus equipped boards are properly connected
and ready to communicate to the generator CPU via the CAN bus lines.
Communications can start if all the boards connected within the loop are working properly. If the
microcontroller on the boards needs to communicate with the generator CPU, it uses the CAN-SPI
controller and the transceivers on the board. The transceivers are connected to pin 4 (CAN-High) and pin
5 (CAN-Low) for the room I/O and the dual speed starter boards, and on pin 25 and 26 respectively on the
auxiliary CPU board.
LED’s on the boards indicate the state of CAN bus lines, labeled CAN TX (transmit) and CAN RX
(receive). If these LED’s are blinking, it is an indication that the CAN bus lines are actively transmitting
and receiving data.
The connections to the input distribution board are pass through only via J12 and J16, connecting J4 of
the auxiliary CPU board to the CAN bus.
The CAN bus communications protocol will also be used in the future for optional boards such as AEC
boards, etc.
7.2.16 ADR, Fluoro Select, & Power Mode Select (MD-0984)

The generator at the end of each fluoroscopic pulse triggers the high voltage switch circuits in the ADR
module. This rapidly discharges the capacitance of the HV cathode cable and the HV module through a
series of resistors in the ADR module. With the inherent and added filtration in the X-ray beam, the result
is negligible radiation once the cathode capacitance is discharged.
When ADR Module of Tube 1 is active, the CPU board issues a discharge command via J11-28 at the
end of each fluoroscopic pulse. This discharge signal via J31-28 on the generator control board drives Q2
which then drives the trigger circuits via J3-4 in the ADR Module of Tube 1. This turns on the high voltage
switch circuits and very quickly discharges the cathode capacitance as noted above.
When ADR Module of Tube 2 is active, the CPU board issues a discharge command via J11-27 at the
end of each fluoroscopic pulse. This discharge signal via J31-27 on the generator control board drives Q2
which then drives the trigger circuits via J9-4 in the ADR Module of Tube 2. This turns on the high voltage
switch circuits and very quickly discharges the cathode capacitance.
The high voltage switch circuits revert to their “off” state automatically when the discharge current drops
below a very low value, i.e. once the HV module’s cathode capacitance is almost fully discharged.
DS1 on the ADR module lid board is connected in series with the trigger circuits in the ADR module. This
LED will flash at the current PPS rate when the ADR function is active.
®
7.2.16 ADR, Fluoro Select, & Power Mode Select (Cont)
Feedback and logic circuits in the ADR module sense the discharge current and the timing of the
discharge current relative to the trigger pulses. These circuits will detect a fault where the ADR module is
not discharging, as well as a fault where the ADR module is always discharging. This feedback signal is
sent to the generator control board via J3-8 on the ADR module lid board, where it drives the input of opto-
coupler U99 on the generator control board. The CPU detects an ADR fault by monitoring the output of
U99 via U31 and U49 on the generator control board. An appropriate error message will be displayed if a
fault is detected by the feedback and logic circuits in the ADR module, and the generator will then be
placed in the not-ready state.
DS2 on the ADR module lid board will flash at the PPS rate if the ADR module is not discharging when it
should be, and DS2 will be lit continuously if the ADR module is always discharging.
DS3 on the ADR module lid board is connected to +24 VDC inside the ADR module via a series resistor.
This LED will light when the ADR module is connected to the generator and the +24 VDC, supplied by the
generator interface board, is present.
Pin J7-9 on the generator control board is an interlock. This input is grounded via J3-9 on the ADR module
when the ADR module is connected. The interlock status is fed back to the generator CPU via opto-
coupler U100, U31 and U49 on the generator control board. Failure of the ground at this input will result in
an error message.

Sheet 2 shows the driver circuits for the fluoro (resonant) contactor and for the power mode select relay.
The resonant contactor is closed during Rad and pulsed fluoro operation and open during continuous
fluoro operation. The drive signals for the resonant contactor are generated by microcontroller U5 on the
auxiliary CPU board. U5 and driver U10 provides a momentary PULL signal to close the resonant
contactor for approximately 100 milliseconds. After this time, the HOLD signal will be activated to keep
the resonant contactor in the closed position for as long as the generator is in Rad or pulsed fluoro mode.
DS2 on the input distribution board lights up to indicate that the fluoro (resonant) contactor is turned on.
Rad only units are not fitted with the fluoro (resonant) contactor.
Inverter #3 on 80 and 100 kW generators is disabled during low power operation (fluoroscopy or low
power Rad exposures). This is accomplished as described below.
During low power operation, the CPU board will pull the base of Q3 low, turning K2 off, on the generator
control board. With K2 on the generator control board off, the gate drive to inverter #3 is disabled.
Contactor K2 on the resonant assembly enables the inverter #3 output. It's coil is connected to the driver
circuit on the generator control board. It is closed under the command of the CPU board via U49, U29
and Q44 that generate a PULL signal to activate the driver circuit for approximately 100 milliseconds, after
which it is held in place by the HOLD line during high power mode operation. DS24 on the generator
control board turns on to indicate that inverter #3 is enabled.
If the generator is not on the high power mode, the HOLD line will be deactivated, which in turn de-
energizes K2 on the resonant assembly. This disconnects the output of inverter #3 from the input of the
HV module as described under MD-0980.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc Spares 8
CHAPTER 8
SPARES
CONTENTS:
Section Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................. 8-2
®
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO IQ GENERATOR ............................................................................................. 8-2
8.3.0 SPARE PARTS LIST STARQ™ TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE ........................................................................ 8-6
8.4.0 REVISION HISTORY ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-19 Rev. N Page 8-1
8 Spares CPI Canada Inc
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico IQ generators.
Table 3 in section 8.3.0 also lists the spare parts for the StarQ™ Touch Screen Console.
®
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO IQ GENERATOR
Refer to chapter 1E for the location of the major assemblies in the generator.
TABLE 1
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY
Input distribution board SP90472800IQ 2 1
Input distribution board SP90472802IQ 3 1
Mezzanine board SP90413300IQ 3 1
Rectifier board SP73824901IQ 1 1
Generator CPU board SP90449500IQ 1 1
Generator control board SP90449800IQ 1 1
Console connector board SP90455500IQ 1 1
Auxiliary CPU board SP90473100IQ 1 1
Room I/O board SP73821300IQ 1 1
Filament board See note ⇒ 4 ⇐ See note
Inverter board See note ⇒ 5 ⇐ See note
Resonant assembly See note ⇒ 6 1
Temperature sensor board (ambient & inverter) SP90153101IQ 1 1
Low/Dual speed starter 2 board (Legacy) SP90313204IQ 7 1
Low/Dual speed starter 2 board (CAN bus) SP90313203IQ 7 1
Dual speed starter subassembly See note ⇒ 8 ⇐ See note
Low speed starter subassembly See note ⇒ 8 ⇐ See note
AEC board See note ⇒ 10 ⇐ See note
Digital I/O board See note ⇒ 11 ⇐ See note
*Battery, lithium 3.0V *customer has to 1 1
supply the battery
Fan assembly, axial, large SP90391500IQ 1 1
Fan assembly, axial, small SP90391600IQ 1 1
Transformer, room power SP73823400IQ 1 1
HV module assembly (complete) See note ⇒ 9 ⇐ See note
Console CPU board SP95034200 N/A 1
Console LCD display SP90793500 N/A 1
REFER TO TABLE 2 FOR FUSES
*Replace with exactly the same part.
®
Page 8-2 Rev. N Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-19
®
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO IQ GENERATOR (Cont)
TABLE 2:
FUSE KIT SP95057900IQ
FUSE KIT BOARD LOCATION DESCRIPTION QTY
SP95057900-00IQ Input Distribution F5, F8, F9 2A, 500V, 6x32mm, Time Delay, Ceramic 3
Board CPI P/N: 6800000500
P/N: 90472800 Mfg. SIBA P/N: 189140-2A
(Refer to Note 2) F6, F7, F11, 2A, 500V, 1-1/2 x 13/32, Time Delay 3
F12 CPI P/N: 5550005300
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: FNQ-2
F10, F15, F16 60A, 480V, 2.25 x .406, TD, Class G 3
CPI P/N: 6713837500
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: SC-60
SP95057900-01IQ Input Distribution F5, F8, F9 2A, 500V, 6 x 32mm, Time Delay, Ceramic 3
Board CPI P/N: 6800000500
P/N: 90472802 Mfg. SIBA P/N: 189140-2A
(Refer to Note 3) F6, F7, F11, 2A, 500V, 1-1/ 2 x 13/32, Time Delay 3
F12 CPI P/N: 5550005300
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: FNQ-2
SP95057900-02IQ Mezzanine Board F9, F10, F11 60A, 600V, Class K-5, One Time 3
P/N: 904133xx CPI P/N: 6800004300
Mfg. MERSEN P/N: OTS60
SP95057900-03IQ Filament Board F1, F2 4A, 250V ,5 x 20mm, Time Delay 3
P/N: 903559xx CPI P/N 5550033100
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: S506-4-R
SP95057900-04IQ Rectifier Board F1 3/10A, 250V ,1/4 x 1-1/4in, Time Delay 3
P/N: 73824901 CPI P/N: 6713533000
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: MDL-3/10R
SP95057900-05IQ RIOB F1 1.6A, 250V, 5 x 20mm, Time Delay 3
P/N: 73821300 CPI P/N: 5550033300
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: S506-1.6-R
F2 1A, 250V, 5 x 20mm,Time Delay, Glass 3
CPI P/N: 5550032900
F3 8A, 250V, 5 x 20mm 3
CPI P/N 5550037500
F4, F5 6.3A, 250V, 5 x 20mm 3
CPI P/N: 5550033400
Mfg. Bussmann P/N: S506-6.3-R
®
®
TABLE 2:
FUSE KIT SP95057900IQ
FUSE KIT BOARD LOCATION DESCRIPTION QTY
SP95057900-06IQ DSS 2 / LSS 2 F1, F2 15A, 1000VDC, 10 x 38mm, Fast Acting 3
P/N: 903132xx CPI P/N 6800004500
Mfg. MERSEN P/N: HP10M15
NOTE:
®
1. This item is used on all Indico IQ X-ray generators.
®
2. This item is used on 50 kW 400 - 480 VAC Indico IQ X-ray generators.
®
3. This item is used on 65 kW 80 kW, and 100 kW 400 - 480 VAC Indico IQ X-ray generators.
®
4. The Indico IQ X-ray generators use Filament PWBA part number SP90543100IQ for both the large
and small focus. The large focus PWBA will have different jumper (JW1 & JW2) settings compared to
the small focus PWBA. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
®
5. Two different inverter PWBA part numbers are used on the Indico IQ X-ray generators. Spares should
be stocked accordingly.
• 50 / 80 kW 400 - 480 VAC generators use part number SP90511111IQ (50 kW qty 2 boards, 80
kW qty 3 boards)
• 65 / 100 kW 400 - 480 VAC generators use part number SP90511110IQ (65 kW qty 2 boards, 100
kW qty 3 boards).
Note that SP73688501IQ can be replaced with SP905111xxIQ (where xx should
correspond to the same power levels as indicated above). However, if this is the case, all
inverter boards should be replaced with the same SP905111xxIQ part number. Mixing
two different inverter board part numbers should be completely avoided as this will result in
a mismatch and possible generator instability or damage.
6. The following resonant assembly part numbers are used on the various 400 – 480 V generators:
• 50 kW generator uses part number SP90665400IQ
• 65 kW generator uses part number SP90665401IQ
• 80 kW & 100 kW generators use part number SP90665402IQ
7. PWBA SP90313204IQ is a replacement for the following LSS 2/DSS 2 PWBA part numbers operating
in Legacy mode:
Note: For Legacy mode operation, switch SW8-1 to SW8-7 are OFF and SW8-8 is ON.
• 90313200
• 90313204
PWBA SP90313203IQ is a replacement for the following LSS 2/DSS 2 PWBA part numbers operating
in CAN bus mode:
• 90313203 (SW8-1 to SW8-3 are OFF and SW8-4 to SW8 are ON for CAN bus).
• 90313204 (SW8-1 to SW8-5 are OFF and SW8-6 to SW8-8 are ON for CAN bus).
®
®
8. The low speed starter 2/dual speed starter 2 subassembly consists of the shift capacitors, wiring, and
mounting plate. The subassembly part number is printed on a label attached to the low speed starter
2/dual speed starter 2 sub-chassis. Spares should be stocked as required.
®
For Indico IQ generators operating in low speed mode, the following low speed starter subassemblies
are used:
SP905135-xxIQ and SP908025-xxIQ, where xx could be tab -41 or -43 for generators using 400-480
VAC line.
®
For Indico IQ generators operating in dual speed mode, the following dual speed starter
subassemblies are used:
SP904925-xxIQ and SP908022-xxIQ, where xx could be tab -21, -23, or -24 for generators using 400-
480 VAC line.
®
9. For Indico IQ X-ray generators, the following HV module part numbers apply. Spares should be
stocked as required.
• Part number SP902607xxIQ for 2-tube HV modules.

Where xx could be: 00 (50 kW), 01 (65 kW), 02 (80 kW), 03 (100kW)
• Part number SP900786xxIQ for 1-tube HV modules.
Where xx could be: 36 (50 kW), 35 (65 kW), 38 (80 kW), 37 (100 kW)
10. The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To
maintain full compatibility with the installed AEC chambers and / or ABS sensor, the correct part number
must be ordered as a replacement. Consult the factory for details.
11. The digital I/O board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific customer-supplied or
CPI-supplied equipment. To maintain full compatibility with the installed equipment, the correct part
number must be ordered as a replacement. Consult the factory for details.
®
8.3.0 SPARE PARTS LIST STARQ™ TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
TABLE 3
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER NOTE SUGGESTED QTY
a
Touchscreen 95041800 1
Medical Grade Power Supply SP7891369300TS 1
95036800 b
Software upgrade – Touchscreen 1
Interconnect cable – RS232 SP90626800IQ 1
Mini Console Extension Cable SP73584003IQ 1
Mini Console SP73598800IQ 1
Power Cord:
c
Europe SP819989350019TS 1
c
UK SP819989310019TS 1
c
China SP819989410019TS 1
c
North America SP819989320019TS 1
d
CPI Wall mount SP2990041200TS 1
NOTE:
a. Contains part numbers 90626800 and 73584003.
b. Order this part if a software upgrade is needed. The software comes in a USB flash drive.
c. Power cord is region specific; when ordering, use the specific part number for that region.
d. The touchscreen can be wall mounted depending on the requirements.
®

N Updated Note 8 with the following changes: Dec. 6, 2019
• Removed LSS2 assembly tabs -42 and -44.
• Removed DSS2 assembly tab -22 and added tab-24.
®
®
CPI Canada Inc.
CHAPTER 9
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX ......................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.0 GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD TEST POINT DIAGRAM ................................................................... 9-3
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-20 Rev. E Page 9-1
9 Schematics
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION
®
This chapter contains the Generator Control board test points and functional schematics for the Indico IQ
X-ray generator. Each functional schematic represents a major function in the generator. The functional
®
schematics in this chapter represent all of the major functional blocks in Indico IQ X-ray generators.
9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX
The following functional schematics are included in this manual.

®
INDICO IQ FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
DESCRIPTION DRAWING NUMBER
System Interconnect Diagram MD-0974
DC Bus and Power Distribution MD-0975
System ON MD-0976
Room Interface MD-0977
Fans, Interlocks, Tube 1 / Tube 2 Select, etc. MD-0978
Prep & X-Ray Exposure MD-0979
kV Control and Feedback MD-0980
Filament Drive and mA Control MD-0981
Dual Speed Starter MD-0983
ADR, Fluoro Select & Power Mode Select MD-0984
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) MD-0985
Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) MD-0986
Digital Interface MD-0987
DAP (Dose Area Product) MD-0988
Serial Communications MD-0989
CAN Bus MD-0990
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
The functional schematics immediately follow the GCB test point pages.
®
Page 9-2 Ch # 902975-20 Rev. E Indico IQ Service Manual
CPI Canada Inc. Schematics 9
9.4.0 GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD TEST POINT DIAGRAM
®
Indico IQ Service Manual Ch # 902975-20 Rev. E Page 9-3
9 Schematics CPI Canada Inc.
9.4.0 GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD TEST POINT DIAGRAM (Cont)
®
Page 9-4 Ch # 902975-20 Rev. E Indico IQ Service Manual
NOTES:
HAZARDOUS AND LETHAL NOT INSTALLED ON 50 kW UNITS, AC MAINS GOES DIRECTLY TO THE IDB BOARD
FANS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE ** EITHER DSS OR LSS BUT NOT BOTH CAN BE INSTALLED DEPENDING ON CUSTOMER REQUIREMENT
903916-00 THE GENERATOR UNIT INV 3 AND FANS 3 & 4 ARE NOT INSTALLED FOR 50 / 65 kW UNITS
*** OPERATOR CONTROL CONSOLE
{
THE LSS/DSS BOARD NO. AND LSS/DSS ASSEMBLY NO. ARE NOT THE SAME. SHIFT CAPACITORS
TO LSS & LSS
TRANSFORMER ** WARNING EVEN IF POWER IS OFF! **** *
DETERMINE THE LSS/DSS ASSEMBLY NUMBERS. SEE CHAP. 2 & 8 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL.
+24VDC
1 3*** 5
c
{
I
I II III
- + - +
mAs mA/ms - +
FOR INV 3 FOR RES

- +
FOR INV 1&2 -
-
+
+ - +
ASSY AUX
2 4*** J9 J24 J21 J23

INTERNAL CANBUS: LVLE INTERNAL CANBUS: LVLE
J12 STARQ Touchscreen
TM
R/F console
J3 POWER: +5VDC, +12VDC, +/-35VDC, +/-24VDC, /ON/OFF, SYNC 904555-00
903915-00 J8
FANS: 7-12VDC Console Connector Brd REMOTE FLUORO
J2 USB
2.0
CAN 2
ETHERNET
COMM 2 DAP 2 MINI CONSOLE
RIOB TRANSFORMER PRIMARY: 400/480VAC
CAN 1 COMM 1 DAP 1 R&F CONSOLE
AC MAINS
400-480VAC { MEZZANINE
BOARD* J22
TUBE SELECT (2 TUBE OPTION): +130VDC/+35 VDC J23
+/-12VDC
J4 J1
26VAC, 18VAC
ROOM I/O
904731-00
ACB
904133-00 J2 XFRMR
TO CONTACTOR COIL: APPROX. 8-24 VDC
+/-35VDC RIOB ROOM
110VAC, 220VAC
INTERNAL CANBUS: 3.3VDC 738234-00
J6 J11 J5 738213-00 POWER
E4 TO ADR TANK +/-24VDC
THERMAL SWITCH: LVLE
J7 RIOB CONTROL: +24V, +15V, +5V
J3 J6 CUSTOMER
E5 J11 A1 EQUIPMENT
ABS INPUT
J1/J6
!
CONSULT THE SERVICE
J1 AMBIENT
MANUAL FOR DEVICES OR
GCB/CPU
400-480VAC
EQUIPMENT THAT CAN

E7 IDB
AC MAINS
J7 TEMP E1 BE ATTACHED HERE.

SENSOR
904728-00 (50 kW) 904498-00/904495-00
{
901531-01 TO CONTACTOR COIL: APPROX. 8-24 VDC 739389-xx
TEMPERATURE SENSORS: +12VDC

904728-02 (65/80/100 kW)
J13 737998-xx
J24 AEC CONTROL: +/-12VDC, +/-24VDC AEC 737992-xx
J5 J25 J10
STATOR
(OPTIONAL) 734654-xx
INV 1
}
+/-12VDC
480VAC
24VDC
TERMINAL SIGNAL INVERTER GATE DRIVE: 734614-xx

BLOCK INV 2 J8
INV3***
120-400 VAC
{
733947-xx
CONT. 733752-xx
CONTACTOR
J1 J2
COIL TO TUBE1 735921-xx
& TUBE 2
J25
DIGITAL I/O CONTROL: +24V, +15V, +5V DIGITAL I/O 903121-xx
RECTIFIER STATOR
(OPTIONAL) 736894-xx
BOARD 738249-01 INV 1 738947-xx
E17
DC BUSS
E16 INVERTER FEEDBACK: LVLE
INV 2
INV3***
J10 } FILAMENT POWER: +/-12VDC, +/-35VDC
738114-xx
902724-xx
E9 E6 E4 E5 E15 J30
TB2 TB3 J4 J5
DC BUSS +
FILAMENT CONTROL: +/-12VDC

560/680VDC
DC BUSS -
E12 DSS** J8
LSS 2/ DSS 2 PWR
J5 J28
903132-03 CAN
PW10-24K-5
E11
903132-04 **** J1 DSS CONTROL & PWR: +12VDC
J2 J29
FILAMENT POWER: +/-12VDC, +/-35VDC
DC BUSS -
- - - --- -
E10
- - - --- -
NTION DANGEROUS
VOLTAGE
560/680VDC FILAMENT CONTROL: +/-12VDC

E9
RESONANCE FEEDBACK: LVLE J26
J20
DC BUSS + LSS**
(OPTIONAL) E6,E7,E8
E14,15 HV UNIT FEEDBACK: LVLE
J22 J2 J1 J2 J1
DSS 2 ASSY:
LSS 2 ASSY:
DC BUSS
905135-xx
908025-xx
904925-xx
908022-xx
CAPS ASSY 901531-01 FILAMENT FILAMENT

(80/100 kW only) TEMP J1
903955-00 (100 kW)
E1 E2
SENSOR E1
BOARD BOARD
903955-01 (80 kW) 905111-xx (INV 1 only)
SHIFT
(Large) (Small)
FILAMENT DRIVE: LVLE
INVERTER CAPACITORS**** J5
J3
J4
ASSEMBLY*** J1 905431-00 905431-00
50 kW (2 INV) -11 HV MODULE T1
80 kW (3 INV) -11 (A-K) J5 J5
1 TUBE: 900786
65 kW (2 INV) -10 J2
100 kW (-37) FROM STATOR
100kW (3 INV) -10 T2
80 kW (-38) (A-K) 2 TUBE: 902607 TERMINAL
BLOCK
E4 E3 65 kW (-35) 100 kW (-03)
50 kW (-36) 80 kW (-02)
E10
65 kW (-01)
+
E9 50 kW (-00) HV Cables -TUBE 1 +
CONT. COIL Lid Ground

CHASSIS Studs (x3)
GROUND CONT. COIL TUBE HOUSING GROUND (should be connected) X-RAY TUBES
INV 3 see compatibility table
906654-xx WHT
-00 (50 kW)
HV Cables - TUBE 2 +
-01 (65 kW) FDBK RESONANCE FEEDBACK: LVLE (OPTIONAL)
+
TO PROTECTIVE -02 (80/100 kW) 1 PER

INVERTER
EARTH GROUND RESONANT BLK
ASSEMBLY DRAWN DATE
WHEN REPLACING PARTS, USE EXACTLY SYSTEM
!
B. ZUEST/J. LAPE 21 FEB 2013
THE SAME TAB NUMBER. TAB -xx VARIES
CHECKED
INTERCONNECT
DEPENDING ON DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT DIAGRAM (Indico IQ TM )
INSTALLED. CHECK YOUR GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION AND SERVICE MANUAL. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0974 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
CONTROL CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS;
ONLY ONE CONSOLE
{ J9 R&F CONSOLE
c
R/F
CONSOLE HAND SWITCH (J13)
TO X-RAY EXPOSURE SWITCH
TO BE USED AT A TIME
J3 MINI CONSOLE
I
MINI CONSOLE
R&F CONSOLE
I II III
- + - +
CONSOLE (J5) TO GENERATOR
CONSOLE CONNECTION
mAs mA/ms - + - +
- +
SERIAL COMM PORT 3 J4 RS232 3 - +
AUX
- +
(RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE)

RS232 (J2)
COMM 3
TO DAP CHAMBER 1
J2 DAP CH1 CCB SERIAL COMM PORT
CPI touchscreen
J1 DAP CH2
TO DAP CHAMBER 2
DAP 1
DAP 2
MEMBRANE CONSOLE CONNECTIONS
J5 RS232 1
SERIAL COMM PORT 1 CPU/GCB
COMM 1
COMM 2
ASSEMBLY
SERIAL COMM PORT 2 J8 RS232 2
USB
2.0
ETHERNET
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
J2 USB
CAN 2
CAN 1
ETHERNET CONNECTION / J1 ETHERNET
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
J7 CANBUS 2
CANBUS PORT 2
CANBUS PORT 1
J6 CANBUS 1 TOUCHSCREEN
CONSOLE ETHERNET (ETH)
TO CONFIGURATION PC
USB HOST (USB A)

INDICO IQ GENERATOR CONNECTIONS USB PORT
USB HOST (USB A)

USB PORT
RS232 (COMM 1) TO GENERATOR

CONSOLE CONNECTION
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE CONNECTIONS

!
REFER TO THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR
EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES THAT CAN BE
CONNECTED TO THESE PORTS.
DRAWN DATE
SYSTEM
B. ZUEST/J. LAPE 21 FEB 2013
CHECKED
INTERCONNECT
DIAGRAM (Indico IQ TM )
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0974 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
E9
PHASES
A
F10
E5
K1
A D7
~ + C10 C12 C14

E8
~
E18 560 / 680 VDC 560 / 680 VDC
3 PHASE F15 E7 B TO DUAL-SPEED DC BUS TO INVERTER
B DS1
E19 STARTER OUT
AC MAINS C11 C13 C15 R51 BOARD(S)
MD-0983 MD-0980 PG 2
~
INPUT F16 DS2
C E4 C E6
L4 L1
- L2
R20 R21 E7
~
R10
DISCRETE
+ 1 3
DC BUS
~
R9 DIODE DISCHARGE
R30
U1 R23 R24
R25
BRIDGE CIRCUIT 1 3
K3 2 4 (Q1, Q7, D9,
~
F11 R11 D1 TO D6 D11, U5, ETC) U4
-
R26
R31
2 4
F12 DS3
E11 / E15 R27
COIL OF K3 R43 R32
R38
R39
R1
R2
SHOWN ON R14
E10 / E14 R29
PAGE 4
1 3
J25-6 J1-6 DS4
E12 / E16 U2 BUZZER
DRIVER CIRCUIT LS1
2 4 (Q2, Q3, R33,
J25-1 J1-1 D10
R34, R35, ETC)
AC MAINS TO
MISC EQUIPMENT. F1
REFER TO SEPARATE 400/480 VAC
SUPPLEMENT IN TO PG 3 RECTIFIER BOARD
THIS MANUAL (IF INTERLOCK
APPLICABLE)
J2-3 J2-2 J2-1 J2-4 J2-7 J2-5
RECTIFIER BOARD
ROOM POWER TRANSFORMER

K2 J10-3 J10-2 J10-1 J10-4 J10-6 J10-5
F7 J21-7 240V 220V
K1 +12V
J21-5 200V 110V 110/220 VAC
WINDINGS
OPTIONAL
COILS OF K1, K2 SHOWN ON PG 4
J21-1 0V 0V
J18-33
26V TO MD-0977
K2 PG 2
J23-7 J18-31
240V
TO J5 AUXILIARY
K1 19V J18-29
J23-5 CPU BOARD (PG 6)
200V
0V J18-32
J16-2
F6 J23-1 0V 19V FROM J4 AUXILIARY
+5V
HOLD
F13 J24-1
R107 +24V +12V
J24-5 MAINS
CONTACTOR
NOT USED AT DS1
THIS TIME PULL
F14 J24-4
J24-8
J5-1
DRIVER CIRCUIT K1
FOR K1 D5
(U10, Q15, Q17,R10, R11, R18,
J5-2
C52, C49, etc.)
(ON RECTIFIER
BOARD)
INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD, 400-480 VAC 3 PHASE (50 KW)
400-480 VAC 3-PHASE 50 KW GENERATOR

DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013 DC BUS & POWER
CHECKED DISTRIBUTION
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 1 OF 8
INPUT FUSE MEZZANINE BOARD E9
PHASES
A
F1
E5
K1
A D7
~ + C10 C12 C14

E10
E8
~
E18 560 / 680 VDC 560 / 680 VDC
3 PHASE AC F2 E7 B DS1 TO DUAL-SPEED DC BUS TO INVERTER
B 100 kW UNITS
R51 E19 STARTER OUT
MAINS INPUT C11 C13 C15 ONLY BOARD(S)
MD-0983 MD-0980 PG 2
~
C F3 DS2 E11
E4 C E6
L4 L1
- L2
E17 / E11
R10
~ DISCRETE
+ 1 3
R20 R21
E7
E19 / E12
R9
~ DIODE
BRIDGE
U1 DC BUS R23 R24
R25
R30
DISCHARGE 1 3
2 4
~
E18 / E10 R11 D1 TO D6 CIRCUIT
- (Q1, Q7, D9, U4
D11, U5 ETC)
R26
DS3 2 4
R31
AC MAINS TO E5 E7 E4 COIL OF K3 R27
MISC EQUIPMENT. SHOWN ON
R38
R39
R14
R1
R2
REFER TO SEPARATE PAGE 4 R43
SUPPLEMENT IN 1 3 R29 R32
THIS MANUAL (IF K3 DS4
F11 J25-6 J1-6
APPLICABLE) U2
BUZZER
2 4 DRIVER CIRCUIT
F12 J25-1 J1-1 (Q2, Q3, R33, LS1
R34, R35, ETC)
D10
F1
RECTIFIER BOARD
INTERLOCK
400/480 VAC
TO PG 3
J2-3 J2-2 J2-1 J2-4 J2-7 J2-5
RECTIFIER BOARD
ROOM POWER TRANSFORMER

K2 J10-3 J10-2 J10-1 J10-4 J10-6 J10-5
F7 J21-7 240V 220V
K1 +12V
J21-5 200V 110V 110/220 VAC
WINDINGS
OPTIONAL
COILS OF K1, K2 SHOWN ON PG 4
J21-1 0V 0V
J18-33
26V TO MD-0977
K2 PG 2
J23-7 J18-31
240V
TO J5 AUXILIARY
K1 19V J18-29
200V
0V J18-32
J16-2
F6 J23-1 0V 19V FROM J4 AUXILIARY
+5V
F13 J24-1 HOLD

R107 +24V +12V
J24-5 MAINS
NOT USED AT CONTACTOR
DS1
F14 J24-4 THIS TIME
PULL
J24-8
J5-1
DRIVER CIRCUIT K1
FOR K1 D5
(U10, Q15, Q17,R10, R11, R18,
J5-2
C52, C49, etc.)
(ON RECTIFIER
BOARD)
INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD, 400-480 VAC 3 PHASE (65, 80 & 100 KW)
400-480 VAC 3-PHASE 65, 80 & 100 KW GENERATORS

DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 2 OF 8
TP4 +12V
+12V
L2A J8-10
D11
L2B J8-20
J8-2
D12
C7
J8-4
J8-5
R47
~
F9 R53
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
+ C27 T1C T1D TP3
J8-6
DISCRETE +24V +24V
Q10
400/480 VAC F8
~ DIODE DS3
R37
FROM PG 1, 2 BRIDGE DC BUS L2C J8-11
INCLUDES Vgate T2
D45-D50 L3 J8-12
~
F5 R50
D13
- T1A
R22
J8-13
C10 TO J23 GENERATOR
T1E CONTROL BOARD
Q5 (PG 7)
F3 Q6 TP2
R33
T3 Q9 +35V
+35V
C14
F1
D26 L2D J8-3
U3 T1F
R30
F2 D27 C6
F4 TP6
-35V
D23
R65 R66 T1G C8
D24 J8-9
TP9 L2E
+24V STANDBY -35V
PS L2F J8-14
R67
D38
D53
~ DISCRETE DIODE
BRIDGE
+
TP1 T1H D25 C11
R70 R71 ~ D33, 36, 40, 41 - 0V RTN TP5

-24V
-24V
J15-2
TP7 T1B J15-1
LINE FREQ
R72
COUNT
D55 J15-7
J15-8
J15-4
R76 R77 U5
J15-5
ZERO-CROSS J15-3
DETECTOR
TO J7 AUXILIARY
R79
J15-9
D58
J15-10
D1 J15-11
J15-15
U1
J15-14
-12V
REGULATOR J15-16
-24V
J8-1
TO J23 GENERATOR
D2 J8-17
CONTROL BOARD
(PG 7)
D4 J16-33
+24V
J16-35
18 VDC @ 400VAC -12V +24VSB TO J4 AUXILIARY
22 VDC @ 480VAC J16-36 CPU BOARD (PG 5)
(With respect to ground) J16-37
TP15 TP16 TP17
PH-V1 PH-V2 PH-V3
J18-5
DRAWN DATE
J18-24 22 MAR 2013
TO J5 AUXILIARY
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE DC BUS & POWER
J18-4 CHECKED
CPU BOARD (PG 6) DISTRIBUTION
J18-2
INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD (400-480 VAC) DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
400-480 VAC GENERATORS Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 3 OF 8
J14 PINS 1 AND 2 SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A
NORMALLY CLOSED (EPO) SWITCH DURING NORMAL
+24VSB +12V
OPERATION. J14 PINS 3 AND 4 CAN PROVIDE POWER
TO THE POWER DISTRIBUTION RELAY OR TO AN J16-30
J14-1
ILLUMINATED SWITCH THAT REQUIRES 24V. +24V
J14-2 J16-32
EMERGENCY POWER- +35V
OFF SWITCH AND POWER J14-3 +24V J16-24
DISTRIBUTION RELAY * IN THE POSITION “ON W/GENERATOR”, 24 VDC, 26 VAC AND J16-7
J14-4 110 / 220 VAC IS ONLY AVAILABLE ON THE ROOM INTERFACE
BOARD WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. IN THE J16-11
POSITION “ON ALWAYS”, 24 VDC, 26 VAC AND 110 / 220 VAC +12V +12VSB +12V
+5V IS AVAILABLE AT ALL TIMES THAT THE GENERATOR IS J16-5
JW2 *1 JW1 ** 1
CONNECTED TO LIVE AC MAINS.
FROM J23-15 GENERATOR J8-15 HIGH CAP 2 -35V
ON W/GENERATOR 2 J16-12
CONTROL BOARD (PG 7) TP14 -24V J16-13
+130V ON ALWAYS 3 LOW CAP 3
+130V
J4-1 BOOST J16-14 TO J4 AUXILIARY
CPU BOARD (PG 5)
FROM J8 AUXILIARY J4-2
CPU BOARD (PG 5) ** JW1 SETS THE DC BUS CHARGING TIME.
J4-3
400-480 V 100 KW UNITS AND 1 PHASE
J4-4 208-230 V UNITS MUST USE THE POSITION J16-34
+12V
“HIGH CAP”, ALL OTHER UNITS MUST USE
THE POSITION “LOW CAP”.
+12VSB J16-29
J18-6 400-480 V GENERATORS CONNECTED

TO + 12V, 208-230 V GENERATORS
CONNECTED TO GROUND
+3.3V
J16-38
J18-28
J18-9
J18-10
FROM J5 AUXILIARY J18-3
CPU BOARD (PG 5) J18-19 TO J5 AUXILIARY
J18-20 J18-8 CPU BOARD (PG 5)
J18-22
J18-37
J18-38
J18-40
FROM J23-16 GENERATOR J8-16

CONTROL BOARD
(MD-0976)
J16-9
K2
D44
J16-10
FROM J4 AUXILIARY
CPU BOARD (PG 5) J16-8
K1 CONTACTS OF K1-K3
D43 SHOWN ON PAGES 1-4
J16-6
+12V
R68
K3
D59 DS5
SOFT
FROM J5 AUXILIARY J18-1 START
CPU BOARD (PG 5)
INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 4 OF 8
+130V J8-1
+12V
J8-2 TO J4 INPUT
* TP19 WILL NORMALLY READ 0V. THIS WILL SWITCH TO +10 V SHOULD ONE J8-3 DISTRIBUTION
OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS FROM THE SWITCHING REGULATOR ON BOARD (PG 4)
R89
U25 PAGES 5 & 6 BE LOST: +12 V, +24 V, +35 V, -24 V, OR -35 V DC. J8-4
D59 Q18 CROWBAR
J7-2 PWM Q8, Q9 +12VSB
REGULATOR
DS17 J5-6
U21 DS16
CURRENT LIMIT CIRCUIT D28 +24VSB +12V +24V +35V -24V -35V
INCLUDES Q17, Q18, U26 +3.3V
D58 U6
J5-28
+12V
J7-1 TP19
UNDER J5-9
J7-14
+12 V OVER- VOLTAGE +10V
DETECT J5-10
J7-15 U12 VOLTAGE
DETECT TO J18 INPUT
UNDER-VOLTAGE DETECTION J5-19
J7-3 +24VSB Q3 DISTRIBUTION
FROM J15 INPUT CIRCUIT FOR +12V, +24V, +35V, BOARD (PG 4)
C17 J5-20
DISTRIBUTION J7-6 U3 D26 -24V, AND -35V SUPPLIES
BOARD (PG 3 ) J5-22
J7-9 DS15
J5-37
J7-10
+12V +24V J5-38
J7-11
U4
J5-40
J7-7
J7-8 DC BUS READY +24VSB
J7-4 LOGIC
U7
Q1
J7-5
R17
R14
COMPARATOR / LOGIC
J7-16 “OR” / RELAY Q16
DRIVER CIRCUITS
(U14, 16, 17, 19, 22, J4-8
Q13-Q16, ETC) J4-6
D7 Q14
J4-34
J4-38 Q15 TO J16 INPUT
DISTRIBUTION
R194
BOARD (PG 4)
J4-29
Q13 J4-9
AUXILIARY CPU
J4-32 BOARD INTERLOCK R165 J4-10
R149
R164
TP21
+12V +12V
+24V
FROM J16 INPUT J4-30 +12V TP27
DISTRIBUTION U5 +3.3V
+35V U27 MAINS CON
BOARD (PG 4) J4-24 R23 TP16 +3.3V PULL IN
+5V +5VSB
J4-7 +3V3 (SEE NOTE) J4-3
U1 REGULATOR 1 Hz
R16
R15 +3.3V pulses
J4-11 +12V +12V
R171
REGULATOR TP18
J4-5 HEARTBEAT +12V
R12
R13
J4-12 DS1
-35V HEART
+3.3V Q7 TO J16 INPUT
J4-13 +35V
-24V +24VSB +12VSB BEAT DS13 DS14 DISTRIBUTION
J4-14 TP17 TP20 TP22 TP30 BOARD (PG 1-2)
R86
R46
GND GND GND MAIN SS
R55
+12V SWITCHING MICRO
REGULATOR U10 CON REL
CONTROLLER HLD
(U13, L1, D31, ETC) R47
R56
R169 J4-2
+24VSB TP23
R44, 45, 193

BOOST DR +12V
DRIVER
J4-33 +35 +130V
TO J18 INPUT
R57
FROM J16 INPUT J4-35 J5-1
+130V SWITCHING DISTRIBUTION
DISTRIBUTION J4-36 REGULATOR BOARD (PG 4)
BOARD (PG 3) (U9, Q5, L2, D18, 30,
J4-37 D36, ETC) -35V NOTE: TP27 WILL NORMALLY BE HIGH +12V. IT WILL PULSE LOW FOR
APPROXIMATELY 100 MS IN ORDER TO BRIEFLY TURN ON Q7 (AUXILIARY
J5-8 CPU BOARD) & Q3 ON THE I/P DISTRIBUTION BOARD WHEN THE MAIN
FROM J18 INPUT CONTACTOR IS TO CLOSE.
DISTRIBUTION J5-3 R26
BOARD (PG 4)
AUXILIARY CPU BOARD
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 5 OF 8
+3.3V
+3.3V
R4
DS5
RECT U5
R30
ITLK
U2
J5-33
DRIVER
R58
R59
J5-32
FROM J18 INPUT TP29 2V @ 680 VDC BUS (480 VAC MAINS)
DISTRIBUTION DC BUS SENSE 1.6V @ 560 VDC BUS (400 VAC MAINS)
BOARD (PG 1-2) R117 0.95V @ 320 VDC BUS (230 VAC MAINS)
J5-31 R140
R126
R127
R147
+
R141 U20B
J5-29
R137
R108
- R79
J5-24 R182 R87
+
U11A MICRO CAN DATA LINK

CONTROLLER REFER TO
R94 MD-0990
- R83
J5-4 R166 R88
+
U11B
FROM J18 INPUT R95
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD (PG 3) - R138
J5-2 R150 R142
+
U20A
TP31 R148
-12V
J5-5
-12V
AUXILIARY CPU BOARD
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 6 OF 8
TP48
+12V +12V
J23-10
+5V TP49 +3.3V TP28 +5V
J23-20 +5V +3.3V
TP11 -12V J23-15 TO J8-15 INPUT
U143 DISTRIBUTION
+35V BOARD (PG 4)
-12V
TP46 +24VSB
J23-3 +24V REGULATOR
TP2 -15V_RIOB J32-80 J32-75 J32-76 J32-77 J32-78 J32-71 J32-72 J32-29 J32-19 J31-19
U159
DC-DC CONVERTER
J23-11 -15V +35V
TP6 +35V
J23-12 (U13, L19,D17,ETC) REGULATOR J14-80 J14-75 J14-76 J14-77 J14-78 J14-71 J14-72 J14-29 J14-19 J11-19
R634 D153 TP45 +12V J29-1 J1-1 F2
J23-13 -15VA +12V
U93 J29-3 J1-4
TO
-15V INTERNAL
DS5 +5V +5V +2.5V
REGULATOR CIRCUITS J29-6 J1-3
+24V U12
TP44 +15VA +5V SWITCHING
+2.5V
R273
R637 U87 REGULATOR J29-4 J1-2 F1

J32-69 J14-69 REGULATOR -12V
Q7 +15V -12V
FROM J8 INPUT (U14, Q1,Q4, L3, ETC)
DC-DC CONVERTER J29-2 J1-5
DISTRIBUTION REGULATOR TP7 -35V
R274
BOARD (PG 3) (U160, L5, D18, ETC) TP4 +15V_RIOB +3.0V -35V TP2
-12V +5V J29-5 J1-6
R254 D174 U42 +3.3V U2
+15V +3.0V
+3.3V SWITCHING REGULATOR FILAMENT BOARD
REGULATOR
+12V REGULATOR
+5V +1.2V
(U13, Q2, Q3, L4, ETC)
TP12 +15V_DAP U40
+1.2V +35V
REGULATOR TP6 +35V
+1.0V +1.2V_PHY
+5V +3.3V
DC-DC CONVERTER U11 U34 +12V J30-1 J1-1 F2 +12V
(U21, L18, D145, ETC) +1.0V +1.2V
R635 D154 J30-3 J1-4
REGULATOR REGULATOR
J23-14
J30-6 J1-3
J23-9
+5V +1.8V J30-4 J1-2 F1

-24V
U39 -12V
-12V
-35V +1.8V +5V J30-2 J1-5
REGULATOR TP7 -35V
TP6 TP9 TP15 TP26 TP41 -35V TP2
GND GND GND GND GND J30-5 J1-6
U95 Q9
J23-2 5V - 3.3V
R261 R549 J32-20 J14-20
J23-4 FILAMENT BOARD
TO FPGA U53
J23-5
J23-6 +24V +15V_A +15V_DAP +12V
DS19
PNG
R151
R135
R137
R122
+12V_ISOL
+5V_ISOL +12V_ISOL
+12V
R123
12V TO +/-12V
R152
R136
R138
TP47 CONVERTER
+24VSB U50 U26 +5V_ISOL,
+24VSB
+12V_ISOL &
-12V_ISOL DS14
J23-17
R124
-12V_ISOL DETECTOR
J23-1 CIRCUIT ISOL PG
A/D J31-46 J11-46

TO FPGA U53 TP9 +5V +5V
CONVERTER +3.3V
TP GND -12V_ISOL +15V_RIOB
+24V J3-11 J6-11 +24V_INT
Vref J3-13 J6-13
+5V_ISOL
+12V J3-17 J6-17
12V TO +5V DS16 J3-15 J6-15
HEARTBEAT
R156
R154
CONVERTER
R139
J31-2 J11-2
- J3-9 J6-9
B1 U68
+ FROM J3-21 J6-21
Q5
CPU -15V_RIOB
U57 J3-23 J6-23
R153
R155
R140
CPU BOARD
ROOM I/O BOARD
R141
-15V_A -12V
DRAWN DATE
-24V
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. SHEET 7 OF 8
+5V
+3.3V
TP8
+24V TP7 +1.2V
J4-2 J13-2 J9-13 J5-13 + 5V, + 3.3V, +1.2V TP12
AND - 15V
J4-20 J13-20 J9-15 J5-15 F1 POWER SUPPLY TP2
F1
CIRCUITS
(U9, U10, U11,
D1-D6, L1, ETC.)
J4-10 J13-10 J9-14 J5-14
TP11 TP10
J4-11 J13-11
-15V R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE
+5V
300 VAC J10-1

BACKLIGHT FLUORESCENT LAMP
POWER SUPPLY J10-4
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD CONSOLE CONNECTOR BOARD (Q2, Q3, T1,
C61, ETC.)
CONSOLE BOARD (R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE) LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE
STARQ
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
19 VDC
STARQTM
USE WITH SUPPLIED
IEC 60601
APPROVED
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
AC ADAPTOR ONLY
POWER
SUPPLY
100-240VAC
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
DRAWN DATE
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0975 REV F
SHEET 8 OF 8
X-RAY MINI-CONSOLE
+12V
+24VSB
J1-1 J3-1 J13-3 J4-3 F2 JW26
DS4 1
J1-2 J3-2
R4
2 NORMAL
J1-10 J3-10 3 LOCKOUT
J1-9 J3-9
OFF Q38
ON J1-5 J3-5 J13-10 J4-10
J1-13 J3-13 J13-11 J4-11
R536
Q37
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
S1 +12V +12V D14
D13
OFF
J13-4 J4-4
S2
ON Q40
J23-16 TO J8-16 INPUT DISTRIBUTION
BOARD (MD-0975, SHT 4)
D74
Q36
Q39
J13-5 J4-5
D118
J32-79 J14-79
R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE

FAULT LATCH
J3-3 J5-10 J9-10 DS17
D7, Q6, Q7, Q8 ETC
POWER
OFF
ON J3-2 J5-11 J9-11
OFF
J3-1 J5-12 J9-12 FROM
CPU
CONSOLE
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY BOARD
CONSOLE CONNECTOR BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD CPU BOARD
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0975, IN

CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
R&F CONSOLE AND MINI CONSOLE

DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013
CHECKED SYSTEM ON
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0976 REV C
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. L. FOSKIN
SHEET 1 OF 2
X-RAY MINI-CONSOLE
+12V
+24VSB
J1-1 J3-1 J13-3 J4-3 F2 JW26
DS4 1
J1-2 J3-2
R4
2 NORMAL
J1-10 J3-10 3 LOCKOUT
J1-9 J3-9
OFF Q38
ON J1-5 J3-5 J13-10 J4-10
J1-13 J3-13 J13-11 J4-11
R536
Q37
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
S1 +12V +12V D14
D13
OFF
J13-4 J4-4
S2
ON Q40
J23-16 TO J8-16 INPUT DISTRIBUTION
BOARD (MD-0975, SHT 4)
D74
Q36
Q39
J13-5 J4-5
D118
STARQTM TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE

J32-79 J14-79
*USE MINI-CONSOLE TO TURN ON
GENERATOR
(SEE CHAPTER 3-OPERATOR’S MANUAL FAULT LATCH

DS17
AND CHAPTER 2-SERVICE MANUAL D7, Q6, Q7, Q8 ETC
FOR MORE INFORMATION) POWER
OFF
100-240 VAC
FROM
ON * CPU
(CONSOLE ONLY) *USE ONLY
APPROVED
AC ADAPTOR
INCLUDED WITH
THE CONSOLE
CONSOLE CONNECTOR BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD CPU BOARD
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0975, IN

CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE DRAWN DATE

CHECKED SYSTEM ON
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0976 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
+24V
TB10-1 JW53
+24V +3.3 V max. (proportional
TP5 to S.I.D. input)
CURRENT 1 2
SOURCE TP14
S.I.D. TB10-2 Q2, U7, Q1 ISOLATION & J6-20 J3-20 RM I/O BRD ABS
INPUT ETC. CONVERSION CIRCUIT: S.I.D.
+ TO MD-0986
(0 TO 1000 INPUT RESISTANCE TO
TB10-3 +24V VOLTAGE OUTPUT +3.3V
OHMS) R227 GAIN
NOTE * ADJUSTMENT
- +3.3V
R39
INCLUDES U6,
R24
JW15 +3.3V
R183
4 3 2 1 U8A, U13A, ETC.
R25
D9 U65
R229
1 4
TB10-4
R23 U11
INPUT 10 DS30
R22 U31 R38 HEARTBEAT
II SAFETY* TB10-5 2 3 +24V
R118 NOTE * DATA

BUFFER
4 3 2 1 JW44
TB10-6 R145
INPUT 9 +3.3V
ROOM DOOR CAN DATA LINK
TB10-7 R21 R30 U29
INTERLOCK* 1 4 MICRO REFER TO
CONTROLLER MD-0990
+24V U10 DATA
NOTE * BUFFER
2 3
+5V
4 3 2 1 JW14 +3.3V R103
J31-30 J11-30
R214 TO FPGA U53
TB10-8
1 4
INPUT 8 U80
R20 U9
COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK* TB10-9 R19 U30 AMBIENT
2 3 +24V C72 TEMP.
R117 NOTE * DATA SENSOR
BUFFER
R13
4 3 2 1 JW29 +3.3V
CPU BOARD
TB13-1
1 4
INPUT 13
R68 U28
REMOTE TOMO
SELECT* TB13-2 R67 2 3
+3.3V
R97
+24V
+3.3V
R584
NOTE *
+5V +5V
JW28 1 4 +3.3V
4 3 2 1 DS12
TP6 U33 TP7
U27
R13
TB13-3 +3.3V ROOM I/O
2 3 +24V
INPUT 7 REGULATOR BOARD
R66 NOTE *
MULT. SPOT ROOM INPUTS
SYNC
EXPOSURE* TB13-4 R65
4 3 2 1 JW27 +3.3V FROM PAGE 2
R96 U74
TB13-5
TP1 TP4 TP8 TP9 5V - 3.3V
1 4
R64
ROOM INPUTS R551
INPUT 11 U26 FROM PAGE 3
TB13-6 R63 2 3
R95
+24V
+3.3V +5V U4
NOTE *
1 4 R216
4 3 2 1 JW26
R194
U25
TB13-7
2 3 Q4 J6-22 J3-22
R62 Q9
INPUT 12
TB13-8 R61
R94
1 5
TB13-9 C74
R215
SYNC U24
R60
INPUT TB13-10 R59
3 4
ROOM I/O BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
*DEFAULT
SETTINGS
REFER TO “ROOM DOOR INTERLOCKS” ON SHEET 3
FOR DOOR INTERLOCK CONFIGURATION OPTIONS.
* * FOR THE JUMPERS ASSOCIATED WITH INPUTS ON THE ROOM I/O BOARD
(JW14, 15, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44: DRAWN DATE
INDICATED;THESE 1 1 G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 ROOM
INPUTS &/OR
OUTPUTS ARE
NOTE: SHORTING JUMPERS SHORTING JUMPERS LIVE POSITION: CHECKED INTERFACE
INSTALLER IN “LIVE” POSITION IN “DRY” POSITION JUMPERS CONNECT THE INPUT TO AN INTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE. AN EXTERNAL
PROGRAMMABLE IF THE OPTICALLY-COUPLED INPUTS ON SHEETS 1-3 ARE USED IN THE “DRY” CONTACT CONTACT CLOSURE WILL ENERGIZE THE OPTO-COUPLERS ON THE ROOM I/O BOARD.
POSITION, ENSURE THAT THE VOLTAGE ON EITHER SIDE OF THE JUMPER BLOCK DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0977 REV B
PINS (2 or 3) TO THE GENERATOR GROUND DOES NOT EXCEED 48 VOLTS. DRY POSITION: L. FOSKIN
A JUMPER CONNECTS THE OPTO-COUPLER BACK TO THE INPUT. AN EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE ENERGIZES
THE OPTO-COUPLER (24 VDC @ 20 mA). SEE NOTE AT LEFT RE GROUNDING THE EXTERNAL SUPPLY. SHEET 1 OF 8
*SETTINGS
DEFAULT
+24V
INDICATED;THESE +3.3V
NOTE *
INPUTS &/OR
OUTPUTS ARE
INSTALLER 4 3 2 1 JW34 1 4
PROGRAMMABLE
U22
TB14-3
2 3
FLUORO R78 U31
TIMER RESET TB14-4 R77 DATA
R116 BUFFER
+24V
TB14-5 +3.3V
NOTE *
X-RAY 1 4
4 3 2 1 JW33
DISABLE TB14-6
U21
2 3
+24V
+3.3V R76
NOTE *
R75
1 4 R115
4 3 2 1 JW32
U16
TB14-7
2 3
INPUT 14 R74 U30
MAG MODE
TB14-8 R73
INPUT 1* R112 DATA
BUFFER
+24V
TB14-9 +3.3V
NOTE *
INPUT 15
MAG MODE 4 3 2 1 JW31 1 4
TB14-10 U32
INPUT 2* U15
2 3
+24V
+3.3V R72 DATA
NOTE *
R71 BUFFER
1 4 R111
4 3 2 1 JW30
U20
TB14-11
2 3
INPUT 16 R70
MAG MODE
TB14-12 R69
INPUT 3* R110
+3.3V ROOM INPUTS

DS3
R5 220VAC TO PAGE 1
1 5
U2 DS2 +3.3V
ROOM POWER D2 R4 110VAC
2 4
TRANSFORMER 220 VAC 110 VAC 26 VAC 1 5
FROM MD-0975
PG 1 - PG 4 U1
220V J1-1 F2 R124 D1
2 4
110V J1-3 F1
R123
0V J2-2 F3
26V J2-3 +3.3V

DS6 +3.3V
R12 DS5
26VAC R9 18VAC
19V F4 +24V 1 4 19 VAC (2)
TP3 +3.3V 1 4
DS4
J2-4 U5 R7
0V 18VAC U4
D5 19 VAC (1)
D6 2 3 1 4 D4
2 3
19V J2-6 F5 R13 U3 R8
R3
C1
D3
J2-1 R122 2 3
19 VAC (1) R121
DS1 R6
J2-5 TP2 19 VAC (2) +24VDC R120
ROOM I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 ROOM
NOTE:
CHECKED INTERFACE
IF THE OPTICALLY-COUPLED INPUTS ON SHEETS 1-3 ARE USED IN THE “DRY” CONTACT
PINS (2 or 3) TO THE GENERATOR GROUND DOES NOT EXCEED 48 VOLTS. L. FOSKIN
SHEET 2 OF 8
ROOM DOOR INTERLOCKS
Configuration A
Inhibits new exposures if the room
door is open. Does not interrupt
exposures in process when the
door is opened.
+24V
TB15-1 +3.3V
NOTE * DOOR INTERLOCK
INPUT 1 SWITCH
BUCKY 1 4 3 2 1 JW43 1 4
TB15-2 ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK
CONTACTS* U36
INPUT (DEFAULT TB10-6, 7)
2 3 U30
+24V
+3.3V R144
NOTE * DATA
R143 FLUORO FOOT
BUFFER
1 4 R113 SWITCH
4 3 2 1 JW42
U43 (R&F UNITS REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE
TB15-3
2 3 ONLY) INPUT (DEFAULT TB16-3, 10)
INPUT 3 R142
BUCKY 2
TB15-4 R141
CONTACTS* R104
+24V ROOM I/O BOARD

TB15-5 +3.3V
NOTE * U29
INPUT 2
BUCKY 3 4 3 2 1 JW41 1 4
TB15-6
CONTACTS* U35
DATA
2 3 BUFFER
+24V
+3.3V R140
NOTE *
R139
R108 Configuration B
4 3 2 1 JW40 1 4
Inhibits new exposures if the room
U42 door is open. Stops fluoro exposures
TB15-7 ROOM INPUTS
2 3 if the room door is opened
INPUT 5 R138 TO PAGE 1
during a fluoro exposure.
BUCKY 4
TB15-8 R137
CONTACTS* R107
+24V DOOR INTERLOCK

TB15-9 +3.3V SWITCH
NOTE *
1 4 ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK

INPUT 4 4 3 2 1 JW39
TB15-10 INPUT (DEFAULT TB10-6, 7)
U34
2 3
+24V
+3.3V R136
NOTE * DOOR INTERLOCK
R135 SWITCH
1 4 R106
4 3 2 1 JW38
U41 REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE
TB15-11 INPUT (DEFAULT TB16-3, 10)
2 3
R134 FLUORO FOOT
INPUT 6 SWITCH
TB15-12 R133
R105
ROOM I/O BOARD
NOTE: For this configuration, the room door interlock switch

must be a double-pole type (one pole for the room door
interlock, with the second pole in series with the fluoro
foot switch).
*SETTINGS
DEFAULT
INDICATED;THESE
INPUTS &/OR
OUTPUTS ARE ROOM I/O BOARD
INSTALLER
PROGRAMMABLE
DRAWN DATE
NOTE:
CHECKED INTERFACE
IF THE OPTICALLY-COUPLED INPUTS ON SHEETS 1-3 ARE USED IN THE “DRY” CONTACT
PINS (2 or 3) TO THE GENERATOR GROUND DOES NOT EXCEED 48 VOLTS. L. FOSKIN
SHEET 3 OF 8
REFER TO MD-0975, SHEET 9, FOR
THE +24V INT SOURCE
C9
TB8-2
+24V INT
R17 JW9 OUTPUT 7
TB20 K4 TB8-1 BUCKY 1
K4
1 SELECT*
2
C8
3 TB8-4
K1 K5 R16 JW8 OUTPUT 3
JW4 JP10
R160
JP11 JP12
4 K3 TB8-3 BUCKY 2
5 DRY * LIVE *
SELECT*
DS18
OUT 1 6
U65 U69
JW3 JP9
JP7 JP8
TB7
DRY * LIVE *
1
K2 K3
C7
R158
2
TB8-7
K3 3
R15 JW7 OUTPUT 4
R156
K2 K2 TB8-6 BUCKY 3
DS28
OUT 4 4 SELECT*
DS24 5
OUT 3 K1 C6
6 TB8-10
JW2 R14 JW6 OUTPUT 1
JP4 JP5 JP6
K1 TB8-9 BUCKY 4 /
DRY * LIVE * TOMO SELECT*
K4 220 VAC
R153
K5 TB4
JW1 JP1
R154
DRIVER JP2 JP3
DS16
OUT 7 DRY * LIVE *
DS23
OUT 2 C4
TB9-10
R11 JW11 OUTPUT 2
CAN DATA LINK
REFER TO MICRO K5 TB9-9 BUCKY /
MD-0990 CONTROLLER TOMO START*
K6 TB9-6
C10
R165
K7
OUTPUT 5
R28
110 VAC JW5 K6 TB9-5
R157
JP13 JP14 JP15 C5 ROOM LIGHT*
DS25 JW12
OUT 5 TB3 R10 JW10
DRY * LIVE *
DS22 TB9-3
OUT 6 K7
NOTE THE FOLLOWING IF USING JW1, JW2,

JW3, JW4, OR JW5 IN THE LIVE CONTACT TB9-1 OUTPUT 6
POSITION:
TB9-2
K8 A JUMPER WIRE MUST BE CONNECTED TO
R166
TB20 PINS 1, 3 AND TB7 PINS, 1, 3, & 5 FROM TB2,

TB3, OR TB4 IN ORDER TO SUPPLY +24V, TB10-12
R167 K11 C11
DS13 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC AT THE SELECTED OUTPUT OUTPUT 11
OUT 11 R18 JW13 K8 COLLIMATOR
U70 TB10-11
BYPASS*
DS12
OUT 8
DRIVER +24V
C24 R58 JW22
TB2 TB6
TB11-2
ADDRESS / DATA BUS

FROM PAGE 8 TB11-3
K11 OUTPUT 8
+24V
TB11-1
JW23 1 2 3 4
C30
DRY ** R131 JW37 *SETTINGS
DEFAULT
LIVE 24 VDC ** INDICATED;THESE

INPUTS &/OR
ROOM I/O BOARD OUTPUTS ARE
INSTALLER
PROGRAMMABLE
FOR THE JUMPERS ASSOCIATED WITH OUTPUTS ON THE ROOM I/O BOARD
* * (JW1 TO JW5, JW19, 21, 23. 24):
DRAWN DATE
1 1 G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 ROOM
LIVE POSITION:
SHORTING JUMPERS SHORTING JUMPER JW1 to JW5: 24 VDC, 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC WILL BE OUTPUT WHEN THE CORRESPONDING RELAY CLOSES
CHECKED INTERFACE
IN “LIVE” POSITION IN “DRY” POSITION JW19, 21, 23, 24: 24 VDC WILL BE OUTPUT WHEN THE CORRESPONDING RELAY CLOSES
SHORTING JUMPER SHORTING JUMPER (JW19, 21, 23, 24) (JW19, 21, 23, 24) DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0977 REV B
IN “LIVE” CONTACT IN “DRY” CONTACT DRY POSITION:
POSITION (JW1 to JW5) POSITION (JW1 to JW5) A DRY CONTACT CLOSURE WILL BE PROVIDED WHEN THE RELAY ASSOCIATED L. FOSKIN
WITH THE SELECTED OUTPUT CLOSES SHEET 4 OF 8
*SETTINGS
DEFAULT
+24V INT REFER TO MD-0975 FOR C23 R57 JW20 INDICATED;THESE
THE +24V INT SOURCE INPUTS &/OR
TB11-7 OUTPUTS ARE
INSTALLER
PROGRAMMABLE
K9 TB11-8
R155
K10 OUTPUT 9
+24V
DS21 TB11-6
OUT 10
U65 U70 JW21 1 2 3 4
C29
C22 R56 JW18 DRY ** JW36
R130
LIVE 24 VDC **
K10 TB11-11
R161
K12
R162
TB11-12
DS20 K9 OUTPUT 10
OUT 9 +24V
DS29
TB11-10
OUT 14
DRIVER JW19 1 2 3 4 TB12-3 OUTPUT 16 (COMM)

C28
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
DRY ** R129 JW35 K15 TB12-1
OUTPUT 16 (TUBE 1)
K13 LIVE 24 VDC **
R163
TB12-2
K14 OUTPUT 16 (TUBE 2)
R164
DS14 TB12-7
OUT 13
CAN DATA LINK K14 OUTPUT 12
MICRO DS17
REFER TO
CONTROLLER OUT 12 TB12-6 MAG MODE 1*
MD-0990
TB12-9
K13 OUTPUT 13
TB12-8 MAG MODE 2*
K15
R159
TB12-11
DS27 OUTPUT 14
K16 K12
OUT 16 TB12-10 MAG MODE 3*
K16 +24V
TB12-12
R168
+24V INT
R152
Q3
JW24 1 2 3 4
R86
D22 D35 TB13-11
DS19
OUT 15 DRY ** X-RAY ON
U69 1 4 TB13-12
LIVE 24 VDC **
U61
DRIVER TB14-1
2 3
Q5 ALE
U70 TB14-2 OUT
R87
DRIVER
D26 D36
110 VAC
TB5-1
HV ON TB5-2
J3-19 J6-19
FROM MD-0980 110 VAC OUT
TB5-3
PG 1 MAX LOAD 1.5A
TB5-4
TP1 TP4 TP8 TP9

220 VAC
TB1-1
TB1-2
220 VAC OUT
TB1-3
MAX LOAD 1A
TB1-4
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD ROOM I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0977 REV B
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 5 OF 8
*SETTINGS
DEFAULT +24V +24V
INDICATED;THESE
INPUTS &/OR 1 4 1 4
OUTPUTS ARE 1 4 LIH Circuit
INSTALLER U62 (U59, C68, U63
A
PROGRAMMABLE U57 U68 U18 R205-207)
2 3 2 3
2 3 DATA
DRIVER D41 to D47
LATCH
D40
+3.3V
D39 D49 D50 D51 D48 D53 D52 D38
TO A,
SHEETS
R176
U14 6&7
JW45 JW48 JW49 JW50 JW47 JW52 JW51 JW46
DATA
BUFFER
1 4
U38
2 3 EXP EN
1 4 TO B, TO C, TO D, FROM
A SHEET 7 SHEET 7 SHEET 7 SHEET 7
U53 U68 U18
DS8 2 3 DATA
HS_IN7 DRIVER
LATCH
+3.3V
R88
J6-14 J3-14 EXPOSURE ENABLE

TO MD-0979
R177
PAGE 1
R109
U14
TB16-7 DATA
BUFFER
HS INPUT 1 4
7
U39
1 4
R114 R89 2 3
HS INPUT 6 TB16-6 A
U47 U68 U18
TOMO EXPOSURE* DS9 U44
2 3 DATA J6-3 J3-3 R19 J31-11 J11-11
HS_IN6 DRIVER
LATCH R18
J6-4 J3-4 J31-41 J11-41
+3.3V
J6-5 J3-5 R17 DATA J31-12 J11-12
TB16-9
R16 BUFFER
J6-6 J3-6 J31-42 J11-42
R175
TB16-10
U14 R15
J6-7 J3-7 J31-13 J11-13
DATA
BUFFER
1 4
U52
2 3 DATA & CONTROL
1 4 BUS
HS INPUT 4 TB16-4 R91 R102 A
U58 U68 U18
PULSED FLUORO SEL* DS11
HS_IN4 2 3 DATA
DRIVER
LATCH
+3.3V
R173
U14
DATA
BUFFER
1 4
U54
2 3 1 4
TB16-3 R119 R100 A
HS INPUT 3 U40 U68 U18
REMOTE FLUORO EXP* DS7
HS_IN3 2 3 DATA
DRIVER
LATCH
+3.3V
R174
U14
DATA
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD CPU BOARD
BUFFER
1 4 Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document.
U51
2 3 DRAWN DATE
TB16-5 R90 R101 G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 ROOM
HS INPUT 5
HI-LEVEL FLUORO SEL* DS10
CHECKED INTERFACE
HS_IN5
L. FOSKIN
ROOM I/O BOARD SHEET 6 OF 8
*SETTINGS
DEFAULT
INDICATED;THESE
INPUTS &/OR
OUTPUTS ARE
INSTALLER
PROGRAMMABLE
B, FROM
SHEET 6
1 4
A, FROM
U74 SHEET 6 EXP EN
U68 U18
TO SHEET 6
2 3 DATA
DRIVER
LATCH
+3.3V
R199
U14
DATA
BUFFER
1 4 C, FROM
SHEET 6
U77
2 3 1 4
TB16-1 R201 R200 A, FROM
HS INPUT 1 U75 SHEET 6 U68 U18
REMOTE PREP* DS32
HS_IN1 2 3 DATA
DRIVER
LATCH
+3.3V
TB16-11
R202
TB16-12
U14
DATA
BUFFER
1 4 D, FROM
SHEET 6
U78
2 3 1 4
HS INPUT 2 TB16-2 R204 R203 A, FROM
U73 SHEET 6 U68 U18
REMOTE EXP (RAD)* DS33 U44
HS_IN2 2 3 DATA J6-1 J3-1 R21 J31-10 J11-10
DRIVER
LATCH R20
J6-2 J3-2 DATA J31-40 J11-40
+3.3V BUFFER
J6-8 J3-8 R19 J31-43 J11-43
R196
U14
DATA
BUFFER DATA & CONTROL
1 4 BUS
U76
2 3
HS INPUT TB16-8 R198 R197
8 DS31
HS_IN8
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
L. FOSKIN
ROOM I/O BOARD SHEET 7 OF 8
U36
J14-133 J21-133 DATA R9 J3-25 J6-25 +5V

FROM FPGA
BUFFER
U53
3.3V - 5V
ADDRESS / DATA BUS

TO PAGE 4
Q6
+3.3V +3.3V J8
+12V +12V
EXP SOUND
R126
R148
EXPOSURE OUT
Q7 SOUND
OUTPUT
1 4 1 4
U44 U55
2 3 2 3
+24V
TB17-9
+24V +24 V
TB17-10
+3.3V +3.3V U67 +24 V
+12V +12V TB17-1
HS OUT 1
R125
R127
TB17-2
HS OUT 2
TB17-3
1 4 1 4 HS OUT 3
TB17-4
U49 U50 HS OUT 4
DRIVER TB17-5
2 3 2 3 HS OUT 5
TB17-6
HS OUT 6
TB17-7
HS OUT 7
TB17-8
HS OUT 8
TB17-11
+3.3V +3.3V FW DIODE
+12V +12V TB17-12
GND
R149
R128
U44 U19
J11-10 J31-10 R21 J3-1 J6-1
NOTE: HS OUTPUT
J11-40 J31-40 R20 J3-2 J6-2 ASSIGNMENTS
1 4 1 4 ARE INSTALLER
J11-11 J31-11 R19 J3-3 J6-3 PROGRAMMABLE
U56 U48
J11-41 J31-41 R18 J3-4 J6-4
DATA 2 3 2 3 26 VAC
BUFFER DATA
J11-12 J31-12 R17 J3-5 J6-5
3.3V - 5V LATCH TB18-1
J11-42 J31-42 R16 J3-6 J6-6 COLLIMATOR
TB18-2
R15 LAMP 6.7A
J11-13 J31-13 J3-7 J6-7
TB18-3
J11-43 J31-43 R14 J3-8 J6-8
TB18-4 GROUND
+3.3V +3.3V
+12V +12V
DATA & CONTROL
R132
R147
BUS
+24V
1 4 1 4
TB19-1
U45 U46 ELECTRIC
TB19-2
2 3 2 3 LOCKS 4A
TP8 TP9 TB19-3
TB19-4 GROUND
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD ROOM I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 8 OF 8
+12V
THERMAL SENSOR BOARD
R173
(LOCATED ON INVERTER HEAT SINK)
R162
J1-3 J7-1 J16-16 J4-16
- R168
TEMP J1-2 J7-2 J16-18 J4-18 R196 R207
+
SENSOR
U31A
J7-3
R163
J1-1 +12V C97
U5
R174
R213
J7-4 J16-19 J4-19 R88
- R212 MICRO CAN DATA LINK
J7-5 J16-20 J4-20 R197 R208 REFER TO
+ CONTROLLER
MD-0990
U31B
J7-6
R211
+12V C99
R153
R198
J16-21 J4-21
- R206
J1-3 J7-7 J16-22 J4-22 R200 R199
+
J1-2 J7-8 U32A

TEMP
R209
C94
SENSOR
J1-1 J7-9
THERMAL SENSOR BOARD

(LOCATED TO THE RIGHT OF THE INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD AUXILIARY CPU BOARD
IDB MOUNTED ON THE CHASSIS)
INVERTER / AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSE
TUBE 1
STATOR
TERMINAL
+24V
BLOCK
J11-1 R3 J16-40 J4-40
R145
THERMAL
SWITCH
1 4 +3.3V +3.3V
U29
R51
R48
2 3 U5
TUBE 2
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK +24V MICRO CAN DATA LINK
CONTROLLER REFER TO
J11-2 R7 J16-39 J4-39 MD-0990
R146
THERMAL
SWITCH J11-3
1 4
U30
R8
2 3
INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD AUXILIARY CPU BOARD
TUBE THERMAL SWITCH INPUTS
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 FANS, INTERLOCKS,
CHECKED TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
SELECT, ETC
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0978 REV A
SHEET 1 OF 2
J6-1 J19-1 J2-8 FAN 1 PIN 1
J2-1 FAN 1 PIN 3 FAN 1
U5 INVERTER 1 &
J5-39 J18-39 J2-4 FAN 1 PIN 2 INVERTER 2
R75
J6-3 J19-3
R68
+3.3V +3.3 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V J2-9 FAN 2 PIN 1
J2-2 FAN 2 PIN 3 FAN 2
J5-36 J18-36 INVERTER 1 &
R157
R159
R156
R155
R158
R160
U24 J2-5 FAN 2 PIN 2 INVERTER 2
R187
J6-4 J19-4
R189
J2-10 FAN 5 PIN 1
CAN DATA LINK MICRO R186 FAN 5
J5-35 J18-35 J2-3 FAN 5 PIN 3
REFER TO CONTROLLER RESONANT
MD-0990 MUX R188
J2-6 FAN 5 PIN 2 ASSEMBLY
R185 J6-6 J19-6
R190 TP1
J3-10 FAN 3 PIN 1
J6-2 J19-2 OV RTN
NOTE 1 FAN 3
J3-1 FAN 3 PIN 3
TP13 INVERTER 3
FAN GATE DR +24V J3-4 FAN 34 PIN 2 (IF APPLICABLE)
R184
J3-11 FAN 4 PIN 1

NOTE 2
J3-2 FAN 4 PIN 3
FAN 4
U4 TP8 INVERTER 3
FAN P/S J3-5 FAN 4 PIN 2 (IF APPLICABLE)
D30 Q8 +12V
J5-30 J18-30
PWM L1
J3-12 FAN 6 PIN 1

D18
FAN 6
J3-3 FAN 6 PIN 3
SPARE
FAN DRIVER CIRCUIT J3-6 FAN 6 PIN 2 (NOT USED)
NOTE 1: THE WAVEFORM AT THIS

AUXILIARY CPU BOARD INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD
POINT WILL BE A PULSE TRAIN
VARYING FROM 0 TO 50% DUTY
FAN DRIVER CIRCUIT CYCLE (0% DUTY = FANS OFF,
50% DUTY = FANS AT HIGH SPEED)
NOTE 2: THIS IS THE DRIVE VOLTAGE

FOR THE FANS. IT WILL VARY FROM
0 TO 12 V (0 V = FANS OFF,
NOTE: TP25 WILL NORMALLY BE HIGH +12V. IT WILL PULSE LOW FOR APPROXIMATELY APPROXIMATELY 6 V = FANS LOW,
+12V
100 MS IN ORDER TO BRIEFLY TURN ON Q11 & Q12 ON THE INPUT TP25 12 V = FANS HIGH)
DISTRIBUTION BOARD WHEN TUBE 2 IS SELECTED. TUBE SEL REL R56 R54 J22-2 J5-2
+12V (SEE NOTE)
J22-6 J5-6
U5 J5-26 J18-26
R10
J22-1 J5-1
DS11 +130V +24V
+3.3V HOLD
TUBE
SEL RAIL
U10 HLD +3.3V R51
R24
DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR

CAN DATA LINK MICRO 4 1 TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 R64
DRIVER PULL J22-4 J5-4
REFER TO CONTROLLER J5-25 J18-25 SELECT RELAY
MD-0990 U9 DS4
Q11, Q12, Q14, D52
J18-23 3 2
J5-23 TUBE 2
HV MODULE
J5-27 J18-27
4 1
R52
U8
3 2 DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 FANS, INTERLOCKS,
AUXILIARY CPU BOARD INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD
CHECKED TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
SELECT, ETC
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 DRIVER AND FEEDBACK CIRCUIT DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0978 REV A
+24V
EXPOSURE ENABLE
1 4 1 4 FROM MD-0977
PAGE 6
U105 U104
2 3 LAST IMAGE 2 3
HOLD CIRCUIT
(U9, C10, ETC.)
D88 EXPOSURE
ENABLE
TO PAGE 4
TP4 LOW = FLUORO EXPOSURE REQUESTED. TP4 HIGH (24 V) = NO FLUORO EXPOSURE REQUEST.
TP5 LOW = PREP REQUESTED. TP5 HIGH (24 V) = NO PREP REQUEST. NOTE: DEFAULT POSITION
TP6 LOW = X-RAY REQUESTED. TP6 HIGH (24 V) = NO X-RAY REQUEST. OF JW17 IS PINS 1 & 2.
JW17
TP4 TP5 TP6 3 2 1
1 4
R15
R16
R14
EXPOSURE ENABLE
U106 FROM MD-0987
J5-6 J9-6 J13-1 J4-1 R276 PAGE 1
2 3
J5-7 J9-7 J13-7 J4-7
J5-8 J9-8 J13-9 J4-9 U32

+5V DATA
Q52
+5V +5V +5V J5-9 J9-9 J13-10 J4-10 LATCH
R80
R11
R12
R13
U18
J13-11 J4-11
1 4
R263
FPGA
DS3 2 3 U107 U55
FLUORO
DATA
BUFFER
J3-11 +5V
4 1
FROM
DATA BUS
R304
U3 MINI J3-12
D0..D7
R321
4 1 CONSOLE +24V U58 U49
3 2
U2 (PAGE 2) J3-14 DATA
DATA J31-40 J11-40
BUFFER FPGA U53
BUFFER
5V - 3.3V
R322
3 2 1 4
J13-7
DS13
FLUORO PREP U103
FOOT 4 1 2 3
SWITCH J13-9
U4
3 2
J13-3 JW16
PREP +24V
NOTE: DEFAULT POSITION
3 2 1 OF JW16 IS PINS 1 & 2.
HAND J13-1
X-RAY
SWITCH
R275
J13-5
COM CONSOLE BOARD 1 4
R&F MEMBRANE
CONSOLE J3-18 J3-19 J3-20 U109
2 3
U32
REFER TO PAGES 3 FOR Q53
DATA
R262
THETOUCHSCREEN CONSOLES LATCH
P1-18 +5V
U49
R79
U33
P1-19 DATA
PREP DATA
BUFFER FPGA U53
BUFFER J31-10 J11-10
5V - 3.3V
X-RAY 1 4
P1-20 U110
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DS4 2 3
XRAY
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 10 APR 2013 PREP & X-RAY
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY CHECKED EXPOSURE
CONSOLE CONNECTOR
R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0979 REV D
L. FOSKIN
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
PREP
COM
J2-1 J2-2 J2-3
J1-11
J1-12
TO J3 ON CONSOLE
PREP CONNECTOR BOARD (PG 1)
X-RAY
J1-14
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
X-RAY MINI-CONSOLE
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED EXPOSURE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0979 REV D
L. FOSKIN
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
PREP
COM
J2-1 J2-2 J2-3
HS INPUT 3
TB16-3 R119 R100 SEE MD-0977
FLUORO DS7 PAGE 6
FOOT HS_IN3
J1-11 TB16-10
SWITCH
J1-12
TO J3 ON CONSOLE
PREP CONNECTOR BOARD (PG 1)
X-RAY
J1-14
REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE INPUT
(DEFAULT TB16-3, 10)
MINI-CONSOLE BOARD
SEE MD-0977 AND CHAPTER 3B
FOR MORE INFORMATION
X-RAY MINI-CONSOLE
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
(PREP & EXPOSURE CONNECTIONS)
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
(USE MINI-CONSOLE FOR PREP &
EXPOSURE. SEE CHAPTER 3-OPERATOR’S
MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION)
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED EXPOSURE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0979 REV D
L. FOSKIN
+3.3V
+24V
R260
R226
J3-9 J22-12 R225
TP19 0 V = EXPOSURE ENABLE requested

J3-7 J22-10 1 4 5 V = EXPOSURE ENABLE not requested
DM EX EN#
U127
2 3 EXPOSURE ENABLE
FROM PG 1 +5V +5V
H.V. MODULE
0 V = HV Module connected +5V D112

5 V = HV Module disconnected Q32 0 V = Gate drive pulses inhibited (no exposure)
>2 V = Gate drive pulses enabled
TP43
R387
R125
TANK CBL Q31
TP18
INTLK XRAY EN
R440
R389
R545
R142
U96
J14-33 J32-33 R540 0 V = No Fault
TO FPGA U53
TP21 3 V = Fault detected,
FAULT exposure inhibited DRIVE ENABLE
TO MD-0980
SHEET 1
R362
R414
R413
R412
J14-47 J32-47 R404
FROM FPGA U53 Q29
R403
D103 D104 D109
R386
TP20 0 V = Ready to expose

XRAY EXP 5 V = Inhibit exposures
R402
R166
+5V
R411
Q27 Q28
J11-21 J31-21 R563
R401
R400
FROM FPGA U53 Q47
+15V_A +15V_A
R456
R451
Q34
R445
Q33 R212 D56 KV INHIBIT
TO MD-0980
R457
SHEET 1
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED EXPOSURE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0979 REV D
L. FOSKIN
NOTE 1: A narrow pulse will be present at TP42 if a over-voltage condition has been detected.
This pulse may be very difficult to detect as the high voltage will be shut down when the over-voltage R460
condition is detected, thus removing the fault condition.
R459 R205 -
R458 J22-9
+
NOTE 1 1V = approx. 20 kV
TP42 +15V_A U73A
+3.3V TP39
OVP TRIP
**THIS JUMPER KV FBK
R200
SHOULD MATCH C93
R511
JW23
R461
R259
R513
THE GENERATOR
R479
R478
POWER LEVEL. DO J22-5
NOT MOVE
J14-7 J32-7 - INADVERTENTLY.
TO FPGA U53 R496 -
JW23, JW24 installed for single ended tubes,
+ J22-10
KV FEEDBACK
+ removed for double ended X-ray tubes
U82 1 *DO NOT FROM PAGE 3
*
R512
R477
KV FBK
U77A
ADJUST
R195
125 kV R504
2
150 kV 3 JW24
R204
- C102
JW25 ** R463
R480
U62 +
J11-46 J31-46 R164 U122 R462 R465 -

A/D R464 J22-11
TO FPGA U53
CONV +
U73B
R165
NOTE 3
NOTE 3: Should be a 50% duty cycle square wave ranging in
U4 frequency from approx 80 kHz to approx 250 kHz. TP14 TP13
GATE A GATE B
CPU POWER +3.3V +5V
SUPPLY J11-5 J31-5
R363
R89
SUPERVISORY
CIRCUIT
TP34 U45B U37
KV REF 1V = 15 kV
R497 R498 DUAL DRIVE PULSES
R485
Q46
INVERTER/ CONTINUED ON
DRIVER PAGE 2
R486 -
U86 R499 Q45
+
J14-5 J32-5 U45C
FROM FPGA U53 - U77B
R476
J14-6 J32-6 D/A
FROM FPGA U53 +
CONVERTER
R503
J14-45 J32-45 U80A

FROM FPGA U53
TP27 = kV error signal. Approx -0.7V = no kV

High (5V) = HV ON demand, approx +15V = maximum kV demand.
Low (0V) = HV OFF
TP27
TP37 JW22 RAD ERR AMP
+5V +5V 1 Default
R709
D116
position
2 is 1 & 2.
HV_ON ERROR AMPLIFIER
HV ON
R191
TO MD-0977 +5V +5V R441
(PG 5) AND 3 R455 Q
MD-0987
-
VCO
R660
-
(PG 1) + -
Q
- + INCLUDES U45,
- U72A D49 R443 +
+ Q35 U165 R676 U72B U46, U47, U115, U116,
LATCH U68A
R180
U76A
+ -
Q73 U117, Q26
U76B Q47 X-RAY_EXP U166, U148
+
“HV ON” CIRCUIT TP30 = rectified inverter

current. Frequency approx
KV INHIBIT 160 kHz to approx 500 kHz.
FROM MD-0979 TP30 C202 DRIVE ENABLE
PG 5 IR FBK FROM MD-0979
+3.3V NOTE 2 PG 5
TP16 D98-D101
IR TRIP
R256
CURRENT SENSE
J14-43 J32-43 - CURRENT LIMIT

TO FPGA U53 T4 T5
+ Vref -6V
U118
NOTE 2: A narrow pulse will be present at TP16 if an
inverter over-current condition has been detected. This COMPARATOR CIRCUIT
pulse may be very difficult to detect as the high voltage
will be shut down when the over-current condition is J20-1 J20-3 J20-2 J20-4
CPU BOARD detected, thus removing the fault condition. GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN DATE
HT PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013 KV CONTROL &
FROM PAGE 2 CHECKED FEEDBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0980 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 3
E1: 280 / 340 VDC (+)
* K1 USED ON R&F
GENERATORS ONLY
J2-1
TO J10-8 INVERTER 1 FAULT REFER TO MD-0984 (SHT 2)
J2-3 TO PAGE 3
TO J10-4 FOR K1 DRIVE CIRCUITS
K1 *
J8-3 J1-1 MOSFET MOSFET
J8-9 J1-2 SWITCHES SWITCHES
E3
J8-4 J1-3
SWITCHES SWITCHES
*
E4
INVERTER BOARD #1 E2: 280 / 340 VDC (-)
E1: 280 / 340 VDC (+)
J2-1
TO J10-6 INVERTER 2 FAULT
J2-3 TO PAGE 3
TO J10-7

GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT HT PRIMARY CURRENT
E3 CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
FOR MOSFET INVERTER
(INCLUDES Q10 TO Q17) J8-6 J1-3
SWITCHES SWITCHES
E4
INVERTER BOARD #2 E2: 280 / 340 VDC (-)
T1
E1: 280 / 340 VDC (+)

J2-1
TO J10-1 INVERTER 3 FAULT
J2-3 TO PAGE 3
TO J10-5
K2 J8-1 J1-1 MOSFET MOSFET

K2
E3
J8-2 J1-3
DRIVE PULSES SWITCHES SWITCHES K2
FROM PAGE 1
E4
REFER TO MD-0984 SHT 2
K2
FOR K2 DRIVE CIRCUITS
REFER TO MD-0984 SHT 2 E2: 280 / 340 VDC (-)

FOR K2 DRIVE CIRCUITS
GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD INVERTER BOARD #3 RESONANT ASSEMBLY
INDICO IQ GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER

MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER HT PRIMARY CURRENT TO J13-1
SENSE, TO PAGE 1 TO J13-4
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED FEEDBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0980 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 3
HV ANODE
BOARD
NOTE 4
TP7 ANODE
TRIP1
T3 C S
J10-4 L
J14-31 J32-31 - Vref 5V
TO FPGA U53 INVERTER 1 FAULT
+
J10-8 FROM PAGE 2
U10
J3-8
TO J22-11 HV MULT
ASSY +
J3-7 (ANODE)
KV TO J22-10
FEEDBACK
TO PAGE 1 J3-5
TO J22-5
J3-6
TO J22-9
NOTE 4
TP3
TRIP2
T2
J10-7
J14-30 J32-30 - Vref 5V
TO FPGA U53 INVERTER 2 FAULT
+
J10-6 FROM PAGE 2
U6 E9
HV MULT
ASSY-
E10 (CATHODE)
NOTE 4
TP1
TRIP3
T1
J10-5 HT PRIMARY CURRENT
J14-32 J32-32 - Vref 5V FROM PAGE 2
TO FPGA U53 INVERTER 3 FAULT L
+
J10-1 FROM PAGE 2 C
U2 S
HV CATHODE CATHODE
TANK LID
BOARD
BOARD
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD PART OF HV MODULE
INVERTER FAULT CIRCUITS ** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE
HV MODULES WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
NOTE 4: A narrow pulse will be present at TP7, TP3 or TP1 if an inverter over current or shoot-through condition has HT PRIMARY CURRENT / HV MODULE
been detected. This pulse may be very difficult to detect as the high voltage will be shut down when the over current / shoot-through
condition is detected, thus removing the fault condition.
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED FEEDBACK
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0980 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 3
J26-6 J2-6
FILAMENT REFERENCE
J26-5 J2-5 (LARGE / SINGLE BOARD
FILAMENT SUPPLY)
TP38
U49
1V = 1A
U31 FIL 1 FBK
J11-41 J31-41
TO FPGA U53
DATA
DATA
R244
BUFFER
J11-12 J31-12 BUFFER
TO FPGA U53 5V-3.3V
R514
J26-1 J2-1
FILAMENT FEEDBACK
- (LARGE / SINGLE BOARD
TP29 R518 J26-2 J2-2 FILAMENT SUPPLY)
1V = 1A
FIL1 REF
U90A
R515
R519
R224
J26-11 J2-11 DRIVE FOR RELAY K1
R507 +12V (SINGLE BOARD FILAMENT
+5V SUPPLY ONLY)
- R506
R242
R250
+ J26-10 J2-10 FILAMENT FAULT
U83A (LARGE / SINGLE BOARD
R505
FILAMENT SUPPLY)
DS23
U86 TP35 FIL 1 READY
J14-5 J32-5 1V = 1A 4 1
FROM FPGA U53 FIL2 REF LARGE / SINGLE BOARD FILAMENT SUPPLY
J14-6 J32-6 D/A U129 CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
FROM FPGA U53
R223
CONVERTER
J14-45 J32-45 3 2
FROM FPGA U53
R509
- R508 J28-8 J2-8

+
FILAMENT REFERENCE
J28-7 J2-7 (SMALL FILAMENT
U83B BOARD)
R510
TP36
1V = 1A
FIL2 FBK
+3.3V +5V
R213
R236
Q19
R517
J28-3 J2-3
R235
U85 FILAMENT FEEDBACK
- (SMALL FILAMENT
Q46 FLIP- R521 J28-4 J2-4 BOARD)
FLOP
U4 U90B
Q45
R516
R520
CPU POWER D69
SUPPLY J11-5 J31-5 R238
SUPERVISORY Q20
+12V
CIRCUIT +5V
R237
D70
R241
J28-10 J2-10 FILAMENT FAULT
R249
(SMALL FILAMENT
BOARD)
U25 D80
DS22
4 1
FIL 2 READY SMALL FILAMENT SUPPLY
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
FROM CPU
ADDRESS BUS } DATA
LATCH
D72 U128
3 2
+12V
DS21
FIL 1
+12V SM/LRG
U62
R177
R248
R173 D7
J11-46 J31-46 A/D

R176
R172
TO FPGA U53 FLUORO MA F/B FROM PG 3

CONV R246
RAD (HIGH) MA F/B FROM PG 3 Q22
R247
RAD (LOW) MA F/B FROM PG 3
J14-36 J32-36 DRAWN DATE

FROM FPGA U53 G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013 FILAMENT DRIVE
CHECKED & MA CONTROL
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0981 REV A
L. FOSKIN
HVM LID
JW1 BOARD
R73 R74 3 +35V
R75
2 6.5 A
- SET IMAX
U1A
R48
R44
D6 R76 5.5 A
R72 1
-12V -12V R43 R47
J2-6 R65
- R95 R77 +12V +12V
J2-5 R66 +
Q6 Q12
U1B 25 uSec
FEEDBACK CURRENT R20 Q2 Q8
LOW FILAMENT
(1V=1A) C10 GATE 12 V
DRIVE * CURRENT
R71
R29
R33
TP4 R85
- TP3 0V
+IN
+
R84
U4B PWM 12 V HIGH FILAMENT
J2-1 R70 CURRENT
R91 REGULATOR
J2-2 R69 0V
Q9
R21
U3 Q3
+12V R90 -
Q7 Q13
* GATE DRIVE WAVEFORM @ TP3
ON FILAMENT BOARD(S)
R52
R51
12 VDC = FIL FAULT -
U2B
0 VDC = NO FIL FAULT
R88 U4A
R45 R49
R92
TP1 FILAMENT
R89
C22
R46
R50
FAULT
R13
R83
J2-10 R56
D27 -35V
R87 -
Q1 T1
RMS CONVERSION D12 J5-2 J4-2
U2A (U7, U8, D26, R55,
R58
R10 R57, R93, R94) CATHODE
D13 R97 * J5-1 J4-1 L
+12V D28 C L
K1 * J5-4 S
K1
J2-11 * K1: SINGLE BOARD FILAMENT ONLY J5-3
(SINGLE BOARD R97: LARGE FILAMENT BOARD ONLY
FILAMENT ONLY) FILAMENT SUPPLY (LARGE / SINGLE BRD.)
JW1
R73 R74 3 +35V
S
R75
2 6.5 A
- SET IMAX
U1A
R48
R44
D6 R76 5.5 A
R72 1 FILAMENT MOUNTING
-12V -12V R43 R47 BOARD
J2-8 R63
- R95 R77 +12V +12V
J2-7 R64 +
Q6 Q12
U1B FEEDBACK CURRENT Q2 Q8
C10 R20 GATE
(1V=1A)
DRIVE *
R71
R29
R33
TP4 R85
- TP3
+IN
+
R84
U4B PWM
J2-3 R68
R91 REGULATOR
J2-4 R67 Q9
R21
U3 Q3
+12V R90 -
Q7 Q13
R52
R51
12 VDC = FIL FAULT -

U2B
0 VDC = NO FIL FAULT
R88
R45 R49
U4A
R92
TP1 FILAMENT
R89
C22
R46
R50
FAULT
R13
R83
J2-10 R56
D27 -35V
R87 -
Q1 T1 PART OF HV MODULE
RMS CONVERSION D12 J5-4 J4-4
U2A (U7, U8, D26, R55,
R58
R10 R57, R93, R94)

D13 R96 J5-3 J4-3
DRAWN DATE
D28 G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013 FILAMENT DRIVE
FILAMENT SUPPLY (SMALL) DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0981 REV A
L. FOSKIN
R194
R452 FL mA 1 V = approx. 2.0 mA OF
ANODE CURRENT
TP22
R193 FL MA FBK
NULL
R425
R424
- - R146 TO FLUORO MA F/B
R82 R163
+ (PG 1)
R423 R410
+ U52B
U57
TP52 1 V = approx. 100 mA OF
C234
80 mV = 20 mA ANODE CURRENT
RAD MA FBK
HV ANODE TP23
R589
BOARD R420 R148 R405
ANODE RAD MA FBK
S C
R406
L
- R170 TO RAD (LOW) MA F/B
1 R58 R150
+ (PG 1)
2 U56A
R171
C232
J3-1 J22-1 R426 R437 R436 3
C79 JW30
R439
-
C262
+
R30
J3-2 J22-2 R438 R435 U64B +15V_A +3.3V

NOTE 1
C82 TP24
R434
R431
R257
mA/mAs ANO TRIP
TEST
E18 JACK R395
-
-
R433
R430
- R174 TO RAD (HIGH) MA F/B
VOLTAGE U63
CLAMP + (PG 1)
U52A
R175
R396
+
E17
R432
J3-3 J22-3 R469 R468
U64A
R30
C281
R470
C270 -
+3.3V
J3-4 J22-4 R467 R466 NOTE 1
TP40
R501
R258
R483 -15V_A CATH TRIP J32-3 J14-3
C105 TO FPGA U53
R484
- J32-46 J14-36
TO FPGA U53
R500
L C U78
S
CATHODE R566 R565

HV CATHODE HVM LID
BOARD BOARD R482
R481
-
R567
+
U138
PART OF HV MODULE GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD CPU BOARD
ONE TUBE HV MODULES ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE HV

MODULES WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF HT OUTPUTS NOTE 1: A narrow pulse will be present at TP24 / TP40 if a anode or cathode over-current condition has been detected.
This pulse may be very difficult to detect as the high voltage will be shut down when the over-current condition is detected,
thus removing the fault condition.
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 22 MAR 2013 FILAMENT DRIVE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH. MD-0981 REV A
L. FOSKIN
SW4 SW5
+5V +12V +12V LS TEST HS TEST
LEGACY MODE TUBE 1 TUBE 1 +12V +3.3V
+3.3V TP13 TP12
R283
R200
SW6 SW7 +3.3V SWITCHING
R8
U49 U31 LS TEST REGULATOR
HS TEST 1 Hz
TUBE 2 (U27, L8, ETC)
DS11 U24 TUBE 2 DS5
U20
DS10
READY
R125
4 1 DRIVER
DATA
DATA U98
BUFFER
BUFFER
5V-3.3V 3 2 J2-10
HIGH SPEED
J1-10
J11-11 J31-11 +12V DS8 1 4
HIGH SPEED CAN DATA LINK
J11-12 J31-12 U12
J2-6 J1-6 R40 REFER TO
J11-41 J31-41 2 3 MD-0990
J11-42 J31-42 J2-14 J1-14 R42
J2-2 R41 DS7

PREP LEGACY +3.3V
J1-2 MODE FIELD
DS9 UPGRADES U19
+12V 1 4 TUBE 2
+12V +12V PREP EEPROM
1 4
2 3 U14
J2-4 J1-4
TUBE 2
R282
R281
R284
DATA & CONTROL U13 MICRO
BUS 2 3 CONTROLLER
R115
+3.3V
U29 U19
DS11 DS8 DS9 J2-16 J1-16 R117 U31
J2-8 J1-8 R116

EEPROM
OFF=LEGACY MODE
ON=CAN bus MODE
DATA
DRIVER
LATCH SW2 * U17 SW8 *
C80 1 R174
R173
+12V +12V
J2-1 J1-1
J2-3 J1-3 SHIFT
J2-5 J1-5 REGISTER
J2-7 J1-7 6**
+3.3V
+12V J2-9 J1-9
8
R280
R227
J2-11 J1-11
J14-48 J32-48 J2-12 J1-12
TO SW1 * U18
J2-13 J1-13 SW3 * U16
FPGA U53 4 1 J2-15 J1-15
J2-17 J1-17
U97
3 2
SHIFT SHIFT
** DS2
J2-19 J1-19 REGISTER REGISTER
TP1 TP6
+12V +12V
1 1 J8
J5 2 2 C56
CANDSS
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD SUPPLY
LOW SPEED STARTER 2/DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 BOARD 903132-04 IN NON-CAN BUS MODE
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR

THE PROCEDURE TO SET THESE DIP SWITCHES DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 27 MAR 2013 LOW SPEED/DUAL SPEED
** REFER TO CHAPTER 5 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE CHECKED STARTER 2
DESCRIPTION OF LED DISPLAY OPERATION.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0983 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 3
SW4 SW5
LS TEST HS TEST
TUBE 1 TUBE 1 +3.3V
SW6 SW7
LS TEST
TUBE 2
HS TEST
TUBE 2 DS5
1 Hz HEARTBEAT
U20
R125
3.3V
J5-1 D20 D14

4 1
U30
R59
3 2 3.3V CAN DATA LINK
3.3V
REFER TO
D47 MD-0990
D12
DS4
CAN RX
U21
J5-5 U22 DS3
FROM J4 ON PAGE 1 OF MD-0990 CANH CAN TX
CAN-SPI
CAN CONTROLLER
J5-4 TRANSCEIVER
MICRO
J5-3 CANL CONTROLLER
J5-6
+12V +3.3V
TP13 TP12
+3.3V SWITCHING
REGULATOR
(U27, L8, ETC) DS6 C80
SW8 * R174
1
R173
SET WHEN OPERATING IN LOCAL

CONFIGURATION MODE.
SW2 * U17
6**
8
SHIFT
REGISTER
SW3 * U16
**7- segment LED display

DS2
SHIFT
REGISTER
SW1 * U18
+12V
J8-1 TP1 TP6

FROM J5 ON GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD J8- 2 C56
SHIFT
REGISTER
LOW SPEED STARTER 2/DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 BOARD 903132-03 AND 903132-04 IN CAN BUS MODE
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR

THE PROCEDURE TO SET THESE DIP SWITCHES
** REFER TO CHAPTER 5 OF THE SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE
DESCRIPTION OF LED DISPLAY OPERATION.
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED STARTER 2
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0983 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 3
+12V
E18 E9 F2 L1
560 / 680 VDC (+) VBUS
R154
TP2
DC BUS VOLTAGE 560 / 680 VDC (-) 560 / 680 VDC (+)
560/680 VDC D49 R157
E19 E10 F1 K4 K2
560 / 680 VDC (-) K5
R61
K3 K1 K7
U24 D48 D50 U26A

U20
DRIVER
TB2
K1-A SHIFT 3 TUBE 1
K1-B
BUS VOLTAGE
MAIN 2
RECTIFIER BOARD +5V COMM 1
I MAIN
TP3
GND 4
MAIN CURRENT
I SHIFT K2-B
U36 Vref
TP4
SHIFT CURRENT
+3.3V I DC+ +5V

IDC TRIP TP18 I SENSE TB3 * FOR FUTURE
USE ONLY, NOT
560 / 680 VDC (+) APPLICABLE AT
TP20 U35 SHIFT 3 TUBE 2 THIS TIME
INVTRIP
I DC- K2-A
U10 U43 Vref U41 Vref U39 I SENSE
TP19
+12V
+
MAIN 2
+3.3V COMM 1 -
MICRO IGBT
CONTROLLER
DS1
SWITCH GND 4
(Q4) K4
INVERTER
FAULT J6 * R68
R24
1
IGBT U34 2
SWITCH IGBT 3
(Q2) SWITCH I SENSE R70
FET DRIVER (Q3) 4
CIRCUIT AND
ENABLE FAULT
R71
CURRENT
R69
TP10 E6
LATCH
DRIVER 1 GATE DRIVE
(U1-U11, U28,
TP11 T1-T4, ETC). IGBT
DRIVER 2 GATE DRIVE SWITCH
1 4 1 4
(Q1) E5/E7
SHIFT CAPACITORS
U23 U25
ENABLED 2 3 3
2
U40 I SENSE
560 / 680 VDC (-)
THERMAL 2 (FOR FUTURE USE ONLY, NOT APPLICABLE AT THIS TIME)
THERMAL 1 (FOR FUTURE USE ONLY, NOT APPLICABLE AT THIS TIME)
LOW SPEED STARTER 2/DUAL SPEED STARTER 2 BOARD 903132-03 AND 903132-04
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED STARTER 2
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0983 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 3
TUBE 1
CATHODE SIDE C S
L X-RAY
OF THE GENERATOR
TUBE
HIGH VOLTAGE LID, ADR TANK
MODULE TUBE 2
C S C S C S
L L L
TRANSFORMER - -TUBE CATHODE-
+5V +5V +24V R1 R20
+24V J7-1 J3-1

U49 U31
R23
R22
LOAD RESISTOR BOARD
J7-2 J3-2
ADR FAULT J11-43 J31-43 11 11 4 1 DS3
TO FPGA U53 J7-5 J3-5 DS1 V+
DATA DATA +24V

3 2 J7-8 POWER SUPPLY HIGH VOLTAGE
BUFFER LATCH U99 J3-8 SWITCH
ADR CABLE INTERLOCK J11-13 J31-13 CIRCUITS
12 12 4 1 CIRCUITS
TO FPGA U53
ADR Fault 2 J11-42 J31-42 13 3 2 J7-9

TO FPGA U53 J3-9
FEEDBACK
U100 V+ CIRCUITS
ADR Cable Interlock 2 J11-10 J31-10
TO FPGA U53
+24V V+
J7-4 TRIGGER
J3-4 CIRCUITS
DS2
J7-3 J3-3
ADR Trigger J11-28 J31-28
From FPGA U53 Q2 J7-6 J3-6
J7-7 J3-7
H.V SWITCH BOARD

+5V
ADR MODULE FOR TUBE 1
R655
+24V
X-RAY
TUBE
4 1 LID, ADR TANK
+5V 3 2 C S C S
U154 L L
R654
U168 TRANSFORMER - -TUBE CATHODE-
+24V
2 R1 R20
BUFFER +24V
4 1 J15-1 J3-1
LOAD RESISTOR BOARD
J15-2 J3-2
3 2
U155 DS3
J15-5
R649 J3-5 DS1 V+
J15-8 J3-8 POWER SUPPLY HIGH VOLTAGE

TO JW6 (JUMPER JW6 SWITCH
MUST BE IN DEFAULT CIRCUITS
CIRCUITS
POSITION 2 & 3 TO ENABLE J3-9
J15-9
ADR TUBE 2) OF MD-0987,
PAGE 1
FEEDBACK
V+ CIRCUITS
+24V V+
D170 TRIGGER
J15-4 J3-4 CIRCUITS
DS2
J15-3 J3-3
ADR Trigger 2 J11-27 J31-27
From FPGA U53 Q23
J15-6 J3-6
*NOTE: ADR MODULE FOR TUBE 2
J15-7 J3-7
IS ONLY APPLICABLE FOR 2 TUBE ADR
SYSTEMS.
H.V SWITCH BOARD
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD *ADR MODULE FOR TUBE 2
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 22 MAR 2013
ADR, FLUORO
CHECKED
SELECT, & POWER
MODE SELECT
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
Use and disclosure is subject to the restrictions on the title page of this CPI document. MD-0984 REV B
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE: TP24 WILL NORMALLY BE HIGH AT APPROXIMATELY +12V.
IT WILL BRIEFLY PULSE LOW FOR APPROXIMATELY 100 MS
TO QUICKLY PULL IN THE RESONANT CONTACTOR.
TP24
RES CON PULL IN
(SEE NOTE)
J4-1 J16-1
+12V
J4-4 J16-4
R11
+12V +24V
U5 HOLD PULL
DS12
RES CON
U10 HLD DRIVER CIRCUIT FOR
FLUORO / RESONANT
CAN DATA LINK CONTACTOR
MICRO (U11, Q16, Q18,
REFER TO DRIVER
CONTROLLER R96, R98, R101,
MD-0990 J6-1
R102, C54, D6, etc.) K1
REFER TO
MD-0980
R108 J6-3 SHEET 2
DS2 FLUORO FLUORO / RESONANT

CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
AUXILIARY CPU BOARD INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD RESONANT BOARD
DRIVE FOR RESONANT CONTACTOR
U49 U29
J11-11 J31-11 DATA R59
DATA
FROM FPGA U53 BUFFER Q44
LATCH
3.3V-5V
R7
+12V +24V
ENERGIZING K2 ON GENERATOR +12V
CONTROL BOARD ENABLES PULL
DRIVE TO INVERTER BOARD
# 3 (MD-0980 SHT 2) K2 DRIVER CIRCUIT ENERGIZING K2 ON RESONANT
+12V TO ENABLE BOARD ENABLES OUTPUT OF
HOLD
INVERTER INVERTER BOARD # 3
BOARD #3 J13-1 (MD-0980 SHT 2)
(U141, Q51, Q56,
D27 Q57, R6, R88, R502,
C355, D79, etc.)
R590
K2
U131
J11-18 J31-18 R51 J13-2
FROM FPGA U53 Q3 DS24
INV3
R46
REFER TO MD-0980
PAGE 2 FOR K2 CONTACTS
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD RESONANT ASSEMBLY DRAWN DATE

ADR, FLUORO
POWER MODE SELECT CIRCUIT (USED ON 80 AND 100 KW UNITS ONLY) CHECKED
SELECT, & POWER
MODE SELECT
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0984 REV B
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 2 OF 2
REFER TO PAGE 10 FOR LOGIC LEVELS, +24V
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL: +12V J24-19
J24-21
J24-13
J24-14
J24-23
J24-11
J24-12
J24-22
J24-16
J24-17
-12V J24-18
-24V J24-20
J24-31
J24-32
J24-33
J24-34
U49 U41 U42

J11-10 J31-10 J24-2
CHAMBER 4
J11-40 J31-40 J24-3
CHAMBER 3
J11-11 J31-11 J24-4 4
CHAMBER 2
J11-41 J31-41 J24-5
DATA CHAMBER 1
DATA
J11-12 J31-12 BUFFER DRIVER J24-6
BUFFER
3.3V - 5V START 7
J11-42 J31-42 J24-7
LEFT TO AEC BOARD
J11-13 J31-13 J24-8 (FOLLOWING PAGES)
MIDDLE 5
J11-43 J31-43 J24-9
RIGHT
TP33
PT REF 3
DATA & CONTROL
R209
BUS
U86 R487
J14-5 J32-5
- J24-10 PT
FROM J14-6 J32-6
DAC + REFERENCE
FPGA U53 J14-45 J32-45 U80B
R488
TP32
PT RAMP
2
U62
R208
TO FPGA J11-46 J31-46 A/D R189 J24-15 PT

U53 CONV RAMP
R188
TP31
PT STOP 1
+5V
R214
R210
J11-58 J31-58 R211 J24-1

TO FPGA
PT STOP
U53
U79A
5V - 3.3V
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
CHECKED AEC
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD DES.\MFG.\AUTH.

L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 1 OF 10
+500V
TP10 LEFT +/-300V
J1-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 1
+12V +12V +12V +12V +12V
12 J11-1
JW8 H.V. J1-1
+12V 1 +/-300/+500 V
RN6C
RN6D
RN6B
RN6A
RN6E
TP22 2 J1-3
+/-300V +45V +45 V
TP24 * H.V. 3 J11-4
START J1-8
DS5 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 RIGHT RESET/START
J11-3
MIDDLE J1-10
RN4A JW7 M FIELD SEL
J5-2 D6 J11-2
CH 4 1 L/R J1-9
TP9 2 R FIELD SEL
U3C 3 J11-6
J5-3 RN3D CONVERTER R/L J1-11
D5 L FIELD SEL
CH 3 +12V +24V CIRCUIT J11-5
R66
12 VDC TO 45 VDC TP11 J1-12
U3B R89 CHAMBER O/P
J5-4 D12 RN3C AND +/-300 / +500 VDC 13 J11-9
CH 2 J1-7
+45V CH 1 GROUND
J5-5
U3F
RN3A * INCLUDES U7 AND T1
D4
CH 1 S1D R90
D16
U3D
J5-6 D11 RN3B Q1
SET
R79
STRT
VALUE 11 LEFT +/-300V
J2-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 2
U3E U3A * START J12-1
JW6 H.V. J2-1
1 +/-300/+500 V
2 J2-3
+12V +24V +12V +24V +12V +24V +45V +45 V
3 J12-4
START J2-8
RIGHT RESET/START
J12-3
MIDDLE J2-10
JW5 M FIELD SEL
J5-7
* * * 1 J12-2
L/R J2-9
2 R FIELD SEL
D30 D40 D65 3 J12-6
J5-8 R/L J2-11
Q2 Q3 Q4 L FIELD SEL
J12-5
J5-9 TP12 J2-12
* * * R67 CHAMBER O/P
RIGHT MIDDLE LEFT 13 J12-9
J2-7
CH 2 GROUND
FROM
PAGE 1 S1C R68
LEFT +/-300V
J3-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 3
TP18 J13-1
TP17 2 TP20 8 JW4 H.V. J3-1
J5-19 CH 1 1 +/-300/+500 V
+24V J3-3
2 +45V +45 V
TP23 - STRT R1 S2A 3 J13-4
START J3-8
-
CH 2 RESET/START
J5-13 TP5 TP6 TP7
+
S4 RIGHT
+12V + J13-3
U4A MIDDLE J3-10
J5-17 U4B R2 S2B JW3 M FIELD SEL
R32 J13-2
C11 CH 3 1 L/R J3-9
* 2 R FIELD SEL
TP4 3 J13-6
C4 S2C R/L J3-11
R3 L FIELD SEL
J5-11 CH 4 J13-5
-12V CH 1 R53 TP13 J3-12
TP21 -
13 R57 CHAMBER O/P
S2D J13-9
J5-16 S3A
+ R4 J3-7
-24V CH 3 GROUND
U2B
R11 CH 2 S1B R58
TP3 3 TP19 9
TP2 10
S3B
J5-15 R54 LEFT +/-300V
J4-2
+/-300 V AEC CH 4
R12 J14-1
RN4C CH 3 JW2 H.V. J4-1
J5-10 +/-300/+500 V
1
2 J4-3
J5-1 S3C +45V +45 V
3 J14-4
START J4-8
R13 CH 4
-
RIGHT RESET/START
+12V
- J14-3
D27 MIDDLE J4-10
R56
+
+ JW1 M FIELD SEL
S3D U1A 1 J14-2
U2A L/R J4-9
RN4D
RN4B STRT 2 R FIELD SEL

3 R14 J14-6
3
-
7 R/L J4-11
+ 2 L FIELD SEL
J14-5
U6 TP14 J4-12
R35 CHAMBER O/P
SAMPLE 13 J14-9
J4-7
D22 & HOLD CH 4 GROUND
S1A R36
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734614 DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE DRAWN DATE
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS. SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
CHECKED AEC
THE -24V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND THE +/- 12V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 DESIGNATES A FACTORY CONFIGURED LOGIC OR SIGNAL LEVEL. AEC
AND J11 TO J14 ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. THESE ARE BOARDS ARE CONFIGURED AT THE TIME OF ORDER TO BE COMPATIBLE
DETAILED ON THE CONNECTOR PIN OUT TABLES IN CHAPTER 3D.
* WITH THE SPECIFIED AEC CHAMBER(S). FOR EXAMPLE, THE START DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SIGNAL TO THE CHAMBER MAY BE FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE ACTIVE
LOW (0 V), ACTIVE HIGH +12 V, OR ACTIVE HIGH +24 V. SHEET 2 OF 10
AEC CH 1 AEC CH 3
LEFT 1 LEFT 1
SELECT SELECT
2 2
JW1 JW5
RIGHT 3 R5 RN1 RN1 RIGHT 3 R6 RN2 RN2
3 6 7 2 J1-2 3 6 7 2 J3-2
SELECT ANODE (L) SELECT ANODE (L)
2 J1-5 2 J3-5
R69 -
CATH (L) R70 - CATH (L)
1 RN1 RN1 1 RN2 RN2
3 4 5 8 1 J1-1 3 4 5 8 1 J3-1
ANODE (M) ANODE (M)
+ +
U4A U5A
U2A J1-6 U3A J3-6
CATH (M) CATH (M)
R10
R50
J1-3 J3-3
ANODE (R) ANODE (R)
J1-4 J3-4
CATH (R) CATH (R)
MIDDLE MIDDLE
SELECT J1 (shell) SELECT J3 (shell)
R13 RN7 RN7 GROUND R14 RN8 RN8 GROUND
3 6 7 2 3 6 7 2
R9 - 6 R11 - 6
7 RN7 RN7 7 RN8 RN8
+ 5 4 5 8 1 + 5 4 5 8 1
U4B U5B
U2B U3B
R7
R8
RIGHT 1 J11-5 RIGHT 1 J13-5
ANODE (L) ANODE (L)
SELECT J11-6 SELECT J13-6
2 CATH (L) 2 CATH (L)
JW2 J11-3 JW6 J13-3
3 ANODE (M) 3 ANODE (M)
LEFT R27 RN9 RN9 J11-4 LEFT R28 RN10 RN10 J13-4
3 6 7 2 CATH (M) 3 6 7 2 CATH (M)
SELECT SELECT
2 J11-1 2 J13-1
R22 - ANODE (R) R23 - ANODE (R)
1 RN9 RN9 1 RN10 RN10
3 4 5 8 1 J11-2 3 4 5 8 1 J13-2
U4C
+
CATH (R) U5C
+
CATH (R)
U8A J11-7 U9A J13-7
R16
R17
CH 1 CH 3
SELECT U4D SELECT U5D
CH 1 CH 3
OUT OUT
(NEXT PG) (NEXT PG)
AEC CH 2 AEC CH 4
LEFT 1 LEFT 1
SELECT SELECT
2 2
JW3 JW7
RIGHT 3 R43 RN11 RN11 RIGHT 3 R44 RN12 RN12
3 6 7 2 J2-2 3 6 7 2 J4-2
SELECT ANODE (L) SELECT ANODE (L)
6 J2-5 6 J4-5
R40 - CATH (L) R41 - CATH (L)
7 RN11 RN11 7 RN12 RN12
5 4 5 8 1 J2-1 5 4 5 8 1 J4-1
ANODE (M) ANODE (M)
+ +
U14A U15A
U8B J2-6 U9B J4-6
CATH (M) CATH (M)
R33
R34
J2-3 J4-3
ANODE (R) ANODE (R)
J2-4 J4-4
CATH (R) CATH (R)
MIDDLE MIDDLE
SELECT J2 (shell) SELECT J4 (shell)
R51 RN13 RN13 GROUND R52 RN14 RN14 GROUND
3 6 7 2 3 6 7 2
R47 - 2 R49 - 2
1 RN13 RN13 1 RN14 RN14
+ 3 4 5 8 1 + 3 4 5 8 1
U14B U15B
U16A U17A
R45
R46
RIGHT 1 J12-5 RIGHT 1 J14-5
ANODE (L) ANODE (L)
SELECT J12-6 SELECT J14-6
2 CATH (L) 2 CATH (L)
JW4 J12-3 JW8 J14-3
3 ANODE (M) 3 ANODE (M)
LEFT R57 RN15 RN15 J12-4 LEFT R58 RN16 RN16 J14-4
3 6 7 2 CATH (M) 3 6 7 2 CATH (M)
SELECT SELECT
6 J12-1 6 J14-1
R55 - ANODE (R) R56 - ANODE (R)
7 RN15 RN15 7 RN16 RN16
5 4 5 8 1 J12-2 5 4 5 8 1 J14-2
U14C
+
CATH (R) U15C
+
CATH (R)
U16B J12-7 U17B J14-7
R54
R53
CH 2 CH 4
SELECT U14D SELECT U15D
CH 2 CH 4
OUT OUT
(NEXT PG) (NEXT PG)
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737992. THIS DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
PAGE SHOWS THE INPUT CIRCUITS; THE SIGNAL PROCESSING THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CIRCUITS ARE CONTINUED ON THE NEXT PAGE. LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 5V = ON). G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
CHECKED AEC
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 3 OF 10
+5V +5V +5V +5V
8 7 6 5
RN3
RN3
RN3
RN3
1 2 3 4 U6
DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
R67 CH 1 OUT
J5-2 2 18
CH 4 SELECT (FROM PREVIOUS
PAGE)
J5-3 R66 3 17
CH 3 SELECT
J5-4 R65 4 16
CH 2 SELECT
J5-5 R64 5 15
CH 1 SELECT
INVERTING
BUFFER
J5-6 D28 6 14
J5-7 R63 7 13
RIGHT SELECT
J5-8 R62 8 12
MIDDLE SELECT CH 2 OUT
J5-9 R61 9 11 (FROM PREVIOUS
LEFT SELECT PAGE)
+5V
R15
R36
TP1 15 R18
FROM +12V +5V

PAGE 1 U1 R21
R39
Q2
+5 V TP2 14
REGULATOR
R35
- 2
J5-13 1
+ 3 CH 3 OUT
TP6 TP7 U12A (FROM PREVIOUS
J5-17
PAGE)
R38
J5-11 R25
-12V
R42 R29
- 6
7
CH 1 + 5
SELECT U11B
R59 R1
TP4 2 TP3 6- R32
PT REF
3 CH 2 7
PT RAMP SELECT 5+
R31
C31
R26 U12B
J5-15
R37
R60 R2
- 2
J5-10 1 CH 3 CH 4 OUT
3 SELECT (FROM PREVIOUS
+
J5-1 U11A PAGE)

+12V R3
CH 4
R19
+5V SELECT
R20
6 SAMPLE
R4 & HOLD
TP5 D37
R12
R24
PT STOP
D38 R30
- 3
7
+ 2
U10
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 737992. THIS DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
PAGE SHOWS THE SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUITS; THE INPUT THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE PREVIOUS PAGE. LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 5V = ON). G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
CHECKED AEC
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 4 OF 10
LEFT AEC CH 1
+5V +5V +5V +5V SELECT
JW8 NO CONNECTION N/C
+5V 1
J1-2
R51
R49
R50
R52
2 LEFT/RIGHT
3 J1-6
U6 RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
R39
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 SELECT MIDDLE J1-3
R61 +12V JW7 MIDDLE
J5-2 2 18 SELECT
+12V
CH 4 SELECT START/ 1 J1-4
START RESET/START
2
R62 R40 D12 3 TP1 J1-8
J5-3 3 17 Q5 +12V
CH 3 SELECT 13
R1 J1-5
START CHAMBER O/P
J5-4 R63 4 16
CH 2 SELECT R38 CH 1 J1-7
Q4 SELECT -12V
J5-5 R64 5 15 J1-9
GROUND
CH 1 SELECT U1D R2
INVERTING -12V
BUFFER
LEFT AEC CH 2
SELECT
J5-6 D20 6 14 JW6 NO CONNECTION N/C
R66 1
J5-7 7 13 J2-2
2 LEFT/RIGHT
R67 3 J2-6
J5-8 8 12 RIGHT/LEFT
RIGHT
J5-9 R68 9 11 SELECT MIDDLE J2-3
JW5 MIDDLE
SELECT
+12V
1 J2-4
START RESET/START
2
+12V +12V +12V 3 TP2 J2-8
13 +12V
R3 J2-5
CHAMBER O/P
+12V +5V D11 D10 D9
CH 2 J2-7
R37
R36
R35
U3 LEFT MIDDLE RIGHT SELECT -12V
SELECT SELECT SELECT J2-9
+5 V GROUND
FROM U1C R4 -12V
REGULATOR Q3 Q2 Q1
PAGE 1
J5-13
LEFT AEC CH 3
SELECT
TP11 TP12 JW4 NO CONNECTION N/C
1
J5-17 J3-2
2 LEFT/RIGHT
TP7 8 CH 1 SELECT 3 J3-6
RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
J5-11 SELECT MIDDLE J3-3
-12V - R11 JW3 MIDDLE
CH 2 SELECT SELECT
START/ +12V
+
1 J3-4
START RESET/START
U4A 2
R12 3 TP3 J3-8
CH 3 SELECT 13 +12V
* R5 J3-5
CHAMBER O/P
R13 CH 3
CH 4 SELECT J3-7
SELECT -12V
- J3-9
R14 GROUND
TP9 2 TP8 + U1B R6 -12V
3 U8B
J5-15 R30 - LEFT AEC CH 4

+ TP5 10 SELECT
J5-10 TP6 JW2 NO CONNECTION N/C
U4B
9 1
J4-2
J5-1 2 LEFT/RIGHT
+5V +12V 3 J4-6
- RIGHT RIGHT/LEFT
SELECT
-
R32
R31
+ MIDDLE J4-3
JW1 MIDDLE
R69
R34
+
SELECT
U7A +12V
U8A 1 J4-4
START/ START RESET/START
6 2
D25 3 TP4 J4-8
R33 +12V
TP10 13
R7 J4-5
CHAMBER O/P
D27 3
7
-
SAMPLE CH 4 J4-7
+ 2 & HOLD SELECT -12V
U9 J4-9
GROUND
U1A R8 -12V
AEC BOARD
CHECKED AEC
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 5 OF 10
+12V +12V +45V TP4
+500V
AEC CH 1
J1-3 J5-3 +12V J1-1
U1E U1F +300V +500V +500 V
J1-19 J1-19 J1-2
R22 R47 +300V +300 V
R31
J1-15 J1-15 +12V J1-3
+45V +45 V
J1-17 J1-17 J1-4
R27
+12V +12 V
J1-1 J5-1 J1-5
-12V -12 V
16 J1-6
R15
+12V J1-4 J5-4
R32
-24V -24 V
+12V +12V +12V +12V J1-7
-12V J1-2 J5-2 -12V TP3 GND
6-
7 J1-8
R23
-24V -24V R28 5+ FEEDBACK RESET/START
D45 D46 D47 START 1
R16
R18
R20
R21
J1-9
U1B RIGHT 1 RIGHT
CONVERTER CIRCUIT J1-10
U1D 12 VDC TO 45 VDC, MIDDLE 1 MIDDLE
CH 4 300 VDC, 500 VDC, J1-11
J5-2 D44 AND -1000 VDC LEFT 1 LEFT
D43 J1-12
U1C SIGNAL 1 CHAMBER O/P
CH 3 INCLUDES U3, Q1-Q4,
U2C
U2D
U2A
J5-3 D37 TO D1-D6, D12-D21,
D42
U1B SHT 8 AND T1 AEC CH 2
CH 2
J5-4 D38 5.1V REFERENCE J2-1
D41 +500V +500 V
U1A J2-2
CH 1 +300V +300 V
R19
R10
R24
J5-5 D39 J2-3
D40 +45V +45 V
J2-4
+12V +12 V
+12V J2-5
-1000V -12V -12 V
J2-6
-24V -24 V
J2-7
R14
START 1~ J2-1 J6-1 GND
START 1
D36 NEXT PG. J2-8
J2-3 J6-3 START 2 RESET/START
J5-6 TO START RIGHT 1_ RIGHT 1 J2-9
SHT 8 FROM J2-5 J6-5 RIGHT 2 RIGHT
MIDDLE 1_ MIDDLE 1 J2-10
SHT 7 J2-7 J6-7 MIDDLE 2 MIDDLE
+12V +24V LEFT 1_ J2-11
LEFT 1
LEFT 2 LEFT
J2-9 J6-9 J2-12
SIGNAL 1_ TO SHT 8 SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL 2 CHAMBER O/P
R29*
R90*
START 2~ J2-11 J6-11
START 2
NEXT PG. J2-13 J6-13
RIGHT 2_ RIGHT 2 AEC CH 3
R42 FROM J2-15 J6-15
FROM MIDDLE 2_ MIDDLE 2 J3-1
PAGE 1 D69* SHT 7 +500V +500 V
R43 J2-17 J6-17 J3-2
LEFT 2_ LEFT 2 +300V +300 V
Q4 J3-3
J2-19 J6-19
SIGNAL 2_ TO SHT 8 SIGNAL 2 +45V +45 V
D34 TO AEC INPUT J3-4
START 3~ J2-2 J6-2 +12 V
J5-15 START 3 CONNECTORS J1 -J4 +12V
NEXT PG. J3-5
JW29 J2-4 J6-4 -12V -12 V
J5-10 FROM RIGHT 3_ RIGHT 3 J3-6
D33 FROM J2-6 J6-6 -24V -24 V
SHT 8 JW30 MIDDLE 3_ MIDDLE 3 J3-7
J5-1 SHT 7 GND
J2-8 J6-8
LEFT 3_ LEFT 3 J3-8
D22 START 3 RESET/START
J2-10 J6-10 J3-9
SIGNAL 3_ TO SHT 8 SIGNAL 3 RIGHT 3 RIGHT
JW31 START 4~ J2-12 J6-12 J3-10
J5-19 START 4 MIDDLE 3 MIDDLE
+24V D24 NEXT PG. J2-14 J6-14 J3-11
JW32 RIGHT 4_ RIGHT 4 LEFT 3 LEFT
J3-12
TP1 FROM J2-16 J6-16 SIGNAL 3 CHAMBER O/P
MIDDLE 4_ MIDDLE 4
J5-13 TP2 D26 SHT 7 J2-18 J6-18
+12V LEFT 4_ LEFT 4
J5-17 JW33 J2-20 J6-20 AEC CH 4
SIGNAL 4_ TO SHT 8 SIGNAL 4
D28 J4-1
JW34 +500V +500 V
TP5 J4-2
+300V +300 V
J5-11 J4-3
-12V D30 +45V +45 V
J4-4
+12V +12 V
J5-16 JW35 J4-5
-24V D32 -12V -12 V
JW36 J4-6
-24V -24 V
J4-7
TP5 GND
J4-8
START 4 RESET/START
-1000V J4-9
RIGHT 4 RIGHT
J4-10
MIDDLE 4 MIDDLE
J4-11
LEFT 4 LEFT
J4-12
SIGNAL 4 CHAMBER O/P
AEC BOARD J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 AEC INTERFACE BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD DRAWN DATE
SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
734630. THE AEC BOARD CIRCUITS ARE CONTINUED ON PAGES CHECKED AEC
7 AND 8.
* NOT FITTED ON ALL MODELS. REFER TO SUP734654 IN THE FRONT OF
THIS MANUAL FOR DETAILS DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS. L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 6 OF 10
J5-7
FROM J5-8
PAGE 1
J5-9
+12V +24V +12V +24V +12V +24V
R29*
R29*
R29*
R90*
R90*
R90*
R28 R26 R27
R9 R8 R5
Q2 Q1 Q3
D31 D9 D17
JW5 JW13 JW21

D19 LEFT 1_ D1 MIDDLE 1_ D8 RIGHT 1_
JW6 JW14 JW22
D20 D2 D10
JW7 JW15 JW23

JW8 JW16 JW24
J2 J2 J2
D23 SHT D4 SHT D11 SHT
6 6 6
JW9 JW17 JW25
JW10 JW18 JW26
D27 D6 D15
JW11 JW19 JW27

JW12 JW20 JW28
R12 R6 R10
D35 D13 D18
R111 JW73 R110 JW72 R109 JW71

U19C U19B U19A
R104 JW68 R103 JW67 R112 JW74

U17B U17A U19D
R99 JW63 R107 JW70 R105 JW69

U16D U16C U16B
R102 JW66 R101 JW65 R100 JW64

U16A U17D U17C
R66 R65 R47 R48 R62 R69 R57 R64
2- 6- 2- 6-
JW47 R88, R67 1 S/S OUT 1 JW52 R74, R46 7 S/S OUT 2 JW57 R73, R80 1 S/S OUT 3 JW62 R87, R54 7 S/S OUT 4
START 1~ 3+ SHT 8 START 2~ 5+ SHT 8 START 3~ 3+ SHT 8 START 4~ 5+ SHT 8
SHT 6 U6A SHT 6 U6B SHT 6 U14A SHT 6 U14B
R38
R44
R68
R59
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD DRAWN DATE
SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL. G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
6 AND 8.
* NOT FITTED ON ALL MODELS. REFER TO SUP734654 IN THE FRONT OF
THIS MANUAL FOR DETAILS DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 7 OF 10
START
FROM SHT 6 R50E R52 JW43
R50A
R36 U4C
R50F
R50B - 6
- 6 7
JW2 C4 7 5 JW44 R86
+ 5
+
SIGNAL 1_
R1 R50D START R50G JW45 FROM SHT 6
U7B
R41
U5B FROM SHT 6
R37
JW3 R45
- 2 JW46 S/S OUT 1
R50C
1
R50H
CH 1 3 FROM SHT 7
D51
+
FROM SHT 6 U4A

U7A
R120 R34 2
1
-
C9
+ 3
C39 U3B
R121 U5A R40
R91
C48
START
R118 FROM SHT 6 R51A R75 JW48
R51E
R114 R58 U4D
R51B
R116 2 R51F - 6
6 1
-
- 6 7
7
-
3 JW39 C12 7 5 JW49 R85
+
5
+
SIGNAL 2_
5 +
R51H FROM SHT 6
+
R2 START U11B R51C JW50
R39
U18A
U10B FROM SHT 6
R31
U18B JW40 R49
- 2 JW51 S/S OUT 2
R51G
1
R51D
CH 2 3 FROM SHT 7
D56
+
FROM SHT 6 U4B

U11A
R113 R32 2
1
-
C20
+ 3
C36 U3A
R108 U10A R60
R92
START
FROM SHT 6 R70A R71 JW53
R70E
R76 U12C
R70B
R70F - 6
+12V 2 - 6 7
JW37 C14 7 5 JW54 R84
5
+
SIGNAL 3_
3 TP4 R3
+
R70H START FROM SHT 6
U8B R70C JW55
R56
U9B
R25
FROM SHT 6
R30
TP3 JW38 R72
2
- JW56 S/S OUT 3
R70G
1
R70D
R53 CH 3 3 FROM SHT 7
D59
+
PT RAMP FROM SHT 6 U12A
R17 U8A
TO R98 R33 2
PT REF 1
-
C19
SHT 6 + 3
PT STOP C33 U3C
R97 U9A R55 +12V
R93
R106
D49 START
R24
FROM SHT 6 R82A R81 JW58
R82E
R19 R77 U12D
3
7
-
R82B
2 R82F - 6
+
- 6 7
JW41 C15 7 5 JW59 R83
SIGNAL 4_
R22
+
U2 + 5
D50 R4 R82H START R82C JW60 FROM SHT 6
U15B
R63
U13B FROM SHT 6
R79
JW42 R61
- 2 JW61 S/S OUT 4
R82G
1
R82D
CH 4 3 FROM SHT 7
D65
+
FROM SHT 6 U12B

U15A
R96 R35 2
1
-
C21
+ 3
C32 U3D
R95 U13A R78
R94
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734654, WHICH DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE DRAWN DATE
CONSISTS OF AEC INTERFACE BOARD 728399 AND AEC BOARD LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 12V = ON). G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013
6 AND 7.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 8 OF 10
+5V LEFT +12V
+5V +5V AEC CH 1
+12V JW8
1 J1-8
+12 V
R39
2
R49
R50
D29 3 J1-2
LEFT/RIGHT
U6 STRT RIGHT J1-6
DS1 DS2 INVERTED RIGHT/LEFT
R40 JW7
J5-2 R61 2 18 R71 Q5 J1-4
Q7 1 START RESET/START
+12V +12V 2 J1-3
R62 3 MIDDLE MIDDLE
J5-3 3 17
J1-11
D28 D12 13 TP1 PORTRAIT PORTRAIT
J5-4 R63 4 16 J1-13
CH 2 INVERTED INVERTED
PORTRAIT START CH 1
R2 R1 J1-5
R64 R70 R38 CHAMBER O/P
J5-5 5 15 Q6 Q4 U1D
CH 1 J1-7
INVERTING -12 V
BUFFER J1-9
GROUND
-12V
J5-6 D20 6 14
J5-7 R66 7 13 LEFT +12V AEC CH 2

J5-8 R67 8 12 JW6
1 J2-8
R68 +12 V
J5-9 9 11 2
3 J2-2
LEFT/RIGHT
+12V +12V +12V
RIGHT J2-6
RIGHT/LEFT
JW5
D11 D10 D9 J2-4
1 START RESET/START
R37
R36
R35
J5-19 2 J2-3
+24V LEFT MIDDLE RIGHT 3 MIDDLE MIDDLE
J2-11
J5-13 Q3 Q2 Q1 13 TP2 PORTRAIT PORTRAIT
+12V TP11 TP12 J2-13
FROM INVERTED INVERTED
J5-17 CH 2
PAGE 1 R4 R3 J2-5
CHAMBER O/P
U1C J2-7
J5-11 -12 V
-12V
J2-9
GROUND
J5-16 -12V
-24V 8 TP7
STRT
R11 S2B
TP8 2 CH 1
TP9 3
U2A
J5-15 R30 R12
CH 2
J5-10 R32 -
+ R4 U2B
U8B
TP6 9
+5V TP5 10
R69
-
-
J5-1 +
+
U4A
U4B -
D27
-
+12V +
+
U7A
D25 R33 U8A STRT
R34
R31
- 3
7
+ 2
SAMPLE
U9 & HOLD
TP10 6
AEC BOARD
CHECKED AEC
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 9 OF 10
NOTE
REMARKS
REFERENCE
1 “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 3.3 VDC) = NO PTSTOP (PHOTOTIMER STOP) SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PTSTOP SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD.
2 AEC RAMP. THIS IS A SIGNAL RAMPING FROM 0 TOWARD +10 VDC. THE ACTUAL MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE.
3 AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE, 0 TO +10 VDC, DEPENDING ON AEC TECHNIQUE. THE LENGTH OF THE AEC EXPOSURE WILL BE PROPORTIONAL TO THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE.
4 “HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL DESELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL SELECTED.
5 “HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD DESELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD SELECTED.
6 “HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = NO AEC STOP REQUEST (INSUFFICIENT RAMP TO TERMINATE AEC EXPOSURE), “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STOP REQUESTED (AEC EXPOSURE TERMINATED).
7 “HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = AEC START NOT REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC START REQUESTED.
8 THE VOLTAGE AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS THE PT RAMP OUTPUT, NOTE REFERENCE 2 .
9 THIS WILL BE A NEGATIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
10 THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
11 R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS.
12 THE VOLTAGE AT TP22 SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 (BELOW). THE MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 45%, DEPENDING ON THE LOAD ON THE HV SUPPLIES.
13 THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
14 THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
15 THIS IS THE START SIGNAL. “HIGH” (5 VDC) = START = ANALOG SWITCHES CLOSED, “LOW” (0 VDC) = START = ANALOG SWITCHES OPEN.
16 THIS WILL BE A VOLTAGE BETWEEN 0 AND 5.1 V, DEPENDING ON THE SETTING OF THE ACTIVE POTENTIOMETER R10, R19, OR R24..
200 kHz
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED AEC
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0985 REV A
SHEET 10 OF 10
NOTE 1: THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE. THE MAGNITUDE WILL
VARY DEPENDING ON THE DOSE VALUE.
U25
DIG I/O BRD ABS

FROM MD-0987 U12A
RM I/O BRD ABS DATA

FROM MD-0977 LATCH U49
U12B J31-43 J11-43
FROM FPGA U53
U12C J31-11 J11-11

JW4 * R300 NOTE 1 FROM FPGA U53
TP10
JW5 * R301
R288
U12D
U28
J31-41 J11-41
DATA FROM FPGA U53
JW3 * BUFFER
1 C146 3.3V-5V
U102A J31-12 J11-12
R299 R298
2 - FROM FPGA U53
R309 DATA
+
3 R292 R294 LATCH
JW8 * U1A U102B J31-42 J11-42
4 FROM FPGA U53
JW7 *
R293
R308
U102C J31-13 J11-13
+12V
R270
FROM FPGA U53
R286
J1-5 TP5
D9
R269 ABS NOTE 2
J1-2 R287
PMT / PHOTO DIODE / U62
J1-4
R305
PROPORTIONAL DC - R295 U102D
VIDEO INPUT & J1-3 C14
+ SAMPLE AND HOLD
AEC OUTPUT -12V -
CIRCUIT (U70, U75, A/D J31-46 J11-46
U1B TO FPGA U53
+ CONVERTER
R296
J1-1 U139 ETC.)
U101B
R35
1 NOTE 2: A DC VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT FROM TP5 TO GROUND WHEN OPERATING
J6
2 JW1 *
WITH ABS ON. THIS VOLTAGE WILL TYPICALLY RANGE FROM 0.5 TO 5 VDC, AND WILL
COMPOSITE VIDEO VARY DEPENDING ON THE NOMINAL DOSE VALUE.
INPUT 3 R26
C135 R4
D6
-
R3
+
J31-52 J11-52
FROM FPGA U53
C134 R5 U101A DIGITAL J31-23 J11-23
FROM FPGA U53
POTENTIOMETER
* J31-53 J11-53
*
R267
R278
R268
REFER TO CHAPTER JW2 * FROM FPGA U53

JW10
JW9
3E OF SERVICE MANUAL U5
FOR DETAILS ON
ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
* REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF THE SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE REQUIRED JUMPER

POSITIONS FOR THESE CONNECTORS. THE DEFAULT JUMPER SETTINGS WHEN THE UNIT
IS SHIPPED ARE SHOWN ABOVE INDICATED BY , , , , OR OPEN SUCH AS JW10.
DRAWN DATE
ABS
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 28 FEB 2013
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS
CHECKED STABILIZATION)
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0986 REV A
SHEET 1 OF 1
+5V
+15V_RIOB
+24V J25-11
J25-13
J25-17
J25-15
J25-9
J25-21
-15V_RIOB J25-23
U84
J11-6 J31-6 R523 J25-10
J11-35 J31-35 R522 J25-12
DATA
BUFFER
3.3V - 5V
J11-3 J31-3 R232 J25-18
U92
J11-10 J31-10 R531 J25-1
J11-40 J31-40 R530 J25-2 CONTINUED
ON PAGES
J11-11 J31-11 R529 J25-3
2 TO 19
J11-41 J31-41 R528 J25-4
DATA
J11-12 J31-12 BUFFER R527 J25-5
3.3V - 5V
J11-42 J31-42 R526 J25-6
J11-13 J31-13 R525 J25-7
J11-43 J31-43 R524 J25-8
EXPOSURE ENABLE J25-14

DATA & CONTROL TO MD-0979 PAGE 1
BUS
HV ON FROM J25-19
MD-0980 PAGE 1
DIG I/O BRD ABS J25-20

TO MD-0986
J25-22
NOTE: DEFAULT POSITION JW6

OF JW6 IS PINS 2 & 3
3 2 1
FROM MD-0984 OF J15-9,
+3.3V PAGE 1.
D8
R583
+5V
DS20
R184
U69
DIO
BOARD
TO FPGA J11-60 J31-60
U53
U74
5V - 3.3V 12 mA
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN MD-0987 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 19
+5V +15V +24V
J1-11
J1-13 J3-7
J1-17
J3-1
J1-15
J3-3
TP1 TP2
-15V U7
+24V
R2 J2-20
J1-20
MUX R3 J2-21
R11
+24V J3-9
J1-14
1 5
R1
U16
3 +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V
2 4
5 1 J3-10
2
U3B JW1 U10 F1 J2-1
R10
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
4 6 1
J1-19 5 4 2 +24V
DS4 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10
FROM
R17
PAGE 1 EXON PFL HCF PREP GEN TOMO
J1-1 U4 U6 J3-5
READY
J1-2 J2-7
1 5
J1-3
J1-4 J2-3 U14
J1-5 DATA DRIVER J2-4 2 4

LATCH J3-6
J1-6 J2-5
ADDRESS DECODER
J1-7 CIRCUITS J2-6
(U1, U2, U3A, U6A) J2-22
J1-8
J1-10 J3-2
J1-12
+24V J3-4
+24V
J1-18 J3-8
U8
R6
R7
J2-9
BUFFER 5 1 DS1
J1-9 U13
OFL
J1-21 4 2 +24V
+24V
J1-23
R5
U9 SW1
R8
J2-23
5 1 DS2
BUFFER U12
STOP J2-2
4 2 EXP. +24V
+24V J2-10
R4
J2-12
R9
5 1 DS3
U11
O.EXP
4 2
J2-11
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733752.

DRAWN DATE
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013 DIGITAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3. CHECKED INTERFACE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 2 OF 19
+24VR +24VR
+5V +15V +24V +24VR
J3-25 J2-1
J1-11 J3-27 J2-3
J1-13 J3-29 J2-5

D6 J3-31 J2-7
J1-17 F1
J3-33 J2-9
J1-15 D5 J3-35 J2-11
R10
Q1 J2-13
J2-17
-15V
R9
D3 U17
12 U10D 11 J2-19
J1-19 MONOSTABLE
13 TIMER J2-18
D4 J2-20
U14 U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J2-8
J1-4 DATA
DRIVER J2-6
J1-5 LATCH
J2-4
J1-6 ADDRESS DECODER +24V +24VR
J2-2
J1-7 CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
J1-8
R15
J1-10
U13 U15 R13 J3-34
J1-12 Q2 J2-23
J3-32
J1-18 J3-30
D1 J3-28
DATA DRIVER J3-26
LATCH
J3-36
FROM
PAGE 1
+24V +24VR
+24VR +24VR +24VR
U12
R14
R12
J1-9 Q3
BUFFER 5 1 R1 5 1 R2 5 1 R3 J2-16
J3-47
J1-21 J2-22
U3 U4 U5
J1-23 D2
4 2 4 2 4 2 J3-41
J3-39
U11 SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER J3-40
J3-42
J3-44
5 1 R4 5 1 R5 5 1 R6 J3-46
U6 U7 U8
4 2 4 2 4 2 J2-15
+24VR
J3-45
J3-43
R16
J2-24
J1-22 J3-48
J1-20 J2-21
DIGITAL I/O BOARD

DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 3 OF 19
+24VR +24VR
+5V +15V +24V +24VR
J3-25 J2-1
J1-11 J3-27 J2-3
J1-13 J3-29 J2-5

D6 J3-31 J2-7
J1-17 F1
J3-33 J2-9
J1-15 D5 J3-35 J2-11
R10
Q1 J2-13
J2-17
-15V
R9
D3 U17
12 U10D 11 J2-19
J1-19 MONOSTABLE
13 TIMER J2-18
D4 J2-20
U14 U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3 J4-1 J5-3
J2-8
J1-4 DATA
DRIVER J2-6 J4-2 J5-7
J1-5 LATCH
J2-4
J1-6 ADDRESS DECODER +24V +24VR
J2-2
J4-4 J5-2
J1-7 CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C) J4-5 J5-8
J1-8
R15
J1-10 J4-7 PREP SW J5-5
J1-12 U13 U15 R13 J3-34 J2-23
FROM J9 ON
Q2
J3-32 CONSOLE J4-8 X-RAY SW
J1-18 J3-30 CONNECTOR J4-10 “ON” SW
D1 J3-28 BOARD
DATA DRIVER J3-26
J4-11 “OFF” SW
LATCH
J3-36 J4-12 COMMON
J4-3
+24V +24VR J4-9
+24VR +24VR +24VR
U12
R14
R12
J1-9 Q3
BUFFER 5 1 R1 5 1 R2 5 1 R3 J2-16
J3-47
J1-21 J2-22
U3 U4 U5
J1-23 D2
4 2 4 2 4 2 J3-41
FROM J3-39
PAGE 1 U11 SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER J3-40
J3-42
J3-44
5 1 R4 5 1 R5 5 1 R6 J3-46 +15V
U6 U7 U8
4 2 4 2 4 2 J2-15 J6-1
+24VR
J3-45 J6-2
J3-43
J6-3
R16
J2-24
J1-22 J3-48 J6-4

J1-20 J2-21
J6-6
J6-7
THE CIRCUITS WITHIN THE DASHED LINES ARE IDENTICAL TO THOSE J6-8
ON PAGE 3. REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR THE FULL SIZED DIAGRAM TO X-RAY
MINI-CONSOLE.
(SHEET 5)
J6-11
+15V
J6-12
J7-2 J6-9
J6-10
J7-3
J6-13
J7-1 TO MINI-CONSOLE X-RAY
EXPOSURE INDICATOR. J6-5
J7-4
(SHEET 5) J6-14
J7-5
U18 U19
J7-7
DATA
DRIVER
LATCH
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 735921. DRAWN DATE
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3, J5.
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 4 OF 19
J1-1
J1-2 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4
RAD FLUORO PREP PWR

EXP EXP ON
LS1 LS2
J1-4
J1-6
J1-3
J1-5
J1-7
FROM J6 J1-8
(SHEET 4)
J1-9
J1-10
ON
OFF
J1-13
J1-11 J2-1
J2-2
J1-12
HAND
PREP J2-3 SWITCH
(OPTIONAL)
X-RAY
J1-14 J2-4
X-RAY MINI CONSOLE
J3-2
J3-3 DS1 DS2
RAD FLUORO
EXP EXP
LS1 LS2
FROM J7
(SHEET 4) J3-1
J3-5
J3-7
J3-4
MINI CONSOLE X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATOR
DRAWN DATE
THE OPTIONAL “X-RAY MINI CONSOLE” AND OPTIONAL “MINI CONSOLE X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATOR” CHECKED INTERFACE
ARE TYPICALLY USED WITH DIGITAL IMAGING SYSTEMS THAT HAVE INTEGRATED GENERATOR
CONSOLE CONTROL FUNCTIONS. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 5 OF 19
+24V
F1 J2-14
+5V +15V +24V +5V(A)
J1-11 U12
J1-13 +5 V J2-21
REGULATOR
J1-17
+15V J2-8
J1-1
1 5
J1-2
GENERATOR U7 +15V J2-22
J1-3
U4 U6
READY
J1-4 2 4 1 5
DS4
J1-5 EXPOSURE IN U10
R2 PROCESS (EIP)
J1-6 ADDRESS DECODER 2 4
J1-7 CIRCUITS DATA DS3
FROM (U1, U2, U3A, U5A) DRIVER
LATCH R1 J2-11
PAGE 1 J1-8
J1-10 +24V J2-13
J1-12
R9
J1-18
X-RAY
DS2 J2-15
R8
J1-14
J2-4
R6
5 1
J3-1
U16
J2-5
R7
4 2
J3-4
U8 5 1 J2-6
U14 J3-3
J1-9
4 2 J2-16
J1-21 J3-10
BUFFER
J1-23 5 1 J2-18
U15 J3-11
+5V(A) 4 2 J2-17
U9 SW1
5 1
J2-19
EXPOSE
U11
+24V RDY
BUFFER 4 2 J3-12
DS5
5 1
R3
U13 J2-9
4 2 DS1 J2-12
R4 R5 PREP
DIGITAL I/O BOARD

DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 6 OF 19
+24V
F1 J2-13
+5V +15V +24V J2-7

J2-8
J1-11 J2-9
J1-13 J2-12
J1-17 J2-5
J4-3
J2-6
J4-2
+15V J2-20
J4-5
1 5 +15V J2-24
J1-1 U10
1 5 +15V J2-22
J1-2 U6 2 4
DS3 U7
J1-3 U4 1 5 +15V J2-21
R1 2 4
J1-4 DS4 U13
1 5 +15V J2-23
J1-5 R2 2 4
J1-6 DATA DS7 U14
ADDRESS DECODER DRIVER 1 5
J1-7 CIRCUITS LATCH R7 2 4
FROM (U1, U2, U3A, U5A) DS8 U15
PAGE 1 J1-8
R8 2 4
J1-10 DS9 J2-1
J1-12 J3-2
R9
J2-2
12
J1-18 9 11 DS3 EXPOSURE IN PROCESS (EIP) J3-1
8 13
10
U3D DS4 GENERATOR PREPPED J2-3
U3C
DS7 RAD HANGMODE J3-4
J1-19
DS8 BUCKY START J2-4
J3-5
DS9 X-RAY ON
J2-11
J3-6
U8 J2-15
J3-8
J1-9
J2-16
J1-21
BUFFER J3-7
J1-23
J2-17
J3-12
J2-18
U9 SW1
J3-11
+24V
J2-19
BUFFER 5 1
J3-10
U11
+24V
4 2 DS5 J2-10
5 1 R3 R4 BUCKY IN MOTION
U12
4 2 DS6 J2-25
R5 R6 SPARE INPUT
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736153

DRAWN DATE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3, J4. CHECKED INTERFACE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 7 OF 19
+5V +15V +24V U1 +24V
U12
RATE 0 J2-8 F1 J3-16
J1-11
* DS38 RATE 1 J2-21 J3-17
J1-13 * DS40 RATE 2 J2-9 +24V J3-1
DRIVER
J1-17 * DS41 RATE 3 J2-22 J3-2
J2-13
J1-15 * DS43 SPARE I/P J2-23 J3-3
J2-1
* DS45 U9
SELECT DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY J3-8 J2-2 J3-4
-15V U11 * DS16 SELECT TOMO J3-27 J2-3 J3-5

TABLE STEP SELECT J2-17 * DS18 J3-6
SPARE INPUT 1 J3-9 J2-4
EXPOSURE ON J2-4
* DS20 SPARE INPUT 2 J3-28 J2-5 J3-7
GENERATOR RDY J2-16 DRIVER
* DS21 MAG MODE 0 J3-10 J2-6 J3-8
TOMO SELECT J2-3
DRIVER EXP SAFETY ITLK J2-15 MAG MODE 1 * DS22
J3-29 J2-7 J3-9
J1-1
EXPOSURE REQ J2-2 MAG MODE 2 * DS23
J3-31 J2-8 J3-10
J1-2
PREP REQ J2-14 * DS24 J2-9 J3-20
J1-3
J2-1 J3-21
J1-4 J2-10
U3
J1-5 DS27 DS29 DS31 DS33 DS35 DS36 DS37 DS39 SPARE O/P 4 J2-11 J3-22
FLUORO J3-23
J1-6 REQUEST SPARE O/P 3 J3-4 J2-12 J3-23
J1-7 * * * * * * * * SPARE O/P 2 J3-24
CPLD J3-22 J2-14
J1-8 U10 SPARE O/P 1 J3-3
STEP TABLE J2-5 J2-15 J3-25
J1-10 DRIVER TABLE TUBE SELECT J3-21
* DS25 CINE TIME SEL 0 J2-18 J2-16 J3-26
J1-12 GENERATOR READY J3-2
* DS26 CINE TIME SEL 1 J2-6 J2-17 J3-27
J1-18 X-RAY ON J3-20
J1-19 * DS28 CINE TIME SEL 2 J2-19 J3-1 J2-18 J3-28
DRIVER
J1-22 * DS30 SELECT HCF J2-7 J2-19 J3-29
DS4 DS6 DS8 DS11 DS13 DS14 DS17 DS19
SELECT CINE * DS32 J2-20 TABLE STEP J2-20 J3-30
REQUEST
* DS34 * * * * * * * * J2-21 J3-31
FROM
+24V +24V
PAGE 1 U2 J2-22 J3-32
U17 AEC CENTER FIELD SELECT J3-5
J2-23 J3-33
* DS1
R77
SELECT TABLE STEPPING J3-24
J2-24
R78 * DS3 SELECT STEP DIRECTION J3-6
Q1 J2-25
DRIVER DS46 DRIVER * DS5 TOMO TIME SELECT 0 J3-25
R72
TOMO TIME SELECT 1 * DS7 J3-7
D3 TOMO TIME SELECT 2 * DS10 J3-26
* DS12
J3-34
J3-35
J3-36
J2
J3-37
-1
+15V
1
0
3
-1
-3
-3
-2
-1
-3
U
U
J2
J3
J3
J2
J2
J3
1
1
D1
R63 DS2 DS9 DS44 DS42 DS15
J1-20
5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1
D2 U4 TABLE X-RAY U6 TABLE FLUORO U15 READY ACQUIRE U13 READY ACQUIRE U8 TABLE PREP +24V
REQUEST REQUEST FLUORO RAD/CINE/HCF REQUEST
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 R30 K1
-15V
J1-14
J1-9 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1
J5-1
J1-21 U5 U7 U16 U14 24V FROM
ROOM INTERFACE J5-3
J1-23 4 2 R17 4 2 R25 4 2 R69 4 2 R68 J3-18
J3-19
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736894

DRAWN DATE
* DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, SERIES RESISTORS ARE NOT SHOWN FOR THE INDICATED LED’S G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 8 OF 19
+5V +15V +24V
J1-11
+5V
J1-13
DS1 +15V
JW103
J1-17 J7-2
XRAY ON X-RAY ON TO PAGE 10
J7-3 +15V
R10
U10 J6-1
6 J2-20 (-) J7-1
U3C J6-2
U7 U3B 9 8 4
4 J7-4
12 U3D 11 6 10 DRIVER 7 J2-19 (+) J6-5
J1-19 MONOSTABLE 5 J7-5
13 TIMER J6-14
J7-7
U17 U18
J6-3
J1-1
J6-4
J1-2
J6-6
J1-3
J6-7
J1-4 DATA
DRIVER J6-8
J1-5 LATCH
J1-6 ADDRESS DECODER
J1-7 CIRCUITS JW101 J4-10
(U1, U2, U3A, U5)
J1-8 X-RAY RQST TO PAGE 10 J6-9
J1-10
J4-11
J1-12 U13
U4 6 J2-17 (+) J6-10
4
J1-18 DRIVER 7 J2-18 (-) J4-7
DATA J6-11
U11
LATCH 6 J2-13 (+)
4 J4-8
FROM DRIVER 7 J2-14 (-) J6-12
PAGE 1
R8
R6
J4-12
U12
U6 6 J2-15 (+) J6-13
XRAY DS4 DS2 PREP
4
DRIVER 7 J2-16 (-) J4-3
DATA U14 J4-9
LATCH 6 J2-21 (+)
4
J1-9 DRIVER 7 J2-22 (-)
J1-21
R7
R9
J1-23 U8
GENRDY DS3 DS5 *
J2-1 (+)
U15 J4-1
BUFFER 6 J5-3
1
R4
DRIVER 7 J4-2
J2-2 (-) J5-7
U9 SW1 +5V J4-4

J5-2
DS7
R5
J4-5
BUFFER
DS6 * XRAYEN J5-8
+5V
R12
J2-25 (+) J5-5
5 1
R11
U16
4 2 J2-26 (-)
Q1 JW102
X-RAY EN FROM PAGE 10
* THE INPUTS / OUTPUTS MARKED “*” ARE SPARE, AND HAVE NOT BEEN ASSIGNED DIGITAL I/O BOARD

THIS SHOWS THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J4, J5, J6 AND J7. THE DRAWN DATE
REMAINING CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE NEXT PAGE. G. SANWALD 10 APR 2013 DIGITAL
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J4, J5, J6, AND J7. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 9 OF 19
+24V_EXT +24V_EXT +24V_EXT
+24V_EXT
R112
R110
R111
+5V
R102
DS101 DS102 DS103
R101
1 5
U103
2 4 +24V_EXT +24V_EXT
J101-5
U101 +5V
R107
1 2 EXP_ACQ J101-2
X-RAY RQST
R105
EXP_END J101-6 TO DIGITAL
FROM SYSTEM
PAGE 9 4 U104
EXP_REQ J101-8
3 DATA 5 2 MONOSTABLE 3 R106
X-RAY ON LATCH TIMER
Q101 J101-1
U102
+5V +5V
R114
R115
U105
TO R113 6 4
PAGE 9 X-RAY EN DRIVER +24V_EXT
5 1
U106 J102-1 FROM
J102-3 DIGITAL
4 2 SYSTEM
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 737950. THIS SHOWS
THE CONNECTIONS TO J101 AND J102. THE REMAINING CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE
PREVIOUS PAGE.
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS J101 AND J102.
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 10 OF 19
+5V +15V +24V +24V
U9
J6-16
J8-11
F1 J6-17
U7
J8-13 J6-1
J6-2
J8-17
J6-3
J8-15
J6-4
DRIVER J6-20
J6-21
-15V
J6-22
J8-1 J6-23
J8-2
J8-3 U8
J8-4 R14 J6-5
J8-5 R16 J6-6
CPLD R18 J6-7
J8-6
J8-7 DRIVER R15 J6-24
J8-8 R17 J6-25
J8-10 R19 J6-26
J8-12
U10
J8-18 R20 J6-8
R22 J6-9
R24 J6-10
R21 J6-27
DRIVER
J8-9 R23 J6-28
R25 J6-29
J8-21
R26 J6-31
J8-23 J6-32
FROM
PAGE 1 J6-12
J6-30
U20
J6-33
+3.3V J6-14
R54 -
2
A/D 1 R46 J6-15
CONVERTER +
3
R35
J6-18
R53
U23A
+3.3V J6-19
DS3
R30 +3.3V
5 1 +24V +24V
R27 J9-1
U19
DS2 24V FROM
1 5
R43
4 2 J9-3 ROOM I/O BOARD
J8-14 R36
U14 1 5 DS1
5 1 Q3
2 4 U12
U15 5 1 +24V
R42
2 4 U11
4 2 R31 U11 R44
U13
4 2 U11 U11 DRIVER
DRIVER R28
K1
DRIVER DRIVER
J8-22 R45 J6-34

J6-35
J6-36
FROM J7-3, J7-5 (SHT 12) J6-37
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 738947. THIS SHOWS THE CONNECTIONS
TO J6 AND J9; THE REMAINING CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE NEXT PAGE. DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J6, J9. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 11 OF 19
+3.3V +2.5V
U16 +24V
J8-11 3.3V
REGULATOR J2-1
+24V +24V R6 J2-2
U22 J2-3
J4A-1 J4E-1
R8 VOLTAGE R5 J2-4
REGULATOR J4A-2 J4E-2
U2 J2-5
J4A-3 J4E-3
+10V R4 J2-6
J4A-4 J4E-4
U9 U6 J4A-5 U4 J4E-5
+24V
J4A-6 J4E-6
R48
DRIVER
U21 J4A-7 J4E-7 J3-1
J8-13 R49 VOLTAGE J4A-8 J4E-8 R9 J3-2
REGULATOR DRIVER DRIVER J3-3
R47
+24V +24V
J3-4
J4B-1 J4F-1 J3-5
J4B-2 J4F-2 R7 J3-6
J8-1 J4B-3 J4F-3

J11-2
J8-2 J4B-4 J4F-4
J8-3 J11-1
J4B-5 J4F-5
J8-4
J4B-6 J4F-6
J8-5 +24V
CPLD J4B-7 J4F-7
J8-6
J4B-8 J4F-8 J1-1
J8-7
R3 J1-2
J8-8
J8-10 +24V +24V J1-3
J8-12 R2 J1-4
FROM J4C-1 J4G-1
PAGE 1 U1 J1-5
J4C-2 J4G-2
J8-18 R1 J1-6
J4C-3 J4G-3
J4C-4 J4G-4
U5 J4C-5 U3 J4G-5 +24V
DRIVER
J4C-6 J4G-6
J10-1
J4C-7 J4G-7
R50 J10-2
J4C-8 J4G-8
J10-3
DRIVER DRIVER
+24V +24V R51 J10-4
+24V +24V +24V +24V
J10-5
J4D-1 J4H-1
R52 J10-6
R12
R10
J4D-2 J4H-2
Q2 Q1 J4D-3 J4H-3
J4D-4 J4H-4 +24V +24V +24V +24V
R13
R11
J4D-5 J4H-5
R37
R39
U11 J4D-6 J4H-6
J4D-7 J4H-7
DRIVER Q4 Q5
J4D-8 J4H-8
J7-6
R38
R40
J7-4
J7-1
D2 U11
J7-3
U18B U17 R41 DRIVER J7-5
4 6 J7-2
MONOSTABLE D1
J8-19 5 TIMER
D3 D4
J8-20 TO J8-22
(SHT 11)
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 738947. THIS SHOWS THE CONNECTIONS TO J1 TO J4, J7, J10, J11, AND
THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUITS; THE REMAINING CIRCUITS ARE SHOWN ON THE PREVIOUS PAGE. DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J1-J4, J7, AND J10. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 12 OF 19
+5V +24V
U10 +24V
+24V(A)
+15V
J8-11
J3-11
R17
J8-13 J3-12
F1 J3-9
J8-17 DS
U14 15 J3-10
J8-15 J6-20
J3-13
J6-17
J6-21
-15V
J6-18
DRIVER +24V J6-19 J4-7
J8-1 PREP SW
+24V J6-22 J4-8
J8-2 X-RAY SW
R26
1 4 J6-16 J4-10
J8-3 PWR ON
1 4 U18 +5V J6-14 J4-11
J8-4 +5V PWR OFF
2 3 J6-7 J4-12
J8-5 U26 PWR COMM
RN7D
CPLD DS29 J6-2 J4-1
RN7C
J8-6 2 3 RXD
R18
J6-23 J4-2
J8-7 CTS
R33 J4-4
J8-8 1 4 TP1 TXD
+5V DS21
J4-5
J8-10 U16 RTS
4 1 J4-3
4 1 DS16
RN6D
J8-12 2 3
U31 J4-9
U29
3 2
J8-18
R11
3 2
+24V
J8-19 J1-3
+5V 4 1 J1-7
4 1
TP3 J1-2
U21
U32
RN6B
4 1 J1-8
J8-9 3 2
U30 3 2 J1-5
J8-21
3 2
FROM
J8-23
PAGE 1 +24V
4 1
R32 DS28 J7-16
1 4 U23
U20 3 2 J7-24
2 3 DS19 J7-23
R24
J8-14
R34
4 1 TP4
U22
J7-14
3 2
R23 J7-21
DS18 J7-2
R21
U24
J7-7
J8-22
J7-20
MUX
U27 THIS GROUND

CONNECTS TO
D1 D3 THE SHELLS
R29 DS27
OF J1 TO J4
DRIVER D2 D4
R28 DS26 SW1
+24V(A)
R31
R30
J9-1
24V FROM
J8-20 J9-3 ROOM I/O BOARD
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 738114. THE CIRCUITS FOR THIS BOARD ARE SPLIT BETWEEN SHEETS 13, 14, AND 15.
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J1, J2, J3, J4, J6, AND J7. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
U10
+15V +15V
J3-1 J2-2
J3-2 J2-3
U2
J3-3 J2-1
J3-4 J2-5
J8-1
J3-6 J2-7
J8-2 DRIVER
J3-7 J2-4
J8-3
J3-8
J8-4
J8-5 J3-5
CPLD J3-14
J8-6 +5V
FROM
PAGE 1 J8-7
+5V +5V
RN3B
J8-8
J8-10 J6-1
J8-12 +24V J6-3
J6-4
J8-18 4 1 J6-5
J8-19 +5V U3 J6-6
RN5C
3 2 DS2
R2
RN3D
+24V J6-24
+24V
4 1
RN3C
U11 J7-1
4 1
+24V J7-3
U5 3 2 DS10
+5V R10 J7-4
3 2 DS4 J7-5
R4 4 1
RN2B
+5V U4
+24V +5V
3 2 DS3
R3
RN2A
RN5D
4 1 +5V
+24V
+5V U7 +24V
RN6C
3 2 DS6
R6 4 1
RN2D
+24V 4 1
+5V U6
+24V +5V U12
3 2 DS5
4 1 R5 3 2 DS9
RN2C
R9 J7-6
RN6A
4 1 +5V U25
3 2 DS20 +24V
U9 +24V
RN3A R25
3 2 DS8
R8 4 1
+24V 4 1
U8
U17
3 2 DS7
4 1 R7 3 2 DS17
R22 J7-22
U1
3 2 DS1
R1
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
SHEET 14 OF 19
U10
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
U19
J8-4 J6-12
J8-5 J7-12
CPLD
J8-6 J6-11
FROM
PAGE 1 J8-7 J7-11
J8-8 DRIVER J6-10
J8-10 J7-10
J8-12 J6-9
J7-9
J8-18
J8-19
DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS22 DS23 DS24 DS25
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R19
R20
R27
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
SHEET 15 OF 19
+5V +24V
U10 +24V
+15V
J8-11 +24V(A)
J3-11
R17
J8-13 F1 J10-17 J3-12
J8-17 J12-2 J3-9
DS15
U14 LIH J3-10
J8-15
J3-13
J12-10
J10-2
-15V
DRIVER +24V +24V J11-6 J4-7

J8-1 PREP SW
+24V J10-16 J4-8
J8-2 X-RAY SW
R26
1 4 J12-5 J4-10
J8-3 PWR ON
1 4 U18 +5V J11-9 J4-11
J8-4 +5V PWR OFF
2 3 J10-11 J4-12
J8-5 U26 PWR COMM
RN7D
CPLD DS29 J11-8 J4-1
RN7C
J8-6 2 3 RXD
R18
HAFLU J4-2
J8-7 J10-10 CTS
R33 J4-4
J8-8 1 4 TP1 TXD
+5V DS21
J4-5
J8-10 XRAYON DS16 U16 RTS
4 1 J4-3
4 1 GENRD
RN6D
J8-12 2 3
U31 J4-9
U29
3 2
J8-18
R11
3 2
+24V
J8-19 J1-3
+5V 4 1 J1-7
4 1
TP3 J1-2
U21
U32
RN6B
4 1 J1-8
J8-9 3 2
U30 3 2 J1-5
J8-21
3 2
FROM
J8-23
PAGE 1 +24V
4 1 DS28
R32 HARAD J12-8
1 4 U23
U20 3 2 DS19 J12-11
2 3 EXP J12-12
R24
J8-14
R34
4 1 TP4
U22
J11-10
3 2
R23 J12-7
DS18 J12-3
FLEXP
JW2-1
R21
U24
JW2-2
J8-22
JW2-3
MUX
U27
DS27 D1 D3
R29 HSHCF
DRIVER D2 D4
R28 DS26 HSTEP SW1
+24V(A)
R31
R30
J9-1
24V FROM
J8-20 J9-3 ROOM I/O BOARD
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J1, J2, J3, J4, J10, J11 AND J12. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
U10
+15V +15V
J3-1 J2-2
J3-2 J2-3
U2
J3-3 J2-1
J3-4 J2-5
J8-1
J3-6 J2-7
J8-2 DRIVER
J3-7 J2-4
J8-3
J3-8
J8-4
J8-5 J3-5
CPLD J3-14
J8-6 +5V
FROM
PAGE 1 J8-7
+5V +5V
RN3B
J8-8
J8-10 J10-9
J8-12 +24V J10-18
J10-19
J8-18 4 1 J10-7
J8-19 +5V U3 J11-4
DS2
RN5C
3 2 FLMA
R2
RN3D
+24V J12-13
+24V
4 1
RN3C
U11 J10-20
4 1
+24V J10-21
U5 3 2 DS10
+5V R10 J10-22
DS4
3 2 TS1 J10-23
R4 4 1
RN2B
+5V U4
+24V DS3 +5V
3 2 TA20
R3
RN2A
RN5D
4 1 +5V
+24V
+5V U7 +24V
DS6
RN6C
3 2 TS2
R6 4 1
RN2D
+24V 4 1
+5V U6
+24V DS5 +5V U12
3 2 TA30 DS9
4 1 R5 3 2
RN2C
EXINH
R9 J10-8
RN6A
4 1 +5V U25
DS20
3 2 +24V JW1-1
U9 PREP
R25 +24V
DS8 RN3A
JW1-2
3 2 TOMO
R8 4 1
JW1-3
+24V 4 1
U8
DS7 U17
3 2 TA40 DS17
4 1 R7 3 2 PFSEL
R22 J12-14
U1
DS1
3 2 TA7
R1
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
SHEET 17 OF 19
U10
J14-1 J10-14
J14-2 J10-15
J14-3 J10-3
TO ROOM
J14-4 J10-4
I/O BOARD
J14-5 J10-5
J14-6 J10-6
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
U19
J8-4 J11-5
J8-5 J11-1
CPLD
J8-6 J11-3
FROM
PAGE 1 J8-7 J11-2
J8-8 DRIVER J11-7
J8-10 J12-6
J8-12 J12-4
J10-1
J8-18
J8-19 DS11 DS12 DS14 DS22 DS23 DS24 DS25
DS13
HFL HPREP HCON HTOMO HGRDY HEXP RDYAQ
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R19
R20
R27
TO J14-1, J14-2 J13-1 J10-24
INPUT DISTRIBUTION J13-2 J10-25
BOARD
J10-12
J10-13
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
SHEET 18 OF 19
TP1
R2 J2-16 DOSE
FEEDBACK
+5V +5V
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V
R21
R18
R19
R20
R1
R3
R4
Q1
R22
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6
U4 U6
+5V +24V J2-12
X-ON
J2-7
+15V TRIGGER 0
J1-11 J2-8
TRIGGER 1
J1-13 J2-9
DATA TRIGGER 2
DRIVER J2-10
J1-17 LATCH TRIGGER 3
J2-11
J1-20 TRIGGER CLOCK
J1-19 J2-14
REMOTE ON
J1-1
J1-2 DS7 +15V +15V +24V +24V
J1-3
R23
R25
J1-4
R34
R36
FROM
PAGE 1 +5V +5V
J1-5
Q2
J1-6
R16
R15
R35
R5
J1-7 DS8
J1-8
R28
R24
J1-22
J1-15 Q4 J2-4
U8 READY
J1-9
+24V +24V
R29
J1-21
BUFFER
J1-23 -15V
R31
R26
Q5
SW1
DS9 Q3
U9
R27
BUFFER
R30
J2-1 TRIGGER
R32
ACKNOWLEDGE
J2-2
Q6
J2-13
R33
J2-15
DIGITAL I/O BOARD

DRAWN DATE
CHECKED INTERFACE
FOR DETAILS REGARDING CONNECTIONS TO THIS BOARD. DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
SHEET 19 OF 19
+15V_DAP F4
0.5A +5V
+15V_DAP_IO
R333
+5V +5V +15V_DAP_IO
R335
R62
Q24
R75
R63
R99
R98
Q4
R64
Q8
R68
R70
D28
DS18 DS19 U112 J12-10
DAP DAP
CH 1 CH 2 J12-8
J12-6
J12-2
J14-10 J12-4
J32-10
TO FPGA U53
J12-18
J12-20
J12-3
R347
U49 U26 U17
J12-5
5 1
DRIVER
U23
4 3 L11
J11-10 J31-10
J11-40 J31-40 DATA +5V
DATA
J11-11 J31-11 BUFFER
LATCH
3.3V-5V
J11-41 J31-41 TO J15 CONSOLE CONNECTOR
+15V_DAP_IO R346
BOARD (PG 2)
R334
J11-42 J31-42
+15V_DAP_IO
J31-13
R336
J11-13 R67
J11-43 J31-43 Q25
R76
R66
Q5
R65
Q9
R71
R69
D29
U24
J12-17
U111
DATA & CONTROL
BUS J12-15
J12-13
J12-11
J12-7
J12-14
J12-16
J12-9
R339
J12-12
5 1
U22
4 3 L12
R72
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED DAP
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0988 REV B
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 1 OF 2
J15-10 J2-1
SWITCHED +15V
J15-8 J2-2
+ DOSE
J15-6 J2-3
- DOSE
J15-2 J2-4
OPTO
J15-4 J2-5 DAP
RELAY CHAMBER
J15-18 J2-6 #1
TEST +15V
J15-20 J2-7
CURRENT LOOP IN
J15-3 J2-8
GROUND
J15-5 J2-9
GROUND
FROM J12 GENERATOR

CONTROL BOARD
(PG 1)
J15-17 J1-1
SWITCHED +15V
J15-15 J1-2
+ DOSE
J15-13 J1-3
- DOSE
J15-11 J1-4
OPTO
J15-7 J1-5 DAP
RELAY CHAMBER
J15-16 J1-6 #2
TEST +15V
J15-14 J1-7
CURRENT LOOP IN
J15-9 J1-8
GROUND
J15-12 J1-9
GROUND
CONSOLE CONNECTOR BOARD
DRAWN DATE
CHECKED DAP
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
MD-0988 REV B
L. FOSKIN
SHEET 2 OF 2
+3.3V
+5V +5V
R47
DS41 DS42
CONSOLE CONNECTOR BOARD
DS45
TXD RXD
1 Hz U8
U18
R20
R19
DATA
BUFFER U1
3.3V-5V
R2 J5-1 J9-1 J13-17
R21 J5-2 J9-2 J13-15

TO J4 GENERATOR
U16 CONTROL BOARD
R8 J5-4 J9-4 J13-16
DATA
(SHT 2)
BUFFER R10 J5-5 J9-5 J13-18
FPGA 5V-3.3V
RS-232
+5V +5V
TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE
DS44 DS43 COMM1
(USB PORT)
TXD RXD
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
R18
R17
U5 J2
U8
R5
DATA 3 TXD
BUFFER R4
3.3V-5V 7 RTS
U16
R3
DATA BUS DATA 2 RXD
D0..D7 BUFFER R9
5V-3.3V 8 CTS
RS-232 5
CONSOLE BOARD (R&F MEMBRANE CONSOLE)
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 10 APR 2013 SERIAL
CHECKED COMMUNICATIONS
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0989 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 3
+3.3V +5V
R53
R52
DS14 DS15
CON CON U39A
U113 TX RX 5V - 3.3V
R50 J31-26 J11-26
TO FPGA U53
R47 U39B
5V - 3.3V
J31-56 J11-56
TO FPGA U53
J31-55 J11-55
FROM FPGA U53
U8
J31-25 J11-25
R49 FROM FPGA U53
R48
JW11
1
2 RS-232
U15 RS-422
3
RS-422
U14
J4-17 RS-422
J4-15
FROM J13 CONSOLE
CONNECTOR BOARD J4-16
(SHT 1)
J4-18
JW14 JW12 JW13 JW15

1 1 1 1
RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232
2 2 2 2
RS-422 RS-422 RS-422 RS-422 3
3 3 3
DRAWN DATE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0989 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 3
+3.3V +3.3V
DS10 DS11
RX1 TX1 U66 U27

J3-8 J11-8 J5-3
TXD
J3-6 J11-6 J5-7
RTS
DIGITAL
ISOLATOR J3-4 J11-4 J5-2 COMM
RXD PORT 1
J3-10 J11-10 J5-8
(RS-232)
CTS
J3-11 J11-11 J5-5
RS-232
+3.3V +3.3V
DS12 DS13 J3-7 J11-7 J8-3 TXD
RX2 TX2 U65 U69 J3-5 J11-5 J8-7 RTS
J3-3 J11-3
COMM
J8-2 RXD
PORT 2
J3-9 (RS-232)
DIGITAL J11-9 J8-8 CTS
ISOLATOR
J3-1 J11-1 J8-5
RS-232
CPU CORE J1
AND
SUPPORT
CHIPS
10/100/1000 ACCESSIBLE
Ethernet FROM REAR
PANEL ON
J2 GENERATOR
USB
DS5
+3.3V +3.3V +5V_ISOL +5V_ISOL
USB VBUS
CAN BUS
U29 PORT 1
J4-6 J10-6 J6-2
CAN LOW
CAN
DS8 DS6 DS7 DS9 J4-8
TRANCEIVER J10-8 J6-7
CAN HIGH
CAN CAN CAN CAN J4-10
RX2 RX1 TX1 TX2 J10-10 J6-3
1 4
U67 2 3 J4-4 J10-4 J6-6
SW1
CAN BUS
DIGITAL U28 PORT 2
ISOLATOR J4-5 J10-5 J7-2
CAN LOW
CAN
TRANCEIVER J4-7 J10-7 J7-7
CAN HIGH
J4-9 J10-9 J7-3
1 4
2 3 J4-3 J10-3 J7-6
SW2
DRAWN DATE
CONSOLE CONNECTOR
CPU BOARD BOARD
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0989 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 3
+3.3V +3.3V
R170
R169
U65 U64 DS15 DS26 U66
CAN RX CAN TX
CAN-SPI CAN
CONTROLLER TRANCEIVER
MICRO
CONTROLLER
+3.3V
R179
D12 D33
4 1
U60
3 2
+3.3V
+24V D21 D34
R255
U94A
J14-25 J32-25
TO FPGA U53
4 1
U108
3 2
+3.3V +3.3V
R271
R272
R327
J11-2 J5-2 J4-2
R328
U130 DS1 DS2 U16
CAN RX CAN TX
J11-5 J5-5 J4-5
CAN-SPI CAN J11-1 J5-1 J4-1

CONTROLLER TRANCEIVER TO J5 OF THE DSS
BOARD (PG 2)
J11-3 J5-3 J4-3
J14-21 J32-21 U94
FROM FPGA U53
J14-22 J32-22 J11-6 J5-6 J4-6
TO FPGA U53
J14-23 J32-23
FROM FPGA U53
J14-61 J32-61
FROM FPGA U53 J11-4 J5-4 J4-4
J14-63 J32-63
TO FPGA U53
CPU BOARD GENERATOR CONTROL BOARD ROOM I/O BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 INTERNAL
CHECKED CAN BUS
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0990 REV A
SHEET 1 OF 2
+3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
R121
R119
R1
R2
U20 U21 DS3 DS4 U22 U5 U18 DS2 DS3 U23
CAN TX CAN RX CAN RX CAN TX
CAN-SPI CAN CAN-SPI CAN

CONTROLLER TRANCEIVER CONTROLLER TRANCEIVER
MICRO MICRO
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
+3.3V +3.3V
R144
D20 D14 D55 D54
4 1 4 1
U30 U28
R59
3 2 3 2
D47 D12 D57 D56
J5-2 J4-2 J12-2 J16-28 J4-28
J5-5 J4-5 J12-5 J16-26 J4-26
J5-1 J4-1 J12-1 J16-27 J4-27

FROM J4 OF THE
ROOM I/O
BOARD (PG 1) J16-12 J4-12
J5-3 J4-3 J12-3
J16-13 J4-13
J5-6 J4-6 J12-6
J16-14 J4-14
J5-4 J4-4 J12-4 J16-25 J4-25
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD INPUT DISTRIBUTION BOARD AUXILIARY CPU BOARD
DRAWN DATE
G. SANWALD/J. LAPE 18 MAR 2013 INTERNAL
CHECKED CAN BUS
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
MD-0990 REV A
SHEET 2 OF 2

Cpi Indico IQ SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cpi Indico IQ SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INDICO IQ® SERIES X-RAY GENERATOR

COMMUNICATIONS & POWER INDUSTRIES CANADA INC.

Mail: Customer Support Department

Telephone: (905) 877-0161

Fax: (905) 877-8320

Attention: Customer Support Department

Attention: Customer Support Department

The original version of this manual (June 2010)

PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL

This chapter contains the following sections.

(This page intentionally left blank)

1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 1A-2

DIRECT RADIOGRAPHY Radiography in which the recording is effected at an

Note: The above definitions were derived from document IEC60788.

1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing

1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)

Figure 1A-2: Console outline drawing

• One or two tube operation, Rad / Fluoro.

1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL

LOW SPEED STARTER 2

DUAL SPEED STARTER 2

1A.7.0 OUTPUT PARAMETERS

1A.7.1 Radiographic Performance

kVp Range/Steps 40 - 150kV; variable in 1kV steps.

kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV

Exposure Time Range / Steps 1 ms - 6300 ms; variable in 1 ms steps. (Optional up to 20

Generator will stop the exposure within 20µs of receiving the

Rad mA Range/Steps 50kW; 10 - 630 mA / R10 (Variable in 0.1mA steps)

mAs Range/Steps 0.1 - 1000mAs / R10 (Variable in 0.1 mAs steps)

mAs Accuracy ±(10% + 0.2mAs)

Coefficient of Linearity < 0.1 for kV and mAs parameters.

1A.7.2 Fluoroscopic Performance (Continuous)

kVp Range/Steps 40 - 125kV; variable in 1kV steps.

kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV;

mA Range/Steps 0.5 - 10 mA in 0.1mA steps;

mA Accuracy ±(5% + 1mA) measured 50ms after the beginning of the

1A.7.3 Fluoroscopic Performance (Pulsed)

kVp Range/Steps 40 - 125kV; variable in 1kV steps.

kVp Accuracy ±2% for 90 - 110kV;

mA Accuracy ±(5% + 1mA) (measured 5ms after the beginning of the

Pulse Rates 60Hz; 30, 15, 7.5, 3, 1 PPS.

Pulse Widths 2 - 40 ms; variable in 1 ms steps

1A.8.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS

1A.8.1 Environmental Specifications

TRANSPORT AND STORAGE

1A.8.2 Applicable Standards

• ACPEIP-------------------------------------------------- China RoHS

• DIRECTIVE 2011/65/EU, RoHS--------------------- Restriction of Hazardous Substances

1A.8.2 Applicable Standards (Cont)

B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2/IEC 60601-1-2)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

1A.8.2 Applicable Standards (Cont)

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

1A.8.2 Applicable Standards (Cont)

1A.8.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1A.8.4 RoHS Compliance

O: 表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下

1A.9.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS

• KV: KV peak including any initial kV overshoot.

1A.10.0 RUNTIME LICENSE AGREEMENT (TOUCHSCREEN CONSOLE)